pasolink neo te cx2200_instruction manual ver_02.05

648

Click here to load reader

Upload: julio-perez-ferrufino

Post on 29-Nov-2015

383 views

Category:

Documents


97 download

TRANSCRIPT

Page 1: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

PASOLINK NEO TECX2200

Multi-service Transport Gateway

Instruction Manual

Cautions

Read this manual carefully before use for proper operation. Be sure to keep this manual at hand after reading it.

MADE IN JAPAN

Page 2: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Version Ver. 02.05

Page 3: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Revision History

Revision History

Rev. Published date Description

B January 2010 First edition published

Page 4: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

(blank page)

Page 5: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Preface

i

Preface

Outline ................................................ iii

About This Product ........................... iv

Safety Precautions ...........................vii

Labels ...............................................xiii

Document Structure .........................xv

Page 6: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Preface

ii

Thank you for purchasing the PASOLINK NEO TE CX2200 (hereinafter CX2200).

Read this manual in advance thoroughly to correctly use this product.

Keep this manual at hand for quick reference.

The manual gives descriptions required to install, set, and service this equipment.

The manual is intended for persons who know basic operations and settings of a personal computer and network. For operations of a personal computer and general network settings, see the manual of the equipment used or commercially available books.

Note

(1) This manual may not be copied, in whole or in part, without consent of NEC.

(2) The information in this manual is subject to change without notice.

(3) Every effort has been made to ensure that the information in this manual is accurate. Any discrepancies, errors, and missing information should be reported to the distributor of the product or the NEC account sales person.

(4) NEC assumes no responsibility for the result of the operation, regardless of the description of (3).

(5) We are ready to replace a manual book having a missing page or incorrect collating with a perfect one.

(6) Contact information is available at http://www.nec.com.

Page 7: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Preface

iii

Outline This section describes the points to be checked before using the CX2200.

Page 8: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Preface

iv

About This Product Information about Voluntary Control Council for Interference by Information Technology Equipment

This product is classified as information technology equipment complying with the standards of Voluntary Control Council for Interference by Information Technology Equipment Class A. If the product is used in ordinary home electric environments, it may cause interference.

The user may be required to take a proper action against interference.

EU Emission (EMI) Standards

Warning

This is a class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures.

FCC Warning

FCC Warning:

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

FCC Statement:

The following information is for FCC compliance of Class A devices;

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful Interference to radio communications, Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.

Page 9: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Preface

v

Safety Standard (FDA) for Laser Products

Complies with FDA performance standards for Laser products except for deviations to Laser Notice No. 50, dated June 24, 2007.

Power Supply

This is Class III equipment. Supply SELV DC power. This equipment uses high energy DC power; be sure to handle with great care.

Use in Medical Institutions

This product is not intended for use as (or use as a component in) equipment involving human lives or equipment required high reliability, such as medical equipment, nuclear equipment, aerospace equipment, or transportation equipment.

NEC assumes no responsibility for physical injury, fire, or social loss caused due to a failure with this product used as such equipment or a control system.

In equipment or a control system, all possible measures must be taken for safety design such as redundant design, fire spread prevention design, and malfunction prevention design.

Precautions

NEC assumes no responsibility for net economic damage, caused by lost communication opportunity due to the equipment failure, malfunction, and other trouble, as well as external factors such as blackout of commercial power.

Precautions on Export

Anyone who wishes to export this product is required to follow the necessary procedure including an export license application according to the Export Trade Control Order. Any specific documents that are necessary for obtaining the license should be requested to the distributor of the product or the NEC sales office.

Page 10: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Preface

vi

Product Disposal

In the European Union

EU-wide legislation as implemented in each Member State requires that used electricaland electronic products carrying the mark (left) must be disposed of separately fromnormal household waste. This includes all of PASOLINK NEO TE CX2200 product orelectrical accessories, such as various function modules or cables.

When disposing of used products, you should comply with applicable legislation oragreements you may have. The mark on the electrical and electronic products only applies to the current European Union Member States.

Outside the European Union

If you wish to dispose of used electrical and electronic products outside the European Union, please contact your local authority and ask for the correct method of disposal.

Regarding Software License Agreement

By using this product, you agree to be bound by the clauses of this license agreement. If you do not agree this agreement, NEC will not grant you a license to use the software or make a copy of the software. The software license agreement is provided at the end of the document.

Regarding Trademarks

The company names, product names, and service names in this document are registered trademarks or trademarks of their respective owners.

Page 11: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Preface

vii

Safety Precautions Safety has been taken into account in design and manufacture of this product. However, mishandling or operation errors by the user may lead to a serious accident. To avoid such an accident, please read this manual carefully to understand the contents before using the product.

There are many 'items that are not possible' or 'items that are prohibited' and it is not possible to include all the items in this manual. Therefore, assume the items as 'not possible' unless otherwise described as 'possible' in this manual.

Safety marks

The marks and legends used in this manual and their meanings are listed below. Before reading this manual, keep the following in mind.

WARNING Indicates that incorrect handling by neglecting this mark may cause a fatal or serious injury to a human body.

CAUTION Indicates that incorrect handling by neglecting this mark may cause injury to a human body and damage to physical equipment.

NOTE Indicates the supplementary explanation that is not related to personal safety or equipment damage.

Indicates that incorrect handling may cause fire.

Indicates that incorrect handling may cause electric shock.

Indicates that incorrect handling may cause injury.

The touching of a rotating object may cause an injury.

Transceiver that radiates laser rays.

Indicates that the prohibition of the use of the equipment near water for safety.

Indicates that the prohibition of the disassembly of the equipment for safety.

The handling of the equipment with a wet hand is prohibited for safety reasons.

The wetting of the equipment is prohibited for safety reasons.

Indicates that the prohibition of general actions that are not specified.

Be sure to disconnect the power cord from the power terminal (main body) for safety reasons.

(This mark is commonly applied to both the AC power supply module and the DC power supply module.)

Gives a direction for surely connecting the ground cable to equipment having a ground terminal.

Page 12: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Preface

viii

Precautions Regarding Power Supply

WARNING Make sure that this equipment is used within the power supply voltage range from DC-40.5V to -57V.

Otherwise, fire or electric shock may be caused.

Securely insert the power cable into the power connector (main body).

Only trained maintenance engineers should handle the connection/disconnection of a power cable.

If metal or the like makes contact with the power connector, fire or electric shock may be caused..

Do not put any object on the power cable.

Damage to the power cable may cause fire or electric shock.

For the power cable supplying power cable, securely connect the DC power cable to the power terminal at the rear of this equipment, by correctly identifying -48V side and RTN(G) side and avoiding mutual contact.

A connection error of the power cable on the -48V side and the RNG(G) side or mutual contact may cause fire, electric shock, or some equipment malfunction.

Connect or disconnect the power cable from the power cable according to the procedure and precautions that are described in this manual.

Mishandling may cause fire or electric shock.

Always disconnect the external power source before connecting/disconnecting the power connector from the power cable.

Otherwise, fire or electric shock may be caused.

Be sure to connect the ground wire to the ground terminal.

Otherwise, electric shock may be caused

Connection of the ground wire reduces damage during lighting or prevents noise.

Do not pull or insert the power cable from or into the power connector (main body) with a wet hand.

Otherwise, electric shock may be caused.

When the power cable is connected to the power connector (main body), do not touch the main body with a wet hand.

Otherwise, electric shock may be caused.

Before connecting or disconnecting the ground wire, be sure to disconnect the power cable from the power connector (main body).

If the ground wire is connected or disconnected while the power cable is connected to the power connector (main body), electric shock may be caused.

Always hold the power supply plug when removing it.

Otherwise the power supply cable may be damaged, causing fire or electric shock.

NOTE An aluminum electrolytic capacitor is used for the power supply module of this equipment. The storing of an aluminum electrolytic capacitor for a long period of time without charging causes performance deterioration. Charge the capacitor by turning on the power supply for around two hours once a year for safety reasons even if it is not used for a long time.

When not using this equipment, always disconnect the power cable from the power connector (main body) for safety reasons.

Page 13: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Preface

ix

Precautions Regarding Installation, Transportation, Storage, and Operating Environments

WARNING Do not place a container with liquid such as a flowerpot, glass, cosmetics, chemical near the equipment.

If liquid is spilled over the equipment, fire or electric shock may be caused.

Do not use this equipment in a humid environment (humidity 90% or higher) or in the environment that causes condensation such as in a bathroom or in the vicinity of a humidifier.

Otherwise, fire or electric shock may be caused.

The contents of the CD-ROM of this manual are not voice data. Use it only with a CD-ROM player. Otherwise, the loud noise may impair the hearing function or damage the speaker..

Never overlay one unit on another during installation. If the unit falls, you may suffer serious injury such as fracture.

When one unit needs to be overlaid on another, be sure to use a rack.

When installing the equipment units at the top and bottom, always mount them on the racks.

Keep the equipment and power cable away from fire or flame such as a heater.

Damage to the cover or power cable may cause fire, electric shock, or malfunction.

Do not place the equipment in a location where oil splashes, steam generates, or much dust is present.

Otherwise, fire, electric shock, or malfunction may be caused.

Do not place the equipment during operation in a location exposed to direct sunlight or a high temperature (55°C or higher).

Otherwise, the temperature inside the equipment rises excessively, probably causing fire.

Always take a measure to handle electrostatic discharge before handling the equipment.

The touching of the equipment without taking such a measure causes electrostatic discharge failure, thereby causing fire, electric shock, or some equipment malfunction.

Do not touch the components when handling each module.

Otherwise, the components may be disengaged from the substrate, causing fire, electric shock, or some equipment malfunction.

As this product is susceptible to impact, do not drop or hit the product with a hard object.

Otherwise, the product may be damaged, causing fire, electric shock, or some equipment malfunction.

Store each module by wrapping it with an insulated sheet.

An electrostatic discharge failure or accumulation of dust on the product by storing without protection may cause fire, electric shock, or some equipment malfunction.

Page 14: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Preface

x

CAUTION The temperature and humidity ranges that are specified in this manual must be observed at transportation and storage of this equipment.

Otherwise, the equipment may be damaged.

Do not cover the ports of this equipment.

Otherwise, the internal temperature rises, possibly causing a fire.

Do not place this equipment on an unstable location (unstable or sloping stand).

Otherwise, the equipment may drop or tip over, causing an injury or some equipment malfunction.

Do not place this equipment in the environment of high vibration or impact.

Otherwise, the equipment may drop or tip over, causing an injury or some equipment malfunction.

This product has many angles.

Handle the product with the utmost care to avoid any injury

Mounting of the equipment on a rack must be performed by more than one person.

NOTE If the equipment is used near a radio or TV, the noise from the equipment may affect the radio or TV. If a device that generates a strong magnetic field is present near the equipment, the equipment may be affected by noise, resulting in malfunction. In this case, keep the equipment away from other units.

Precautions Regarding Fault and Trouble

WARNING When the equipment is dropped or damaged, turn off the power, disconnect the power cable from the power connector (main body), and report the incident to the distributor of the equipment or the sales person.

Leaving the equipment in service may cause fire, electric shock, or malfunction.

When liquid such as water enters inside of the equipment, turn off the power, disconnect the power cable from the power connector (main body), and report the incident to the distributor of the equipment or the NEC sales person.

Leaving the equipment in service may cause fire, electric shock, or malfunction.

When a foreign object enters inside of the equipment, turn off the power, disconnect the power cable from the power connector (main body), and report the incident to the distributor of the equipment or the NEC sales person.

Leaving the equipment in service may cause fire, electric shock, or malfunction.

When the power cable is damaged, replace it with a normal cable according to the procedure and the precautions that are described in this manual.

Leaving the equipment in service may cause fire, electric shock, or malfunction.

When detecting smoke or abnormal odor from this equipment, turn off the power, disconnect the power cable from the power terminal (main body), check that smoke is no longer emitted, and report the incident to the distributor of the equipment or the NEC sales person

Leaving the equipment in service may cause fire, electric shock, or malfunction.

Page 15: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Preface

xi

CAUTION Do not carry out electrical construction during a thunder storm.

Otherwise, fire or electric shock may be caused.

Precautions for Maintenance

CAUTION Before starting any maintenance of this equipment, always turn off the power and disconnect the power cable from the power connector (main body) for safety reasons.

After the purchase of this equipment, consult with the distributor or sales person for regular cleaning of the inside of the equipment.

Dust accumulated inside of the equipment for a long period of time may cause fire or some equipment malfunction.

When replacing a FAN module after the power is turned on, make sure that the fan stops rotating before replacing it

The touching of a rotating fan may cause an injury.

NOTE Clean the external surfaces of the equipment by lightly wiping with wet soft cloth immersed in water and neutral detergent. During the cleaning, remove the power cable from the DC power terminal (main body) for safety.

Do not use volatile chemicals such as benzine or thinner to prevent deformation or discoloration

Do not apply insecticides because they may cause deformation or discoloration

Cautions on Handling the Transceiver Accessories

CAUTION As laser beams are used, do not look directly through the optical transceiver section after the transceiver is installed in the main body and the power is turned on.

As the surfaces of some transceivers become hot during use, handle them carefully.

Mishandling may cause a burn injury.

Before connecting the optical fiber cable and each transceiver, check for any connector damage, bent connector pins, stains, or dust.

Any connector damage or dust or stain on the connector may cause a short-circuit, thereby causing a fire. A stain on the transceiver section or end of the connector of the optical fiber cable may prevent normal communication.

Use the transceiver specified by NEC.

The use of any other transceivers may hinder normal operation or cause a failure of the main body.

Page 16: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Preface

xii

Other Warnings and Cautions

WARNING Inspection, adjustments, cleaning, and repair of the inside of this equipment by anyone other than the NEC authorized parties must be strictly prohibited as such activities are dangerous.

Some internal sections of this equipment bear a high voltage, which may cause fire or electric shock.

The customer must consult with the distributor of the equipment or NEC sales person for inspection, adjustments, cleaning, or repair of the inside of this equipment.

Disassembling and remodeling the inside of the equipment by anyone other than the NEC concerned parties are strictly prohibited.

Such handling may cause fire, electric shock, or some equipment malfunction.

Handle this equipment with care to prevent any liquid from entering this equipment or the equipment from getting wet.

Otherwise, fire, electric shock, or some equipment malfunction may be caused.

CAUTION Do not insert metal objects or flammable objects into the internal section from the openings of this equipment such as ports.

The use of the equipment with such objects may cause fire, electric shock, or some equipment malfunction.

Do not place any object on this equipment or climb on the equipment.

Such behavior can cause some equipment malfunction or an injury.

Page 17: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Preface

xiii

Labels The following labels are attached to the product.

The touching of a rotating object may cause an injury.

Electrostatic warning label Always take measures to handle electrostatic discharge before handling the equipment.

Indicates that a transceiver that radiates laser beams may beinstalled.

Warning label relating to Class 1 LASER. Do not look directly through the optical transceiver port.

Indicates that this equipment complies with the FDA Standards.

Indicates that this product complies with the VCCI Class AStandards.

Indicates that this product complies with the FCC Part15 Class AStandards.

Indicates that electrical and electronic wastes must be separatedfrom household refuse in the EU member countries based on thelaws that are enforced in each EU member country.

Indicates that this equipment complies with the CE Marking Standards.

Page 18: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Preface

xiv

These labels are affixed to the system as the following picture shows.

Page 19: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Preface

xv

Document Structure This manual is organized as shown below.

Preface Describes the points to be checked before using the CX2200.

Abbreviations Lists the abbreviations used in this manual and their full spelling.

1 Overview of the Device Describes the features, device configuration, and device specifications of the CX2200.

2 Operations Describes how to operate CLI (Command Line Interface), and explains the procedures for setting the basic functions such as VLAN, QoS and link aggregation; ATM functions such as PVC registration, ATM shaper, OAM and IMA; TDM functions such as TDM path and TDMoP (CES); and EtherOAM functions.

3 Installation Describes the procedures for installing the CX2200, connecting cables and power, and setting consoles.

4 Maintenance Describes how to operate the maintenance functions for networks and devices and the management functions by a monitor or log, and explains the upgrading procedure, as well as troubleshooting (how to find a solution when the device does not operate as desired and the procedure for restoring the default settings).

Appendix Lists troubles, counter monitoring conditions, command errors, restart factors, and restrictions.

*"CPUSW" in this manual indicates the CPUSW card or the CPUSWE card.

Page 20: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Preface

xvi

(Blank page)

Page 21: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Abbreviations

xvii

Abbreviations

1 Outline...........................................xviii

2 List of Abbreviations .....................xix

Page 22: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Abbreviations

xviii

1 Outline This section lists the abbreviations used in this manual.

Page 23: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Abbreviations

xix

2 List of Abbreviations Abbreviations Full Spelling

A AIS

ALM

ANSI

APS

ARP

ATM

ATMoP

Alarm Indication Signal

Alarm

American National Standards Institute

Automatic Protection System

Address Resolution Protocol

Asynchronous Transfer Mode

ATM over Packet

B BBE

BER

BITS

BPDU

Background Block Error

Bit Error Rate

Building Integrated Timing Supply

Bridge Protocol Data Unit

C CC

CCM

CES

CESoPSN

CL

CLI

CLP

CoS

CPU

CR

CRC

CTC

Continuity Check

Continuity Check Message

Circuit Emulation Service

CES over Packet Switched Network

Cleared

Command Line Interface

Cell Loss Priority

Class of Service

Central Processing Unit

Critical

Cyclic Redundancy Check

Common Transmit Clock

D DA

DCS

DLF

DM

DMM

DMR

DSCP

Destination Address

Digital Clock Supply

Destination Lookup Failure

Delay Measurement

Delay Measurement Message

Delay Measurement Reply

Differentiated Services Code Point

E ECID

EMC

Emulated Circuit Identifier

Electro-Magnetic Compatibility

Page 24: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Abbreviations

xx

Abbreviations Full Spelling

EMI

ERR

ES

ESD

ESF

ETH

Electro-Magnetic Interference

Error

Errored Seconds

Electrostatic Discharge

Extended Super Frame

Ethernet

F FCS

FDB

FE

FEBE

FER

FG

FLT

FTP

FTTx

Frame Check Sequence

Forwarding Data Base

Fast Ether

Far End Block Error

Frame Error Rate

Frame Ground

Fault

File Transfer Protocol

Fiber To The x

G G

GbE

GND

Ground

Gigabit Ether

Ground

I ID

IEEE

IF

IFG

IMA

IP

ITC

ITU

Identification

Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers

Information

Inter Frame Gap

Inverse Multiplexing for ATM

Internet Protocol

Independent Transmit Clock

International Telecommunication Union

L L2SW

LACP

LAG

LAN

LB

LBM

LBR

LCD

LCV

Layer 2 Switch

Link Aggregation Control Protocol

Link Aggregation Group

Local Area Network

Loop Back

Loop Back Message

Loop Back message Reply

Loss of Cell Delineation

Line Code Violation

Page 25: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Abbreviations

xxi

Abbreviations Full Spelling

LED

LIF

LLB

LM

LMM

LMR

LOC

LODS

LOF

LOP

LOS

LT

LTM

LTR

Light Emitting Diode

Loss of IMA Frame

Link aggregation Load Balancing

Loss Measurement

Loss Measurement Message

Loss Measurement Reply

Loss Of Continuity

Link Out of Delay Synchronization

Loss Of Frame

Loss Of Pointer

Loss Of Signal

Link Trace

Link Trace Message

Link Trace Reply

M MAC

MDI

MDIX

MEF

MEG

MEL

MEP

MIB

MIP

MJ

MMF

MN

MS-AIS

MTU

Media Access Control

Media Dependent Interface

Media Dependent Interface with Crossover

Metro Ethernet Forum

Maintenance Entity Group

MEG Level

MEG End Point

Management Information Base

MEG Intermediate Point

Major

Multi Mode Fiber

Minor

Multiplex Section AIS

Maximum Transmission Unit

N NRZ

NTP

None Return to Zero

Network Time Protocol

O OAM

OOF

OPT

Operation Administration and Maintenance

Out Of Frame

Optical

P P-AIS

PDH

Pass-AIS

Pre synchronous Digital Hierarchy

Page 26: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Abbreviations

xxii

Abbreviations Full Spelling

PDU

PHY

PKG

PMON

PVC

PW

PWR

Protocol Data Unit

Physical layer

Package

Performance Monitor

Permanent Virtual Circuit

Pseudo Wire

Power

Q QoS Quality of Service

R RAI

RDI

RED

RFC

RL

RMON

RPL

RSTP

RTP

RX

Remote Alarm Indication

Remote Defect Indication

Random Early Detection

Request For Comments

Ring Link

Remote network Monitoring

Ring Protection Link

Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol

Real time Transport Protocol

Receive

S SA

SAToP

SD

SDH

SELV

SF

SFP

SMF

SNMP

SNTP

SONET

SP

STM

STP

STP

SW

Source Address

Structure-Agnostic TDM over Packet

Signal Degrade

Synchronous Digital Hierarchy

Safety Extra Low Voltage

Signal Fail

Small Form-factor Pluggable

Single Mode Fiber

Simple Network Management Protocol

Simple Network Time Protocol

Synchronous Optical Network

Strict Priority

Synchronous Transport Mode

Spanning Tree Protocol

Shielded Twisted Pair

Switch

T TDM Time Division Multiplexing

Page 27: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Abbreviations

xxiii

Abbreviations Full Spelling

TDMoP

TLV

TPID

TS

TTL

TX

TDM over Packet

Type Length Value

Tag Protocol Identifier

Time Slot

Time To Live

Transmit

U UAS

UDP

UPC-RED

UTP

Unavailable Second

User Datagram Protocol

Usage Parameter Control-RED

Unshielded Twist Pair

V VC

VCI

VID

VLAN

VP

VPI

Virtual Channel

Virtual Channel Identifier

VLAN Identifier

Virtual LAN

Virtual Path

Virtual Path Identifier

W WDTOVF

WR

WRED

WRR

WTR

Watch Dog Timer Over Flow

Warning

Weighted Random Early Detection

Weighted Round Robin

Wait To Restore

X XC Cross Connect

Page 28: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

(blank page)

Page 29: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Contents

xxv

Contents

Preface ....................................................................... i

Outline.....................................................................................iii

About This Product ...............................................................iv

Safety Precautions ...............................................................vii

Labels....................................................................................xiii

Document Structure .............................................................xv

Abbreviations ....................................................... xvii

1 Outline...............................................................................xviii

2 List of Abbreviations..........................................................xix

1 Overview of Device ............................................1-1

1.1 Outline............................................................................. 1-2

1.2 Features and Configuration .......................................... 1-3

1.2.1 Features of the CX2200 ............................................................................. 1-3

1.2.2 Unit Configuration ...................................................................................... 1-5 1.2.2.1 Unit outline ...................................................................................................... 1-5 1.2.2.2 Components .................................................................................................... 1-6

1.3 Specifications............................................................... 1-18

1.3.1 Unit Specifications.....................................................................................1-18

1.3.2 Interface Specifications .............................................................................1-20 1.3.2.1 Line interface specifications .......................................................................... 1-20 1.3.2.2 Console port connectors ............................................................................... 1-27 1.3.2.3 Clock interface specification.......................................................................... 1-29

Page 30: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Contents

xxvi

2 Operations ..........................................................2-1

2.1 Outline............................................................................. 2-3

2.2 Commands...................................................................... 2-4

2.2.1 Entering a Command ................................................................................. 2-4 2.2.1.1 Rules for entering a command ........................................................................ 2-4

2.2.2 Command Line Interface............................................................................ 2-5

2.3 Setting of Basic Functions.......................................... 2-11

2.3.1 Setting of Basic Functions.........................................................................2-11 2.3.1.1 Port ................................................................................................................ 2-11 2.3.1.2 VLAN ............................................................................................................. 2-33 2.3.1.3 QoS control ................................................................................................... 2-49 2.3.1.4 Link aggregation............................................................................................ 2-86 2.3.1.5 Frame size..................................................................................................... 2-97 2.3.1.6 Spanning tree protocol .................................................................................. 2-98

2.3.2 Setting of Extended Functions ................................................................2-114 2.3.2.1 Port isolate .................................................................................................. 2-114 2.3.2.2 Filtering........................................................................................................ 2-118 2.3.2.3 Reference clock control function ................................................................. 2-122

2.4 ATM Functions ........................................................... 2-128

2.4.1 ATM Path Setting ....................................................................................2-128 2.4.1.1 PVC setting ................................................................................................. 2-130 2.4.1.2 ATMoP ........................................................................................................ 2-134 2.4.1.3 ATM cell relay.............................................................................................. 2-150

2.4.2 ATM Shaper Function .............................................................................2-153

2.4.3 ATM-OAM Setting ...................................................................................2-158

2.4.4 IMA Function ...........................................................................................2-163

2.5 TDM Functions ........................................................... 2-171

2.5.1 TDM Setting ............................................................................................2-171

2.5.2 TDMoP Setting........................................................................................2-179

2.6 EtherOAM Functions ................................................. 2-210

2.6.1 EtherOAM Function.................................................................................2-210

2.6.2 EtherRing Function .................................................................................2-248

2.7 Configuration Data..................................................... 2-266

Page 31: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Contents

xxvii

2.7.1 About Configuration Data ........................................................................2-266 2.7.1.1 Structure of configuration data .................................................................... 2-267 2.7.1.2 Types of configuration data ......................................................................... 2-268

2.7.2 Configuration Data Management ............................................................2-270 2.7.2.1 Setting and referencing the running configuration data............................... 2-271 2.7.2.2 Setting and referencing the startup configuration data................................ 2-272 2.7.2.3 Managing configuration data using a server................................................ 2-276

3 Installation ..........................................................3-1

3.1 Outline............................................................................. 3-2

3.2 Settings for Network Connection ................................. 3-3

3.2.1 Installation Procedure ................................................................................ 3-3

3.2.2 Unit Mounting ............................................................................................. 3-4

3.2.3 Cable Connection....................................................................................... 3-7 3.2.3.1 Network connection mode............................................................................... 3-7 3.2.3.2 Cable connection............................................................................................. 3-8

3.2.4 Power on and Login ..................................................................................3-21 3.2.4.1 Confirming console port connection .............................................................. 3-22 3.2.4.2 Power on ....................................................................................................... 3-22 3.2.4.3 Login.............................................................................................................. 3-27

3.2.5 Settings for Remote Maintenance .............................................................3-34 3.2.5.1 Setting IP addresses ..................................................................................... 3-36 3.2.5.2 Remote maintenance through in-band network............................................. 3-36 3.2.5.3 Remote maintenance through out-band network .......................................... 3-45 3.2.5.4 Maintenance network construction................................................................ 3-52

3.2.6 Basic Settings after Purchase ...................................................................3-54 3.2.6.1 Setting date and time..................................................................................... 3-55 3.2.6.2 Setting system information ............................................................................ 3-59 3.2.6.3 Setting functions............................................................................................ 3-59 3.2.6.4 Saving set information................................................................................... 3-60

4 Maintenance........................................................4-1

4.1 Outline............................................................................. 4-2

4.2 Method of Operating Maintenance and Management Functions .............................................................................. 4-3

Page 32: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Contents

xxviii

4.2.1 Loopback Test............................................................................................ 4-3 4.2.1.1 Ether network loopback test ............................................................................ 4-4 4.2.1.2 ATM transmission path loopback test.............................................................. 4-8

4.2.2 Connection Test ........................................................................................4-18 4.2.2.1 Connection test procedure ............................................................................ 4-18

4.2.3 SNMP-based Management .......................................................................4-20 4.2.3.1 Setting SNMP................................................................................................ 4-22 4.2.3.2 Setting the SNMP manager........................................................................... 4-23 4.2.3.3 Setting SNMP unauthorized access trap issuance........................................ 4-24 4.2.3.4 Setting the trap manager ............................................................................... 4-24 4.2.3.5 Saving the set data........................................................................................ 4-25

4.2.4 Counter Monitoring....................................................................................4-26 4.2.4.1 Port counters ................................................................................................. 4-26 4.2.4.2 VLAN counters .............................................................................................. 4-31 4.2.4.3 ATM counters ................................................................................................ 4-37 4.2.4.4 Line quality counters ..................................................................................... 4-47 4.2.4.5 EtherOAM counter......................................................................................... 4-49

4.2.5 Fault Monitoring ........................................................................................4-53

4.2.6 Faults ........................................................................................................4-56

4.2.7 syslog Functions .......................................................................................4-57

4.2.8 MAC Learning ...........................................................................................4-62 4.2.8.1 CPUSW MAC learning function..................................................................... 4-62

4.2.9 Port Mirroring ............................................................................................4-65

4.2.10 System Reboot........................................................................................4-69

4.2.11 Initialization .............................................................................................4-71

4.2.12 Replacement ...........................................................................................4-73 4.2.12.1 Replacing LINE1 card ................................................................................. 4-75 4.2.12.2 Replacing LINE2 card ................................................................................. 4-77 4.2.12.3 Replacing a CPUSW card ........................................................................... 4-79 4.2.12.4 Replacing a FAN unit .................................................................................. 4-83 4.2.12.5 Replacing the fuse of the CPUSWE card .................................................... 4-85

4.2.13 Resource Monitoring ...............................................................................4-86

4.2.14 NTP Function ..........................................................................................4-88

4.3 Useful Functions .......................................................... 4-91

4.3.1 Version Up ................................................................................................4-91 4.3.1.1 Version up procedure .................................................................................... 4-92

4.3.2 Trap Transmission Selection Function ......................................................4-98

4.4 Troubleshooting......................................................... 4-103

Page 33: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Contents

xxix

Appendix ...................................................................1

1 Outline....................................................................................3

2 Alarm Transfer Mechanism ..................................................3

3 Fault List ..............................................................................18

4 Trap List ...............................................................................24

5 Counter Monitoring Condition List....................................75

6 Command Error List............................................................87

7 Restart Cause List.............................................................113

8 IMA State List.....................................................................114

9 Remote Device Interface Speed-by-Speed Connection List .........................................................................................116

10 ATM Shaper Setting Bandwidth Value List...................119

11 List of Operations on ATM Loopback Cell Reception .121

Page 34: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

(blank page)

Page 35: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Overview of Device

1-1

1 Overview of Device

1.1 Outline..........................................1-2

1.2 Features and Configuration .......1-3

1.2.1 Features of the CX2200.................................. 1-3

1.2.2 Unit Configuration........................................... 1-5

1.3 Specifications............................1-18

1.3.1 Unit Specifications ........................................ 1-18

1.3.2 Interface Specifications................................. 1-20

Page 36: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Outline

1-2

1.1 Outline This chapter describes the features, device configuration, and device specifications of the CX2200.

Page 37: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Features and Configuration

1-3

1.2 Features and Configuration 1.2.1 Features of the CX2200 The CX2200 series are a series of high-performance multi-service aggregation switches that can apply to establishing broadband access network such as FTTx service to wide-area Ethernet network and mobile access aggregation network called mobile backhaul.

Various access lines CX2200 provides various line cards to flexibly support establishing various networks. The fast Ethernet interface is provided as standard equipment.

− Ethernet line cards supporting GbE (100BASE-TX/1000BASE-T, 1000BASE-X)

− TDM line cards supporting T1/E1 (Channelized T1/E1)

− ATM line cards supporting T1/E1 and STM-1 (T1/E1 IMA, STM-1/OC-3)

− Multiservice line cards supporting various TDM/ATMs (TDM: Channelized T1/E1 ATM: T1/E1 IMA)

Line emulation function CX2200 provides the line emulation function to packetize TDM/ATMs, which enables the traffic to be integrated into the cost-efficient packet network.

− TDM emulation: SAToP, CESoPSN

− ATM emulation: ATMoP (cell mode)

OAM functions CX2200 provides Ethernet and ATM OAM functions to improve the maintenance capability.

− Ethernet: continuity monitoring, continuity confirmation, performance measurement

− ATM: alarm transfer

Page 38: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Features and Configuration

1-4

Various VLAN functions CX2200 provides various VLAN functions for effective use of networks.

− Portbase VLAN

− Tagbase VLAN

− Extended-VLAN

MPLS function This function corresponds to the MPLS function that supports EoMPLS, ATM/TDMoMPLS, and various line interfaces. This function is made available by purchasing a separate MPLS function license. Refer to the Instruction Manual (MPLS) and Command Reference (MPLS) for the setting method and the details.

SNMP functions CX2200 provides a network management protocols defined in the RFC1157 (SNMPv1: Simple Network Management Protocol Version1 and SNMPv2c: Community String-Based SNMPv2) to retain own operational statuses in a database called MIB (Management Information Base) as an SNMP agent. These statuses can be monitored or managed by the SNMP manager.

NTP functions CX2200 provides Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTPv3: Simple Network Time Protocol Version3), with which an exact time information source can be structured hierarchically.

Page 39: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Features and Configuration

1-5

1.2.2 Unit Configuration 1.2.2.1 Unit outline The appearance of the CX2200 is show below.

The outer dimensions of the CX2200 are 430 mm in width, 230 mm in depth, and 43.6 mm in height (without the flange), so the unit can be mounted in the 19-inch rack.

Page 40: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Features and Configuration

1-6

1.2.2.2 Components CX2200

Front (connectors and indication lamps)

The front of the CX2200 has various insertion slots in which various cards are to be mounted.

Item Indication Color Description

(1) LINE1 slot LINE1 - This slot mounts various line cards. CPUSW card and LINE2 card cannot be mounted.

(2) CPUSW slot CPUSW - This slot mounts CPUSW cards. LINE1/LINE2 card cannot be mounted.

(3) LINE2 slot LINE2 - This slot mounts various line cards. CPUSW and LINE1 card cannot be mounted.

(4) FAN unit FAN - This unit mounts a FAN module for cooling equipment.

When the CPUSWE card is mounted and the unit temperature drops to 45 degrees or lower, the FAN rotates at low speed and when the unit temperature reaches 50 degrees or higher, the FAN rotates at high speed.

* When the power is turned on, the FAN rotates at high speed.

(5) FG terminal - A terminal for connection to frame ground

(6) Power switch PWR - Switch to turn on/off the equipment

(7) Power LED PWR1/PWR2 Green This LED lights up in green when the main power is supplied.

(1) (3) (4)

(5) (2) (7) (6)

(8)

(9)

Page 41: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Features and Configuration

1-7

Item Indication Color Description

(8) FAN unit fixing screw

- - Screw to fix the FAN unit to the chassis

* Be sure to tighten the screw completely when the FAN unit is mounted on the chassis.

(9) FAN unit drawing knob

- - Knob to remove the FAN unit.

Page 42: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Features and Configuration

1-8

CPUSW Card

Item Indication Color Description

(1) ALM lamp ALM Red Indicates the fault state of the card.

On: A failure has occurred in the card or an error has been found during self-diagnosis.

Blink: Failure occurs in FAN or low temperature.

Off: The card is normal.

(2) INS lamp INS Green/Yellow

Indicates the operating state of the card.

On (Green): The card is in the normal state.

On (Yellow): The card is initial state.

Blink (Yellow): The card is in the initial setting state or self-diagnosis state.

Blink (green and yellow): The states are given below.

- The module is downloading software, FPGA, or configuration.

- The module is uploading configuration, failure information, or local log.

Off: The card stops services, has a unit failure, or finds an error during self-diagnosis.

(3) Power connector 1 PWR1 Green Power connector of the unit.

On: Power is supplied normally.

Off: Failure occurs in power supply.

(4) Power connector 2 PWR2 Green Power connector of the unit.

On: Power is supplied normally.

Off: Failure occurs in power supply.

* Power can be supplied via both or only one side of PWR1/2.

PWRSELV

GND -48VPULL

ALM PWR1ETHRS-232C17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24FE CONSOLE SELV

GND-48V

PWR2INS

CPUSWEXT-M

-48V

(11) (10) (1) (2) (9) (6) (7) (8) (3) (4) (5) (11)

Page 43: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Features and Configuration

1-9

Item Indication Color Description

(5) Power switch PWR - Power on/off switch of the unit. Tilt the switch to right/left with pulling it out. The left side is Off, and the right side is On.

(6) Console port 2 CONSOLE RS-232C

- This is a console port used to connect to a local console terminal. An RS-232C cable is used for the connection. A cross cable is used for the connection with a console (such as a PC).

(7) Console port 1 CONSOLE ETH

- This is a console port used to connect to a local console terminal for the purpose of network download. An RJ45 STP (category 5) cable is used for the connection.

(8) Maintenance port EXT-M - This is a port to which external memory is connected (for maintenance).

(9) Fast ether port FE17-24 Green/Yellow

Port to connect the CX2200 to Ethernet using 10/100BASE-TX. An RJ45 STP (category 5) cable is used for the connection.

LED (Green):

On as a link is established.

Blink as a link is established or frame is sent/received

Off as no link is established.

LED (Yellow):

On as a 100M link is established

(10) Frame ground connection terminal

Terminal for connection to frame ground

(11) Card fixing screw - - Screw to fix a card to the chassis.

* When a card is mounted to the chassis, be sure to tighten the screw before use.

Page 44: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Features and Configuration

1-10

CPUSWE Card

Item Indication Color Description

(1) ALM lamp ALM Red Indicates the fault state of the card.

On: A failure has occurred in the card or an error has been found during self-diagnosis.

Blink: Failure occurs in FAN or low temperature.

Off: The card is normal.

(2) INS lamp INS Green/Yellow

Indicates the operating state of the card.

On (Green): The card is in the normal state.

On (Yellow): The card is initial state.

Blink (Yellow): The card is in the initial setting state or self-diagnosis state.

Blink (green and yellow): The states are given below.

- The module is downloading software, FPGA, or configuration.

- The module is uploading configuration, failure information, or local log.

Off: The card stops services, has a unit failure, or finds an error during self-diagnosis.

(3) Power connector 1 PWR1 Green Power connector of the unit.

On: Power is supplied normally.

Off: Failure occurs in power supply.

(4) Power connector 2 PWR2 Green Power connector of the unit.

On: Power is supplied normally.

Off: Failure occurs in power supply.

* Power can be supplied via both or only one side of PWR1/2.

(11) (10) (1) (2) (9) (6) (7) (8) (3) (4) (5) (11)

PWRSELV

RTNPULL

ALM PWR1

ETHRS-232C17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24FE CONSOLE SELV

RTN-48V

PWR2INS

CPUSWE-48V

EXT-CLK

Page 45: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Features and Configuration

1-11

Item Indication Color Description

(5) Power switch PWR - Power on/off switch of the unit. Tilt the switch to right/left with pulling it out. The left side is Off, and the right side is On.

(6) Console port 2 CONSOLE RS-232C

- This is a console port used to connect to a local console terminal. An RS-232C cable is used for the connection. A cross cable is used for the connection with a console (such as a PC).

(7) Console port 1 CONSOLE ETH

- This is a console port used to connect to a local console terminal for the purpose of network download. An RJ45 STP (category 5) cable is used for the connection.

(8) Clock port EXT-CLK - This is a port to output clocks.

(9) Fast ether port FE17-24 Green/Yellow

Port to connect the CX2200 to Ethernet using 10/100BASE-TX. An RJ45 STP (category 5) cable is used for the connection.

LED (Green):

On as a link is established.

Blink as a link is established or frame is sent/received

Off as no link is established.

LED (Yellow):

On as a 100M link is established

(10) Frame ground connection terminal

Terminal for connection to frame ground

(11) Card fixing screw - - Screw to fix a card to the chassis.

* When a card is mounted to the chassis, be sure to tighten the screw before use.

Page 46: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Features and Configuration

1-12

2GBE line card

Item Indication Color Description

(1) ALM lamp ALM Red Indicates the fault state of the card.

On: A failure has occurred in the card.

Off: The card is normal.

SFP interface (port25)

25 Green Port to connect the CX2200 to Ethernet using 1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX/ BX. A SFP (mini GBIC) module is used to connect a fiber-optic cable.

LINK lamp LINK Green Indicates port state.

On: A link is established (Link-Up).

Off: No link is established (Link-Down).

(2)

ACT lamp ACT Green Indicates port state

Blink: Communication is in progress.

Off: Communication is not in progress.

1000BASE-T 25 - Port to connect the CX2200 to Ethernet using 1000BASE-T. An RJ45 STP (category 5E or higher) cable is used for the connection.

LINK lamp -

(Connector)

Green Indicates the LAN port state.

On: A link is established (Link-Up).

Off: No link is established (Link-Down).

Blink: Communication is in progress.

(3)

SPEED lamp -

(Connector)

Yellow Indicates the LAN port state.

This lamp lights only when 1000BASE-T is connected.

SFP interface (port26)

26 - Port to connect the CX2200 to Ethernet using 1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX/ BX. A SFP (mini GBIC) module is used to connect a fiber-optic cable.

(4)

LINK lamp LINK Green Indicates port state

On: A link is established (Link-Up).

Off: No link is established (Link-Down).

LINK

ACT

LINK

ACT

25 26

ALM

2GBE

(6) (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)

Page 47: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Features and Configuration

1-13

Item Indication Color Description

ACT lamp ACT Green Indicates port state

Blink: Communication is in progress.

Off: Communication is not in progress.

1000BASE-T 26 - Port to connect the CX2200 to Ethernet using 1000BASE-T. An RJ45 STP (category 5E or higher) cable is used for the connection.

LINK lamp LINK Green Indicates the LAN port state.

On: A link is established (Link-Up).

Off: No link is established (Link-Down).

Blink: Communication is in progress.

(5)

SPEED lamp ACT Yellow Indicates the LAN port state.

This lamp lights only when 1000BASE-T is connected.

(6) Card fixing screw - - Screw to fix a card to the chassis.

* When a card is mounted to the chassis, be sure to tighten the screw before use.

Page 48: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Features and Configuration

1-14

32T1E1H line card

Item Indication Color Description

(1) ALM lamp ALM Red Indicates the fault state of the card.

On: A failure has occurred in the card.

Off: The card is normal.

(2) T1/E1 line 1-16 - This port is used to connect this product to T1/E1 line.

An MDR68 pin connector is used for the connection.

(3) T1/E1 line 33-48 - This port is used to connect this product to T1/E1 line.

An MDR68 pin connector is used for the connection.

(4) Card fixing screws - - Screws to fix a card to the chassis.

* When a card is mounted to the chassis, be sure to tighten the screws before use.

(1) (4) (2) (3) (4)

Page 49: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Features and Configuration

1-15

32T1E1T line card

(4) (1) (2) (3) (4)

Item Indication Color Description

(1) ALM lamp ALM Red Indicates the fault state of the card.

On: A failure has occurred in the card.

Off: The card is normal.

(2) T1/E1 line 1-16 - This port is used to connect this product to T1/E1 line.

An MDR68 pin connector is used for the connection.

(3) T1/E1 line 33-48 - This port is used to connect this product to T1/E1 line.

An MDR68 pin connector is used for the connection.

(4) Card fixing screws - - Screws to fix a card to the chassis.

* When a card is mounted to the chassis, be sure to tighten the screws before use.

32T1E1T

ALM

1-16 33-48

Page 50: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Features and Configuration

1-16

1ATM155A line card

Item Indication Color Description

(1) ALM lamp ALM Red Indicates the fault state of the card.

On: A failure has occurred in the card.

Off: The card is normal.

SFP interface 1 - Port to connect the CX2200 to an STM-1/OC-3 line. A SFP (mini GBIC) module is used to connect a fiber-optic cable.

LINK lamp LINK Green Indicates the port state.

On: A link is established (Link-Up).

Off: No link is established (Link-Down).

(2)

FAIL lamp FAIL Red Indicates the port state.

On: A line failure (F1) has occurred.

Blink: A line failure (F2-F3) has occurred.

Off: No line failure occurs.

(3) Card fixing screws - - Screws to fix a card to the chassis.

* When a card is mounted to the chassis, be sure to tighten the screws before use.

ALM

FAIL

1

1ATM155ALINK

(1) (2) (3)(3)

Page 51: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Features and Configuration

1-17

Back surface (label)

The label on the back surface of the product body of CX2200 is shown below. As the product number of the CX2200, "SPEC.No.NWA-035874-001" is indicated.

Page 52: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Specifications

1-18

1.3 Specifications 1.3.1 Unit Specifications The following table lists the CX2200 specifications.

For the specification relating to MPLS, refer to the Instruction Manual (MPLS).

Function Specifications

T1/E1 (MDR 68 x 2) × 32

STM-1/OC-3 (SFP) × 1

Basic ports

10/100BASE-TX (RJ-45) × 8

Uplink ports 1000BASE-T (RJ-45) × 2

1000BASE-X (SFP) × 2

10/100BASE-TX (RJ-45) × 1 Maintenance ports

RS-232C (RJ-45) × 1

Interface

Clock port BITS (DB9 female) × 1

Packet switching performance

5.7Gbps Switch

Packet transfer performance 4.2Mpps

MAC learning 16K entries

VLAN Up to 256 VLANs (VLANID range: 1-4094) Portbase VLAN, tagbase VLAN [802.1Q] Extended VLAN [802.1ad]

QoS Priority control, Bandwidth control

OAM Ethernet OAM (Y.1731/802.1ag)

Ethernet

Ring Ether Ring (ITU-T G.8032/Y.1731)

Setting granularity 64kbps

Number of classes 4 classes / output port

Ether shaper

Algorithm SP, Deficit WRR

Number of TDM paths 16T1E1H/32T1E1H: Up to 112

32T1E1T: Up to 96

Circuit emulation SAToP (RFC4553), CESoPSN (RFC5086)

TDM

Clock synchronization Line clock, Adaptive clock

Page 53: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Specifications

1-19

Function Specifications

Number of VPs/VCs Up to 256

Link redundancy IMA (AF-PHY-0086.001/I.761) (T1/E1)

ATM

(T1/E1, STM-1/OC-3)

Circuit emulation ATM over Packet, ATM over MPLS (RFC4717)*1

Setting granularity T1/E1: 64kbps (T1: 64k to 12.288M, E1: 64k to 16.384M)

STM-1: 500kbps (500k to 150.0M)

Number of classes 4 classes / output port

ATM shaper

Algorithm SP

Input range -40.5 to -57V Power

Input rating -48VDC/3.0A

Network management SNMPv1/v2c (RFC 157,1902), MIB-II (RFC1213), syslog (RFC3164), RMON (RFC1757)

Maintenance and operation CLI, TELNET (RFC854), FTP (RFC959), SNTPv3 (RFC2030), Remote File Update

Guaranteed operating temperature

Temperature: -5 to 50°C

Humidity: 5 to 90% (no condensation)

Operable temperature Temperature: -10 to 55°C

Humidity: 5 to 90% (no condensation)

Environment conditions

(* FAN removal and FAN failure at 45°C or higher are not guaranteed) Storage temperature Temperature: -20 to 65°C

Humidity: 5 to 90% (no condensation)

External dimensions (W×D×H) 430×230×43.6mm (without the flange)

*1 To use this function, a separate MPLS license must be purchased.

32T1E1H line card operation mode 32T1E1T line card operation mode

Port Operation mode

Port1 to Port16 TDM mode

TDMoP mode

ATMoP mode

Port33 to Port48 TDM mode

Port Operation mode

Port1 to Port16 TDM mode

TDMoP mode

Port33 to Port48 TDM mode

TDMoP mode

Page 54: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Specifications

1-20

1.3.2 Interface Specifications 1.3.2.1 Line interface specifications

10/100BASE-TX/1000BASE-T interface

10/100BASE-TX/1000BASE-T Appearance and Pin Assignment

10/100BASE-TX/1000BASE-T Straight Connection

Port of this unit Straight cable Terminal port

Pin No.

Signal name Contents Internal

connection Signal name Contents Pin

No.

1

2

3

6

4

5

7

8

D0+

D0-

D1+

D1-

D2+

D2-

D3+

D3-

Send/receive+

Send/receive-

Send/receive+

Send/receive-

Send/receive+

Send/receive-

Send/receive+

Send/receive-

D0+

D0-

D1+

D1-

D2+

D2-

D3+

D3-

Send/receive+

Send/receive-

Send/receive+

Send/receive-

Send/receive+

Send/receive-

Send/receive+

Send/receive-

1

2

3

6

4

5

7

8

8 1

Page 55: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Specifications

1-21

10/100BASE-TX/1000BASE-T Cross Connection

Port of this unit Cross cable Terminal port

Pin No.

Signal name Contents Internal

connection Signal name Contents Pin

No.

1

2

3

6

4

5

7

8

D0+

D0-

D1+

D1-

D2+

D2-

D3+

D3-

Send/receive+

Send/receive-

Send/receive+

Send/receive-

Send/receive+

Send/receive-

Send/receive+

Send/receive-

D0+

D0-

D1+

D1-

D2+

D2-

D3+

D3-

Send/receive+

Send/receive-

Send/receive+

Send/receive-

Send/receive+

Send/receive-

Send/receive+

Send/receive-

1

2

3

6

4

5

7

8

Note: Pins 4, 5, 7, and 8 are not cross-connected in some cases.

Page 56: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Specifications

1-22

1000BASE-X interface The 1000BASE-X port is the SFP (mini GBIC) connector. Switching between 1000BASE-SX/LX is possible by changing the SFP module.

For the SFP module, use the recommended CX2000 series product. Contact NEC for the recommended product.

The following table lists the physical standard of the 1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX/BX.

Note When removing an SPF module, pull out the module straight with the ejector being horizontal.

Interface Standard

Item Standard value

Standard 1000BASE-SX

(802.3z)

1000BASE- LX

(802.3z)

1000BASE-ZX

1000BASE- BX10-D

(802.3ah)

1000BASE-BX10-U

(802.3ah)

Interface speed (Mbits/sec) 1250

Conductor count 2 1

Transmission medium MMF SMF

Encoding system 8B10B

Wavelength (nm) 770 to 860 1270 to 1355 1520 to 1580 1480 to 1500 1260 to 1360

Spectrum width (nm) 0.85 (RMS) 4 (RMS) 1 (λ20) 0.88 3.5

Max. output power (dBm)

0 -3 +5 -3

Min. output power (dBm) -9.5 -11 0 -9

Sending part

Extinction ratio (dB) 9 or more 9 or more 7 or more 6 or more

Wavelength (nm) 770 to 860 1270 to 1355 1520 to 1580 1260 to 1360 1480 to 1500

Min. received light power (dBm)

-17 -19 -24 -19.5

Receiving part

Max. received light power (dBm)

0 -3 -3 -3

1000BASE-X Eye Mask

1.3

0.8

1.0

0.5

0.2

0

-0.20 22 37.5 62.5 78 100

Page 57: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Specifications

1-23

T1/E1 interface

T1/E1 Interface (MDR 68 Pins, Female) Appearance

T1/E1 Line Pin Assignment

Port of this unit (Port 1-16)

Pin No.

Signal name Contents Pin

No. Signal name Contents

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

GND

CH16_IN+

CH16_OUT+

CH15_IN+

CH15_OUT+

CH14_IN+

CH14_OUT+

CH13_IN+

CH13_OUT+

CH12_IN+

CH12_OUT+

CH11_IN+

CH11_OUT+

CH10_IN+

CH10_OUT+

CH9_IN+

CH9_OUT+

CH8_IN+

CH8_OUT+

CH7_IN+

CH7_OUT+

CH6_IN+

CH6_OUT+

CH5_IN+

CH5_OUT+

Ground

CH16 Receive+

CH16 Send+

CH15 Receive+

CH15 Send+

CH14 Receive+

CH14 Send+

CH13 Receive+

CH13 Send+

CH12 Receive+

CH12 Send+

CH11 Receive+

CH11 Send+

CH10 Receive+

CH10 Send+

CH9 Receive+

CH9 Send+

CH8 Receive+

CH8 Send+

CH7 Receive+

CH7 Send+

CH6 Receive+

CH6 Send+

CH5 Receive+

CH5 Send+

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

43

44

45

46

47

48

49

50

51

52

53

54

55

56

57

58

59

GND

CH16_IN-

CH16_OUT-

CH15_IN-

CH15_OUT-

CH14_IN-

CH14_OUT-

CH13_IN-

CH13_OUT-

CH12_IN-

CH12_OUT-

CH11_IN-

CH11_OUT-

CH10_IN-

CH10_OUT-

CH9_IN-

CH9_OUT-

CH8_IN-

CH8_OUT-

CH7_IN-

CH7_OUT-

CH6_IN-

CH6_OUT-

CH5_IN-

CH5_OUT-

Ground

CH16 Receive-

CH16 Send-

CH15 Receive-

CH15 Send-

CH14 Receive-

CH14 Send-

CH13 Receive-

CH13 Send-

CH12 Receive-

CH12 Send-

CH11 Receive-

CH11 Send-

CH10 Receive-

CH10 Send-

CH9 Receive-

CH9 Send-

CH8 Receive-

CH8 Send-

CH7 Receive-

CH7 Send-

CH6 Receive-

CH6 Send-

CH5 Receive-

CH5 Send-

Page 58: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Specifications

1-24

Port of this unit (Port 1-16)

Pin No.

Signal name Contents Pin

No. Signal name Contents

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

CH4_IN+

CH4_OUT+

CH3_IN+

CH3_OUT+

CH2_IN+

CH2_OUT+

CH1_IN+

CH1_OUT+

GND

CH4 Receive+

CH4 Send+

CH3 Receive+

CH3 Send+

CH2 Receive+

CH2 Send+

CH1 Receive+

CH1 Send+

Ground

60

61

62

63

64

65

66

67

68

CH4_IN-

CH4_OUT-

CH3_IN-

CH3_OUT-

CH2_IN-

CH2_OUT-

CH1_IN-

CH1_OUT-

GND

CH4 Receive-

CH4 Send-

CH3 Receive-

CH3 Send-

CH2 Receive-

CH2 Send-

CH1 Receive-

CH1 Send-

Ground

Port of this unit (Port 33-48)

Pin No.

Signal name Contents Pin

No. Signal name Contents

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

GND

CH48_IN+

CH48_OUT+

CH47_IN+

CH47_OUT+

CH46_IN+

CH46_OUT+

CH45_IN+

CH45_OUT+

CH44_IN+

CH44_OUT+

CH43_IN+

CH43_OUT+

CH42_IN+

CH42_OUT+

CH41_IN+

CH41_OUT+

CH40_IN+

CH40_OUT+

CH39_IN+

Ground

CH48 Receive+

CH48 Send+

CH47 Receive+

CH47 Send+

CH46 Receive+

CH46 Send+

CH45 Receive+

CH45 Send+

CH44 Receive+

CH44 Send+

CH43 Receive+

CH43 Send+

CH42 Receive+

CH42 Send+

CH41 Receive+

CH41 Send+

CH40 Receive+

CH40 Send+

CH39 Receive+

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

43

44

45

46

47

48

49

50

51

52

53

54

GND

CH48_IN-

CH48_OUT-

CH47_IN-

CH47_OUT-

CH46_IN-

CH46_OUT-

CH45_IN-

CH45_OUT-

CH44_IN-

CH44_OUT-

CH43_IN-

CH43_OUT-

CH42_IN-

CH42_OUT-

CH41_IN-

CH41_OUT-

CH40_IN-

CH40_OUT-

CH39_IN-

Ground

CH48 Receive-

CH48 Send-

CH47 Receive-

CH47 Send-

CH46 Receive-

CH46 Send-

CH45 Receive-

CH45 Send-

CH44 Receive-

CH44 Send-

CH43 Receive-

CH43 Send-

CH42 Receive-

CH42 Send-

CH41 Receive-

CH41 Send-

CH40 Receive-

CH40 Send-

CH39 Receive-

Page 59: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Specifications

1-25

Port of this unit (Port 33-48)

Pin No.

Signal name Contents Pin

No. Signal name Contents

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

CH39_OUT+

CH38_IN+

CH38_OUT+

CH37_IN+

CH37_OUT+

CH36_IN+

CH36_OUT+

CH35_IN+

CH35_OUT+

CH34_IN+

CH34_OUT+

CH33_IN+

CH33_OUT+

GND

CH39 Send+

CH38 Receive+

CH38 Send+

CH37 Receive+

CH37 Send+

CH36 Receive+

CH36 Send+

CH35 Receive+

CH35 Send+

CH34 Receive+

CH34 Send+

CH33 Receive+

CH33 Send+

Ground

55

56

57

58

59

60

61

62

63

64

65

66

67

68

CH39_OUT-

CH38_IN-

CH38_OUT-

CH37_IN-

CH37_OUT-

CH36_IN-

CH36_OUT-

CH35_IN-

CH35_OUT-

CH34_IN-

CH34_OUT-

CH33_IN-

CH33_OUT-

GND

CH39 Send-

CH38 Receive-

CH38 Send-

CH37 Receive-

CH37 Send-

CH36 Receive-

CH36 Send-

CH35 Receive-

CH35 Send-

CH34 Receive-

CH34 Send-

CH33 Receive-

CH33 Send-

Ground

T1/E1 Interface Electrical Conditions

Item T1 E1

Interface speed (kbps) 1544 2048

Transmission code B8ZS, AMI HDB3, AMI

Impedance (Ω) 100 120/75

Support frame ESF

SF

CRC4 multiframe

CRC4 multiframe-no-CAS

non-CRC-4(G.704 basic)

unframed

Page 60: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Specifications

1-26

STM-1/OC-3 interface The SFP of the following interface types can be installed.

For the SFP module, use the recommended CX2000 series product. Contact NEC for the recommended product.

Note When removing an SPF module, pull out the module straight with the ejector being horizontal.

SFP module type Standard value

SONET OC3 IR-1 LR-1 LR-2

ITU-T G.957 S-1.1 L-1.1 L-1.2

Transmission medium SMF

Interface speed (Mbits/sec) 155.520

Wavelength (nm) 1261 to 1360 1263 to 1360 1480 to 1580

Max. output power (dBm) -8 0 0

Min. output power (dBm) -15 -5 -5

Sending part

Extinction ratio (dB) 8.2 or more 10 or more 10 or more

Wavelength (nm) 1261 to 1360 1263 to 1360 1480 to 1580

Min. received light power (dBm) -28 -34 -34

Receiving part

Max. received light power (dBm) -8 -10 -10

STM-1 ATM Eye Mask

1.2

0.8

1.0

0.5

0.2

0

-0.2

0 0.15 0.35 0.65 0.85 1.00

Normalized Time (% of Unit Interval)

Nor

mal

ized

Am

plitu

de

Page 61: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Specifications

1-27

1.3.2.2 Console port connectors Console port (RJ-45)

Console Port (RJ-45) Appearance and Pin Assignment

Console Port (RJ-45) Cross Connection

Port of this unit (RJ-45) Crossing cable Terminal port

(D-Sub 9 pins, male)

Pin No.

Signal name Contents Internal

connection Signal name Contents Pin

No.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

CTS

DTR

TxD

GND

GND

RxD

DSR

RTS

CD

RxD

TxD

DTR

GND

DSR

RTS

CTS

RI

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

8 1

Page 62: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Specifications

1-28

NMS port (10/100BASE-TX)

NMS Port (10/100BASE-TX) Appearance and Pin Assignment

NMS Port (10/100BASE-TX) Straight Connection

Port of this unit Straight cable Terminal port

Pin No.

Signal name Contents Internal

connection Signal name Contents Pin

No.

1

2

3

6

4

5

7

8

D0+

D0-

D1+

D1-

D2+

D2-

D3+

D3-

Send/receive+

Send/receive-

Send/receive+

Send/receive-

Send/receive+

Send/receive-

Send/receive+

Send/receive-

D0+

D0-

D1+

D1-

D2+

D2-

D3+

D3-

Send/receive+

Send/receive-

Send/receive+

Send/receive-

Send/receive+

Send/receive-

Send/receive+

Send/receive-

1

2

3

6

4

5

7

8

NMS Port (10/100BASE-TX) Cross Connection

Port of this unit Crossing cable Terminal port

Pin No.

Signal name Contents Internal

connection Signal name Contents Pin

No.

1

2

3

6

4

5

7

8

D0+

D0-

D1+

D1-

D2+

D2-

D3+

D3-

Send/receive+

Send/receive-

Send/receive+

Send/receive-

Send/receive+

Send/receive-

Send/receive+

Send/receive-

D0+

D0-

D1+

D1-

D2+

D2-

D3+

D3-

Send/receive+

Send/receive-

Send/receive+

Send/receive-

Send/receive+

Send/receive-

Send/receive+

Send/receive-

1

2

3

6

4

5

7

8

Note: Pins 4, 5, 7, and 8 are not cross-connected in some cases.

8 1

Page 63: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Specifications

1-29

1.3.2.3 Clock interface specification Clock interface (DSUB 9-pin)

Clock interface external appearance and pin assignment

Clock interface pin assignment

BITS Pin No.

Signal name Contents

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

TIP

N.C

FG

N.C

N.C

RING

N.C

FG

N.C

External Clock Output T Lead

N.C

Frame Ground

N.C

N.C

External Clock Output R Lead

N.C

Frame Ground

N.C

Note When using BITS, connect pin 1, pin 3, pin 6, and pin 8.

2048 kHz synchronization interface (G.703.13) electrical conditions

Item Standard value

Transmission medium Twisted paired

Interface speed (kHz) 2048

Impedance (Ω) 120

Amplitude 1.0~1.9Vo-p

Page 64: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

(blank page)

Page 65: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Operations

2-1

2 Operations

2.1 Outline..........................................2-3

2.2 Commands...................................2-4

2.2.1 Entering a Command...................................... 2-4

2.2.2 Command Line Interface ................................ 2-5

2.3 Setting of Basic Functions.......2-11

2.3.1 Setting of Basic Functions ............................ 2-11

2.3.2 Setting of Extended Functions.................... 2-114

2.4 ATM Functions ........................2-128

2.4.1 ATM Path Setting........................................ 2-128

2.4.2 ATM Shaper Function................................. 2-153

2.4.3 ATM-OAM Setting....................................... 2-158

2.4.4 IMA Function .............................................. 2-163

2.5 TDM Functions ........................2-171

2.5.1 TDM Setting................................................ 2-171

2.5.2 TDMoP Setting ........................................... 2-179

2.6 EtherOAM Functions ..............2-210

2.6.1 EtherOAM Function .................................... 2-210

2.6.2 EtherRing Function..................................... 2-248

Page 66: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Operations

2-2

2.7 Configuration Data..................2-266

2.7.1 About Configuration Data ........................... 2-266

2.7.2 Configuration Data Management................ 2-270

Page 67: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Outline

2-3

2.1 Outline This chapter describes how to operate the CLI (Command Line Interface). This chapter also describes the setting procedures related to the basic functions such as VLAN, QoS or link aggregation, as well as the ATM functions such as PVC registration, ATM shaper, OAM and IMA, the TDM functions such as TDM path and TDMoP (CES), and the EtherOAM functions.

Page 68: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Commands

2-4

2.2 Commands 2.2.1 Entering a Command 2.2.1.1 Rules for entering a command This unit uses the command line interface (CLI) to accept commands.

The displayed command prompt is followed by a command or space-delimited commands. A parameter following a command is delimited by a space.

Single-byte numbers, letters, and symbols can be entered. The letters are case sensitive.

[1] Command prompt [2] Command [3] Cursor

Error message during command entry If command execution ends abnormally because an incorrect command or unauthorized command is entered, an error message appears.

Memo For details of individual error messages, see "6 Command Error List" in Appendix.

Switch> date 10/21/04 10:51:30

00034 : Command not found.

Switch>

Switch> show system date

[1] [2] [3]

Page 69: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Commands

2-5

2.2.2 Command Line Interface During command entry, you can move the cursor, edit characters on the command line, call the command history, complete a command, enter an abbreviated command, and use the help and scroll control functions.

Cursor movement The cursor can be moved on the command line.

Ctrl + b or ← Moves the cursor one character to the left.

Ctrl + f or → Moves the cursor one character to the right.

Ctrl + a Moves the cursor to the beginning of the line.

Ctrl + e Moves the cursor to the end of the line.

Switch> show system date

Switch> show system date

Switch> show system date

Switch> show system date

Switch> show system date

Ctrl + b or ← (One character to the left)

Ctrl + a (To the beginning of the line)

Ctrl + f or → (One character to the right)

Ctrl + e (To the end of the line)

Page 70: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Commands

2-6

Editing characters on the command line The following key combinations can be used with cursor movement to delete or edit characters on the command line.

Back Space Deletes the character to the left of the cursor.

Ctrl + k Deletes the characters between the cursor position and the end of the command line.

Ctrl + u Deletes the entered characters on the command line.

Ctrl + w Deletes the characters between the cursor position and the beginning of the command line.

Ctrl + y Pastes the cut or copied character string.

Ctrl + z Cancels the standby state and starts a new line.

Switch> show system date

Switch> show system dat

Switch> show system dat

Switch> show system dat

Switch> show system d

Switch>

Switch> show system d

Switch>

Switch>

Back Space (Delete the character to the left)

Ctrl + k (Deletes the characters up to the end)

Ctrl + u (Deletes the characters on the command line)

Ctrl + y (Pastes the cut or copied character string)

Ctrl + w (Deletes the characters between the cursor position and the beginning) Ctrl + z (Starts a new line)

Ctrl + b or ← (One character to the left)

Ctrl + b or ← (One character to the left)

Page 71: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Commands

2-7

Calling command history The commands entered so far can be called through key operation.

The commands can be called from newest to oldest or from oldest to newest.

The command history capacity is 20 latest commands. When all commands are called, the first prompt appears.

A called command can be edited.

Ctrl + n or ↓ Calls the entered commands from the oldest one.

Ctrl + p or ↑ Calls the entered commands from the newest one.

After startup, when the three commands "show all", "show session", and "show system date" has been entered in this order, the commands are called as shown below.

In combined use, the order is determined relative to the current command.

Switch>

Switch> show system date

Switch> show session

Switch> show all

Switch>

Ctrl + p or ↑

Ctrl + p or ↑

Ctrl + p or ↑

Ctrl + p or ↑

Switch>

Switch> show system date

Switch> show session

Switch> show system date

Switch>

Switch>

Ctrl + p or ↑

Ctrl + p or ↑

Ctrl + n or ↓

Ctrl + n or ↓

Ctrl + n or ↓

Page 72: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Commands

2-8

Completion of a command The Tab key completes a command that is incompletely entered.

When there is only one command that begins with the entered character string, pressing the Tab key completes the rest of the command.

When there is more than one command that begins with the entered character string, pressing the Tab key does not complete the rest of the command.

Switch> show system da Tab

Switch> show system date

Switch> show s Tab Switch> show s

Page 73: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Commands

2-9

Entering an abbreviated command When there is only one command that begins with the entered character string, pressing the Enter key can enter the command. When there is more than one command that begins with the entered character string, the command cannot be entered.

The following example shows entry of the abbreviated "disable" command.

For a command containing multiple words, if each of the words can be abbreviated, the command can be entered with each word abbreviated. A space is used to separate between the words.

The following example shows entry of the abbreviated "write memory" command.

Help function The ? key can be used to list command descriptions.

The ? key displays the descriptions of the commands or parameters that can be used in that state.

Switch# dis Enter

Switch>

Switch# wr m Enter Writing Flash Memory...

Switch#

Switch# set terminal scroll system ?

off Disables scroll control.

on Enables scroll control.

(d) Scroll Line <1 - 99>

<cr>

Switch# set terminal scroll system

Page 74: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Commands

2-10

Scroll control If scroll control is set, "--More--" appears in midstream of display to stop scrolling many lines of information. Press the Space key to display the multiple lines that follow or press the Enter key to display the next line. If Ctrl + c are pressed, the subsequent display is cancelled and the prompt appears.

Commands

set terminal scroll system Setting of scroll control defaults

set terminal scroll local Setting of local terminal scroll control

show terminal config Display of scroll setting

Note on entering a command Only the ASCII characters (excluding control characters) can be used to enter a command.

When two or more commands are copied and pasted simultaneously, the commands may not be properly executed.

Page 75: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Setting of Basic Functions

2-11

Sets the attributes for each port.

2.3 Setting of Basic Functions 2.3.1 Setting of Basic Functions 2.3.1.1 Port Set the communication mode for the FastEther (100BASE-TX) port (hereinafter called FE port), GigabitEther (1000BASE-X/T) port (hereinafter called GbE port), T1/E1 port, and ATM155 port in accordance with the use environment.

Note When you change port settings during communication, communication may instantaneously stop or a frame error may occur.

Setting port attributes 2-12

Page 76: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Setting of Basic Functions

2-12

Sets the media for the GbE port.

Sets the line speed.

Enables or disables the flow control.

Sets the link protection time.

Sets whether to send link traps to SNMP.

Blocks or unblocks the line.

Sets the clock mode for the ATM155 port.

Sets the frame mode for the ATM155 port.

Sets the port mode for the T1/E1 port.

Sets the port frame for the T1/E1 port.

Sets the cable length for each T1/E1 port.

Setting port attributes The CX2200 accommodates different types of lines depending on cards. A line card supporting FastEther has eight ports; the GigabitEther line card has two ports; the T1/E1 line card has 32 ports; and the ATM155 line card has one port. When you set the attributes for each port, specify port numbers as parameters.

Setting the GbE port media 2-15

Setting the line speed 2-15

Setting the flow control 2-16

Setting the link protection time 2-16

Setting the link-trap transmission 2-17

Setting port blocking/unblocking 2-17

Setting the clock mode 2-18

Setting the frame mode 2-18

Setting the port mode 2-19

Setting the port frame 2-22

Setting the cable length 2-24

Page 77: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Setting of Basic Functions

2-13

Shows the cable length of each T1/E1 port.

Sets the impedance for each T1/E1 port.

Shows the impedance of each T1/E1 port.

Shows the port settings and status information.

Displaying the cable length settings 2-26

Setting the impedance 2-27

Displaying the impedance setting 2-27

Displaying the line status 2-28

Page 78: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Setting of Basic Functions

2-14

The following shows the procedure for setting the port attributes.

Set the clock mode (set port clock)

Yes

Set link trap transmission (set port link-trap)

Set the line speed (set port speed)

GbE port

Set the port blocking/unblocking(set port admin)

No

Yes

End

Set the frame mode (set port frame)

YesATM155 port

No

T1/E1 port

No

Set the port frame (set port frame)

Set the impedance (set port impedance)

Set the port mode (set port mode)

Set the flow control (set port flowcontrol)

Set the link protection time (set port protection-time)

Set the GbE port media (set port type)

Set the cable length (set port cable-length)

Page 79: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Setting of Basic Functions

2-15

Setting the GbE port media Sets the GbE port media to optical or electric setting.

Commands

set port type Setting of GbE port media

show port information Display of port setting and status information

Note The GbE port cannot be set for combined electric and optical usage. Be sure to connect the GbE port specified by the GbE port media setting to the other device.

Setting the line speed Sets autonegotiation or fixed as the line speed setting.

Autonegotiation is a procedure by which this device automatically negotiates with the other device to implement optimum communication. In case of fixed setting of the line speed, appropriate settings need to be set for port speed with the other device and MDI, etc. For the details of the interface with the other device, refer to "9 Remote Device Interface Speed-by-Speed Connection List" in Appendix.

Note If 100m-full is set for the FE port, the SPEED-LED is always on regardless of the line

status.

Note If only a fixed speed is set for the FE port, the port becomes MDI-X. If you want to use it as MDI, be sure to set MDI when you set the speed.

Note For the GigabitEther optical port, MDI/MDI-X setting is ignored. For the electric port, MDI/MDI-X setting is always auto because autonegotiation is always used.

Note If an aggregation group is specified, the line speed cannot be changed.

Note For GigabitEther, autonegotiation is recommended for speed setting regardless of whether the port is optical or electric. If the speed is fixed, connection may become unstable when the other unit supports a different link connection method.

Commands

set port speed Setting of port speed and MDI/MDI-X

show port information Display of port setting and status information

Page 80: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Setting of Basic Functions

2-16

Setting the flow control Adjusts the data transmission and reception in accordance with the traffic status so that received data is not missed.

Flow control is enabled/disabled according to decision by the autonegotiation function or, flow control can be enabled forcibly regardless of the settings specified in negotiation of the other device.

Note Flow control cannot be set to autonegotiation setting unless the line speed setting is set to autonegotiation setting. (Also when the port speed is fixed, autonegotiation can be set but flow control does not work.)

Note On a line where flow control setting is enabled or set to autonegotiation, functions (IEEE802.3ad aggregation, spanning tree, and EtherOAM) that involve transmission and reception of control frames will not operate.

Note This unit supports the Pause frame reception operation only and does not support the Pause frame transmission operation.

Commands

set port flowcontrol Setting of flow control

show port information Display of port setting and status information

Setting the link protection time Sets the protection time that lasts from when a port link down occurs to when it is recovered.

Commands

set port protection-time Setting of port link protection time

show port information Display of port setting and status information

Note It is recommended to use the default setting, unless link down and recovery repeat many times.

Page 81: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Setting of Basic Functions

2-17

Setting the link-trap transmission Sets whether to notify port link down/recovery by SNMP traps.

Commands

set port link-trap Setting of SNMP link trap transmission

show port information Display of port setting and status information

Note SNMP traps will not be sent unless the trap transmit selection function is also enabled. For details, see "4.3.2 TRAP Transmission Selection Function".

Setting port blocking/unblocking Stops a port’s operation in case of port blocking and result in link down and communication unavailable. Unblocking a port enables its operation.

Commands

set port admin Setting of port blocking/unblocking

show port information Display of port setting and status information

Page 82: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Setting of Basic Functions

2-18

Setting the clock mode Sets either the independent mode (master) or external supply mode (slave).

In the external supply mode, the clock is synchronized with the clock supplied by the other device.

If no external clock can be extracted in the external supply mode, a clock can be generated in the independent mode by the hardware autonomous operation.

Note This command can be set for the ATM155 port only.

Commands

set port clock Setting of the clock mode

show port information Display of port setting and status information

Setting the frame mode Sets either SDH/idle cell, SDH/unassigned cell, or SONET/unassigned cell as the physical layer frame format and idle cell method.

Note This command can be set for the ATM155 port only.

Commands

set port frame Setting of the frame mode

show port information Display of port setting and status information

Page 83: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Setting of Basic Functions

2-19

Setting the port mode Sets the operation mode for each T1/E1 port.

The following shows the operation mode(s) supported for T1/E1 ports.

Port type Operation mode

TDM mode

TDMoP mode T1/E1 port

ATMoP mode

* For the alarm transfer operation for each port mode, refer to "2 Alarm Transfer Mechanism" in Appendix.

The following shows the setting range of each operation mode of the cards.

32T1E1H 32T1E1T 1ATM155A

TDM mode

TDMoP mode

ATMoP mode

The following shows how to set the port mode.

Commands

set port mode Setting of the port mode

show port information Display of port setting and status information

Memo When you set each mode of TDM, TDMoP, and ATMoP, you cannot specify a single port number to more than one port.

Memo For 32T1E1H line card, you cannot specify the TDMoP or ATMoP mode for the port33 to port48.

Note You cannot change the port mode setting if any of the following commands is already entered:

- set tdm group - set tdmop group - set ima group - set pvc static - set atm-shaper rate

Page 84: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Setting of Basic Functions

2-20

Note You cannot set the ATMoP mode if the frame type for port frame setting is T1 and the frame format is unframed.

Page 85: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Setting of Basic Functions

2-21

Input examples

The following example shows how to set the port mode when the TDM mode is specified to port1 to port5 and the TDMoP mode is specified to port6 to port15 and the ATMoP mode is specified to port16.

The following example shows how to set the port mode when the TDM mode is specified to port1 to port6 and the ATMoP mode is specified to port9 to port16.

*Switch# set port mode tdm 1-6 atmop 9-16

*Switch#

*Switch# set port mode tdm 1-5 tdmop 6-15 atmop 16

*Switch#

Page 86: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Setting of Basic Functions

2-22

Setting the port frame Sets frame types, line codes, frame formats for each T1/E1 port.

The following shows the line codes and frame formats supported for each frame type.

Frame type Line code Frame format

CRC-4 Multiframe

CRC-4 Multiframe-no-CAS

Non-CRC-4 E1

HDB3

AMI

Unframed

Extended Super Frame (ESF)

Super Frame (SF)

Super Frame-Japanese (SF-JPN) T1

B8ZS

AMI

Unframed

The following shows how to set the port frame.

Commands

set port frame Setting of port frame

show port information Display of port setting and status information

Note You cannot specify unframed for frame format if the TDMoP mode is CESoPSN.

Note You cannot change the port frame setting if any of the following commands is already entered:

- set tdm group - set tdmop group - set port cable-length - set port impedance - set ima group

Note You cannot change the frame type from E1 to T1, and the frame format from unframed to other than unframed if the following command is already entered:

- set atm-shaper rate

Note When the cable length setting is already done, it is necessary to reset to the default setting with the cable length setting command (set port cable-length). (For details, refer to "Setting the cable length".)

Page 87: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Setting of Basic Functions

2-23

Note When the impedance setting is already done, it is necessary to reset to the default setting with the impedance setting command (set port impedance). (For details, refer to "Setting the impedance".)

Note If the ATMoP mode is set for port mode setting, you cannot specify T1 for frame type and unframed for frame format.

Input examples

The following example shows how to set the port frame when E1 is specified to the first parameter (frame type).

The following example shows how to set the port frame when T1 is specified to the first parameter (frame type).

*Switch# set port frame e1 hdb3 crc4

*Switch# set port frame e1 hdb3 crc4nocas

*Switch# set port frame e1 hdb3 non-crc4

*Switch# set port frame e1 hdb3 unframed

*Switch# set port frame e1 ami crc4

*Switch# set port frame e1 ami crc4nocas

*Switch# set port frame e1 ami non-crc4

*Switch# set port frame e1 ami unframed

*Switch# set port frame e1

*Switch#

*Switch# set port frame t1 b8zs esf

*Switch# set port frame t1 b8zs sf

*Switch# set port frame t1 b8zs sf-jpn

*Switch# set port frame t1 b8zs unframed

*Switch# set port frame t1 ami esf

*Switch# set port frame t1 ami sf

*Switch# set port frame t1 ami sf-jpn

*Switch# set port frame t1 ami unframed

*Switch# set port frame t1

*Switch#

Page 88: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Setting of Basic Functions

2-24

Setting the cable length Sets the cable length between CX2200 and remote devices, transmission power, and reception sensitivity for each port when T1 is selected as the frame type.

When the cable length type is short, the cable length can be specified as follows:

Cable Length Supported Cable Length (ft)

133 ft 0 to 133 (default)

266 ft 134 to 266

399 ft 267 to 399

533 ft 400 to 533

655 ft 534 to 655

Command

set port cable-length Setting of cable length

Memo When initial is specified in the second parameter (length type), the default values can be set:

- Length type: short - Cable length: 133 ft

Page 89: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Setting of Basic Functions

2-25

Input examples

The following example shows how to set the cable length when short is specified in the second parameter (length type).

The following example shows how to set the cable length when initial is specified in the second parameter (length type).

*Switch# set port cable-length 1 initial

*Switch#

*Switch# set port cable-length 1 short

*Switch# set port cable-length 1-2,4-8 short 399ft

*Switch#

Page 90: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Setting of Basic Functions

2-26

Displaying the cable length settings Shows the cable length settings for each port when T1 is selected as the frame type. The setting can be shown per port basis or per device basis.

Command

show port cable-length Display of port cable length settings

Input example

The following example shows how to display the cable length settings per port basis.

*Switch# show port cable-length 1

Cable Length Information Table

==============================

Cable

Port Kind Length

-------------------

1 short 266ft

*Switch# show port cable-length 1-8

Cable Length Information Table

==============================

Cable

Port Kind Length

-------------------

1 short 266ft

2 short 266ft

3 short 133ft

4 short 133ft

5 short 133ft

6 short 133ft

7 short 133ft

8 short 133ft

*Switch# show port cable-length 9-10

Cable Length Information Table

==============================

No entry in the table.

*Switch#

No cable length setting is shown if no 32T1E1H card/32T1E1T card is installed or the frame type is set to E1.

Page 91: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Setting of Basic Functions

2-27

Setting the impedance Sets impedance 120Ω or 75Ω for each port when E1 is selected as the frame type.

Command

set port impedance Setting of impedance

The following example shows how to set the impedance.

Input example

Displaying the impedance setting Shows the impedance setting of each port whose frame type is set to E1. The setting can be shown per port or per device.

Command

show port impedance Display of impedance setting

*Switch# set port impedance 1 e1-120

*Switch# set port impedance 2-5,10-12 e1-75

*Switch#

Page 92: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Setting of Basic Functions

2-28

Input example

The following example shows how to display the impedance setting per port.

Displaying the line status Shows port setup information and the line status.

Command

show port information Display of port setting and status information

*Switch# show port impedance 1

Port E1 Impedance Information Table

===================================

Port Impedance(ohm)

--------------------

1 e1-120

*Switch# show port impedance 1-8

Port E1 Impedance Information Table

===================================

Port Impedance(ohm)

--------------------

1 e1-120

2 e1-120

3 e1-120

4 e1-120

5 e1-75

6 e1-75

7 e1-75

8 e1-75

*Switch# show port impedance 9-10

Port E1 Impedance Information Table

===================================

No entry in the table.

*Switch#

No impedance setting is shown if no 32T1E1H card/32T1E1T card is installed or the frame type is set toT1.

Page 93: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Setting of Basic Functions

2-29

Input example (1/4)

(Continued to the next page)

*Switch# show port information

Line1 Port Information Table

==============================

Frame

Type Code Framing

--------------------

e1 hdb3 crc4

Port Link Alarm

Port Mode Admin Status Status

--------------------------------------

1 atmop enabled 2.048m-e1 normal

: tdmop enabled link-down los

48 tdm enabled link-down los

Link Trap

Port Status

---------------

1 disabled

: enabled

48 enabled

Cpusw Port Information Table

============================

Port Link

Port Admin Speed Status MDI

---------------------------------------------------

17 enabled auto link-down auto mdi/mdi-x

: enabled auto link-down auto mdi/mdi-x

24 enabled auto 100m-full auto mdi/mdi-x

Flowcontrol Flowcontrol

Port Configuration Status

------------------------------

17 disabled disabled

: disabled disabled

24 disabled disabled

Port number

Port mode

Line speed

Line status

Blocked or unblocked status

SNMP link trap transmission configuration.

Port number

Port number

Blocked or unblocked information Line speed configuration

MDI status Line status

Port number

Flow control configuration

Status of flow control

Frame type

Line code

Frame format

Page 94: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Setting of Basic Functions

2-30

Input example (2/4)

(Continued to the next page)

Link Trap Protection Time Protection Time

Port Status Link Up(msec) Link Down(msec)

-------------------------------------------------

17 enabled 3000 500

: enabled 3000 500

24 enabled 3000 500

Line2 Port Information Table

===========================

Port Link

Port Admin Speed Status MDI

------------------------------------------------------

25 enabled auto link-down auto mdi/mdi-x

26 enabled auto link-down auto mdi/mdi-x

Flowcontrol Flowcontrol Type Type

Port Configuration Status Configuration Status

---------------------------------------------------------

25 disabled disabled electric ---

26 disabled disabled electric ---

Link Trap Protection Time Protection Time

Port Status Link Up(msec) Link Down(msec)

-------------------------------------------------

25 enabled 3000 500

26 enabled 3000 500

Tx Rx SFP

Port SFP Type Error Error Fault

------------------------------------------------------

25 1000BASE-SX normal fail normal

26 1000BASE-LX normal fail normal

Line type currently used Line type configuration

SFP information acquisition fault status Detection status of optical reception fault Detection status of optical transmission fault

Port number SNMP link trap transmission configuration Configuration of port link down recovery detection time Configuration of port link down detection time

Port number Blocked/unblocked information Line speed configuration Line status MDI status

Port number Optical module type used

Port number Flow control configuration Flow control status

Port number SNMP link trap transmission configuration Configuration of port link down recovery detection time Configuration of port link down detection time

Page 95: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Setting of Basic Functions

2-31

Input example (3/4)

(Continued to the next page)

SFP Vendor Information

======================

Port 25

-----------------------------------------

Vendor Name : SumitomoElectric

Vendor OUI : 00-00-5F

Vendor Part Number : SCP6F86-GL-CWH

Vendor Revision : N

Vendor Serial Number : 6XK056N13263

Port 26

-----------------------------------------

Vendor Name : SumitomoElectric

Vendor OUI : 00-00-5F

Vendor Part Number : SCP6F44-GL-CWH

Vendor Revision : H

Vendor Serial Number : 71S480H01940

*Switch#

Vendor name of the optical module

Optical module reversion information

OUI of the optical module

Product number of the optical module

Optical module serial number

Page 96: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Setting of Basic Functions

2-32

Input example (4/4)

*Switch# show port information 1

Line1 Port Information Table

===============================

Port Link Cell

Port Admin Speed Status Clock Framing Padding

--------------------------------------------------------------------

1 enabled auto 155m slave sdh idle

Port SFP Type Tx Error Rx Error SFP Fault

---------------------------------------------

1 OC3-SI15 normal fail normal

Port Status

---------------

1 enabled

SFP Vendor Information

===============================

Port 1

-----------------------------------------

Vendor Name : NEC CORPORATION

Vendor OUI : 00-00-4C

Vendor Part Number : OD-J9449-5A01

Vendor Revision : 0001

Vendor Serial Number : 1234

F1 Status Table

===============

Port LOS LOF

--------------------

1 detect ---

F2 Status Table

===============

Port MS-AIS MS-SD MS-RDI MS-ERR MS-REI

--------------------------------------------

1 --- --- --- --- ---

F3 Status Table

===============

Port LOP P-AIS LCD

----------------------------

1 --- --- ---

Optical module manufacturer

Optical module OUI

Optical module product number

Optical module version number

Optical module serial number

Port number LOS detection status LOF detection status

MS-AIS detection status MS-SD detection status MS-RDI detection status MS-ERR detection status MS-REI detection status

Port number

Port number LOP detection status

P-AIS detection status

LCD detection status

Port number

Port number SNMP link trap transmission setting

Port number Optical module type used Optical transmission fault detection status Optical reception fault detection status SFP information acquisition fault status

Blocked/unblocked informationLine speed setting

Line status Clock mode setting Physical layer framing formatIdle cell padding method

Port number

Page 97: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Setting of Basic Functions

2-33

Describes how to set a portbase VLAN.

Describes how to set a tagbase VLAN.

Describes how to set an extended VLAN.

Describes the VLAN ID tag swap function.

2.3.1.2 VLAN The CX2200 supports the VLAN function that allows the user to flexibly add, clear, or change the network configuration without being restricted by the physical network configuration.

The CX2200 has four types of VLAN functions including portbase VLAN, tagbase VLAN, Extended VLAN, and VLAN ID tag swap function, which can be used for different purposes.

Note Each device can have up to 256 VLANs registered.

Portbase VLAN 2-34

Tagbase VLAN 2-37

Extended VLAN 2-40

VLAN ID tag swap function 2-45

Page 98: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Setting of Basic Functions

2-34

Portbase VLAN The CX2200 implements a portbase VLAN by grouping ports and assigning a unique VLAN ID to each group, which serve as the identifier. The portbase VLAN is the most popular VLAN method where groups are formed based on the physical ports of the switch.

Broadcast frames from the port belonging to a VLAN will be sent only to the ports that belong to the same VLAN.

From a portbase VLAN port, data is output without VLAN tags.

The following shows the procedure for setting a portbase VLAN.

To clear a portbase VLAN, set a tagbase VLAN (without a VLAN).

Memo To set a portbase VLAN, use the portbase VLAN setting command or collective setting command for portbase VLAN and tagbase VLAN.

Note This portbase setting cannot be set for ports other than the GbE or FE port.

Set the VLAN IDs. (set vlan portbase, set vlan member)

Set the VLAN name. (set vlan name)

Page 99: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Setting of Basic Functions

2-35

Commands

set vlan portbase Setting of portbase VLAN

set vlan member Setting of portbase VLAN and tagbase VLAN en bloc

show vlan table port Display of VLAN table per port

show vlan table vid Display of VLAN table per VLAN

set vlan name Setting of VLAN name

clear vlan name Clearing of VLAN name

show vlan summary Display of number of VLAN entries

Setting example

Higher unit Higher unit

Port 18 Port 17 Port 24

Port 23

Port 19 Port 21 Port 22Port 20

VLAN10 VLAN20

CX2600/220CX2600/220CX2600/220CX2600/220

Page 100: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Setting of Basic Functions

2-36

The following describes how to set portbase VLANs in a configuration shown on the previous page.

(1) Set portbase VLANs.

(2) Set VLAN names.

*Switch# set vlan portbase 17 10

*Switch# set vlan portbase 18 10

*Switch# set vlan portbase 19 10

*Switch# set vlan portbase 20 10

*Switch# set vlan portbase 21 20

*Switch# set vlan portbase 22 20

*Switch# set vlan portbase 23 20

*Switch# set vlan portbase 24 20

*Switch# set vlan name 10 VLAN10

*Switch# set vlan name 20 VLAN20

*Switch#

(2)

(1)

Page 101: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Setting of Basic Functions

2-37

Tagbase VLAN The CX2200 supports the tagbase VLAN function based on the IEEE802.1Q specification. The tagbase VLAN is a VLAN method where a VLAN group is explicitly specified by assigning a "tag header" to a MAC frame as an identifier for identification of a VLAN group. This frame is called VLAN tag frame. By using a tagbase VLAN, you can configure a VLAN across multiple devices.

A switch, receiving a VLAN tag frame, internally interprets the tag data and relays the frame to the proper port belonging to the VLAN.

The following shows the procedure for setting a tagbase VLAN.

The following shows the procedure for clearing a tagbase VLAN.

Memo To set a tagbase VLAN, use the tagbase VLAN setting command or collective setting command for portbase VLAN and tagbase VLAN.

Note When VLAN tag swap is set in a port, a VLAN ID already used as the swap destination VLAN ID cannot be set as a tagbase VLAN ID.

Note A port to which tagbase VLAN is set checks whether a received frame has a VLAN tag. If it receives a frame having no tag, it will discard the frame.

Set a VLAN ID. (set vlan tagbase, set vlan member)

Set a VLAN name. (set vlan name)

Clear the VLAN ID. (clear vlan tagbase)

Clear the VLAN name. (clear vlan name)

Page 102: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Setting of Basic Functions

2-38

Commands

set vlan tagbase Setting of tagbase VLAN

set vlan member Setting of portbase VLAN and tagbase VLAN en bloc

clear vlan tagbase Clearing of tagbase VLAN

set vlan name Setting of VLAN name

clear vlan name Clearing of VLAN name

show vlan summary Display of number of VLAN entries

Setting example

Higher unit Higher unit

Port 24

Port 22

Lower unit Lower unit

10

10 20

20 20

Port 17

Port 20

Port 18

Port 23

20

Port 21

10

10

VLAN10 VLAN20

Port 19

CX2600/220CX2600/220CX2600/220CX2600/220

Page 103: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Setting of Basic Functions

2-39

The following describes how to set tagbase VLANs in a configuration shown above.

(1) Set tagbase VLANs.

(2) Set VLAN names.

*Switch# set vlan tagbase 17 10

*Switch# set vlan tagbase 18 10

*Switch# set vlan tagbase 19 10

*Switch# set vlan tagbase 20 10

*Switch# set vlan tagbase 21 20

*Switch# set vlan tagbase 22 20

*Switch# set vlan tagbase 23 20

*Switch# set vlan tagbase 24 20

*Switch# set vlan name 10 VLAN10

*Switch# set vlan name 20 VLAN20

*Switch#

(1)

(2)

Page 104: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Setting of Basic Functions

2-40

Extended VLAN The CX2200 allows the user to add multiple VLAN tags unique to the network using portbase VLANs by the extended VLAN (VLAN tag stacking) function based on the VLAN function defined by IEEE802.1Q. This makes it possible for the user to separate the traffic within the network by the VLAN ID assigned to individual VLANs.

The following describes the network configuration and operation of an extended VLAN.

VLAN Layer2 switch Layer2 switch

Ethernet type 0x9100 , VLAN ID 100

(1) IEEE802.1Q VLAN tag (2) Extended VLAN tag [Ethernet type=0x9100, VLAN ID=100]

(2) (2)

(1) (2) (2) (1) (1) (1)

Extended VLAN tag is added.

Extended VLAN tag is forwarded.

Extended VLAN tag is cleared.

Frame forwarding status

Frame forwarding direction

CX2200#1 CX2200#2 CX2200#3

Layer2 switch Layer2 switch

VLAN ID is decided by the receive port.

VLAN ID is decided by theextended VLAN tag of the

received frame VLAN ID is decided by the extended VLAN tag of the

received frame

Port Tag Tag Tag Tag PortCX2200#1 CX2200#2 CX2200#3

Page 105: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Setting of Basic Functions

2-41

In an extended VLAN of the CX2200, an extended VLAN tag is added at each port. Transmission cannot be performed with a VLAN ID of an extended VLAN added to an extended VLAN tag for each VLAN tag frame on one port.

The example below shows each case when a VLAN tag frame of VLAN ID=10 is received on port 17 and when a VLAN tag frame of VLAN ID=20 is received on port 17. The VLAN ID of the extended VLAN set on the port 17 is added to the extended VLAN tag of these frames.

Memo A VLAN tag is added when a frame is input from a portbase VLAN and output from a tagbase VLAN port. When the Ethernet type for VLAN tag recognition of the output port is defaulted to 0x8100 (IEEE802.1Q tag), the IEEE802.1Q tag is added and sent out.

Note When a frame is input from a tagbase VLAN and output from a tagbase VLAN port, if the Ethernet type for VLAN tag recognition of the output port is not defaulted to 0x8100 (IEEE802.1Q tag), the Ethernet type of the outer tag is converted.

VLAN tag frame

Port17 Port18

VLAN tag VLAN ID=10

VLAN tag VLAN ID=20

VLAN tagVLAN ID=10

Extended VLAN tagVLAN ID=100

Extended VLAN tagVLAN ID=100

VLAN tag VLAN ID=20

CX2200

VLAN tag frame

Extended VLAN tag frame

Extended VLAN tag frame

Page 106: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Setting of Basic Functions

2-42

Setting an extended VLAN Uses the following commands that are previously explained in explanations of VLAN setting procedures. The parameters and values to set are the same with the other types of VLANs.

The following shows the procedure for setting an extended VLAN. (For adding or clearing an extended VLAN)

The following shows the procedure for clearing an extended VLAN.

Sets a port to a portbase VLAN port that add orclear an extended VLAN.

Sets the Ethernet type for the extended VLAN.

Set a VLAN ID. (set vlan portbase , set vlan member)

Set a VLAN ID. (set vlan tagbase , set vlan member)

Set the Ethernet type for VLAN tag recognition. (set vlan ethertype)

Set a VLAN name. (set vlan name)

Sets the I/O port belonging to the extended VLAN network to a tagbase VLAN.

Sets a VLAN name if necessary. (This can be omitted.)

Clears the tagbase VLAN of the I/O port belongingto the extended VLAN network.

Clears the VLAN name.

Restores the Ethernet type for VLAN tag recognition to 0x8100.

Set the Ethernet type for VLAN tag recognition. (set vlan ethertype)

Clear the VLAN ID. (clear vlan tagbase)

Clear the VLAN name. (clear vlan name)

Page 107: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Setting of Basic Functions

2-43

Commands

set vlan portbase Setting of portbase VLAN

set vlan tagbase Setting of tagbase VLAN

set vlan member Setting of portbase VLAN and tagbase VLAN en bloc

show vlan table port Display of VLAN table per port

clear vlan tagbase Clearing of tagbase VLAN

show vlan table vid Display of VLAN table per VLAN

set vlan name Setting of VLAN name

clear vlan name Clearing of VLAN name

set vlan ethertype Setting of Ethernet type for VLAN tag recognition

show vlan ethertype Display of Ethernet type information for VLAN tag recognition

show vlan summary Display of number of VLAN entries

Page 108: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Setting of Basic Functions

2-44

Extended VLAN setting example This part describes the basic setting procedure for implementing an extended VLAN taking the following network configuration for an example.

Configuration example The following describes the basic setting procedure to implement an extended VLAN as shown below.

(1) IEEE802.1Q VLAN tag (2) Extended VLAN tag [Ethernet type=0x9100, VLAN ID=100]

(2) (2)

(1) (2) (2) (1) (1) (1)

CX2200#1 CX2200#2 CX2200#3

Layer2 switch Layer2 switchExtended VLAN

tag is added. Extended VLAN tag is forwarded.

Extended VLAN tag is cleared.

CX2200#1 CX2200#2 CX2200#3

VLAN

Extended VLAN

VLAN

Layer2 switch Layer2 switch

Ethernet type 0x9100VLAN ID 100

Extended VLANtag is added.

Extended VLAN tag is cleared.

Extended VLAN tag is cleared.

Extended VLANtag is added.

Port 17

Port20

Port24

Port20

Port20

Port 17

Transmission and reception of frames

Page 109: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Setting of Basic Functions

2-45

Input examples

CX2200#1 and CX2200#3 in the above example are configured with Ethernet type of 0x9100.

CX2200#2 in the above example is configured with Ethernet type of 0x9100.

VLAN ID tag swap function The CX2200 can also swap extended VLAN tags as well as adding and deleting extended VLAN tags. Using this function, the user can establish a connection between the local network and another network or between a new network and an existing network without changing the existing extended VLAN IDs, which is very effective in maintenance and operation.

*Switch# set vlan tagbase 20 100

*Switch# set vlan tagbase 24 100

*Switch# set vlan name 100 VLAN100

*Switch# set vlan ethertype 20,24 0x9100

*Switch#

*Switch# set vlan portbase 17 100

*Switch# set vlan tagbase 20 100

*Switch# set vlan name 100 VLAN100

*Switch# set vlan ethertype 20 0x9100

*Switch#

Port17 Port18

VLAN tag VLAN ID=20

VLAN tag VLAN ID=10

Extended-VLAN tagVLAN ID=200

Extended-VLAN tagVLAN ID=400

VLAN tag VLAN ID=20

CX2200

Extended-VLAN tag frame (SWAP)

Extended-VLAN tag frame (SWAP)

Extended-VLAN tag frame

VLAN tag VLAN ID=10

Extended-VLAN tag VLAN ID=100

Extended-VLAN tagVLAN ID=300

Port25 Port26

Extended-VLAN tag frame

Page 110: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Setting of Basic Functions

2-46

Setting VLAN ID swapping The CX2200 provides the VLAN ID tag swap function by the extended VLAN (VLAN tag stacking) function based on the VLAN function defined in IEEE802.1Q.

When you set VLAN ID tag swapping, set a tagbase VLAN port that is to be the origin of swap processing. The set port will be able to receive frames from outside, which have the same Ethernet type as the set one. With this port used as the origin, VLAN IDs and Ethernet type are swapped at input and output of frames.

To set VLAN tag swapping on the CX2200, follow the procedure given below.

(1) Set Ethernet type for the tagbase VLAN port. (set vlan ethertype)

(2) Set VLAN tag swapping for the tagbase VLAN port. (set vlan swap)

(3) Display the VLAN tag swap settings. (show vlan swap)

(4) Clear the VLAN tag swap settings. (clear vlan swap)

Setting Ethernet type

Use the "set vlan ethertype" command to set Ethernet type. The parameters of the "set vlan ethertype" command include the port number (17-26) and Ethernet type value (0x600-0xffff). Enter them with a space placed between them.

Memo If a portbase VLAN is set to a port, the port keeps the Ethernet type setting but the setting does not function.

Displaying Ethernet type

Use the "show vlan ethertype" command to display the Ethernet type setting. The parameter of the "show vlan ethertype" command is the port number (17-26).

Page 111: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Setting of Basic Functions

2-47

Setting and clearing VLAN tag swapping

On the tagbase VLAN port where Ethernet type is set, VLAN tag swapping is enabled. Set the swap destination VLAN ID.

Use the "set vlan swap" command to set VLAN tag swapping. The parameters of the "set vlan swap" command include the port number (17-26), swap origin VLAN ID (1-4094) or VLAN name, and swap destination VLAN ID (0-4094). Enter these parameters in this order placing a space between each of them.

Use the "clear vlan swap" command to clear VLAN tag swapping. The parameters of the "clear vlan swap" command include the port number (17-26) and swap origin VLAN ID (1-4094) or VLAN name. Enter them with a space placed between them.

Memo If a portbase VLAN is set to a port, the port cannot be set for tag swapping.

Memo You cannot set tag swapping specifying the VLAN ID that is the same as the swap destination VLAN ID, because it will not swap tag frames.

Memo A VLAN ID that is already used as a swap origin VLAN ID can be overwritten and changed. For example, when VLAN ID 10 is swapped to 20, you can write 30 over VLAN ID 10 and set it to 30.

Memo If you set a tagbase VLAN on a VLAN where VLAN tag swapping is set, the tag swapping setting will be cleared and a tagbase VLAN is set.

Note VLAN tag swapping cannot be set or cleared for ports other than the GbE port and FE port.

Note A VLAN ID that is already used as a swap destination VLAN ID in a port cannot be assigned redundantly to another VLAN as the swap destination VLAN ID. For example, when VLAN ID 10 is swapped to 20, VLAN ID 30 cannot be swapped again to 20. This is because a redundantly set swap destination VLAN ID will confuse the system about the destination VLAN ID to which it should swap a frame input from the specified port.

Page 112: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Setting of Basic Functions

2-48

Displaying the VLAN tag swapping information

Use the "show vlan swap" command to display the VLAN tag swapping information. The parameters of the "show vlan swap" command include the port number (17-26) and swap origin VLAN ID (1-4094) or VLAN name. Enter these parameters in this order separating them by a space.

Commands

set vlan ethertype Setting of Ethernet type for VLAN tag recognition

show vlan ethertype Display of Ethernet type information for VLAN tag recognition

set vlan swap Setting of VLAN tag swapping

clear vlan swap Clearing of VLAN tag swapping

show vlan swap Display of VLAN tag swapping information

Input example

Ethernet type of port 17 is set to 0x9100, and VLAN ID 10 to 20.

*Switch# set vlan ethertype 17 0x9100

*Switch# show vlan ethertype 17

VLAN Ether-Type Table

=====================

Port Ether-Type

----------------

17 0x9100

*Switch# set vlan swap 17 10 20

*Switch# show vlan swap 17

VLAN Swap Table

===============

Port : 17 Ether-Type : 0x9100

VID Name (Interior) VID (Exterior)

---------------------------------------------------

10 VLAN10 20

*Switch#

Page 113: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Setting of Basic Functions

2-49

Explains maximum input bandwidth limitation.

Explains priority control.

Explains L2 switch buffer setting.

Explains output bandwidth setting.

2.3.1.3 QoS control QoS control is a function for effective use of the limited bandwidth of a line. The CX2200 has QoS control to perform maximum input bandwidth limitation, priority control, L2 switch buffer setting, output bandwidth setting, and other functions.

Maximum input bandwidth limitation 2-50

Priority control 2-54

L2SW buffer setting 2-60

Output bandwidth setting 2-67

This figure shows how the QoS control functions are deployed.

Line card

CPUSW card

L2SW buffer maximum accumulation frame count control

Line card

L2SW priority transmission control

Class mapping Maximum input bandwidth

limitation

Assignment/change of input priority

Output bandwidth

Output WRED

Page 114: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Setting of Basic Functions

2-50

Maximum input bandwidth limitation This function limits the maximum bandwidth per input port and VLAN or per VLAN class.

Maximum bandwidth limitation per input port and VLAN or per VLAN class The maximum bandwidth limitation function can be set for each input port and VLAN (collective addition mode) or for each VLAN class (individual addition mode or individual addition mode (with RED used)). Eight priorities of input frames can be mapped to four classes in each VLAN. In the collective addition mode, the maximum bandwidth limitation function is implemented by setting the maximum bandwidth for each VLAN and burst tolerance for each class. In the individual addition mode, the maximum bandwidth limitation function is implemented by setting the maximum bandwidth and burst tolerance for each VLAN class. In the individual addition mode (with RED used), the maximum bandwidth limitation function is implemented by setting the maximum bandwidth, upper burst tolerance, lower burst tolerance, and maximum discard rate for each VLAN class. VLANs whose bandwidth is not explicitly specified can be regarded as one VLAN, for which the maximum bandwidth limitation function can be set. A VLAN whose bandwidth is not explicitly specified is called a remaining-VLAN, which exists for each input port. If you do not set any other settings than this remaining-VLAN, the maximum bandwidth limitation function works per input port instead of per VLAN.

Bandwidth control is performed based on the physical rate. (See the figure below. The numbers in parentheses are byte counts.)

* Physical rate: A frame size is the sum of the valid frame (preamble to FCS) + 12 (minimum IFG).

Burst tolerance is the tolerance value of the input burst traffic that exceeds the specified value of maximum bandwidth limitation. This can be set for each input port and VLAN class, and for each remaining-VLAN class. The value of burst tolerance can be calculated by multiplying the burst traffic volume (kbps) exceeding the specified value of maximum bandwidth limitation by the tolerance time (sec).

FCS(4)

Preamble (8)

DA (6)

SA (6)

TYPE(2)

Data (46 - 1500)

FCS (4)

VLAN tag(0, 4, 8…)

Frame size for bandwidth control on the physical rate basis

Flow of frames

Preamble (8)

IFG (12)

IFG (12)

Page 115: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Setting of Basic Functions

2-51

The order of priorities corresponds to the descending order of the burst tolerance values. Different burst tolerances are set for different classes. Therefore, when input traffic exceeds the burst tolerance, frames having a class of lower priority are supposed to be discarded before frames having a class of higher priority.

In the individual addition mode (with RED used), UPC-RED (Usage Parameter Control-Random Early Detection) is used for maximum bandwidth limitation where discard judgment is performed based on the discard rate line instead of Tail-Drop in response to the flow rate measurement. This makes it possible to gradually increase the number of frames to be discard before the length of the queue reaches the limit.

Memo The number of VLANs whose bandwidth can be explicitly specified by using this function is 256 per GbE port, and 1 per FE port. One of them can be used for remaining-VLAN.

Memo In a specified input port, if the maximum bandwidth limitation is set with VLAN specification at the initial setting, remaining-VLAN is also set.

Memo In the individual addition mode (with RED used), the setting of upper burst tolerance cannot be a value equal to or smaller than the lower burst tolerance. Likewise, the lower burst tolerance cannot be equal to or greater than the upper burst tolerance.

Memo In the individual addition mode (with RED used), for a class for which the lower burst tolerance is made invalid, discard judgment is performed by Tail-Drop instead of the discard rate line.

Note The FE port cannot accept settings for maximum bandwidth limitation specifying VLAN, and settings for individual addition mode and individual addition mode (with RED used).

Note The remaining-VLAN cannot be cleared if maximum bandwidth limitation for a VLAN is set on the specified input port.

Note Ports other than GbE and FE ports do not accept this setting.

Commands

set qos in-rate maximum Setting of maximum bandwidth limit function per input VLAN

set qos in-priority maximum Setting of priority discard function per input VLAN

clear qos in-rate maximum Clearing of maximum bandwidth limit function per input VLAN

show qos in-rate maximum Display of maximum bandwidth limit function per input VLAN

Page 116: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Setting of Basic Functions

2-52

Input example

Maximum bandwidth limitation and burst tolerances are set in the individual addition mode (with RED used).

The input example on the next page shows how the following is set in the above configuration.

• Class-A: Maximum bandwidth = 50 Mbps, Upper burst tolerance = 1000 Kbytes, Lower burst tolerance = 500 Kbytes, Maximum discard rate 32 (100%)

• Class-B: Maximum bandwidth = 30 Mbps, Upper burst tolerance = 500 Kbytes, Lower burst tolerance = 250 Kbytes, Maximum discard rate 16 (50%)

• Class-C: Maximum bandwidth = 15 Mbps, Upper burst tolerance = 100 Kbytes, Lower burst tolerance (invalid), Maximum discard rate (invalid)

• Class-D: Maximum bandwidth = 5 Mbps, Upper burst tolerance = 50 Kbytes, Lower burst tolerance (invalid), Maximum discard rate (invalid)

- The bandwidth and burst tolerance can be set for each class of a VLAN. - There are four classes from A to D. - Each priority can be assigned to a desired class.

SV SV SV SV

PC

Web http://

Web

Movie stream

GW

Movie

Voice

Voice Picture Pri=1

Picture

VID 10

Pri=7

Pri=5

Pri=3

Input bandwidth limitation

ClassA

ClassB

ClassCW=15Mbps/Th=100KB

W=30Mbps/Th=500KB

W=50Mbps/Th=1000KB

CX2200

Switch Fabric

VID 10 VID 10

UpStream Network

ISP

Home GateWay (Router)

W=5Mbps/Th=50KBClassD

PC

PC

Page 117: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Setting of Basic Functions

2-53

*Switch# set qos in-rate maximum 25 vid 10 separate-red class-a 50000 class-b 30

000 class-c 15000 class-d 5000

*Switch# set qos in-priority maximum 25 vid 10 separate-red class-a 1000 500 32

class-b 500 250 16 class-c 100 disable class-d 50 disable

*Switch# show qos in-rate maximum 25

QoS Input Port Maximum Table

============================

Port Registered-VID Available-VID

-----------------------------------

25 2 254

QoS Input VLAN Maximum Table

============================

Port : 25

VID : 10

Mode : separate-RED

===================

Rate Maximum- Minimum-

Priority (Kbps) Burst(KByte) Burst(KByte) Probability

--------------------------------------------------------------------------

Class-All : --- --- --- --- ---

Class-A : 6,7 50000 1000 500 32(100%)

Class-B : 4,5 30000 500 250 16(50%)

Class-C : 0,3 15000 100 disabled disabled

Class-D : 1,2 5000 50 disabled disabled

Port : 25

VID : remain

Mode : normal

===================

Rate Maximum- Minimum-

Priority (Kbps) Burst(KByte) Burst(KByte) Probability

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------

Class-All : --- 1000000 --- --- ---

Class-A : 6,7 --- 127 --- ---

Class-B : 4,5 --- 64 --- ---

Class-C : 0,3 --- 32 --- ---

Class-D : 1,2 --- 16 --- ---

*Switch#

Page 118: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Setting of Basic Functions

2-54

Explains mapping of priorities to classes.

Explains assignment and change of priorities.

Priority control This part explains mapping of priorities to classes, and assignment and change of priorities.

1 Class mapping function 2-55

2 Priority assignment/change function 2-58

Page 119: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Setting of Basic Functions

2-55

1 Class mapping function Decide the priority value in the VLAN tag and class mapping used for various QoS control. Bandwidth control and priority transmission control described later are performed at the applicable points in accordance with the priority value in the VLAN tag and class mapping specified here.

Maximum input bandwidth control class mapping Class mapping for maximum input bandwidth control enables class mapping setting for each input port and VLAN. Class mapping for each input port and VLAN allows the user to specify classes, as well as priorities in the VLAN tag, for broadcast frames and multicast frames. This is useful when you want to manage bandwidths separately for unicast frames, broadcast frames, and multicast frames without relation to the priority values. Broadcast frames and multicast frames have their own priority values, but when a class for broadcast or multicast is set, they will be under bandwidth control of the class for broadcast or multicast.

The following shows the default assignment of priorities and class mapping.

Priority 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Class mapping C D D C B B A A

Note Multiple classes cannot be mapped as classes for broadcast or multicast. (If the classes do not overlap, mapping is possible in each class.)

Note In an FE port and in a VLAN where maximum bandwidth control is performed in the collective addition mode, mapping of broadcast or multicast is not supported.

Note Priorities cannot be redundantly specified.

Note Each priority must be mapped to any one of the classes.

Commands

set qos in-class-map maximum Setting of priority mapping function per input VLAN

show qos in-rate maximum Display of maximum bandwidth limit function per input VLAN

Page 120: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Setting of Basic Functions

2-56

Input example

Priority mapping is changed as shown in the following table.

Priority 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Class mapping C C C B B B A A

Priority Broadcast Multicast

Class mapping D D

*Switch# set qos in-class-map maximum 25 vid 1 separate class-a 6,7 class-b 3-5 class-c 0-2 class-d bc+mc *Switch# show qos in-rate maximum 25 QoS Input Port Maximum Table ============================ Port Registered-VID Available-VID ----------------------------------- 25 2 254 QoS Input VLAN Maximum Table ============================ Port : 25 VID : 1 Mode : separate =================== Rate Maximum- Minimum- Priority (Kbps) Burst(KByte) Burst(KByte) Probability ------------------------------------------------------------------------- Class-All : --- --- --- --- --- Class-A : 6,7 50000 127 --- --- Class-B : 3,4,5 30000 64 --- --- Class-C : 0,1,2 15000 32 --- --- Class-D : bc+mc 5000 16 --- --- Port : 25 VID : remain Mode : normal =================== Rate Maximum- Minimum- Priority (Kbps) Burst(KByte) Burst(KByte) Probability ------------------------------------------------------------------------- Class-All : --- 1000000 --- --- --- Class-A : 6,7 --- 127 --- --- Class-B : 4,5 --- 64 --- --- Class-C : 0,3 --- 32 --- --- Class-D : 1,2 --- 16 --- --- *Switch#

Page 121: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Setting of Basic Functions

2-57

Class mapping setting function of switch fabric The class mapping setting function of switch fabric can set class mapping on the switch fabric output side. Send frames are sorted into four send queues according to the priorities assigned to the VLAN tags based on the set mapping information, and sent from the output port in the descending order of the send queue classes (class-a is the first, followed by class-b, class-c and class-d). The continuity is temporarily stopped from the command input until the completion of the setting.

The following shows the default assignment of priorities and class mapping.

Priority 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Class mapping C D D C B B A A

Memo Ping and other frames intended for devices, BDPU, and LACP PDU are excluded from QoS control.

Note Since the continuity is stopped from the command input until the setting completion, the adaptive clock causes a loss of synchronization.

Commands

set qos switch-class-map Setting of class mapping for switch fabric

show qos switch-class-map Display of class mapping setting of switch fabric

Input example

*Switch# set qos switch-class-map class-a 1 class-b 0 class-c 2-7 class-d none

*Switch# show qos switch-class-map

QoS Switch Class Map Table

==========================

Class Priority

------------------------

class-a 1

class-b 0

class-c 2,3,4,5,6,7

class-d none

*Switch#

Page 122: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Setting of Basic Functions

2-58

2 Priority assignment/change function This part explains the input CoS priority mapping function.

Input CoS priority mapping function This function, on an input port, assigns or changes a priority value in a VLAN tag based on the DSCP value in the IP header in an IPv4 packet. On a port where a portbase VLAN is set, a priority value of a VLAN tag to be assigned to a received frame can be specified. On a port where a tagbase VLAN is set, the priority value of a VLAN tag can be changed for each input port. For each input port, it is possible to specify whether to enable or disable CoS priority mapping and set the priority value (0 to 7) to be mapped based on the DSCP value.

The priority assignment/change function is disabled by default. The following shows the default mapping assignment of DSCP values and priorities used when the priority assignment/change function is enabled.

DSCP value 0 to 7 8 to 15 16 to 23 24 to 31 32 to 39 40 to 47 48 to 55 56 to 63

Priority 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Memo The point in a frame to be referred for Ethernet type in order to recognize an IPv4 packet varies depending on the tag assignment status. When the TPID (tag protocol ID) of the outer tag is different from the TPID set on the port, the field is referred. When the TPID of the inner tag is not 0x8100, the field is referred. When the TPID of the inner tag is 0x8100, the next field is referred.

Note Priority assignment/change is not performed for frames other than IPv4 packets.

Note Ports other than GbE and FE ports do not accept this setting.

Commands

set qos in-port cos-map mode Setting of input CoS priority mapping enable/disable

set qos in-port cos-map Setting of input CoS priority mapping

show qos in-port cos-map mode Display of input CoS priority mapping enable/disable

show qos in-port cos-map Display of input CoS priority mapping

Page 123: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Setting of Basic Functions

2-59

Input example

The input example below changes the mapping of DSCP values and priorities as shown in the table, and enables the priority assignment/change function.

DSCP value 0 to 4 5 to 7 8 to 15 16 to 23 24 to 31 32 to 39 40 to 51 52 to 63

Priority 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

*Switch# set qos in-port cos-map 17 0-4 0

*Switch# set qos in-port cos-map 17 5-7 1

*Switch# set qos in-port cos-map 17 8-15 2

*Switch# set qos in-port cos-map 17 16-23 3

*Switch# set qos in-port cos-map 17 24-31 4

*Switch# set qos in-port cos-map 17 32-39 5

*Switch# set qos in-port cos-map 17 40-51 6

*Switch# set qos in-port cos-map 17 52-63 7

*Switch# show qos in-port cos-map 17

QoS Input CoS Priority Mapping Table

====================================

Port : 17

=========

CoS DSCP

---------------------------------------------------------------------------

0 0-4

1 5-7

2 8-15

3 16-23

4 24-31

5 32-39

6 40-51

7 52-63

*Switch# set qos in-port cos-map mode 17 enable

*Switch# show qos in-port cos-map mode 17

QoS CoS Mapping Mode Table

==========================

Port Mode

--------------

17 enabled

*Switch#

Page 124: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Setting of Basic Functions

2-60

Describes the setting of the maximum number of frames that are accumulated by L2SW output buffer class.

Describes the setting of the output WRED function.

L2SW buffer setting This section describes the setting of the maximum number of frames that are accumulated by L2SW output buffer class in the L2SW output port and the setting of the output WRED function.

Setting the maximum number of L2SW output buffer accumulation frames for each class 2-60

Setting the output WRED function 2-65

Setting the maximum number of L2SW output buffer accumulation frames for each class Set the maximum number of accumulation frames for each class, in output buffers prepared for each port in a L2SW. An output port is specified per line group/port. The default value is 256 frames for class-a, 256 frames for class-b, 256 frames for class-c, and 240 frames for class-d.

Line group types differ depending on mounting line cards. The following tables shows mapping between mounting line cards and line type groups.

Line group

Mounting line card 1/1 1/2 2/1 2/2

32T1E1H (32×E1/T1 TDM/ATM)

ATMoP (1-16)

TDMoP (1-16)

32T1E1T (32×E1/T1 TDM) - TDMoP

(1-16, 33-48) - - LINE1

1ATM155A (1×STM-1/OC-3 ATM) ATMoP (1) - - -

LINE2 2GBE (2×GbE) - - GbE (25) GbE (26)

Page 125: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Setting of Basic Functions

2-61

Commands

set [reserve] qos initial-buffer Setting of L2 switch buffer

show qos initial-buffer Display of L2 switch buffer

Memo Regarding the setting for 1ATM155A line card 1/1, the adaptive clock control which has been set for the 1ATM155A line card is not performed.

Note To enable the setting of the maximum number of accumulation frames, restart the device after write memory. Because only setting the maximum number does not enable the setting, set reserve qos initial-buffer is output in output with show running-config.

Note As this setting, the total of the maximum number of accumulation frames for each class cannot exceed the maximum number of accumulation frames of output buffers and cannot be below the maximum number of accumulation frames of output buffers.

Note The maximum number of frames actually accumulated per class may be smaller than the maximum number of frames set for each class by 4 to 14 frames.

Page 126: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Setting of Basic Functions

2-62

Input example (1/3)

The maximum number of accumulation frames for each class is configured.

(Continued to the next page)

*Switch# set qos initial-buffer 1/2 class-a 288 class-b 272 class-c 176 class-d

272

*Switch# show running-config

!System : NEC CX2200

!Cpusw : cpusw

!Line1 : 32t1e1h

!Line2 : 2gbe

!Current Software Ver.02.04.01

!Present Time : 01/01/2009 04:01:33

!

!

set reserve qos initial-buffer 1/2 class-a 288 class-b 272 class-c 176 class-d 2

72

!

set ip address out-band 192.168.2.237 255.255.255.0

set ip route default 192.168.2.1

!

*Switch# show qos initial-buffer

QoS Initial Buffer Table

========================

Port Type Condition Class-A Class-B Class-C Class-D

----------------------------------------------------------

1/1 atmop Present 256 256 256 240

Reserve --- --- --- ---

1/2 tdmop Present 256 256 256 240

Reserve 288 272 176 272

2/1 gbe Present 256 256 256 240

Reserve --- --- --- ---

2/2 gbe Present 256 256 256 240

Reserve --- --- --- ---

17 fe Present 256 256 256 240

Reserve --- --- --- ---

18 fe Present 256 256 256 240

Reserve --- --- --- ---

Page 127: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Setting of Basic Functions

2-63

Input example (2/3)

(Continued to the next page)

19 fe Present 256 256 256 240

Reserve --- --- --- ---

20 fe Present 256 256 256 240

Reserve --- --- --- ---

21 fe Present 256 256 256 240

Reserve --- --- --- ---

22 fe Present 256 256 256 240

Reserve --- --- --- ---

23 fe Present 256 256 256 240

Reserve --- --- --- ---

24 fe Present 256 256 256 240

Reserve --- --- --- ---

*Switch#

*Switch# write memory

Writing Flash Memory....

Switch#

Switch# reset system

Would you like to reboot System? :(Y/N): y

System is under closing......

Switch Reset Process is running. Please wait....

Welcome to CX2200 System

Switch>

Switch> enable

Input enable password:

Switch#

Switch# show running-config

!System : NEC CX2200

!Cpusw : cpusw

!Line1 : 32t1e1h

!Line2 : 2gbe

!Current Software Ver.02.04.01

!Present Time : 01/01/2009 04:04:40

!

!

Page 128: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Setting of Basic Functions

2-64

Input example (3/3)

set qos initial-buffer 1/2 class-a 288 class-b 272 class-c 176 class-d 272

!

set ip address out-band 192.168.2.237 255.255.255.0

set ip route default 192.168.2.1

!

Switch# show qos initial-buffer

QoS Initial Buffer Table

========================

Port Type Condition Class-A Class-B Class-C Class-D

----------------------------------------------------------

1/1 atmop Present 256 256 256 240

Reserve --- --- --- ---

1/2 tdmop Present 288 272 176 272

Reserve --- --- --- ---

2/1 gbe Present 256 256 256 240

Reserve --- --- --- ---

2/2 gbe Present 256 256 256 240

Reserve --- --- --- ---

17 fe Present 256 256 256 240

Reserve --- --- --- ---

18 fe Present 256 256 256 240

Reserve --- --- --- ---

19 fe Present 256 256 256 240

Reserve --- --- --- ---

20 fe Present 256 256 256 240

Reserve --- --- --- ---

21 fe Present 256 256 256 240

Reserve --- --- --- ---

22 fe Present 256 256 256 240

Reserve --- --- --- ---

23 fe Present 256 256 256 240

Reserve --- --- --- ---

24 fe Present 256 256 256 240

Reserve --- --- --- ---

Switch#

Page 129: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Setting of Basic Functions

2-65

Setting the output WRED function The output WRED (Weighted Random Early Detection) function enables discarding of frames before the total number of frames that are accumulated in the L2 switch buffer reaches the maximum number.

By setting the a discarding starting position for each port class, the discarding rate is checked through the discarding rate line using the minimum discarding threshold value and the maximum discarding threshold value, and the frames are discarded.

For the discarding starting position, by specifying the ratio (%) to the maximum discarding threshold value, the minimum discarding threshold value is calculated.

The maximum discarding threshold value is the maximum number of frames that are accumulated by class that is set in the L2 switch buffer setting.

The minimum discarding threshold value is re-calculated based on the ratio to the maximum discarding threshold value when the unit is restarted.

The default value specified for the discarding starting position is 100% for all the classes.

When the value exceeds the minimum discarding threshold value, frames are discarded from the transmission frames according to the discarding rate.

The transmission frames, which are exceeding the maximum discarding threshold value are discarded by Tail Drop.

The line group type varies according to the mounted line card. The following table shows the correspondence between mounted line cards and line groups.

Line group

Mounted line card 1/1 1/2 2/1 2/2

32T1E1H (32×E1/T1 TDM/ATM)

ATMoP (1-16)

TDMoP (1-16) - -

32T1E1T (32×E1/T1 TDM) - TDMoP

(1-16,33-48) - - LINE1

1ATM155A (1×STM-1/OC-3 ATM) ATMoP(1) - - -

LINE2 2GBE (2×GbE) - - GbE(25) GbE(26)

Page 130: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Setting of Basic Functions

2-66

Commands

set qos out-wred Setting of the output WRED function

show qos out-wred Display of the WRED function

Note The system operates as follows during execution of the setting command of the output WRED function.

• When a line group is specified, transmission stops temporarily in the specified line group units.

• When a port number is specified, transmission stops temporarily in all the FE ports (17 to 24).

Input example

This example shows the setting of the output WRED function.

*Switch# set qos out-wred 1/1 class-a 90 class-b 80 class-c 70 class-d 60

*Switch# show qos out-wred 1/1

QoS Out WRED Table

==================

Drop-Start

Port Type Class-A Class-B Class-C Class-D

---------------------------------------------------------------

1/1 atmop 90 80 70 60

(230/256) (204/256) (179/256) (144/240)

*Switch# set qos out-wred 17 default

*Switch# show qos out-wred 17

QoS Out WRED Table

==================

Drop-Start

Port Type Class-A Class-B Class-C Class-D

---------------------------------------------------------------

17 fe 100 100 100 100

(256/256) (256/256) (256/256) (240/240)

*Switch#

Page 131: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Setting of Basic Functions

2-67

Output bandwidth setting This part explains the setting of the output bandwidth in a L2SW output port (the output scheduling operation mode function, Deficit WRR surplus bandwidth distribution function, and output port shaper function).

At the output bandwidth setting (Deficit WRR surplus bandwidth distribution function and output port shaper function), the bandwidth control is performed for the frame size from DA to FCS. (See the figure below. The numbers in parentheses are byte counts.)

When 40 Mbps is specified for the output bandwidth and the frame size for output bandwidth is 64 bytes, the physical rate for conversion of frame size with the frame size for output bandwidth (DA to FCS) + preambles + minimum IFG will be as shown in the following example.

• 40 Mbps x ((Preamble8 + 64 + Minimum IFG12) / 64) = Physical rate 52.5 Mbps

If the physical rate exceeds the physical bandwidth for the output port because of the output bandwidth setting and output frame size, the output bandwidth may be less than the setting value.

Output scheduling operation mode function The output scheduling operation mode function switches between the SP (Strict Priority) mode and the Deficit WRR (Weight Round Robin) mode per device.

There are two types for the output scheduling operation mode: SP mode and Deficit WRR mode. The default value of the output scheduling operation mode function is the SP mode.

(1) In the SP mode, class-a to class-d operate in the SP mode.

The frame output is controlled based on the priority of each class (class-a to class-d) in the L2SW output queue. The priority is in the order of class-a > class-b > class-c > class-d.

(2) In the Deficit WRR mode, class-a operates in the SP mode and class-b to class-d operate in the Deficit WRR mode.

The class-a frames in the SP mode will be output with the top priority, and the surplus bandwidth is distributed based on the surplus bandwidth distribution ratio which has been set to each class (class-b to class d).

FCS(4)

Preamble (8)

DA (6)

SA (6)

TYPE(2)

Data (46 to 1500)

FCS(4)

VLAN tag(0,4,8…)

Target frame size of the bandwidth control

Flow of frames

Preamble (8)

IFG (12)

IFG (12)

Page 132: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Setting of Basic Functions

2-68

Note The output scheduling operation mode can be modified only when all the following conditions are satisfied.

• The surplus bandwidth distribution ratio value for the Deficit WRR surplus bandwidth distribution function is the default value.

• The maximum bandwidth limit value for the output port shaper function is the default value.

Note During the output scheduling operation mode switching, the continuity is temporarily stopped at all ports.

Commands

set qos out-bandwidth Setting of output bandwidth

show qos out-bandwidth Display of output bandwidth

Input example (1/3)

The following setting example shows the case that the SP mode is set for the output scheduling mode function and the case that the Deficit WRR mode is set.

(Continued to the next page)

*Switch# set qos out-bandwidth mode sp

*Switch# show qos out-bandwidth

QoS Out Bandwidth Table

=======================

Scheduler Mode : SP

Rate(Kbps)

Port Type Mode Condition Class-All Class-A Class-B Class-C Class-D

--------------------------------------------------------------------

1/1 atmop normal maximum 1000000 --- --- --- ---

--- --- --- --- --- --- ---

1/2 tdmop normal maximum 1000000 --- --- --- ---

--- --- --- --- --- --- ---

2/1 gbe normal maximum 1000000 --- --- --- ---

--- --- --- --- --- --- ---

2/2 gbe normal maximum 1000000 --- --- --- ---

--- --- --- --- --- --- ---

17 fe normal maximum 100000 --- --- --- ---

--- --- --- --- --- --- ---

Page 133: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Setting of Basic Functions

2-69

Input example (2/3)

(Continued to the next page)

18 fe normal maximum 100000 --- --- --- ---

--- --- --- --- --- --- ---

19 fe normal maximum 100000 --- --- --- ---

--- --- --- --- --- --- ---

20 fe normal maximum 100000 --- --- --- ---

--- --- --- --- --- --- ---

21 fe normal maximum 100000 --- --- --- ---

--- --- --- --- --- --- ---

22 fe normal maximum 100000 --- --- --- ---

--- --- --- --- --- --- ---

23 fe normal maximum 100000 --- --- --- ---

--- --- --- --- --- --- ---

24 fe normal maximum 100000 --- --- --- ---

--- --- --- --- --- --- ---

*Switch#

*Switch# set qos out-bandwidth mode sp+wrr

*Switch# show qos out-bandwidth

QoS Out Bandwidth Table

=======================

Scheduler Mode : SP+WRR

Rate(Kbps)

Port Type Mode Condition Class-All Class-A Class-B Class-C Class-D

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------

1/1 atmop normal maximum 1000000 --- --- --- ---

separate wrr-rate --- 1000000 64 64 64

1/2 tdmop normal maximum 1000000 --- --- --- ---

separate wrr-rate --- 1000000 64 64 64

2/1 gbe normal maximum 1000000 --- --- --- ---

separate wrr-rate --- 1000000 64 64 64

2/2 gbe normal maximum 1000000 --- --- --- ---

separate wrr-rate --- 1000000 64 64 64

17 fe normal maximum 100000 --- --- --- ---

separate wrr-rate --- 100000 64 64 64

18 fe normal maximum 100000 --- --- --- ---

separate wrr-rate --- 100000 64 64 64

19 fe normal maximum 100000 --- --- --- ---

separate wrr-rate --- 100000 64 64 64

20 fe normal maximum 100000 --- --- --- ---

Page 134: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Setting of Basic Functions

2-70

Input example (3/3)

separate wrr-rate --- 100000 64 64 64

21 fe normal maximum 100000 --- --- --- ---

separate wrr-rate --- 100000 64 64 64

22 fe normal maximum 100000 --- --- --- ---

separate wrr-rate --- 100000 64 64 64

23 fe normal maximum 100000 --- --- --- ---

separate wrr-rate --- 100000 64 64 64

24 fe normal maximum 100000 --- --- --- ---

separate wrr-rate --- 100000 64 64 64

*Switch#

Page 135: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Setting of Basic Functions

2-71

Output port shaper function The output port shaper function sets the maximum bandwidth limit value on the L2SW output side per line group/line number (collective addition mode) or per line group/line number class (individual addition mode). Traffic volume output from L2SW is controlled by this function.

Memo Line group types differ depending on the mounting line card. The correspondence

between mounting line card and line group type is shown below.

Line group

Mounting line card 1/1 1/2 2/1 2/2

32T1E1H (32×E1/T1 TDM/ATM)

ATMoP (1-16)

TDMoP (1-16) - -

32T1E1T (32×E1/T1 TDM) - TDMoP

(1-16, 33-48) - - LINE1

1ATM155A (1×STM-1/OC-3 ATM) ATMoP (1) - - -

LINE2 2GBE (2×GbE) - - GbE (25) GbE (26)

Memo The default value per line group or line number is as follows.

(1) In the case of a line group Group 1/1: 1000000 Kbps Group 1/2: 1000000 Kbps Group 2/1: 1000000 Kbps Group 2/2: 1000000 Kbps

(2) In the case of a line number Port 17-24: 1000000 Kbps

Note Set a multiple of 64 Kbps for the maximum bandwidth limit value. However, for line numbers 17 to 24, 100 Mbps is not rounded down to a multiple of 64 Kbps.

Note Regarding the maximum bandwidth limit value per class, the total value of all classes cannot exceed the physical bandwidth value.

Note When setting the maximum bandwidth limit value for the output port shaper function per line group/line number (collective addition mode), the value cannot be less than the total value of the surplus bandwidth distribution ratio for each class (class-b to class-d). Set the maximum bandwidth limit value that satisfies the following conditions.

* These conditions are applied only when the output scheduling operation mode is Deficit WRR.

Output port shaper function Deficit WRR surplus bandwidth distribution function

Page 136: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Setting of Basic Functions

2-72

Maximum bandwidth limit value ≥ class-b + class-c + class-d Surplus bandwidth distribution ratio

Note When setting the maximum bandwidth limit value of each class for the output port shaper function per line group/line number class (individual addition mode), the value cannot be less than the value of the surplus bandwidth distribution ratio for each class (class-b to class-d). Set the maximum bandwidth limit value that satisfies the following conditions.

* These conditions are applied only when the output scheduling operation mode is Deficit WRR.

Output port shaper function Deficit WRR surplus bandwidth distribution function

Maximum bandwidth limit value class-b ≥ Surplus bandwidth distribution ratio class-b

Maximum bandwidth limit value class-c ≥ Surplus bandwidth distribution ratio class-c

Maximum bandwidth limit value class-d ≥ Surplus bandwidth distribution ratio class-d

Note During executing of the output port shaper function setting command, the following operations are performed.

• If a line group is specified, the continuity of the specified line group is temporarily stopped.

• If a line number is specified, the continuity of all the FE ports (17 to 24) is temporarily stopped.

Commands

set qos out-bandwidth Setting of output bandwidth

show qos out-bandwidth Display of output bandwidth

Memo Regarding the setting for 1ATM155A line card 1/1, the adaptive clock control which has been set for the 1ATM155A line card is not performed.

Page 137: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Setting of Basic Functions

2-73

(1) Operation example of the output port shaper function (when setting per line group/line number (collective addition mode))

The following is an example of setting the output port shaper function for an FE port (per line number).

- Operation of the output port shaper function

The total value 70 Mbps of class-a to class-d will be shrunk to 60 Mbps by the output shaper function when it is output.

The total value 70 Mbps of output frames class-a to class-d will be shrunk by the output port shaper function to 60 Mbps (class-a 25 Mbps; class-b 20 Mbps; class-c 10 Mbps; class-d 5 Mbps) in the order of the priority from the lowest class to be output.

class-a 25 Mbps

class-c 10 Mbps

class-d 15 Mbps

L2SW

class-b

class-c

Output port shaper function

Rate 60 Mbpsclass-b 20 Mbps

CX2200

Rate 25 Mbpsclass-a

Rate 20 Mbps

Rate 10 Mbps

Rate 15 Mbpsclass-d

[Breakdown] class-a 25 Mbps class-b 20 Mbps class-c 10 Mbps class-d 5 Mbps

Page 138: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Setting of Basic Functions

2-74

Input example

The following setting example shows the case that the output port shaper function is set for an FE port (per line number).

*Switch# set qos out-bandwidth mode sp

*Switch# set qos out-bandwidth maximum 17 60000

*Switch# show running-config

!System : NEC CX2200

!Cpusw : cpusw

!Line1 : 32t1e1h

!Line2 : 2gbe

!Current Software Ver.02.04.01

!Present Time : 01/01/2009 17:19:52

!

!

set qos out-bandwidth maximum 17 59968

!

!

*Switch# show qos out-bandwidth 17

QoS Out Bandwidth Table

=======================

Scheduler Mode : SP

Rate(Kbps)

Port Type Mode Condition Class-All Class-A Class-B Class-C Class-D

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

17 fe normal maximum 59968 --- --- --- ---

--- --- --- --- --- --- ---

*Switch#

Page 139: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Setting of Basic Functions

2-75

(2) Operation example of the output port shaper function (when setting per line group/line number class (individual addition mode))

The following is an example of setting the output port shaper function per FE port (line number) class.

class-a 40 Mbps

class-b 30 Mbps

class-c 15 Mbps

class-d 15 Mbps class-d

L2SW

class-a Rate 40 Mbps

class-b

class-c

class-a 40 Mbps

class-b 20 Mbps

class-c 15 Mbps

class-d 10 Mbps

Output port shaper function

CX2200

Rate 30 Mbps

Rate 15 Mbps

Rate 15 Mbps

- Operation of the output port shaper function

Class-a 40 Mbps, class-b 30 Mbps, class-c 15 Mbps, and class-d 15 Mpbs are shrunk by the output port shaper function to class-a 40 Mbps, class-b 20 Mbps, class-c 15 Mbps, and class-d 10 Mbps when it is output.

Page 140: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Setting of Basic Functions

2-76

Input example

The following setting example shows the case that the output port shaper function is set for an FE port (line number) per class.

*Switch# set qos out-bandwidth mode sp

*Switch# set qos out-bandwidth maximum 17 separate class-a 40000 class-b 20000 c

lass-c 15000 class-d 10000

*Switch# show running-config

!System : NEC CX2200

!Cpusw : cpusw

!Line1 : 32t1e1h

!Line2 : 2gbe

!Current Software Ver.02.04.01

!Present Time : 01/01/2009 17:22:37

!

!

set qos out-bandwidth maximum 17 separate class-a 40000 class-b 19968 class-c 14

976 class-d 9984

!

!

*Switch# show qos out-bandwidth 17

QoS Out Bandwidth Table

=======================

Scheduler Mode : SP

Rate(Kbps)

Port Type Mode Condition Class-All Class-A Class-B Class-C Class-D

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

17 fe separate maximum --- 40000 19968 14976 9984

--- --- --- --- --- --- ---

*Switch#

Page 141: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Setting of Basic Functions

2-77

Deficit WRR surplus bandwidth distribution function The Deficit WRR surplus bandwidth distribution function sets the surplus bandwidth distribution ratio which operates on the Deficit WRR per class (class-b to class-d). Traffic volume is controlled by a ratio based on the surplus bandwidth distribution ratio which has been set by the Deficit WRR surplus bandwidth distribution function.

The class-a value which operates in the SP mode cannot be set by the Deficit WRR surplus bandwidth distribution function. The class-a value is determined as follows.

(1) If the maximum bandwidth limit value is set with [line group/line number per class (individual addition mode)] by the output port shaper function

The value is determined based on the class-a maximum bandwidth limit value of the output port shaper function. The class-a maximum bandwidth limit value which is set by the output port shaper function equals the class-a value of the Deficit WRR surplus bandwidth distribution function.

(2) If the maximum bandwidth limit value is set with [line group/line number (collective addition mode)] by the output port shaper function

The value is determined based on the maximum bandwidth limit value per line group/line number (collective addition mode) which has been set by the output port shaper function. The maximum bandwidth limit value which is set by the output port shaper function equals the class-a value of the Deficit WRR surplus bandwidth distribution function.

The surplus bandwidth is the remaining bandwidth after using for class-a in the SP mode.

Memo Line group types differ depending on the mounting line card. The correspondence list between mounting line card and line group type is shown below.

Line group

Mounting line card 1/1 1/2 2/1 2/2

32T1E1H (32×E1/T1 TDM/ATM)

ATMoP (1-16)

TDMoP (1-16) - -

32T1E1T (32×E1/T1 TDM) - TDMoP

(1-16, 33-48) - - LINE1

1ATM155A (1×STM-1/OC-3 ATM) ATMoP (1) - - -

LINE2 2GBE (2×GbE) - - GbE (25) GbE (26)

Memo This function operates only at output ports.

Memo It can be set only when the output scheduling operation mode function is set to the Deficit

Page 142: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Setting of Basic Functions

2-78

WRR mode.

Page 143: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Setting of Basic Functions

2-79

Memo The default value of the surplus bandwidth distribution ratio (class-b to class-d) is set to 64 Kbps.

Memo Set a multiple of 64 Kbps for the surplus bandwidth distribution ratio value. However, for line numbers 17 to 24, 100 Mbps is not rounded down to a multiple of 64 Kbps.

Note If the output frames of class-b to class-d underrun the value of each class which has been set for the surplus bandwidth distribution ratio, the surplus bandwidth is distributed based on the set surplus bandwidth distribution ratio. If the output frames of class-b to class-d exceed the surplus bandwidth distribution ratio, it may not be distributed with the ratio.

Note Regarding the surplus bandwidth distribution ratio value per class, the total value of all classes cannot exceed the physical bandwidth.

Note The total value of the surplus bandwidth distribution ratio values for each class (class-b to class-d) cannot exceed the maximum bandwidth limit value of the output port shaper function which has been set per line group/line number (collective addition mode). Set the surplus bandwidth distribution ratio value that satisfies the following conditions.

Deficit WRR surplus bandwidth distribution function Output port shaper function

class-b + class-c + class-d Surplus bandwidth distribution ratio ≤ Maximum bandwidth limit value

Note The surplus bandwidth distribution ratio value for each class (class-b to class-d) cannot exceed the maximum bandwidth limit value for each class which has been set per line group/line number class (individual addition mode) for the output port shaper function. Set the surplus bandwidth distribution ratio value that satisfies the following conditions.

Deficit WRR surplus bandwidth distribution function Output port shaper function

Surplus bandwidth distribution ratio class-b ≤ Maximum bandwidth limit value class-b

Surplus bandwidth distribution ratio class-c ≤ Maximum bandwidth limit value class-c

Surplus bandwidth distribution ratio class-d ≤ Maximum bandwidth limit value class-d

Note During executing of the Deficit WRR surplus bandwidth distribution function setting command, the following operations are performed.

• If a line group is specified, the continuity of the specified line group is temporarily stopped.

• If a line number is specified, the continuity of all FE ports (17 to 24) is temporarily stopped.

Page 144: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Setting of Basic Functions

2-80

Commands

set qos out-bandwidth Setting of output bandwidth

show qos out-bandwidth Display of output bandwidth

Memo Regarding the setting for 1ATM155A line card 1/1, the adaptive clock control which has been set for the 1ATM155A line card is not performed.

(1) Operation example of the Deficit WRR surplus bandwidth distribution function

The following is an example of setting the Deficit WRR surplus bandwidth distribution function for an FE port (per line number).

class-a 70 Mbps

class-b 50 Mbps

class-c 50 Mbps

L2SW

class-a SP (Strict Priority)

Rate 70 Mbps

class-b Deficit WRR 30000 Kbps: 3 (Ratio)

Deficit WRR Surplus bandwidth distribution function

Rate 15 Mbps

CX2200

class-d 50 Mbps

class-d Deficit WRR 10000 Kbps: 1 (Ratio)

class-c Deficit WRR 20000 Kbps: 2 (Ratio)

Rate 10 Mbps

Rate 5 Mbps

- Operation of the Deficit WRR surplus bandwidth distribution function

Frames of class-a 70 Mbps in the SP (Strict Priority) mode will be output with the top priority.

Since the input rate of class-a is 70 Mbps, the calculation of surplus bandwidth for the Deficit WRR surplus bandwidth distribution function would be 100 Mbps − 70 Mbps = 30 Mbps, giving the surplus bandwidth of 30 Mbps.

The surplus bandwidth is output at the rate of “class-b: class-c: class-d = 3 (30000 Kbps): 2 (20000 Kbps): 1 (10000 Kbps)” based on the surplus bandwidth distribution ratio which has been set for each class (class-b to class-d).

Calculation of the Deficit WRR surplus bandwidth

Output rate of class-b: Surplus bandwidth 30 Mbps × Ratio 3 / (3+2+1) = 15 Mbps

Output rate of class-c: Surplus bandwidth 30 Mbps × Ratio 2 / (3+2+1) = 10 Mbps

Output rate of class-d: Surplus bandwidth 30 Mbps × Ratio 1 / (3+2+1) = 5 Mbps

Page 145: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Setting of Basic Functions

2-81

Input example

The following setting example shows how to enable the output scheduling operation mode and set the Deficit WRR surplus bandwidth distribution ratio per class of the FE port. The following is a setting example of the surplus bandwidth distribution ratio at the rate of "class-b: class-c: class-d = 3 (30000 Kbps) : 2 (20000 Kbps) : 1 (10000 Kbps)" as shown above.

*Switch# set qos out-bandwidth mode sp+wrr

*Switch# set qos out-bandwidth wrr-rate 17 separate class-b 30000 class-c 20000

class-d 10000

*Switch# show running-config

!System : NEC CX2200

!Cpusw : cpusw

!Line1 : 32t1e1h

!Line2 : 2gbe

!Current Software Ver.02.04.01

!Present Time : 01/01/2009 17:16:49

!

!

set qos out-bandwidth mode sp+wrr

set qos out-bandwidth wrr-rate 17 separate class-b 29952 class-c 19968 class-d 9

984

!

!

*Switch# show qos out-bandwidth 17

QoS Out Bandwidth Table

=======================

Scheduler Mode : SP+WRR

Rate(Kbps)

Port Type Mode Condition Class-All Class-A Class-B Class-C Class-D

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

17 fe normal maximum 100000 --- --- --- ---

separate wrr-rate --- 100000 29952 19968 9984

*Switch#

Page 146: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Setting of Basic Functions

2-82

(2) Operation example of the Deficit WRR surplus bandwidth distribution function + output port shaper function (set per line group/line number)

The following is an example of setting the Deficit WRR surplus bandwidth distribution function and the output port shaper function for an FE port (per line number).

class-a 42 Mbps

class-c 50 Mbps

class-d 50 Mbps

L2SW

class-b Deficit WRR 30000 Kbps: 3 (Ratio)

class-c Deficit WRR 20000 Kbps : 2 (Ratio)

Output port shaper function

Rate 60 Mbps class-b 50 Mbps

CX2200

Rate 42 Mbps class-a SP (Strict Priority)

Deficit WRR Surplus bandwidth distribution function

Rate 9 Mbps

Rate 6 Mbps

Rate 3 Mbpsclass-d Deficit WRR 10000 Kbps : 1 (Ratio)

[Breakdown] class-a 42 Mbpsclass-b 9 Mbps class-c 6 Mbps class-d 3 Mbps

- Operation of the Deficit WRR surplus bandwidth distribution function + output port shaper function

Frames of class-a 42 Mbps in the SP (Strict Priority) mode will be output with the top priority.

Since the rate set for the output port shaper function is 60 Mbps and the input rate of class-a is 42 Mbps, the calculation of surplus bandwidth for the Deficit WRR surplus bandwidth distribution function would be 60 Mbps − 42 Mbps = 18 Mbps, giving the surplus bandwidth of 18 Mbps.

The surplus bandwidth is output at the rate of “class-b: class-c: class-d = 3 (30000 Kbps): 2 (20000 Kbps): 1 (10000 Kbps)” based on the surplus bandwidth distribution ratio which has been set for each class (class-b to class-d).

Calculation of the Deficit WRR surplus bandwidth

Output rate of class-b: Surplus bandwidth 18 Mbps × Ratio 3 / (3+2+1) = 9 Mbps

Output rate of class-c: Surplus bandwidth 18 Mbps × Ratio 2 / (3+2+1) = 6 Mbps

Output rate of class-d: Surplus bandwidth 18 Mbps × Ratio 1 / (3+2+1) = 3 Mbps

Page 147: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Setting of Basic Functions

2-83

Input example

The following setting example shows how to set the Deficit WRR surplus bandwidth distribution function and the output port shaper function to an FE port (per line number).

*Switch# set qos out-bandwidth mode sp+wrr

*Switch# set qos out-bandwidth maximum 17 60000

*Switch# set qos out-bandwidth wrr-rate 17 separate class-b 30000 class-c 20000

class-d 10000

*Switch# show running-config

!System : NEC CX2200

!Cpusw : cpusw

!Line1 : 32t1e1h

!Line2 : 2gbe

!Current Software Ver.02.04.01

!Present Time : 01/01/2009 17:19:52

!

!

set qos out-bandwidth mode sp+wrr

set qos out-bandwidth maximum 17 59968

set qos out-bandwidth wrr-rate 17 separate class-b 29952 class-c 19968 class-d 9

984

!

!

*Switch# show qos out-bandwidth 17

QoS Out Bandwidth Table

=======================

Scheduler Mode : SP+WRR

Rate(Kbps)

Port Type Mode Condition Class-All Class-A Class-B Class-C Class-D

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

17 fe normal maximum 59968 --- --- --- ---

separate wrr-rate --- 59968 29952 19968 9984

*Switch#

Page 148: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Setting of Basic Functions

2-84

(3) Operation example of the Deficit WRR surplus bandwidth distribution function + output port shaper function (set per class)

The following is an example of setting the Deficit WRR surplus bandwidth distribution function and the output port shaper function for an FE port (per class).

class-a 20 Mbps

class-b 50 Mbps

class-c 50 Mbps

class-d 50 Mbps class-d Deficit WRR

20000 Kbps: 1 (Ratio)

L2SW

class-a SP (Strict Priority)

Rate 20 Mbps

class-b Deficit WRR 40000 Kbps: 2 (Ratio)

class-c Deficit WRR 20000 Kbps: 1 (Ratio)

class-a 20 Mbps

class-b 40 Mbps

class-c 20 Mbps

class-d 20 Mbps

Output port shaper function

CX2200

Rate 40 Mbps

Rate 20 Mbps

Rate 20 Mbps

- Operation of the Deficit WRR surplus bandwidth distribution function

Frames of class-a 20 Mbps in the SP (Strict Priority) mode will be output with the top priority.

Since the input rate of class-a is 20 Mbps, the calculation of surplus bandwidth for the Deficit WRR surplus bandwidth distribution function would be 100 Mbps − 20 Mbps = 80 Mbps, giving the surplus bandwidth of 80 Mbps.

The surplus bandwidth is output at the rate of “class-b: class-c: class-d = 2 (40000 Kbps): 1 (20000 Kbps): 1 (20000 Kbps)” based on the surplus bandwidth distribution ratio which has been set for each class (class-b to class-d).

Calculation of the Deficit WRR surplus bandwidth

Output rate of class-b: Surplus bandwidth 80 Mbps ×Ratio 2 / (2+1+1) = 40 Mbps

Output rate of class-c: Surplus bandwidth 80 Mbps ×Ratio 1 / (2+1+1) = 20 Mbps

Output rate of class-d: Surplus bandwidth 80 Mbps ×Ratio 1 / (2+1+1) = 20 Mbps

Deficit WRR Surplus bandwidth distribution function

Page 149: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Setting of Basic Functions

2-85

Input example

The following setting example shows how to set the Deficit WRR surplus bandwidth distribution function and the output port shaper function to an FE port (per class).

*Switch# set qos out-bandwidth mode sp+wrr

*Switch# set qos out-bandwidth maximum 17 separate class-a 20000 class-b 40000 c

lass-c 20000 class-d 20000

*Switch# set qos out-bandwidth wrr-rate 17 separate class-b 40000 class-c 20000

class-d 20000

*Switch# show running-config

!System : NEC CX2200

!Cpusw : cpusw

!Line1 : 32t1e1h

!Line2 : 2gbe

!Current Software Ver.02.04.01

!Present Time : 01/01/2009 22:07:29

!

!

set qos out-bandwidth mode sp+wrr

set qos out-bandwidth maximum 17 separate class-a 19968 class-b 40000 class-c 19

968 class-d 19968

set qos out-bandwidth wrr-rate 17 separate class-b 40000 class-c 19968 class-d 1

9968

!

!

*Switch# show qos out-bandwidth 17

QoS Out Bandwidth Table

=======================

Scheduler Mode : SP+WRR

Rate(Kbps)

Port Type Mode Condition Class-All Class-A Class-B Class-C Class-D

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

17 fe separate maximum --- 19968 40000 19968 19968

separate wrr-rate --- 19968 40000 19968 19968

*Switch#

Page 150: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Setting of Basic Functions

2-86

Specifies the aggregation mode.

Specifies the priority port.

Specifies the priority port.

Specifies the aggregation mode.

2.3.1.4 Link aggregation The CX2200 supports the link aggregation function that collects up multiple Fast Ether ports or Gigabit Ether ports to make a single logical transmission path between other devices. This function can make a group port assume a role of redundancy. This unit supports two functions including the simple aggregation function and IEEE802.3ad aggregation function.

Simple aggregation Simple aggregation is NEC’s unique link aggregation function, which implements link aggregation without recourse to protocol communication between devices.

Up to eight ports per one group and up to five groups can be set. All ports for link aggregation need to be assigned with the same VLAN ID and same speed. Set this function as follows:

Specifying aggregation groups 2-88

Specifying port priorities 2-94

Or,

Specifying port priorities 2-94

Specifying aggregation groups 2-88

Note The function cannot be set for ports other than GbE and FE ports.

Note The function cannot be set for ports where EtherRing function is enabled.

Page 151: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Setting of Basic Functions

2-87

Specifies the priority port.

Specifies the priority level of the switch.

Sets aggregation.

Specifies the priority level of the switch.

Specifies the priority port.

Sets aggregation.

IEEE802.3ad aggregation This unit allows the user to set dynamic link aggregation based on IEEE802.3ad by communicating with the other device using control frames of LACP. This function sets link aggregation according to the settings on the other device. For this purpose, it is necessary that the other device complies with IEEE802.3ad.

The mode of link aggregation with LACP used can be either dot3ad or passive. Up to eight ports and 5 groups can be set.

Set IEEE802.3ad aggregation as follows:

Specifying port priorities 2-94

Specifying system priorities 2-93

Specifying aggregation groups 2-88

Or,

Specifying system priorities 2-93

Specifying port priorities 2-94

Specifying aggregation groups 2-88

Note On a line where flow control is enabled or set to autonegotiation, IEEE802.3ad aggregation does not work.

Note In a frame size which is shorter than the LACP frame size (128 bytes), IEEE802.3ad aggregation does not work.

Note IEEE802.3ad aggregation does not work for ports other than GbE and FE ports.

Note For LACP without a VLAN tag, MAC learning is performed with VLAN ID 1.

Note On a line where EtherRing function is enabled, . IEEE802.3ad aggregation does not work.

Page 152: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Setting of Basic Functions

2-88

Setting the configuration The following explains how to set link aggregation and how the functions work according to the settings. For details on commands, see "Command Reference".

Specifying aggregation groups Specifies the ports required for setting link aggregation. At the same time, specify the number of operation ports, and thus you can set the same number of ports from the highest-priority port to operation ports and the remaining ports to standby ports that do not perform communication. If the ports have the same priority, the operation ports are selected starting from the smallest-number port. If a failure occurs on an operation port, the standby port having the highest priority is automatically selected and switched to an operation port to replace the failed port.

If you do not set the number of operation ports, all group port numbers are used as operation ports. In this case, if a failure occurs on a port, it is not replaced by another port.

Up to five groups and up to eight ports can be set for this aggregation function. However, ports whose speed is different cannot be mixed in a same group.

For line connection with the other device that performs aggregation, connect the device port to port in the order of the port priority of the other device, if the priorities are set, or in the ascending order of the port numbers, if no port priority is set. The numbers of operation ports must be the same on the both devices.

When there are six group ports and four of them are operation ports, if a failure occurs on an operation port, port switching is performed as shown below. Upon recovery, the operation ports before failure will operate again.

If the number of the group ports is the same as the number of the operation ports, all group ports function as operation ports, and this disables switching if a failure occurs.

When you specify aggregation groups, specify the distribution function of the aggregation function at the same time.

Standby ports Failed port Operation ports

Standby ports

Operation ports

Group ports Failure

Page 153: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Setting of Basic Functions

2-89

Distribution methods This unit supports the following three distribution methods.

(1) Source MAC address distribution method (src-mac)

(2) Destination MAC address distribution method (dst-mac)

(3) Source MAC address XOR destination MAC address distribution method (both-mac)

Distribution algorithm Determines which port in the group is used for output when a frame is output from the device, if link aggregation is set on the output destination.

First, the individual ports selected as operation ports in a group are given a number from 1 to 8 cyclically, which is called LLB (Link Aggregation Load Balancing), starting from the port having the smallest number. Then distribution algorithm is used to decide the LLB number of the port to which the frame should be sent.

(The LLB to which a frame is transferred is called destination LLB.)

Lower 3-bit values of each address in the distribution methods of (1) and (2) and the values for which 1 is added to the lower 3-bit values after taking the XOR value of each address in the distribution method of (3) are selected as destination LLB.

The destination LLB is automatically changed when the operation port is changed due to reasons such as layer 1 failure is detected, output destination is changed by setting, or LACP timeout is detected.

Memo When using distribution methods, the target is only the lower 3 bits of a MAC address. The upper 45 bits are not targeted.

Note Distribution methods are not applied to the destination of multicast, unknown (DLF), or broadcast frames. One port is always selected as the destination of such frames by software control.

Note Distribution methods are not applied to the frames sent in a flooding state.

Page 154: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Setting of Basic Functions

2-90

Suppose that 17, 18, and 19 are grouped into LAG#1, and 22, 23 into LAG#2 as shown below.

LLB is assigned to each port in each group in a cyclic manner.

LAG table

LAG#1 LAG#2

LLB Output port# LLB Output port#

1 17 1 22

2 18 2 23

3 19 3 22

4 17 4 23

5 18 5 22

6 19 6 23

7 17 7 22

8 18 8 23

In the above case, the destination of a frame is decided as follows:

CX2200

LAG#1 LAG#2

25 26

17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

Page 155: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Setting of Basic Functions

2-91

When the following frame is output from a link aggregation group:

Source MAC = 0x000000000003 (0x3 = 0011)

Destination MAC = 0x000000000001 (0x1= 0001)

(1) Source MAC address distribution method (src-mac)

Destination LLB: Source MAC (0011) + 1 = 4

Result) According to the LAG table, the frame is distributed to 17 in LAG#1, and 23 in LAG#2.

(2) Destination MAC address distribution (dst-mac)

Destination LLB: Destination (0001) + 1 = 2

Result) According to the LAG table, the frame is distributed to 18 in LAG#1, and 23 in LAG#2.

(3) Source MAC address XOR destination MAC address distribution method (both-mac)

Destination LLB: Source MAC XOR Destination MAC ((0011) XOR (0001)) + 1 = 3

Result) According to the LAG table, the frame is distributed to 19 in LAG#1, and 22 in LAG#2.

local mode Is used when NEC’s unique simple aggregation is used. This is the default setting of this unit. Operation is based on the settings of the local unit without recourse to those of the other device, because LACP communication is not performed. To make operation in this mode effective, select the ports to be used on the local unit and the other unit in advance before setting the function.

Standby filtering local Sets operation when frames are received in standby ports.

(1) standby-block: Discards received frames except LACP.

(2) standby-admit: Accepts received frames.

Memo Link aggregation protection time is applied for groups to which standby-admit is set.

Page 156: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Setting of Basic Functions

2-92

dot3ad mode Is the standard mode based on IEEE802.3ad. LACP communication with the other device is periodically performed for setting of link aggregation. After link aggregation is set, LACP is sent to the other device on a 1-second cycle.

If LACP from the other device is not received for 6 seconds, LACP reception times out, and the port where timeout occurs is separated from the group and changed into a standby port. LACP communication is performed even in this case, but the intervals of LACP transmission will be changed to 30 seconds. When reception of LACP from the other device becomes possible, the port will become a candidate for an operation port again.

The following explains how to decide operation ports and standby ports on the local unit and the other device.

(1) Comparison of system priorities

First, the system priority of the other device and the system priority of the local unit are compared.

(2) Comparison of port priorities

Then the port priority of the switch having the highest system priority is referred to. The ports having higher port priorities are selected. Port priorities of a unit having lower system priority are not referred to.

(3) Selection of operation ports

On a switch having the higher switch priority, ports are selected until the number reaches the specified number of operation ports. If the number of operation ports on the other device is smaller than that on the switch with the higher switch priority, in this process, the number of operation ports on the other device will be effective. If the number of operation ports fails to reach the specified number due to failure in reception of LACP or a physical cause like port failure, the ports that fail to be selected will behave as standby ports.

Page 157: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Setting of Basic Functions

2-93

passive mode Sets link aggregation when the other device is in the dot3ad mode and LACP is received from the other device.

If LACP is not received from the other device, link aggregation is not set because no LACP transmission is made.

Commands

set aggregation group Setting of link aggregation group

show aggregation group Display of link aggregation setting status

clear aggregation group Clearing of link aggregation group

Note One same port cannot accept this setting together with port isolate setting.

Specifying system priorities Specifies whether you use the port priority of the local unit or that of the other device when you select operation and standby ports. The switch having smaller value (higher system priority) takes precedence. If both has the same the priority, their MAC addresses are compared, and the switch having the MAC address of the smaller value will be selected as the priority switch.

Commands

set aggregation system priority Setting of system priority

show aggregation system priority Display of system priority

Note This setting is used for protocol communication by LACP between the devices. Because simple aggregation does not support LACP protocol communication between the devices, this setting makes no difference in operation.

Note Set the system priority before setting link aggregation. System priority cannot be set after link aggregation is set.

Page 158: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Setting of Basic Functions

2-94

Specifying port priorities Specifies the priorities of the ports specified in specification of aggregation groups. The smaller the value is, the higher the priority is. If the priorities are same, priority is given to smallest-number port and the port is selected as an operation port.

Commands

set aggregation port priority Setting of port priority

show aggregation port priority Display of port priority

Specifying link aggregation protection time Is available for link aggregation groups with standby-admit set that operate in the simple aggregation mode.

A port that is in the unblocked and physical link down state becomes a standby port after linkup is notified and then changes to an operation port. The link aggregation protection time function controls the standby time from linkup notification received by a port that is in the unblocked and physical link down state to its change into an operation port.

The port remains the standby state during the link aggregation protection time, which allows frame reception but not frame transmission. After the link aggregation protection time elapses, the port becomes operational and allows frame transmission.

By setting the link aggregation protection time, you can reduce the communication down time that arises when a port that is in the unblocked and physical link down state changes into an operation port.

Commands

set aggregation protection-time Setting of link aggregation protection time

show aggregation protection-time Display of link aggregation protection time

Memo The link aggregation protection time can be set for each link aggregation group whether any aggregation group exists or not.

Note If the linkup port is in the link aggregation protection time, it has an influence on the following functions:

- For the fast and standard spanning tree function, the port status remains the discarding state and will not change.

Page 159: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Setting of Basic Functions

2-95

Setting example

The explanation is based on the following network.

The aggregation distribution method is based on the XOR value of the source MAC address and destination MAC address. Four ports (ports 17-20) are set in Group 1 as simple aggregation. Two ports (ports 25 and 26) are set in Group 5 in dot3ad mode. The port priorities of ports 19-20 are set to 10. The counterparts of ports 25 and 26 are operating in dot3ad mode.

In this sample configuration, the communication speed is set to 100 Mbps on ports 17-20, and 1 Gbps on ports 25 and 26, in advance.

CX2200

Port17-20 Port25-26

Page 160: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Setting of Basic Functions

2-96

Input example

Learning of aggregation groups Is performed by the port of the smallest number in an aggregation group for a frame received from the aggregation port.

Memo The leaned MAC address is not cleared until all ports of link aggregation become standby ports or aging timeout occurs. Learning of link aggregation is always performed on the port of the smallest number in the group regardless of its implementation.

*Switch# set aggregation group 1 17-20 4 standby-admit local both-mac

*Switch# set aggregation group 5 25-26 2 dot3ad src-mac

*Switch# set aggregation port priority 19-20 10

*Switch# set aggregation protection-time 1 10000

*Switch# show aggregation group

Switch Aggregate Table

======================

Aggregated Ports/ Active-Numbers/ Mode/ Distribute

Index Name Standby-Filter Time(msec) Type

--------------------------------------------------------------------------

1 17-20 4 local both-mac

standby-admit 10000

5 25,26 2 dot3ad src-mac

standby-block 0

*Switch# show aggregation port priority 17-20,25-26

LAG Port Information

====================

Port Index Priority

-------------------

17 1 128

18 1 128

19 1 10

20 1 10

25 5 128

26 5 128

*Switch#

Page 161: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Setting of Basic Functions

2-97

2.3.1.5 Frame size The CX2200 provides the frame size setting function.

The minimum frame size is 64 bytes, and the maximum value is 1536 bytes for FE and 9000 bytes for GbE. The default value is 1536 bytes for all.

Use the "set frame-size" command to set the frame size. The parameters of the "set frame-size" command include the port type (FE or GbE) and frame size (64-1536 for FE or 64-9000 for GbE). Enter these parameters separating them by a space.

Note The tolerable frame size on a tagbase VLAN port is the command specification value + 4 bytes.

Note When you set the frame size during data transmission and the frame size becomes smaller than the size before the setting, the data transmission may be momentarily interrupted, which may cause an error like a CRC error.

Note In a GbE port for which line card operation mode is set to FE, the frame size is treated as 1536 bytes even when the frame size setting value exceeds 1536 bytes.

Commands

set frame-size Setting of frame size

show frame-size Display of frame size

Input example

The frame size is set to 1536 bytes for the FE port and 9000 bytes for the GbE port.

*Switch# set frame-size fe 1536

*Switch# set frame-size gbe 9000

*Switch# show frame-size

Frame Size Value(Byte)

=================

FE-Port : 1536

GbE-Port : 9000

*Switch#

Page 162: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Setting of Basic Functions

2-98

2.3.1.6 Spanning tree protocol This unit supports the high-speed spanning tree function. In a large-scale network, redundant network operation is implemented to make the network always available. However, if a layer 2 switch in a network is set up in redundant configuration, it may cause a broadcast storm where a broadcast message loops, which can bring the network down. Then, spanning tree protocol is useful as a layer 2 protocol because it can avoid loops even if the switch is in redundant configuration.

On this unit, you can use the following two types of spanning tree protocols according to the operation system.

(1) High-speed spanning tree (IEEE802.1w): RSTP (Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol)

Protocol based on IEEE802.1w. This spanning tree reconfigures a tree around a root bridge quickly. This is the default function.

(2) Standard spanning tree (IEEE802.1D): STP (Spanning Tree Protocol)

When another device on the network supports STP instead of RSTP, this can be used as an alternate function of RSTP.

Note The standard spanning tree function of this unit is provided as an alternate function of the high-speed spanning tree function (IEEE802.1w). Therefore, the function is different from that of IEEE802.1D STP.

Note The spanning tree function does not work for ports other than GbE and Fe ports.

Note The spanning tree function does not work for ports where the EtherRing function is enabled.

Page 163: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Setting of Basic Functions

2-99

Basic operation of spanning tree

Root switch determination Each switch sends BPDU to other switches to notify them that it is a root switch so that a network can be configured on the tree having the root switch placed in the center.

In the RSTP mode, protocol communication of Proposal and Agreement is performed and the root switch and the designated port are determined at once.

Finally, the switch whose priority is the lowest (if the switch priorities are the same, the switch whose MAC address is the smallest) will be selected as the root switch.

In the STP mode, a tree configuration is not constructed by Proposal and Agreement method.

(1) Sends Proposal BPDU.

(3) Agreement BPDU Returns it if the other switch is more prioritized.

(2) Blocks the other ports.

(6) Blocks the other ports. (5) Sends Proposal BPDU.

(4) Immediately enters into the forwarding state.

1 2 3

1 2

1 2

Page 164: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Setting of Basic Functions

2-100

Determination of the root port and designated port In the RSTP mode, the root port and designated port are selected through the protocol communication of Proposal and Agreement.

In the course of determination of the root port and designated port, ports are compared in the following sequence both in the RSTP and STP mode.

1. Route ID

A route ID consists of a 2-octet switch priority and 6-octet MAC address. The port that receives the BPDU that has the route ID of the smallest value will be selected as the root port.

2. Route cost

The accumulated path cost value from the root switch. The port that has the smallest route cost will be selected as the root port.

In the above figure, the accumulated path cost value of the route from designated port B is 2.

3. Designated switch ID

The port of the switch whose switch ID (switch priority + MAC address) is the smallest will be selected as the designated port.

4. Designated port ID

A port ID consists of 2-octet port priority and 2-octet port number. The port that has the smallest port ID will be selected as the designated port.

Designated port A Path cost value 1

Root port B Path cost value 2

Designated port BPath cost value 3

Root port C Path cost value 4

Root switch A Designated switch B Designated switch C

Page 165: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Setting of Basic Functions

2-101

Port status change in spanning tree The root switch sends a BPDU to the designated switch in every 2 seconds by default. If this frame is not detected by any other switch before receiving timeout (6 seconds: three times the hello-time), or if only a BPDU of lower priority is received, the other switches will have receiving timeout and change the role of the port to designated port.

The behavior of the port statues upon reception of a BPDU is different between the RSTP mode and STP mode.

When operation is in RSTP mode

1) When an Agreement message is received, the status changes immediately.

Port status change: Discarding Forwarding

2) When no BPDU is received, the status changes to forwarding in about 30 seconds.

Port status change: Discarding Learning Forwarding

Transfer delay time (15 seconds by default) Transfer delay time (15 seconds by default)

Note If, however, the designated port is not set point-to-point, the operation will be the same as the operation in STP mode.

Page 166: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Setting of Basic Functions

2-102

When operation is in STP mode

If the transfer delay time is defaulted to 15 seconds, the status changes from discarding to forwarding in about 30 seconds whether a BPDU is received or not.

Port status change: Discarding Learning Forwarding

Transfer delay time (15 seconds by default) Transfer delay time (15 seconds by default)

Memo If a switch receives a higher-priority BPDU or nothing while the receiving timeout is enabled, it outputs a trap indicating detection of a new root switch. If a switch does not receive anything, it detects itself as the root switch.

Memo Port migration is included in port status change. Changing the status among the four statuses including send-stp, sending-stp, send-rstp, and sending-rstp is called migration. At the time when individual port sends a BPDU in RSTP or STP mode, a trap indicating occurrence of migration is output.

Memo In the event of a topology change, each port operates the timer for 4 seconds (twice the hello-time) by default in RSTP mode, or for 35 seconds (maximum aging time + transfer delay time) by default in STP mode. If a port receives a BPDU whose priority is higher than the priority it holds while the timer is working, it checks that the timer of each port has stopped and outputs a trap for topology change.

Note The length of receiving timeout is calculated from the smaller value between the maximum aging time minus the message age time of the BPDU and three times hello-time.

Note MAC learning of a BPDU without a VLAN tag is performed by VLAN ID 1.

Page 167: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Setting of Basic Functions

2-103

Sets the spanning tree mode, switch priority, and timer to be used in the system.

Sets the items required for configuration of a spanning tree on each port.

Applies the settings to the entire system and the status is checked by showing it.

Configuring spanning tree Configure a spanning tree following the steps described below.

Setting data on the switch 2-104

Setting data on the spanning tree port 2-107

Enabling spanning tree 2-111

Page 168: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Setting of Basic Functions

2-104

Setting data on the switch Sets information on the switch, which is necessary for spanning tree protocol to function.

Setting the mode

Sets either RSTP mode or STP mode for the CX2200 spanning tree protocol. Use the "set spantree mode" command to set the RSTP/STP mode.

Memo Mode change applies to the entire switch. The default is RSTP mode.

Note When you change the mode, RSTP/STP must be disabled.

Changing the mode initializes all configuration information related to RSTP/STP to the default values of the newly set mode.

Enabling or disabling RSTP/STP

Is performed using the "set spantree" command.

Set enable or disable as the parameter of the "set spantree" command.

Input example

The mode is set to RSTP.

Switch# set spantree mode rstp

*Switch# show spantree mode

Spantree Mode Information

=========================

Mode : rstp

Status : disabled

*Switch#

Page 169: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Setting of Basic Functions

2-105

Setting the switch priority

Sets the preferential switch. The switch whose priority is the smallest in the same network will be selected as the root switch.

Use the "set spantree priority" command to set the switch priority.

Memo If more than one switch exists, which has the smallest switch priority, in the same network, the switch whose MAC address is the smallest will be selected as the root switch.

Note In the RSTP mode, set the switch priority to a multiple of 4096.

Input example

The switch priority is set to 32768.

Setting the timer

Sets the timer information on the switch, which is necessary to make the spanning tree protocol to operate as you desire.

Setting the hello-time

Sets the intervals at which the switch sends a BPDU to other switches. When the root switch is determined, the switches will operate on the hello-time of the root switch.

Use the "set spantree time" command to set the hello-time.

Setting the transfer delay time

Sets the time taken for changing the port status from learning to forwarding. When the root switch is determined, the switches will operate on the transfer delay time of the root switch.

Use the "set spantree time" command to set the transfer delay time.

*Switch# set spantree priority 32768

*Switch#

Page 170: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Setting of Basic Functions

2-106

Setting the maximum aging time

Sets the maximum survival time of the received route information. When the root switch is determined, the switches will operate on the maximum aging time of the root switch.

Use the "set spantree time" command to set the maximum aging time.

Note For stability and correct modification of spanning tree, this setting must meet the following conditions.

2 × (Transfer delay time -1) ≥ Maximum aging time Maximum aging time ≥ 2 × (Hello-time + 1)

Input example

The timer is set. This is an example in the RSTP mode.

Setting the maximum BPDU transmission times

Sets the maximum times that a line on the switch can send a BPDU in a second and limits the BPDU transmission times in order to keep the bandwidth from spreading when a topology change occurs frequently.

Use the "set spantree txholdcount" command to set the maximum BPDU transmission times.

Memo This command is effective only in the RSTP mode.

Input example

The maximum BPDU transmission times is set to 3.

*Switch# set spantree txholdcount 3

*Switch#

*Switch# set spantree time hello 2

*Switch# set spantree time forward 15

*Switch# set spantree time maxage 20

*Switch#

Page 171: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Setting of Basic Functions

2-107

Setting data on the spanning tree port On the ports, sets the information which is necessary to make the spanning tree protocol to operate as you desire. This information determines that which line is preferentially used for the root port and designated port.

Memo When spanning tree is set together with link aggregation, BPDUs are sent from the smallest-number port of link aggregation in one same group. In this case, the settings of the smallest-number port of link aggregation are always used as the settings for spanning tree.

Note When flow control is enabled or set to autonegotiation on a line, the spanning tree function does not work on this line.

Enabling or disabling spanning tree operation for each port

Is performed using the "set spantree port" command. Enter the port number and enable or disable in this order as the parameters of the "set spantree port" command.

Memo If disable is set on a port, spanning tree does not apply to this port. It forwards frames in the same way as the ports where spanning tree is not set do.

Page 172: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Setting of Basic Functions

2-108

Setting the port path cost

Activates your desired path. The default setting is autonegotiation, which depends on the line speed.

Association between the line speed and path cost by default

Path cost Line speed

STP Mode (IEEE802.1D) RSTP Mode (IEEE802.1w)

10 Mbps 100 2000000

100 Mbps 19 200000

1 Gbps 4 20000

In RSTP/STP configuration, the root switch and all the other switches shall be connected by the paths having the lowest port path cost possible. To set a port path cost independently from the line speed, use the "set spantree port cost" command.

Memo The range of port path cost that can be set is different depending on the mode.

RSTP mode: 1-200000000 STP mode: 1-65535

Page 173: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Setting of Basic Functions

2-109

Setting the port priority

Activates your desired path on a priority basis. If two or more ports have a path to the other port of which path cost is the same, the port whose priority is the lowest is selected as the root port. Use the "set spantree port priority" command to set the priority.

If the port priorities are also same, the port whose port number is the smallest will be selected as the root port.

Memo In the RSTP mode, a port priority can be a multiple of 16.

Input example

Spanning tree is set for each port. This is an example in the RSTP mode.

Setting point-to-point

Makes the other device to operate as connected point-to-point and to be a target of instant switching. When autonegotiation is set, the state changes to enable or disable depending on the full duplex setting with the other device. Set point-to-point by using the "set spantree port point-to-point" command.

Memo This command is effective only in the RSTP mode.

Note When link aggregation is used together, set this item to auto or enable.

*Switch# set spantree port 17-19 enable

*Switch# set spantree port cost 18 20000

*Switch# set spantree port priority 19 128

*Switch#

Page 174: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Setting of Basic Functions

2-110

Setting the edge port

Changes a port connected to a device (terminal) other than a switch, at the time of linkup, into a port that can transfer frames. Use the "set spantree port edge" command to set an edge port.

Memo This command is effective only in the RSTP mode. BPDU transmission is performed periodically also on the line having this setting.

Input example

Point-to-point is set to 19, and edge port is set to 17.

*Switch# set spantree port point-to-point 19 enable

*Switch# set spantree port edge 17 enable

*Switch#

Page 175: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Setting of Basic Functions

2-111

Enabling spanning tree

Enabling spanning tree

Applies spanning tree to the entire system. Perform this setting after completing all the above settings. To enable spanning tree, use the "set spantree" command.

Memo If you disable this function, a network loop may occur. Therefore, if you do not use spanning tree, change the network configuration such that no loops may occur before you disable this function.

Input example

*Switch# set spantree enable

*Switch# show spantree mode

Spantree Mode Information

=========================

Mode : rstp

Status : enabled

*Switch#

Page 176: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Setting of Basic Functions

2-112

Displaying spanning tree information

Shows information of individual port with the "show spantree port" or "show spantree info" command. You can confirm the information in the same way either in RSTP or STP mode. For details on the commands, see "Command Reference".

Input examples

Spanning tree port information is shown. You can see that 17 is the root port.

*Switch# show spantree port 17-25

RSTP Port Configuration Table

=============================

Port Priority Status Edge Cost

-------------------------------------------

17 128 enabled enabled auto

18 128 enabled disabled 20000

19 128 enabled disabled auto

20 128 disabled disabled auto

21 128 disabled disabled auto

22 128 disabled disabled auto

23 128 disabled disabled auto

24 128 disabled disabled auto

25 128 disabled disabled auto

RSTP Port Status Table

======================

DES DES DES

Port Status Role Cost Bridge Cost Port TC

---------------------------------------------------------------------------

17 forwarding root 200000 03fb00004cb42511 19 8029 1

18 discarding disabled 20000 800000004cb4fc70 0 8002 0

19 discarding disabled 800000004cb4fc70 0 8003 0

20 discarding disabled 200000 800000004cb4fc70 0 8004 0

21 discarding disabled 200000 800000004cb4fc70 0 8005 0

22 discarding disabled 800000004cb4fc70 0 8006 0

23 discarding disabled 800000004cb4fc70 0 8007 0

24 discarding disabled 200000 800000004cb4fc70 0 8008 0

25 discarding disabled 800000004cb4fc70 0 8011 0

*Switch#

Page 177: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Setting of Basic Functions

2-113

Spanning tree information is shown. You can see that 17 is the root port. The settings given on the local switch are shown under Local Switch Information and information from the root switch is shown mainly under STP Global Information.

*Switch# show spantree info

STP Global Information

======================

Spanning Tree Version : IEEE802.1w(RSTP)

STP Priority : 32768

Time Since Topology Change (sec): 18015

STP Topology Changes : 0

STP Designated Root : 000000004cc4e3c1

STP Root Cost : 200019

STP Root Port Number : 17

STP MAX Age (sec): 20

STP Hello Time (sec): 2

STP Hold Time (sec): 1

STP Forward Delay (sec): 15

Local Switch Information

========================

STP Bridge MAX Age (sec): 20

STP Bridge Hello Time (sec): 2

STP Bridge Forward Delay (sec): 15

STP TX Hold Count : 3

*Switch#

Page 178: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Setting of Basic Functions

2-114

Sets the port isolate.

Clears the port isolate.

Displays the port isolate setting status.

2.3.2 Setting of Extended Functions 2.3.2.1 Port isolate CX2200 has the port isolate function that blocks the destination port of frames received from arbitrary port. Transfer blocking is performed for all frames (broadcast, multicast, unicast frames and flooding frames).

If the port isolate function has not been set (default status), frames coming from all ports can be transferred to all other ports regardless of its line card type, as shown below for instance.

If the port isolate is set, you can enable a communication between FE and GbE and between GbE and GbE while only the communication between FEs is disabled, as shown below for instance.

Setting port isolate 2-115

Clearing port isolate 2-116

Displaying port isolate 2-117

FE

GbE

2/1 2/2

CX2200

Send Transfer

Transfer

17 20 24

FE

GbE

2/1 2/2

CX2200

Send

Transfer

17 20 24

Page 179: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Setting of Basic Functions

2-115

Setting port isolate Sets the port isolate. By setting the port isolate function, you can prevent from transferring frames coming from the specified port to another specified port.

Command

set isolate port Setting/clearing of port isolate

Memo The port isolate setting does not impact the configuration data which has already been set because it is an additional specification of specified transfer destination port for the specified reception port.

Note The setting can not be performed in complex with the link aggregation for the same port.

Note To set for GbE port, and ATMoP or TDMoP group, specify the line group number.

Input example

Frames coming from port 17 are not transferred to none of port 20 to 24.

Switch# set isolate port 17 20-24 enable

*Switch#

Page 180: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Setting of Basic Functions

2-116

Clearing port isolate Clears the port isolate. By clearing the port isolate function, you can transfer frames coming from the specified port to another specified port.

Command

set isolate port Setting/clearing of port isolate

Memo Clearing port isolate setting does not impact the configuration data which has already been set because it clears only the setting regarding specified transfer destination port for the specified reception port.

Note To set for GbE port, and ATMoP or TDMoP group, specify the line group number.

Input example

Frames coming from port 17 are transferred to any of port 20 to 24.

Switch# set isolate port 17 20-24 disable

*Switch#

Page 181: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Setting of Basic Functions

2-117

Displaying port isolate Shows the port isolate setting state of the specified reception port.

Command

show isolate port Display of port isolate setting state

Input example

Port isolate state of the reception port 17 is displayed.

*Switch# show isolate port 17

FE Isolate Configuration

========================

State of Port-Isolate of Port: 17

Transfer-Blocking Port : 20-24

*Switch#

Page 182: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Setting of Basic Functions

2-118

2.3.2.2 Filtering The filtering function expressly directs the system to discard frames by specifying a traffic type. CX2200 has the input port filtering function.

1 Input port filtering function At the input port, this function expressly directs the system to discard frames using information in frames. Up to 32 indexes can be set per port. To set the filtering, set a port number, index, and discarding condition.

The followings can be selected for the discarding condition.

• Destination MAC address (48-bit)

• Source MAC address (48-bit)

• VLAN ID (Outer-Vlan) (16-bit)

• Ethernet type (16-bit)

Memo Two or more conditions can be selected for discarding.

Memo This function checks frames in the ascending order of the index numbers, and when it finds an input frame having the same information as the specified information, it performs filtering.

Memo The point in a frame to be referred for Ethernet type varies depending on the tag assignment status. When the TPID (tag protocol ID) of the outer tag is different from the TPID set on the port, the field is referred to. When the TPID of the inner tag is not 0x8100, the field is referred to. When the TPID of the inner tag is 0x8100, the next field is referred to.

Page 183: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Setting of Basic Functions

2-119

Referring example

* EhterType Setting of the port: 0x9100

Note For multiple tags, up to two stages are supported.

Note If the tag swap function has been set, VLAN-ID to which the tag swap function is enabled is to be filtered.

Note This function cannot be set for ports other than the GbE port.

MAC addressVLAN ID1000

EtherType0x0800

Data TPID 0x9100

MAC addressData EtherType 0x0800

MAC addressVLAN ID1000

TPID0x8100

Data VLAN ID1000

EtherType0x0800

TPID 0x9100

- Frame without tag

- Tag frame with one stage

- Tag frame with two stages

EtherType to be referred

Page 184: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Setting of Basic Functions

2-120

Operation example

The following example shows the operation of the filtering function in the reception port.

Filter index list Destination Source

Index MAC Address MAC Address VID Ether-Type

------------------------------------------------------------

1 00:00:00:00:00:01 00:11:22:33:44:55 1000 ---

2 --- --- 3000 ---

3 --- --- --- 0x0800

Frame A

Frame B

Frame C

Frame D

Frame E

Frame F

CX2200

Frame list - Frame A - Frame B - Frame C - Frame D - Frame E - Frame F Source MAC

00:11:22:33:44:55 Destination MAC

00:00:00:06:06:06Data EtherType

0x0800 VLAN ID TPID

1000 0x9100VLAN ID TPID

1000 0x8100

Source MAC

00:11:22:33:44:55 Destination MAC

00:00:00:05:05:05Data EtherType

0x0800VLAN ID TPID

1000 0x9100

Source MAC

00:11:22:33:44:55 Destination MAC

00:00:00:00:00:01Data EtherType

0x0900VLAN ID TPID

1000 0x9100

Source MAC

00:55:44:33:22:11 Destination MAC

00:00:00:00:00:01Data EtherType

0x0900VLAN ID TPID

1000 0x9100

Source MAC

00:11:22:33:44:55 Destination MAC

00:00:00:03:03:03Data VLAN ID TPID

2000 0x9100EtherType

0x0900

Source MAC

00:11:22:33:44:55 Destination MAC

00:00:00:04:04:04Data EtherType

0x0800

Transmit

Frame B

Frame A

Frame C

Frame D

Frame E

Frame F

Discarded as the frame satisfies the filter index 1 condition.

Discarded as the frame satisfies the filter index 2 condition by VLAN SWAP.

Not discarded as it does not satisfy any of the filtering conditions.

Submit

VLAN:1000

SWAP VLAN: 2000 → 3000

Ether type: 0x9100

Filter index: 1, 2, 3

Discarded as each Ether Type satisfies the filter index 3 condition.

Dis

card

Page 185: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Setting of Basic Functions

2-121

Commands

set filter in-port Setting of input filtering

clear filter in-port Clearing of input filtering

show filter in-port Display of input filtering

Input example

*Switch# set filter in-port 25 1 dest-mac 00:00:00:00:00:01 src-mac

00:11:22:33:44:55 vlan-id 1000

*Switch# set filter in-port 25 2 vlan-id 3000

*Switch# set filter in-port 25 3 ether-type 0x0800

*Switch#

*Switch# show filter in-port 25

Filter Profile Table

====================

Port : 25

=========

Destination Source

Index MAC Address MAC Address VID Ether-Type

--------------------------------------------------------------

1 00:00:00:00:00:01 00:11:22:33:44:55 1000 ---

2 --- --- 3000 ---

3 --- --- --- 0x0800

*Switch#

Page 186: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Setting of Basic Functions

2-122

2.3.2.3 Reference clock control function Performs the setting regarding reference clock applied to the network synchronization required for the data frame transmission.

This unit supports two types of reference clock control: one is to set multiple clock sources (hereinafter called "source clock") to be a reference clock with priorities (unit collective clock mode), and the other is to set a source clock for each clock supply destination group (line-independent clock mode).

This unit also supports the function that outputs a clock from the interface port.

Clock output function This function outputs a clock from the clock interface port.

Memo The clock output function runs under the CPUSWE card only.

Memo The clock that is output is fixed to the 2048kHz synchronization mode (120Ω).

Note As clock output cannot be stopped, disconnect the cable from the port when not using the function.

CX260CX260CX260

CX2200-

CX2600-

Clock output

TDM/ATM Network

TDM/ATM Network

Network synchronization

Within the station

Network synchronization

Page 187: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Setting of Basic Functions

2-123

Setting the line-independent clock mode Sets the operation mode of the reference clock control function.

If the line-independent clock mode is disabled, this unit operates in the unit collective clock mode.

Memo You can change the operation mode only when any 32T1E1H line card /32T1E1T line

card is being mounted and the reference clock control function is set to the default.

1 Unit collective clock mode

The unit selects a source clock which is to be a reference clock automatically based on the source clock state and priority settings. When the source clock applied as a reference clock is disabled to be supplied, the unit selects another reference clock based on the state of other source clock and priority settings automatically.

While in the unit collective clock mode, source clocks for this unit are as follows.

• Line extraction clock.............Clock supplied by ATM/TDM line

• Adaptive clock ......................Clock regenerated from RTP packet

Settable source clock varies depending on the line card type. See the following table.

Line card type Line extraction clock Adaptive clock Clock priority setting

32T1E1H line card Up to two sets * Up to two sets Up to two sets can be set in total

32T1E1T line card Up to two sets * Up to two sets Up to two sets can be set in total

1ATM155A line card One set One set Up to two sets can be set in total

* Four sets in total, one for port 1 to 8, another one for port 9 to 16, another one for port 33 to 40, and the other one for port 41 to 48.

Note When all the source clocks are disabled to be supplied, the unit retains the last clock

which has been applied as a reference clock, which will be the reference clock.

Page 188: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Setting of Basic Functions

2-124

Setting the reference clock switchover mode Sets the reference clock switchover mode.

Reference clock switchover modes for this unit are as follows.

Switchover mode Mode description

With auto switch/ With auto switch-back

When the source clock which has been applied as a reference clock gets disabled to be supplied, or when a source clock with a priority higher than currently selected reference clock gets enabled, the reference clock selection is performed and the highest-priority source clock is selected among the ones which are being supplied.

With auto switch/ Without auto switch-back

The reference clock selection is performed only when the source clock which has been applied as a reference clock is disabled to be supplied, and the highest-priority source clock is selected among the source clocks with the priority lower than the one which is disabled to be supplied.

Memo Reference clock selection may be performed shortly after executing the command.

Memo When the source clock gets enabled to be supplied after setting a priority in a condition that reference clock priority setting does not exist, the reference clock selection is performed regardless of the switchover mode.

Setting reference clock priority Sets the source clock priorities which are selectable for the reference clock. The priorities can be set on a scale of 1 to 3.

Specify either Line extraction clock or Adaptive clock for the arbitrary priority.

Memo When specifying Adaptive clock, the adaptive clock setting is required separately.

Note Priority which has been already set cannot be modified. Set it again after clearing the priority.

Note Two or more priorities cannot be set for the same port.

Page 189: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Setting of Basic Functions

2-125

Resetting reference clock Restart the operation of a reference clock selection. A source clock to be the reference clock is automatically selected based on the source clock state and priority setting.

Commands

set reference-clock multiple-source Setting of line-independent clock mode

set reference-clock mode Setting of reference clock switchover mode

set reference-clock priority Setting of reference clock priority

show reference-clock information Display of reference clock setting and state

reset reference-clock Resetting of reference clock

Input example

*Switch# set reference-clock multiple-source disable

*Switch# set reference-clock mode revertive

*Switch# set reference-clock priority 1 port 33

*Switch# set reference-clock priority 3 adaptive 5

*Switch# show reference-clock information

Reference Clock Information

===========================

Multiple-Source : disabled

Reference Clock Mode : revertive

Clock Supply Status Table

=========================

Priority Source Status

-------------------------------------

* 1 port:33 normal

3 adaptive:5 fail

*Switch#

Page 190: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Setting of Basic Functions

2-126

2 Line-independent clock mode

Sets a source clock (reference clock) and clock supply destination ports for each clock group (up to three groups), making each group synchronize with the independent reference clock.

While in the line-independent clock mode, source clock for this unit is as follows.

• Adaptive clock ......................Clock regenerated from RTP packet

Settable source clock varies depending on the line card type. See the following table.

Line card type Adaptive clock Clock group setting

32T1E1H line card Up to three sets Up to three sets can be set in total

32T1E1T line card Up to three sets Up to three sets can be set in total

1ATM155A line card Not settable Not settable

Note You cannot set the line-independent clock mode when the TDMoP mode is set to CESoPSN.

Note You cannot set the line-independent clock mode when the TDMoP mode is not set to SAToP. For 32T1E1H card, however, you cannot set the port 33 to 48 as the clock extraction source, because the adaptive-clock (a TDMoP control function) can be set only to the port from 1 to 16. (For 32T1E1T, you can set the port 33 to 48 as the clock extraction source.)

Setting reference clock group For each clock group, sets a source clock and clock supply destination ports.

Up to three groups can be set.

Multiple ports can be set as port supply destination ports.

Memo The adaptive clock setting is required separately.

Note If group 1 is specified, you cannot specify clock supply destination ports. (If the setting of group 2 or 3 is done, the clock supply destination ports for group 1 are reconfigured automatically.

Note You cannot change the source clock that is already set. Change it after clearing the setting of the corresponding group. (You can change clock supply destination ports that are already set.)

Note You cannot set a port in multiple groups as a clock source port or as a clock supply destination port.

Page 191: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Setting of Basic Functions

2-127

Commands

set reference-clock multiple-source Setting of line-independent clock mode

set reference-clock group Setting of reference clock group

show reference-clock information Display of reference clock setting and state

Input example

*Switch# set reference-clock multiple-source enable

*Switch# set reference-clock group 1 adaptive 2

*Switch# set reference-clock group 2 adaptive 3 5,6,10-12

*Switch# set reference-clock group 3 adaptive 4 7,9,13,44-48

*Switch# show reference-clock information

Reference Clock Information

===========================

Multiple-Source : enabled

Reference Clock Supply Status Table

===================================

Group Source Status Member Ports

-------------------------------------------------------------------

1 adaptive:2 fail 1,8,14-16,33-43

2 adaptive:3 acquiring 5-6,10-12

3 adaptive:4 acquiring 7,9,13,44-48

*Switch#

Page 192: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

ATM Functions

2-128

Register a PVC.

Clear a PVC.

Register a PVC name.

Clear a PVC name.

Block or unblock a PVC.

Set the ATMoP mode.

Set the ATMoP format.

Clear the setting of the ATMoP format.

Set the ATM cell concatenation.

Clear the setting of ATM cell concatenation

2.4 ATM Functions 2.4.1 ATM Path Setting Configure ATM path settings.

Registrering PVC 2-130

Clearing PVC 2-130

Registering PVC name 2-131

Clearing PVC name 2-131

Blocking/unblocking PVC 2-132

Setting ATMoP mode 2-134

Setting ATMoP format 2-135

Clearing ATMoP format setting 2-136

Setting ATM cell concatenation 2-140

Clearing ATM cell concatenation setting 2-142

Page 193: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

ATM Functions

2-129

Set the CLP-PW Priority mapping.

Set a path between ATMs.

Clear the setting of the pass between ATMs.

Setting CLP-PW Priority mapping 2-146

Setting path between ATMs 2-150

Clearing path setting between ATMs 2-151

Page 194: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

ATM Functions

2-130

2.4.1.1 PVC setting

Registrering PVC Registers a PVC to make that specified PVC available and ready for communication with the connected destination. PVC types are the VP connection and the VC connection. The VP connection allows communication using all VCI values in a registered VPI value.

Commands

set pvc static Registration of a PVC

show pvc information Display of PVC setting status

Memo Up to 256 PVCs can be registered.

Note 0 to 255 can be used for VPI, and 32 to 16383 can be used for VCI. However, total width in bits of VPI and VCI needs to be within 16 bits.

Clearing PVC Clears a registered PVC.

Commands

clear pvc static Clearing of a PVC

show pvc information Display of PVC setting status

Memo If a PVC is cleared, other setting information associated with that PVC is cleared.

Page 195: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

ATM Functions

2-131

Registering PVC name Assigns a PVC name to a registered PVC.

You can specify a PVC name instead of PVC (VPI, VCI) using ATM related commands.

Commands

set pvc name Registration of a PVC name

show pvc information Display of PVC setting status

Memo If a PVC is cleared, the PVC name corresponding to the cleared PVC is also cleared.

Memo A PVC name must be 1 to 32 characters long.

Memo A PVC name may consist of alphabetic letters (both uppercase and lowercase), numbers (0 to 9), hyphen (-), and underbar (_). A PVC name must begin with an alphabetic letter.

Note This function cannot be used if the PVC is not registered.

Clearing PVC name Clears an assigned PVC name.

Commands

clear pvc name Clearing of a PVC name

show pvc information Display of PVC setting status

Page 196: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

ATM Functions

2-132

Blocking/unblocking PVC Sets blocking/unblocking of a PVC. Blocking a PVC stops the connection. Unblocking a PVC resumes the connection.

Commands

set pvc admin Blocking or unblocking of a single PVC

set pvc port admin Simultaneous blocking or unblocking of PVCs

show pvc information Display of PVC setting status

Memo If a PVC is cleared, this setting is automatically cleared.

Memo The default value is enable (unblock).

Memo If the command mode is execution limitation mode, an execution confirmation is issued after command input when enbloc PVC blocking/unblocking is set.

Note The PVC blocking/unblocking cannot be set if the PVC is not registered.

Page 197: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

ATM Functions

2-133

Input example

• Registration of PVCs (0/32, 0/33, 0/34, and 100)

• Assignment of a PVC name to a PVC (0/32 and 100)

• Blocking of a PVC (0/34 and 100)

*Switch# set pvc static 1 0/32-34

*Switch# set pvc static 1 100

*Switch# set pvc name 1 0/32 test

*Switch# set pvc name 1 100 vptest

*Switch# set pvc admin 1 0/34 disable

*Switch# set pvc admin 1 100 disable

*Switch# show pvc information

PVC System Connection Count

===========================

Configured Configurable

------------------------

3 253

PVC Port Connection Count

====================

Port Enabled Disabled Configured

-----------------------------------

1 2 2 4

2 0 0 0

3 0 0 0

4 0 0 0

5 0 0 0

PVC Table

=========

Port VPI/VCI Name Admin

---------------------------------------------------------

1 0/32 test enabled

1 0/33 enabled

1 0/34 disabled

1 100/--- vptest disabled

*Switch#

Page 198: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

ATM Functions

2-134

2.4.1.2 ATMoP

Setting ATMoP mode Sets the mode of an PW frame that encapsulates an ATM cell. Also, sets the mode of an PW frame accepted in decapsulation. 2-hop VLAN tag (c-tag) mode and UDP/IP (udp-ip) mode are available as mode types. There are UDP port mode source and destination for the UDP/IP mode. Control word existence also can be set for each mode.

Commands

set atmop mode Setting of ATMoP mode

show atmop format Display of ATMoP format information

Memo By default, the 2-hop VLAN tag mode is set and the control word setting is disabled.

Ether frame header

Payload (ATM cell)

Ether frame header

Payload (ATM cell)

UDP header

IP header

2-hop tag UDP/IP

ATM cell

ATM cell

PW framePacket

Network

BTS

CX2600/220CX2600/220

CX2600 RNC

PW frame

* Encapsulate an ATM cell as an PW frame.

CX2200-

Page 199: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

ATM Functions

2-135

Setting ATMoP format ATMoP format setting function maps registered PVCs. In the 2-hop VLAN tag mode, they are mapped to the VLAN. They are mapped to the IP address and UDP port number in the UDP/IP mode. This setting enables transmission of an PW frame that encapsulates an ATM cell (ATM --> PW conversion) and transmission of an ATM cell decapsulated from an PW frame (PW --> ATM conversion).

An identical VLAN ID or IP address and UDP port number can be mapped for multiple PVCs. (PVC=n : VLAN/IP address, UDP port number=1)

Also, an Inner VLAN ID or UDP/IP header can be attached to the generated PW frame.

Commands

set atmop format Setting of ATMoP format

show atmop format Display of ATMoP format information

Memo This setting is cleared automatically when the PVC is cleared.

Note This function cannot be set when the PVC has not been registered.

Note To attach an Inner VLAN ID, "c-tag" must have been specified for the ATMoP mode setting.

Note To attach a UDP/IP header, "udp-ip" must have been specified for the ATMoP mode setting.

Note The PVC used for path connection between ATMs and for the ATM cell concatenation function cannot be specified in this function.

Note If the control word addition is selected in the ATMoP mode, the communication is not established unless the control word is added also to the frames from the other device.

Page 200: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

ATM Functions

2-136

Clearing ATMoP format setting Clears ATMoP format setting.

Commands

clear atmop format Clearing of ATMoP format setting

show atmop format Display of ATMoP format information

Setting example (2-hop VLAN tag mode)

* If the control word addition is selected in the ATMoP mode, it is added in Payload.

VLANVLAN 10

PVC 0/32

Port 1

ポ ー10

/

VLAN

VLAN 200

Port 25

CX2200

CX2600/220CX2600/220

MAC address 00:30:13:a1:2a:aa

VLAN(Tag2) 300

MAC address 00:00:00:00:00:01

VLAN(Tag2) 300

Packet Network

BTS

VLAN 200

PW frame

DA SA Tag1 200

Payload(ATM cell)

Type Tag2 300

Page 201: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

ATM Functions

2-137

Setting procedure to implement an ATMoP like as the above figure is shown below.

- Set GbE port to tagbase (VID=200).

- Set PVC (0/32) to ATMP port (1).

- Set ATMP mode to 2-hop VLAN tag.

- Map PVC (0/32) to VLAN (VID=300).

*Switch# set vlan tagbase 25 200

*Switch# set pvc static 1 0/32

*Switch# set atmop mode c-tag

*Switch# set atmop format 1 0/32 5/100 00:30:13:01:01:01 outer 200 inner 300

*Switch# show atmop format

ATMoP Table

===========

Source Packet Source Control

MAC Address Format IP Address Port Mode Word

------------------------------------------------------------------

00:30:13:a1:2a:aa c-tag --- --- disabled

ATMoP L2-Header Table

=====================

VPI/VCI VPI/VCI Destination Outer Inner

Port (ATM) (ATMoP) MAC Address VID VID

-------------------------------------------------------

1 0/32 5/100 00:30:13:01:01:01 200 300

ATMoP L3-Header Table

=====================

VPI/VCI Source Destination Destination

Port (ATM) UDP Port IP address UDP Port TTL

----------------------------------------------------------

1 0/32 --- --- --- ---

*Switch#

Page 202: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

ATM Functions

2-138

Setting example (UDP/IP mode)

* When the UDP mode is source, 5000 is set for the source UDP port number and 2142 is set for the destination UDP port number.

* When the UDP mode is destination, 2142 is set for the source UDP port number and 5000 is set for the destination UDP port number.

* If the control word addition is selected in the ATMoP mode, it is added in Payload.

PVC 0/32

Port 1

VLAN 200

Port 25

CX2200

CX2600/220CX2600/220

MAC address 00:30:13:01:01:01 IP address 192.168.20.1 UDP port number 5000

Packet Network

BTS VLAN 200

MAC address 00:30:13:a1:2a:aa IP address 192.168.10.1 UDP port number 5000

DA SA Tag1 200

Payload(ATM cell)

Type IP header Destination IP 192.168.10.1 Source IP 192.168.20.1

PW frame (reception)

UDP headerUDP port number 5000

DA SA Tag1 200

Payload(ATM cell)

Type IP header Destination IP 192.168.20.1 Source IP 192.168.10.1

Ether frame (transmission)

UDP headerUDP port number 5000

PW frame

DA SA Tag1 200

Payload(ATM cell)

Type IP header Destination IP 192.168.20.1 Source IP 192.168.10.1

PW frame (transmission) UDP headerUDP port number 5000

Page 203: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

ATM Functions

2-139

Setting procedure to implement an ATMoP like as the above figure is shown below.

- Set GbE port to tagbase (VID=200).

- Set PVC (0/32) to ATMP port (1).

- Set ATMP mode to UDP/IP.

- Map PVC (0/32) to the IP address (192.168.20.1) and UDP port number (5000).

*Switch# set vlan tagbase 25 200

*Switch# set pvc static 1 0/32

*Switch# set atmop mode udp-ip 192.168.10.1

*Switch# set atmop format 1 0/32 00:30:13:01:01:01 outer 200 192.168.20.1 5000

*Switch# show atmop format

ATMoP Table

===========

Source Packet Source Control

MAC Address Format IP Address Port Mode Word

------------------------------------------------------------------

00:30:13:a1:2a:aa udp-ip 192.168.10.1 source disabled

ATMoP L2-Header Table

=====================

VPI/VCI VPI/VCI Destination Outer Inner

Port (ATM) (ATMoP) MAC Address VID VID

-------------------------------------------------------

1 0/32 --- 00:30:13:01:01:01 200 ---

ATMoP L3-Header Table

=====================

VPI/VCI Source Destination Destination

Port (ATM) UDP Port IP address UDP Port TTL

----------------------------------------------------------

1 0/32 5000 192.168.20.1 2142 128

*Switch#

Page 204: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

ATM Functions

2-140

Setting ATM cell concatenation

This function concatenates ATM cells when an ATM cell is encapsulated in a PW frame.

You can remove unnecessary overheads by concatenating ATM cells of multiple PVCs and encapsulating them with an 1PW header added.

Also, you can decapsulate PW encapsulated frames including concatenated ATM cells.

Commands

set atmop format concatenation Setting of ATM cell concatenation group

set atmop format concatenation member Setting of ATM cell concatenation member

show atmop format concatenation Display of ATM cell concatenation information

Memo This setting is cleared automatically when the PVC is cleared.

The above is applicable to the "set atmop format concatenation member" command.

Note This function cannot be used if the PVC is not registered.

The above is applicable to the "set atmop format concatenation member" command.

Note To attach an Inner VLAN ID, "c-tag" must have been specified for the ATMoP mode setting.

The above is applicable to the "set atmop format concatenation" command.

[ATM port] CX2200 [GbE port]

PVC=0/32 port1

PVC=0/33 port2

PVC=0/34 port3 port25VID=100

Cell concatenation

Group1

Page 205: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

ATM Functions

2-141

Note To attach a UDP/IP header, "udp-ip" must have been specified for the ATMoP mode setting.

The above is applicable to the "set atmop format concatenation" command.

Note The PVC used for the ATMoP format and path connection between ATM (within the same port only) cannot be specified in this function.

The above is applicable to the "set atmop format concatenation member" command.

Note If the control word addition is selected in the ATMoP mode, the communication is not established unless the control word is added also to the frames from the other device.

* Note on the setting of the ATM cell concatenation timeout value

An appropriate timeout value is required to be set according to the use environment (such as card type, the number of concatenated cells, or acceptable delay time) of this function.

The time that the number of concatenated cells remains varies depending on the line speed. For your reference to decide the timeout value, the time can be roughly estimated as shown below at the full rate speed.

• 155M: 53byte × 8bit / 155.520Mbps × n (the number of concatenated cells) ≈ 2.7 × n (the number of concatenated cells) μsec

• E1: 53byte × 8bit / 2.048Mbps × n (the number of concatenated cells) ≈ 207 × n (the number of concatenated cells) μsec

• T1: 53byte × 8bit / 1.544Mbps × n (the number of concatenated cells) ≈ 274.6 × n (the number of concatenated cells) μsec

The time twice as much as the one that the 16 cells remain at 155 M is referred to for the setting granularity and the minimum setting value 100 μsec.

Page 206: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

ATM Functions

2-142

Clearing ATM cell concatenation setting Clears ATM cell concatenation setting.

Commands

clear atmop format concatenation Clearing of ATM cell concatenation group

clear atmop format concatenation member Clearing of ATM cell concatenation member

show atmop format concatenation Display of ATM cell concatenation information

Setting example

The following example shows how to set the ATM cell concatenation function.

When the ATMoP mode is "c-tag"

- Set GbE port to tagbase (VID=100).

- Set PVC to ATMP port.

- Set ATMP mode to 2-hop VLAN tag.

- Set ATM cell concatenation group (Group number=1).

- Set ATM cell concatenation member.

Page 207: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

ATM Functions

2-143

*Switch#set port mode atmop 1-3

*Switch#set vlan tagbase 25 100

*Switch#set pvc static 1 0/32

*Switch#set pvc static 2 0/33

*Switch#set pvc static 3 0/34

*Switch#set atmop mode c-tag

*Switch#set atmop format concatenation 1 16 2000 00:30:13:01:01:01 outer 100

inner 3000

*Switch#set atmop format concatenation member 1 1 0/32

*Switch#set atmop format concatenation member 1 2 0/33

*Switch#set atmop format concatenation member 1 3 0/34

*Switch#

*Switch# show atmop format concatenation

ATMoP Concatenation table

=========================

Number

Group of Cells TimeOut

------------------------

1 16 2000

Concatenation L2-Header Table

=============================

Destination Outer Outer Inner Inner

Group MAC Address VID VID COS VID VID COS

--------------------------------------------------------

1 00:30:13:01:01:01 100 5 3000 5

Concatenation L3-Header Table

=============================

No entry in the table.

Concatenation Member Table

==========================

VPI/VCI VPI/VCI

Group Port (ATM) (ATMoP)

-----------------------------

1 1 0/32 ---

2 0/33 ---

3 0/34 ---

*Switch#

Page 208: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

ATM Functions

2-144

When the ATMoP mode is "udp-ip"

- Set GbE port to tagbase (VID=100).

- Set PVC to ATMP port.

- Set ATMoP mode to UDP/IP.

- Set ATM cell concatenation group (Group number=1).

- Set ATM cell concatenation member.

Page 209: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

ATM Functions

2-145

*Switch#set port mode atmop 1-3

*Switch#set vlan tagbase 25 100

*Switch#set pvc static 1 0/32

*Switch#set pvc static 2 0/33

*Switch#set pvc static 3 0/34

*Switch# set atmop mode udp-ip 192.168.2.1

*Switch# set atmop format concatenation 1 16 2000 00:30:13:01:01:01 outer 100

192.168.2.10 5001

*Switch#set atmop format concatenation member 1 1 0/32

*Switch#set atmop format concatenation member 1 2 0/33

*Switch#set atmop format concatenation member 1 3 0/34

*Switch#

*Switch# show atmop format concatenation

ATMoP Concatenation table

=========================

Number

Group of Cells TimeOut

------------------------

1 16 2000

Concatenation L2-Header Table

=============================

Destination Outer Outer Inner Inner

Group MAC Address VID VID COS VID VID COS

--------------------------------------------------------

1 00:30:13:01:01:01 100 5 --- ---

Concatenation L3-Header Table

=============================

Source Destination Destination

Group UDP Port IP Address UDP Port TTL DSCP

--------------------------------------------------------

1 5001 192.168.2.10 1024 128 46

Concatenation Member Table

==========================

VPI/VCI VPI/VCI

Group Port (ATM) (ATMoP)

-----------------------------

1 1 0/32 ---

2 0/33 ---

3 0/34 ---

*Switch#

Page 210: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

ATM Functions

2-146

Setting CLP-PW Priority mapping In the case of CX2200, a CoS value is set to the VLAN tag and a DSCP value is set to the IP header basing on the CLP value of ATM cell when converting an ATM cell into an Ether frame. When the hop count of VLAN tag is 2, CoS must be set for each tag. When a UDP/IP header is added, a DSCP value is set.

Examples of CoS value setting for VLAN tag and DSCP value setting for IP header based on CLP when converting an ATM cell flowed from PVC 0/32 into an Ether frame are shown in the next figure.

ATM cell CLP = 0

ATM cell CLP = 1

CX2200

CX2200

PVC 0/32

PVC 0/32

Ether frame Outer tag CoS = 7Inner tag CoS = 5

Ether frame Outer tag CoS = 2Inner tag CoS = 0

When the CLP value of the ATM cell is 0

When the CLP value of the ATM cell is 1

CLP value

Inner tag CoS value

Outer tag CoS value

0 5 7

1 0 2

CLP-CoS conversion map

IP header DSCP value

46

60

ATM cell CLP = 0

ATM cell CLP = 1

CX2200

CX2200

PVC 0/32

PVC 0/32

When the CLP value of the ATM cell is 0

When the CLP value of the ATM cell is 1

Ether frame Outer tag CoS = 7

IP header DSCP = 46

Ether frame Outer tag CoS = 2

IP header DSCP = 60

Page 211: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

ATM Functions

2-147

Memo The Outer tag CoS value and Inner tag CoS value when CLP=0/CLP=1 is defaulted to 5.

The IP header DSCP value when CLP=0/CLP=1 is defaulted to 46.

Memo This setting is cleared automatically when the PVC is cleared.

Note This function cannot be set when the PVC has not been registered.

Note When the portbase VLAN has been set for the Ether port, the Outer tag will not be transmitted to the network.

Commands

set atmop in-port priority Setting of CLP-PW Priority mapping

show atmop in-port priority Display of CLP-PW Priority mapping setting status

Input example

Set CLP-PW Priority mapping.

*Switch# set atmop in-port priority 1 0/32 clp0 outer 4 inner 5 dscp 40 clp1 outer

2 inner 0 dscp 50

*Switch# set atmop in-port priority 1 0/33 clp0 inner 1 clp1 outer 3 dscp 20

*Switch# set atmop in-port priority 1 0/34 clp0 outer 6 inner 4 clp1 dscp 40

*Switch# set atmop in-port priority 1 0/35 clp1 inner 3

*Switch# set atmop in-port priority 1 0/36 initial

*Switch# show atmop in-port priority 1

ATMoP Input CLP Priority Mapping Table

======================================

CLP=0 CLP=1

Port VPI/VCI Outer-tag Inner-tag DSCP Outer-tag Inner-tag DSCP

---------------------------------------------------------------------

1 0/32 4 5 40 2 0 50

1 0/33 5 1 46 3 5 20

1 0/34 6 4 46 5 5 40

1 0/35 5 5 46 5 3 46

1 0/36 5 5 46 5 5 46

*Switch#

Page 212: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

ATM Functions

2-148

Setting CLP In the case of CX2200, the following conversion methods can be specified for each PVC to convert an Ether frame into an ATM cell.

1. Non-update mode (transparent-mode)

This mode converts frames without updating CLP value.

2. Mode which updates fixed setting value (fix-mode)

This mode rewrites a CLP value to a fixed value which is 0 or 1.

3. Mode which updates setting value per CoS/DSCP (priority-mode)

This mode decides a CLP value based on the CoS or DSCP in the Ether frame.

Memo When the ATMoP mode is 2-hop VLAN tag mode, it is decided based on CoS.

Memo When the ATMoP mode is UDP-IP mode, it is decided based on DSCP.

The following example shows the CLP setting in an ATM cell transferred to PVC 0/32 and 0/33 in the priority-mode.

Commands

set atmop out-port clp mode Setting of CLP conversion mode

set atmop out-port clp priority Setting of CLP conversion priority

show atmop out-port clp Display of CLP conversion setting status

CX2200

Ether frame

CoS = 0

ATM cell

CLP = 1

PVC

0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5

CLP Setting (CLP=1)

0/32 1, 2, 0/33

0/32

Ether frame

CoS = 3

ATM cell

CLP = 0

0/33

Page 213: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

ATM Functions

2-149

Memo Setting of the CLP conversion mode will be automatically cleared when the PVC is cleared.

Input example

Set CLP.

*Switch# set pvc static 1 1/33

*Switch# set pvc static 2 0/32

*Switch# set pvc static 11 100/255

*Switch# set atmop out-port clp priority c-tag 7 1

*Switch# set atmop out-port clp priority udp-ip 0-62 1

*Switch# set atmop out-port clp mode 1 1/33 transparent

*Switch# set atmop out-port clp mode 2 0/32 fix 1

*Switch# set atmop out-port clp mode 11 100/255 priority

*Switch# show atmop out-port clp

Output CLP Mapping Table on Priority Mode (c-tag)

=================================================

CLP CoS

----------------

0 0-6

1 7

Output CLP Mapping Table on Priority Mode (udp-ip)

==================================================

CLP DSCP

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------

0 63

1 0-62

Output CLP Conversion Table

===========================

Port VPI/VCI Mode CLP

-------------------------------

1 1/33 transparent ---

2 0/32 fix 1

11 100/255 priority ---

*Switch#

Page 214: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

ATM Functions

2-150

2.4.1.3 ATM cell relay

Setting path between ATMs Path setting between ATMs is a function to relay ATM cells. This function sets a connection to a PVC between 2 ATMP ports.

Since this function is used with the ATMoP function, VLAN IDs or IP address and UDP port number must be set. (The values are arbitrary.)

Commands

set pvc connection Setting of path between ATMs

show pvc connection Display of path information between ATMs

Memo This setting is cleared automatically when the PVC is cleared.

Note This function cannot be set when the PVC has not been registered.

Note An Inner VLAN ID must be specified when the ATMoP mode is "c-tag".

An UDP port number must be specified when the ATMoP mode is "udp-ip".

Note The PVC used for the ATMoP format and for the ATM cell concatenation function cannot be specified in this function.

ATM cell ATM cell

ATM Network ATM Network

Registers PVCs.

Page 215: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

ATM Functions

2-151

Clearing path setting between ATMs Clears path setting between ATMs.

Commands

clear pvc connection Clearing path setting between ATMs

show pvc connection Display of path information between ATMs

Setting example

VLANVLAN 10

10

PVC 0/32

Port 1

ポート10/1

VLAN

PVC 1/40

Port 8

CX2200

ATM Network

ATM cell

ATM Network

Page 216: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

ATM Functions

2-152

Setting procedure to implement a path between ATMs like as the above figure is shown below.

- Set PVC (0/32) to ATMP port (1).

- Set PVC (1/40) to ATMP port (8).

- Set a connection between PVC (0/32) and PVC (1/40).

*Switch# set pvc static 1 0/32

*Switch# set pvc static 8 1/40

*Switch# set pvc connection 1 0/32 outer 2 inner 200 8 1/40 outer 3 inner 300

*Switch# show pvc connection

ATMoP Connection Table

======================

Port VPI/VCI Outer-VID Inner-VID Port VPI/VCI Outer-VID Inner-VID

------------------------------------------------------------------------

1 0/32 2 200 8 1/40 3 300

*Switch#

Page 217: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

ATM Functions

2-153

Set the Strict Priority mapping.

Set the ATM shaper.

Clear the ATM shaper.

2.4.2 ATM Shaper Function The ATM shaper function controls the ATM cell rate according to the set bandwidth value. ATM cells that exceed the bandwidth are discarded according to the class priority of the Strict Priority mapping function.

Setting Strict Priority mapping 2-154

Setting ATM shaper 2-156

Clearing ATM shaper 2-157

Strict Priority mapping function The Strict Priority mapping function sorts ATM cells according to the priority value in the PW header of Ether frames. Sorted ATM cells are transmitted in the order of priority from the highest.

There are four class priorities, which are the class A (highest) to class D (lowest).

The setting is specified all at once per unit.

Ether frame

Class-D

Class-C

Class-B

Class-A

<Ether to ATM line>

Strict Priority

Shaper ATM cell

Sort according to the Priority value per PW header (1) ATMoEther: CoS (3bit) value in C-Tag (inner r tag) (2) ATMoUDP/IP: DSCP (6bit) value in IP header

* Behavior image per port

FCS PW header

ATM cell

FCS PW header

ATM cell

(High)

(Low)

Page 218: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

ATM Functions

2-154

Setting Strict Priority mapping This function maps the priority value in the PW header to four classes. A priority value is set for each class (A to D).

In the case of ATM over Ethernet, the CoS (3bit) value is set, and in the case of ATM over UDP/IP, the DSCP (6bit) value is set for the priority value.

Commands

set atmop out-port strict-priority Setting of Strict Priority mapping

show atmop out-port strict-priority Display of Strict Priority mapping

Memo A CoS value (c-tag) and DSCP value (udp-ip) can be set separately, however they are sorted according to the priority value corresponding to the packet format of the ATMoP mode (c-tag/ udp-ip).

Mapping initial value list

Priority value Class

CoS value (c-tag) DSCP value (udp-ip)

A 6, 7 48 - 63

B 4, 5 32 - 47

C 0, 3 16 - 31

D 1, 2 0 - 15

Page 219: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

ATM Functions

2-155

Input example

• Map the CoS value to each class when the packet format is c-tag.

• Map the DSCP value to each class when the packet format is udp-ip.

*Switch# set atmop out-port strict-priority c-tag class-a 0-3 class-b 4-7

*Switch# set atmop out-port strict-priority udp-ip class-a 0,1 class-d 2-63

*Switch# show atmop out-port strict-priority

Output Strict Priority Mapping Table(c-tag)

===========================================

Class CoS

--------------------

class-a 0-3

class-b 4-7

class-c none

class-d none

Output Strict Priority Mapping Table(udp-ip)

============================================

Class DSCP

--------------------------------------------------------------------------

class-a 0-1

class-b none

class-c none

class-d 2-63

*Switch#

Page 220: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

ATM Functions

2-156

Setting ATM shaper This function sets a bandwidth value of ATM cell rate for an ATM port. The value can be set per port.

Commands

set atm-shaper rate Setting of ATM shaper

show atm-shaper rate Display of ATM shaper

Note When the line card type is 16T1E1H, the value can be set only when the port mode is atmop.

Note The value can be set per root port for an IMA group.

Note IMA group cannot be set or cleared for a port to which the ATM shaper is set.

To set or clear an IMA group, clear the ATM shaper setting.

Note The range of the settable bandwidth value differs depending on the following conditions.

- Line card type (1ATM155A/16T1E1H) - Frame type (e1/t1) - Frame format (crc4/crc4nocas/non-crc4/unframed) - Number of ports which belong to IMA group - IMA frame size (32/64/128/256)

* For the range of settable bandwidth value, refer to "10 ATM Shaper Setting Bandwidth Value List" in Appendix.

Note Actual rate has a margin of error of 2% at the maximum compared to the setting value.

Page 221: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

ATM Functions

2-157

Clearing ATM shaper This function clears a bandwidth value setting of ATM shaper.

Commands

clear atm-shaper rate Clearing of ATM shaper

show atm-shaper rate Display of ATM shaper

Input example

• Set the shaper bandwidth value (128) to an ATMP port (1).

• Set the shaper bandwidth value (64) to an ATMP port (6).

• Set the shaper bandwidth value (2048) to an ATMP port (10).

*Switch# set atm-shaper rate 1 128

*Switch# set atm-shaper rate 6 64

*Switch# set atm-shaper rate 10 2048

*Switch# show atm-shaper rate

ATM Shaper Table(Kbps)

======================

Port Rate

------------

1 128

2 ---

3 ---

4 ---

5 ---

6 64

7 ---

8 ---

9 ---

10 2048

11 ---

12 ---

13 ---

14 ---

15 ---

16 ---

*Switch#

Page 222: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

ATM Functions

2-158

Set the OAM alarm monitoring.

Set the ATM OAM alarm transfer.

Set the ATM OAM flow point.

Display the ATM OAM setting.

Display the ATM OAM status.

2.4.3 ATM-OAM Setting

Setting OAM 2-158

Setting ATM OAM alarm transfer 2-159

Setting ATM OAM flow point 2-160

Displaying ATM OAM setting 2-161

Displaying ATM OAM status 2-162

Setting OAM Enables or disables OAM alarm monitoring individually for the VP (F4) and VC (F5) levels with respect to registered path connections.

At the time of path connection registration, the OAM function is enabled by default.

If an IMA group has been set, the port number which is used for setting/display/notification will be the root port number.

For information about alarm transfer, see "2 Alarm Transfer Mechanism".

Page 223: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

ATM Functions

2-159

Setting ATM OAM alarm transfer To enable or disable ATM OAM alarm monitoring for the VP (f4) or VC (f5) level, use the "set atm-oam" command. When enabled, alarms are monitored and transferred as shown in the alarm transfer diagram. When disabled, alarm monitoring is not performed. For the VP level, an advance setting is available that allows you to specify whether to transfer the VC-AIS or VC-RDI to all the PVCs belonging to the corresponding VP when VP-AIS is received. In the "set atm-oam" command parameters, specify the level [VP (f4)/VC (f5)], PVC identifier (port number VPI or VPI/VCI PVC name), ATM OAM alarm transfer setting (enable/disable), and advanced setting (f5-generate).

Memo The advanced setting can be entered only when VP (f4) is specified for the level.

Command

set atm-oam Setting of ATM-OAM operation

Memo The default value is enable.

Note This function cannot be used if the PVC is not registered.

Page 224: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

ATM Functions

2-160

Setting ATM OAM flow point To set whether an ATM OAM cell in VP (f4)/VC (f5) level is to be terminated by the device or transparent, use the "set atm-oam flow" command. End-to-End flow and Segment flow can be set individually. When End point is specified, ATM OAM cells are terminated by the device. When Connecting point is specified, ATM OAM cells are made transparent. When nothing is specified, no operation is executed when receiving ATM OAM cells. In the parameters of the "set atm-oam flow" command, specify the level [VP (f4)/VC (f5)], PVC identifier (port number VPI or "VPI/VCI"/ PVC name), flow type [End-to-End flow (end-end)/Segment flow (segment)] and flow point type [End point (end-point) /Connecting point (connecting-point) /nothing (none)].

Whether the flow point setting is enabled or disabled in ATM OAM is shown below.

F4 F5

End-End flow Segment flow End-End flow Segment flow Connection

EP CP Non EP CP Non EP CP Non EP CP Non

VC connection D N N S N D N D N S S D

VP connection N D N S S D N N D N N D

D: Default setting at VP/VC connection registration

S: Selective setting enabled

N: Selective setting is disabled

Command

set atm-oam flow Setting of ATM-OAM flow point

Note This function can be set only for the following line cards.

- 32T1E1H line card (port mode: ATMoP) - 1ATM155A line card

Note This function cannot be used if the PVC is not registered.

Page 225: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

ATM Functions

2-161

Displaying ATM OAM setting To display the ATM OAM setting, use the "show atm-oam config" command. In the "show atm-oam config" command parameter, specify a PVC identifier (if omitted, all information is displayed).

Input example

Set the VP (f4) or VC (f5) alarm transfer operation.

Switch# set atm-oam f4 1 0 enable f5-generate

*Switch# set atm-oam f4 1 20 disable

*Switch# set atm-oam f5 1 0/10000 disable

*Switch# set atm-oam flow f4 1 0 segment end-point

*Switch# set atm-oam flow f4 1 1 segment connecting-point

*Switch# set atm-oam flow f5 1 0/100 segment end-point

*Switch# set atm-oam flow f5 1 0/1000 segment connecting-point

*Switch# show atm-oam config

ATM OAM Configuration Table

===========================

OAM Configuration (F4)

======================

Port VPI Configuration Option Segment End-End

---------------------------------------------------------------------------

1 0 enabled f5-generation end-point end-point

1 1 enabled none connecting-point connecting-point

1 20 disabled --- --- ---

OAM Configuration (F5)

======================

Port VPI/VCI Configuration Segment End-End

----------------------------------------------------------------

1 0/32 enabled none connecting-point

1 0/100 enabled end-point connecting-point

1 0/1000 enabled connecting-point connecting-point

1 0/10000 disabled --- ---

*Switch#

Page 226: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

ATM Functions

2-162

Displaying ATM OAM status To display the ATM OAM status, use the "show atm-oam status" command. In the "show atm-oam status" command parameter, specify a PVC identifier (if omitted, all information is displayed).

Memo Alarm status for F1/F2/F3 can be displayed by using the "show port information"

command.

Input example

Display the ATM-OAM status.

*Switch# show atm-oam status 1

ATM OAM Status Table

====================

OAM Status(F4 Detect/Generate)

==============================

Detect Generate(gen)

------------------------ -----------------------------

Segment End-End Segment End-End

------------ ------------ -------------- --------------

Port VPI VP-AIS VP-RDI VP-AIS VP-RDI VP-AIS VP-RDI VP-AIS VP-RDI

------------------------------------------------------------------

1 0 detect --- --- --- --- gen --- ---

1 1 --- --- --- --- gen --- gen ---

1 20 --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---

OAM Status(F5 Detect/Generate)

==============================

Detect Generate(gen)

---------------------- --------------------------

Segment End-End Segment End-End

----------- ----------- ------------ --------------

Port VPI/VCI VC-AIS VC-RDI VC-AIS VC-RDI VC-AIS VC-RDI VC-AIS VC-RDI

------------------------------------------------------------------

1 0/32 --- --- --- --- --- --- gen ---

1 0/100 --- detect --- --- gen gen gen ---

1 0/1000 --- --- --- --- gen --- gen ---

1 0/10000 --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---

*Switch#

Page 227: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

ATM Functions

2-163

Set the IMA clock mode.

Set the IMA group.

Clear the IMA group.

2.4.4 IMA Function

Setting IMA clock mode 2-165

Setting IMA group 2-166

Clearing IMA group 2-170

IMA function CX2200 requires the IMA function that conforms to Inverse Multiplexing for ATM (IMA) Specification Version1.1 (af-phy-0086.001).

The IMA function of CX2200 is listed below.

Item Description

Line type T1/E1

IMA version Inverse Multiplexing for ATM (IMA) Specification Version1.1 (af-phy-0086.001)

Number of IMA groups Up to 8 groups

Number of IMA links Per IMA group: Up to 8 links

Minimum number of available links: 1 to 8 link(s)

IMA frame size 32/64/128/256

Clock mode ITC (Independent Transmit Clock) / CTC (Common Transmit Clock)

Symmetry mode Symmetrical Configuration and Operation

Differential delay T1: 25ms to 282ms

E1: 25ms to 226ms

Scramble setting T1: Scramble is disabled

E1: Scramble is enabled

Page 228: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

ATM Functions

2-164

The IMA function is a protocol to implement transmission of ATM cell streams in existing links (such as T1/E1). It positions between the ATM layer and the physical layer as the IMA sub-layer and controls multiple physical lines by grouping them as one line. Thus the function enables formation of a logical link in the higher bandwidth. This grouped logical link is called an IMA group.

A Cell stream received from the ATM layer is output to the physical lines which have been selected among those within the IMA group, by using the round-robin sequence. Cells received from the lines are synchronized with those from other lines within the group and restored as a cell stream. Thus the stream is transmitted to the ATM layer again.

An ATM cell stream from the ATM Layer

IMA Group Physical Link #0

Physical Link #1

Physical Link #2

IMA Group

The restored cell stream to the ATM Layer

Tx direction: Cells are distributed to the lines by using round-robin sequence. Rx direction: Cells are restored as a cell stream.

IMA virtual link

PHY

PHY

PHY

PHY

PHY

PHY

Page 229: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

ATM Functions

2-165

Setting IMA clock mode Sets the IMA clock mode. CX2200 supports the Common Transmit Clock mode (CTC) and the Independent Transmit Clock mode (ITC).

• CTC

Use the clock distributed from the Tx Clock Unit as the transmission clock for all the lines.

• ITC

Use the clock extracted from each of the lines as the transmission clock.

Commands

set ima clock Setting of IMA clock mode

show ima clock Display of IMA clock mode setting information

Memo The default setting is the CTC mode.

Note When the IMA clock mode is changed, the communication is to be interrupted due to the IMA group restart processing.

Input example

• Set ITC mode as the IMA clock mode.

*Switch# set ima clock itc

*Switch# show ima clock

Transmit Clock Mode Information

===============================

Mode : itc

*Switch#

Page 230: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

ATM Functions

2-166

Setting IMA group Makes multiple physical lines one logical line. IMA group index (1 to 8), port number (1 to 16), and IMA ID (0 to 7) are required at registration. Minimum number of required links, IMA frame size, link differential delay and root port number also can be specified optionally.

• IMA group index

This is the number to identify the IMA group in the device. A unique number within the range can be specified. If the number which has been registered is specified, content of the group is modified (overwritten) with the specified information.

• IMA ID

This is the number to identify the IMA group/status for the connected links. A unique number within the range can be specified.

• Minimum number of required links

This parameter specifies the Minimum number of links required for communication of the IMA group. Numbers more than the number of the ports that form the IMA group cannot be specified. Also, if the number of the lines in the IMA group becomes less than the minimum number of required links with any cause such as link down and line troubles, communication of the IMA group is stopped. If no number is specified, 1 will be specified as the default.

• IMA frame size

This parameter specifies the length of the IMA frame used for IMA protocol control. It can be specified by selecting either of 32, 64, 128 or 256. If nothing is specified, 128 will be specified as the default.

• Link differential delay

This parameter specifies the maximum delay time to receive the cell transmitted with the round-robin sequence. The range varies depending on line types: 25 to 282 (msec) for T1 lines and 25 to 226 for E1 lines. If nothing is specified, 25 (msec) will be specified as the default in both cases of T1 and E1 lines.

Page 231: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

ATM Functions

2-167

• Root port number

This is the port number specified as the main line among the lines in the IMA group. If this number is modified when modifying the IMA group’s information, restart processing of the IMA group (synchronizes and re-connects the device with the associated device) is executed and its communication is interrupted (communication is not interrupted even if the link of the root port is down). If no number is specified, the youngest line number among the lines in the group will be specified.

No communication is established when a PVC is not set to the root port.

Commands

set ima group Setting of IMA group

show ima group config Display of IMA group setting information

show ima group status Display of IMA group status information

Memo An identical line cannot be registered to multiple IMA groups redundantly.

Memo Up to 4 IMA groups can be registered within ports 1-8 or ports 9-16.

Memo Port numbers which belong to ports 1-8 and ports 9-16 cannot be registered to an identical IMA group together.

Memo If the number which has been registered is specified, content of the group is modified (overwritten).

Note If the number of the lines in the IMA group becomes less than the minimum number of required links with any cause such as link down and line troubles, communication of the IMA group is stopped.

Note When specifying the IMA group index which has been registered for modification, if the rout port number is modified, communication of the IMA group is interrupted due to the restart processing.

Note No communication is established when a PVC is not set to the root port.

Note The corresponding port is required to be set as atmop in the port mode setting.

Note IMA group cannot be set for the port to which ATM shaper has been set.

Note IMA group cannot be set if the frame type is set to "T1" and the frame format is set to "Unframed" in the port frame settings.

Page 232: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

ATM Functions

2-168

Setting example

PVC 0/32

VLAN 200

Port 25 (GbE)

CX2200

CX2600/220CX2600/220

MAC address 00:30:13:a1:2a:82

IP address 192.168.2.144

MAC address 00:30:13:01:01:01

IIP address 192.168.2.10

UDP port number 5001

Packet network

VLAN 200

Outer tag CoS = 2

PVC 0/32

IMA group: 10/2, 10/4, 10/6 Root port: 10/2

Port mode: atmop IMA group: 1-3 Root port: 1

CX2600/220CX2600/220

Page 233: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

ATM Functions

2-169

Setting procedure to implement an IMA configuration like as the above figure is shown below.

• Make the port numbers from 1 to 3 an IMA group. Register it as root port number 1. (In the associated device (CX2600/200), port numbers 2, 4 and 6 of ATMP line card number 10 are assumed to be registered as an IMA group.)

* For the details of IMA group states and IMA link states, refer to "8 IMA State List" in Appendix.

*Switch# set port mode atmop 1-8

*Switch# set vlan tagbase 25 200

*Switch# set ima group 1 1-3 id 1 links 3 delay 123 root 1

*Switch# set pvc static 1 0/32

*Switch# set atmop format 1 0/32 00:30:13:01:01:01 outer 200 inner 100

*Switch# show ima group config

IMA Group Configuration Table

=============================

Min-Req- Frame- Link-Diff- Root-

Index Ports ID Links Length Delay(ms) Port

---------------------------------------------------------------------

1 1-3 1 3 128 123 1

*Switch# show ima group status 1

IMA Group Status Table

======================

Index ID GSM-State(NE) GSM-State(FE) Failure-State

---------------------------------------------------------------------------

1 1 operational operational no-failure

IMA Link Status Table

=====================

Port LID TxState(NE) RxState(NE) TxState(FE) RxState(FE) Failure-State

---------------------------------------------------------------------------

1 0 active active active active no-failure

2 1 active active active active no-failure

3 2 active active active active no-failure

*Switch#

Page 234: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

ATM Functions

2-170

Clearing IMA group Clears an IMA group that has been set.

Commands

clear ima group Clearing of IMA group

show ima group config Display of IMA group setting information

show ima group status Display of IMA group status information

Memo Specify the IMA group index which has been registered.

Note IMA group cannot be cleared when ATM shaper has been set for the root port.

Input example

• Clear the IMA group whose IMA group index is 1

• Clear the IMA group whose IMA group index is 2

• Clear the IMA group whose IMA group index is 8

*Switch# clear ima group 1

*Switch# clear ima group 2

*Switch# clear ima group 8

*Switch# show ima group config

IMA Group Configuration Table

=============================

No entry in the table.

*Switch# show ima group status

IMA Group Status Table

======================

No entry in the table.

*Switch#

Page 235: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

TDM Functions

2-171

Groups time slots.

Connects between TDM groups via path.

2.5 TDM Functions 2.5.1 TDM Setting The CX2200 groups time slots on each line for which the TDM mode is set with 32T1E1H/32T1E1T to provide the TDM switching function for intergroup connections. To enable the TDM switching, configure the TDM group settings to group given time slots, and configure the TDM path settings for intergroup connections via path.

This section describes setting procedures for the TDM switching.

Setting TDM group 2-172

Setting TDM path 2-176

Page 236: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

TDM Functions

2-172

Setting TDM group Sets a TDM group for the line for which the TDM mode is set with 32T1E1H/32T1E1T.

Time slots of each line for which the TDM mode is set with 32T1E1H/32T1E1T can be grouped with a given number. The TDMP group can be set by per time slot basis. Up to 31 time slots can be set when the frame type is set to E1. Up to 24 time slots can be set when the frame type is set to T1.

Setting range of time slots for frame type and frame format is as follows:

Frame Type Frame Format Time Slot Setting Range

CRC-4 Multiframe 1 - 15, 17 - 31

CRC-4 Multiframe-no-CAS 1 - 31

Non-CRC-4 1 - 15, 17 - 31 E1

Unframed 0 - 31

Super Frame (SF) T1

Extended Super Frame (ESF) 1 - 24

Setting group for time slots Groups time slots on lines for which the TDM mode is set with 32T1E1H/32T1E1T with a given number.

Command

set tdm group Setting of TDM group

Memo The group can be set only to time slots within the same line.

Memo A unique number can be set for each line as the group number.

Note TDM mode needs to be specified by the port mode setting.

Note Time slot groups cannot be redundantly specified.

Note Time slots needs to be grouped by a single value or consecutive values.

Note To reconfigure the group setting, delete the setting and reconfigure the setting.

Page 237: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

TDM Functions

2-173

Input examples

The following example shows how to set the group when E1 is specified as the frame type in the port frame setting.

The following example shows how to set the group when T1 is specified as the frame type in the port frame setting.

*Switch# set port frame t1

*Switch# set port mode tdm 12

*Switch# set tdm group 12 t1 24 1-24

*Switch#

*Switch# set port frame e1 crc4

*Switch# set port mode tdm 1

*Switch# set tdm group 1 e1 2 1-19

*Switch# set tdm group 1 e1 1 20-31

*Switch#

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31

Time slot configuration of 1 line at E1 specification

Group number 2 Group number 1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Time slot configuration of 1 line at T1 specification

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

Group number 24

Page 238: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

TDM Functions

2-174

Clearing group setting for time slots Clears a group setting of time slots of lines for which the TDM mode is set with 32T1E1H/32T1E1T. The setting can be cleared by the single specification of the group number or line basis.

Command

clear tdm group Clearing of TDM group

Memo When the command is entered for each line, the execution is confirmed and then the setting is cleared.

Note The group setting that the TDM path is set cannot be cleared.

Page 239: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

TDM Functions

2-175

Displaying group setting for time slots Shows the group setting of time slots of lines for which the TDM mode is set with 32T1E1H/32T1E1T. The setting can be displayed by the single or multiple group specification within a line, per line basis, or per device basis.

Command

show tdm group Display of TDM group setting information

Input example

The following example shows how to display the TDM group settings per device basis.

*Switch# set tdm group 1 e1 2 1-19

*Switch# set tdm group 1 e1 1 20-31

*Switch# set tdm group 12 e1 32 1

*Switch# show tdm group

TDM Group Registration Table

============================

Port Group Time Slot Type

----------------------------

1 1 20-31 e1

1 2 1-19 e1

12 32 1 e1

*Switch#

Page 240: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

TDM Functions

2-176

Setting TDM path Sets a path for grouped time slots to enable connections.

Setting procedures to realize the path setting are explained below.

(1) Set two groups for a path to be connected.

(2) Perform the path setting for the group setting.

Input example

The following example shows how to set the path between the group1 of the port number1 and the group2 of the line number 3 when E1 is specified as the frame type and CRC-4 Multiframe is specified as the frame format in the port frame setting.

Memo A path can be set to the group settings with the same number of time slots.

Memo The path is always set bidirectionally.

*Switch# set port frame e1 hdb3 crc4

*Switch# set port mode tdm 1,3

*Switch# set tdm group 1 e1 1 30-31

*Switch# set tdm group 3 e1 2 29-30

*Switch# set tdm path 1 1 3 2

*Switch#

Path connection

TS 0 - - - TS 29 TS 30 TS31

From TS29 to TS30 is set as Group 2

Port num ber 3

CX 2200

TS0 (* )

- - - TS29 TS30 TS31

F rom TS30 to TS 31 is set as Group 1

Port num ber 1

* TS = Tim e slot

Page 241: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

TDM Functions

2-177

Setting path Sets a path by using group.

Command

set tdm path Setting of TDM path

Memo A path can be set to groups if the time slot number of the groups to be set is not the same.

Note A path cannot be set between groups within the same line.

Clearing path setting Clears a path setting. The setting can be cleared by the single specification of the group number or per line basis.

Command

clear tdm path Clearing of TDM path

Memo To clear a path, specify either the port number or the group number that was used to set the path. (The path setting will be deleted by specifying either side of the port number or group number.)

Memo When the command is entered per line basis, the execution is confirmed and then the setting is cleared.

Page 242: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

TDM Functions

2-178

Displaying path setting Shows a path setting. The setting can be displayed by the single group specification, multiple group specification, per line basis, or per device basis.

Command

show tdm path Display of TDM path setting information

Input example

The following example shows how to display the TDM path settings per device basis.

*Switch# show tdm path

TDM Path Connection Table

=========================

Port Group Time Slot Port Group Time Slot Type

----------------------------------------------------

1 1 1-31 2 1 1-31 e1

3 1 1-31 4 23 1-31 e1

5 2 2-6 6 6 12-16 e1

*Switch#

Page 243: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

TDM Functions

2-179

Sets the TDMP mode.

Sets the port mode to TDMoP.

Sets the port frame.

Groups time slots.

Sets a variation tolerance.

Extracts an adaptive clock from the TDMoP path.

Connects between TDM and Ether via path.

Resets a CESoP device.

2.5.2 TDMoP Setting The CX2200 groups time slots on each port for which the TDM mode is set with a 32T1E1H line card/32T1E1T line card to provide the TDMoP function for encapsulating or decapsulating TDM in Ether.

To use the TDMoP function, configure the TDMoP operation mode, the TDMoP mode setting to select a packet format, and the port mode setting of a port in which the TDMoP function is used. Then, configure the TDMoP group settings to group time slots and the TDMoP path settings to connect TDM and Ether via path (format or connection settings).

(Set a TDMoP variation tolerance and an adaptive clock as needed before setting the TDMoP path.)

If a CESoP device failure has occurred, reset the CESoP device.

This section describes setting procedures for the TDMoP function.

Setting TDMoP mode 2-180

Setting the port mode 2-19

Setting the port frame 2-22

Setting TDMoP group 2-182

Setting TDMoP variation tolerance 2-187

Setting adaptive clock 2-189

Setting TDMoP path 2-195

Resetting CESoP device 2-207

Page 244: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

TDM Functions

2-180

Setting TDMoP mode The TDMoP mode setting selects an operation mode when TDM is encapsulated in Ether and a packet format after the encapsulation.

SAToP or CESoPSN can be selected as the operation mode. TDM over Ethernet (MEF8) or TDM over UDP/IP can be selected as the packet format.

Setting TDMoP mode Sets TDMoP mode for the 32T1E1H line card/32T1E1T line card.

Command

set tdmop mode Setting of TDMoP mode

Memo This setting cannot be performed when any TDMoP group is already set.

Memo For 32T1E1T line card, you cannot set TDMover UDP/IP for the packet format.

Input examples

The following example shows how to set the mode when the operation mode is set to SAToP and the packet format is set to TDM over Ethernet (MEF8).

*Switch# set tdmop mode satop mef

*Switch# set port mode tdmop 1

*Switch# set port frame e1 hdb3 crc4

*Switch# set tdmop group 1 e1 1 all

*Switch#

Page 245: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

TDM Functions

2-181

The following example shows how to set the mode when the operation mode is set to CESoPSN and the packet format is set to TDM over Ethernet (MEF8).

The following example shows how to set the mode when the operation mode is set to SAToP and the packet format is set to TDM over UDP/IP.

The following example shows how to set the mode when the operation mode is set to CESoPSN and the packet format is set to TDM over UDP/IP.

*Switch# set tdmop mode cesopsn udp-ip 100.100.100.1 udp-dst 7 rtp_off static

*Switch# set port mode tdmop 1

*Switch# set port frame t1 b8zs esf

*Switch# set tdmop group 1 t1 1 1-10

*Switch#

*Switch# set tdmop mode satop udp-ip 100.100.100.1 udp-src rtp_on

*Switch# set port mode tdmop 1

*Switch# set port frame e1 hdb3 crc4

*Switch# set tdmop group 1 e1 1 all

*Switch#

*Switch# set tdmop mode cesopsn mef

*Switch# set port mode tdmop 1

*Switch# set port frame t1 b8zs esf

*Switch# set tdmop group 1 t1 1 1-10

*Switch#

Page 246: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

TDM Functions

2-182

Setting TDMoP group Sets TDMoP group for the ports for which the TDMoP mode is set with the 32T1E1H line card/32T1E1T line card.

Setting group Groups time slots of the ports for the 32T1E1H line card/32T1E1T line card.

Command

set tdmop group Setting of TDMoP group

Memo Only when the TDMoP mode is CESoPSN mode, any time slot number can be set.

Memo A TDMoP group can be set only to the port for the 32T1E1H line card/32T1E1T line card to which the TDMoP mode is set.

Memo A unique number can be set for each port as the TDMoP group number.

Memo A TDMoP group cannot be set over ports.

Note When clearing and reconfiguring the path, which has been set in a condition where the frame type or number of time slots that is specified in the TDMoP group setting for TDMoP format setting does not agree with the associated device, a device fault may occur.

When performing the TDMoP group setting for the TDMoP format setting, be sure to confirm in advance that the frame type setting and number of time slots of the TDMoP group to be specified agree with the number of time slots and the frame type setting of the associated device by using the "set tdmop information" command.

Note If the above device fault occurs, delete the TDMoP path setting and TDMoP group setting. Then, reset the CESoP device (refer to the "reset cesop-device" command) and reconfigure the TDMoP group appropriately to newly perform the TDMoP path setting.

Page 247: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

TDM Functions

2-183

Input examples

The following example shows how to set the group when E1 is specified as the frame type in the port frame setting.

(Time slots 1 to 15 are set as group number 1 in the CESoPSN mode and TDM over Ethernet (MEF8) format.)

The following example shows how to set the group when T1 is specified as the frame type in the port frame setting.

(All time slots are set as group number 1 in the SAToP mode and TDM over UDP/IP format.)

*Switch# set tdmop mode satop udp-ip 100.100.100.2

*Switch# set port mode tdmop 3

*Switch# set port frame t1 ami esf

*Switch# set tdmop group 3 t1 1 all

*Switch#

*Switch# set tdmop mode cesopsn mef

*Switch# set port mode tdmop 1

*Switch# set port frame e1 hdb3 crc4

*Switch# set tdmop group 1 e1 32 1-15

*Switch#

Page 248: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

TDM Functions

2-184

Clearing group setting Clears a group setting of ports for which the TDM mode is set with the 32T1E1H line card/32T1E1T line card. The setting can be cleared by the single specification of the group number or per port basis.

Command

clear tdmop group Clearing of TDMoP group

Memo A group to which a TDMoP path setting (format or connection setting) is performed cannot be cleared.

Memo When executing the command with a single group number specification, a group number to which a TDMoP group is not set cannot be specified.

Memo If a group for which the port-independent clock mode has been disabled and an adaptive clock with reference clock priority setting has been set is specified, an error occurs.

Memo If a group for which the port-independent clock mode has been enabled and an adaptive clock with reference clock group setting has been set is specified, an error occurs.

Memo If a group to which an adaptive clock is set is cleared, the adaptive clock setting is also cleared.

Memo If a group to which variation tolerance is set is cleared, the variation tolerance is set back to the default value.

Memo When a port number is specified, the execution is confirmed and then the setting is cleared.

Page 249: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

TDM Functions

2-185

Input examples

The following example shows how to clear the TDMoP group settings when the command is input by specifying a single group number.

The following example shows how to clear the TDMoP group settings when the command is input per port basis.

*Switch# clear tdmop group 12

Would you like to clear the configuration? :(Y/N): y

*Switch# clear tdmop group 1 e1 1

*Switch#

Page 250: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

TDM Functions

2-186

Displaying group setting Shows a group setting of each port for the 32T1E1H card/32T1E1T line card. The setting can be displayed by the single group specification within a port, multiple group specification, per port basis, or per device basis.

Command

show tdmop information Display of TDMoP group setting information

Input example

The following example shows how to display the TDMoP group settings per device basis.

*Switch# show tdmop information

TDMoP Group Count

=================

Enabled Disabled Configured Configurable

-------------------------------------------

3 1 4 108

TDMoP Group Table

=================

Port Group Time Slot Type

----------------------------

1 1 all e1

2 2 all e1

3 3 all e1

4 4 all e1

*Switch#

Page 251: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

TDM Functions

2-187

Setting TDMoP variation tolerance There is a buffer (jitter buffer) for packets received from the Ether side. For TDM-Ether function settings, the size of this buffer (TDMoP variation tolerance) needs to be adjusted according to the network configuration.

Setting variation tolerance Sets variation tolerance (jitter buffer size) for TDM-Ether decapsulation.

Command

set tdmop jitter Setting of variation tolerance

Memo Only a group number to which a TDMoP group is set can be specified.

Memo Variation tolerance cannot be set to a group number to which a TDMoP path is set.

Memo If a TDMoP group is deleted, the variation tolerance is set back to the default value (4ms).

Memo Only 2ms/4ms/8ms can be set as the variation tolerance if the dynamic mode is set as the jitter buffer method in the setting of TDMoP mode.

Memo The range available for the setting of variation tolerance varies depending on the number of frames set in the setting of TDMoP mode. The following table shows the correlations.

Variation tolerance Available number of frames

32ms 2,3,4,5,6,7 and 8

64ms 4,5,6,7 and 8

128ms 8

Page 252: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

TDM Functions

2-188

Input example

The following sequence example shows how to set a variation tolerance.

(When a TDMoP format is set, the variation tolerance is set to 64ms.)

Displaying variation tolerance setting Shows TDMoP variation tolerance which has been already set. The setting can be displayed by the single group specification within a line, multiple group specification, per line basis, or per device basis.

Command

show tdmop jitter Display of variation tolerance

Input example

The following example shows how to display the settings per device basis.

*Switch# show tdmop jitter

TDMoP Jitter Configuration

==========================

Port Group Jitter

-------------------

1 1 2ms

12 12 32ms

*Switch#

*Switch# set tdmop mode satop mef

*Switch# set port mode tdmop 12

*Switch# set port frame t1 b8zs sf

*Switch# set port cable-length 8-12 short 399ft

*Switch# set tdmop group 12 t1 5 all

*Switch# set tdmop jitter 12 5 64ms

*Switch#

Page 253: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

TDM Functions

2-189

Setting adaptive clock

Setting adaptive clock As a source clock that will be subject to application to the reference clock, the adaptive clock extraction from any TDMoP group in the case of 32T1E1H/32T1E1T line cards and the adaptive clock extraction from the adaptive clock format setting in the case of 1ATM155A line cards can be specified.

Command

set adaptive-clock Setting of adaptive clock

set adaptive-clock-mode Setting of adaptive clock mode (for 1ATM155A line card)

set adaptive-clock-format Setting of adaptive clock format (for 1ATM155A line card)

CESoP devices have the following statistics algorithms to synchronize the adaptive clock. The optimal algorithm depends on the network configuration; you can select the operation algorithm with an adaptive clock setting command (the “set adaptive clock” command).

(1) standard mode An algorithm to decide the optimal packect by processing the statistics in the early stage, and generates the clock based on the packet. This algorithm generates accurate clocks, but is vulnerable to packet jitter.

(2) re-sync mode An algorithm to decide the optimal packet by processing the statistics periodically, and generates the clock based on the packet. This algorithm generates less accurate clock than the standard mode does, but is not vulnerable to packet jitter.

(3) averaging mode An algorithm to generate the clock based on the averaged packet. This mode generates less accurate clock than the standard mode or re-sync mode does. Use this mode when the adaptive clock cannot be synchronized in the environment where other algorithm is used and the accuracy of the master clock is low.

Memo In the case of 32T1E1H/32T1E1T line cards, only a group number to which a TDMoP group is set can be specified.

Memo In the case of 32T1E1H/32T1E1T line cards, the adaptive clock cannot be set to a group number to which a TDMoP path is set.

Memo In the case of 32T1E1H/32T1E1T line cards, if a TDMoP group is deleted, the adaptive clock setting is also deleted.

Page 254: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

TDM Functions

2-190

Memo In the case of 1ATM155A line cards, the adaptive clock cannot be set to a card to which an adaptive clock format is set, excepting in the TDMoP blocked state.

Memo When 32T1E1H/32T1E1T line cards are used, the adaptive clock allows up to three systems within the system.

Memo When 1ATM155A line cards are used, the adaptive clock allows only one system within the system.

Memo If any adaptive clock is not set by the command, the adaptive clock cannot be specified for the reference clock priority setting.

Note If a line extraction clock is selected for reference clock, a line warning may be detected on the associated device on the TDMoP path extracting an adaptive clock.

Page 255: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

TDM Functions

2-191

Input example

The following sequence example shows how to set an adaptive clock.

An adaptive clock is extracted from a 32T1E1H/32T1E1T line card (when the packet format is TDM over Ethernet (MEF8)).

(An adaptive clock is extracted from the TDMoP group (group number 5) which is set to port 12 of the 32T1E1/32T1E1T line card.)

An adaptive clock is extracted from a 1ATM155A line card (when the packet format is TDM over UDP/IP and RTP header ON).

*Switch# set adaptive-clock-mode line1 udp-ip 100.100.100.3 udp-dst rtp_on

*Switch# set adaptive-clock line1 middle

*Switch# set adaptive-clock-format line1 00:30:13:71:84:7e 1000 100.100.100.5 65530

*Switch#

*Switch# set tdmop mode satop mef

*Switch# set port mode tdmop 12

*Switch# set port frame t1 b8zs sf

*Switch# set port cable-length 9-12 short 399ft

*Switch#

*Switch# set tdmop group 12 t1 5 all

*Switch#

*Switch# set tdmop jitter 12 5 64ms

*Switch#

*Switch# set adaptive-clock 12 5 wide averaging

*Switch#

Page 256: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

TDM Functions

2-192

Clearing adaptive clock setting Clears an adaptive clock mapped to the TDMoP group in the case of 32T1E1H/32T1E1T line cards and clears an adaptive clock format setting in the case of 1ATM155A line cards.

Command

clear adaptive-clock Clearing of adaptive clock

clear adaptive-clock-format Clearing of adaptive clock format setting (for 1ATM155A line card)

Memo In the case of 32T1E1H/32T1E1T line cards, the group to which a TDMoP path is set cannot be cleared. However, an adaptive clock can be set in the TDMoP blocked state.

Memo If a group for which the port-independent clock mode has been disabled and an adaptive clock with reference clock priority setting has been set is specified, an error occurs.

Memo If a group for which the port-independent clock mode has been enabled and an adaptive clock with reference clock group setting has been set is specified, an error occurs.

Input examples

The following example shows how to clear an adaptive clock setting (in the case of a 32T1E1H/32T1E1T line card).

The following example shows how to clear an adaptive clock setting (in the case of a 1ATM155A line card).

*Switch# clear adaptive-clock-format

*Switch#

*Switch# clear adaptive-clock

*Switch#

Page 257: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

TDM Functions

2-193

Displaying adaptive clock setting Shows an adaptive clock setting that has already been set.

Command

show adaptive-clock Display of adaptive clock setting

Input example

The following example shows how to display the adaptive clock settings (1/2).

• In the case of a 1ATM155A line card in the TDM over UDP/IP mode.

(To be continued to 2/2)

*Switch# show adaptive-clock

Adaptive-Clock Mode Configuration Table

=======================================

Frame TDMoP Packet Filter Frame RTP Jitter

Module Type Mode Format Mode Count Header Mode

---------------------------------------------------------------

line1 t1 satop udp-ip udp-src 1 off static

Adaptive-Clock Format L2 Configuration Table

============================================

Source Destination

Module MAC Address MAC Address VID CoS ECID Jitter

----------------------------------------------------------------------

line1 00:30:13:a1:2a:aa 00:30:13:a1:2a:dd 4094 7 --- 128ms

Adaptive-Clock Format L3 Configuration Table

============================================

Source Source Destination Destination

Module UDP Port IP address IP address UDP Port TTL DSCP

----------------------------------------------------------------------

line1 65535 192.168.100.100 192.168.100.200 2142 255 63

Page 258: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

TDM Functions

2-194

The following example shows how to display the adaptive clock settings (2/2).

(Continued from 1/2)

Adaptive-Clock Table(Line)

==========================

Module Network Type Algorithm Status

---------------------------------------

line1 middle averaging acquiring

*Switch#

Page 259: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

TDM Functions

2-195

Setting TDMoP path

Setting path Connects a path between TDM and Ether by setting a path on grouped time slot basis.

Commands

set tdmop format Setting of TDMoP path (format setting: to another device)

set tdmop connection Setting of TDMoP path (connection setting: loopback within self line card)

Memo When a path which loops back at the self line card (connection setting) is set, two groups needs to be set within the same device.

Memo The ECIDs to be set to each group to which a path which loops back at the self line card is set need to be set separately.

Memo Do not directly connect ports in that a path which loops back at the self line card is set with a cross cable.

Memo The TDMoP group to which a TDMoP path has already been set cannot be selected.

Memo The same ECIDs or UDP port numbers need to be set to TDMoP groups to be connected in the TDM over Ethernet (MEF8) format.

However, the same value cannot be specified redundantly for ECIDs or UDP port numbers within the self line card.

Note When communicating with the associated device via TDMoP path, confirm that settings of frame type and time slot number are same as the associated device before the communication.

Note When clearing and reconfiguring the path, which has been set in a condition where the frame type or number of time slots that is specified in the TDMoP group setting for TDMoP format setting does not agree with the associated device, a device fault may occur.

Note If the above device fault occurs, delete the TDMoP path setting and TDMoP group setting. Then, reset the CESoP device (refer to the "reset cesop-device" command) and reconfigure the TDMoP group appropriately to newly perform the TDMoP path setting.

Page 260: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

TDM Functions

2-196

Input examples

The following example shows a sequence of the setting of a path to another device. (Destination MAC address = 00:02:03:04:05:06, VLAN name = CX2200_VLAN_0100, destination IP address = 200.200.200.10, source UDP port number = 49152, TTL = 255, DSCP=5)

* The destination UDP port number is set to the fixed value (2142) because the flow identification mode is set to "udp-src". If the flow identification mode is set to "udp-dst", the source UDP port number is set to the fixed value (2142).

Path conn ec tion

De stina tion d ev ice

CX 2 200

32 T1E1 H po rt #1 2 M A C add re ss 0 0:02 :0 3:04 :05:0 6

IP a ddress 2 0 0.20 0.200 .10

*Switch# set tdmop mode satop udp-ip 100.100.100.10 udp-src

*Switch# set port mode tdmop 12

*Switch#

*Switch# set port frame t1 b8zs sf

*Switch#

*Switch# set port cable-length 9-12 short 399ft

*Switch#

*Switch# set tdmop group 12 t1 5 all

*Switch#

*Switch# set tdmop jitter 12 5 64ms

*Switch#

*Switch# set adaptive-clock 12 5 wide

*Switch#

*Switch# set tdmop format 12 5 00:02:03:04:05:06 CX2200_VLAN_0100 7 200.200.200.10

udp 49152 ttl 255 dscp 5

*Switch#

Page 261: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

TDM Functions

2-197

The following example shows a sequence of the setting of a group which loops back at the self line card (connection setting). (Port2 (ECID=1048575) and 4 (ECID=1048574) are connected with CX2200_VLAN_100 in SAToP/TDM over Ethernet (MEF8)).

*Switch# set tdmop mode satop mef

*Switch# set port mode tdmop 2

*Switch# set port mode tdmop 4

*Switch# set port frame t1 b8zs esf

*Switch# set tdmop group 2 t1 1 all

*Switch# set tdmop group 4 t1 1 all

*Switch# set tdmop connection 2 1 1048575 4 1 1048574 CX2200_VLAN_100 7

*Switch#

Page 262: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

TDM Functions

2-198

An example of multiple-unit connection is explained below.

Note the following points when configuring each of the units.

- Before setting the TDMoP path (format and connection), be sure to check that the number of TSs set for the TDMoP group agrees with the ones set to the connected units.

- Check that each of the E1/T1 port settings (frame type, line code and frame format) agrees with the ones set to the connected units.

If the TDMoP operation mode is set to CESoPSN and the packet format is set to TDM over Ether (MEF8):

(CX2200-A and CX2200-B are connected with TS number = 12. CX2200-B and the external device are connected with their E1 ports.)

CX2200-A

TS 1

: TS 12 TS 13

TS 32

: : :

External device

TS 1 TS 2

TS 32

TS 10

: TS 21

TS 11

TS 22

TS 9

TS 2

(Port 1)

CX2200-B

12 TSs are connected in CESoPSN

(via GbE ports) (Port 4)

TS 1 TS 2

TS 32

TS 10

: TS 21

TS 11

TS 22

TS 9

32 TSs are connected with E1 ports

Page 263: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

TDM Functions

2-199

Examples of connection conditions of the above CX2200-A and CX2200-B are listed below.

Setting item Set value Remarks

TDMoP operation mode CESoPSN

Packet format TDM over Ethernet (MEF8) Default

Frame type E1 Default

Line code HDB3 Default

Frame format CRC4 multiframe Default

Number of TSs to be transmitted/received

12 TSs

Number of transmitted frames 8 Default

Existence/absence of RTP headers

Exist Default

CoS value 5 Default

VLAN ID (VLAN name) CX2200_VLAN_0100

ECID 200

Jitter buffer control method Static mode Default

Jitter buffer variation tolerance 4ms Default

Connection conditions of the above CX2200-B and the external device are listed below.

Setting item Set value Remarks

Frame type E1 Default

Line code HDB3 Default

Frame format CRC4 multiframe Default

Page 264: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

TDM Functions

2-200

Examples of command input for each of the units are described below.

An example of CX2200-A settings:

An example of CX2200-B settings:

If the TDMoP operation mode is set to SAToP and the packet format is set to TDM over UDP/IP:

(CX2200-A and CX2200-B are connected with TS number = 32 (all). CX2200-B and the external device are connected with their E1 ports.)

(Port 4)

TS 1

: TS 31 TS 32

TS 1 TS 2

TS 32

32 TSs are conncted with E1 ports

External device

TS 2 :

TS 31

PW RS EL V

RT N PULL

ALM PW R 1ETHRS-232C17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24FE CONSO LE SE LV

R TN-48V

16 T1E 1H

A LM1-8 9-16

P WR 2I N S

CP US W

EX T-M

L IN K

AC T

25 26

AL M

2G BE

-4 8V

FA NU

LI NK

AC T

CX2200

CX2200-A

P W RS ELV

R TN PULL

A LM PW R1ETHRS-232C17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24FE C ONSOLE SEL V

RT N- 48V

16T 1E1 H

A LM1-8 9-16

PW R 2I NS

C PU SW

EXT -M

LI N K

A CT

25 26

A LM

2GB E

-48 V

FAN U

L IN K

AC T

CX2200

CX2200-B

(Port 15)

TS 31

32 TSs are connected in SAToP (via GbE ports)

: :

TS 1 TS 2

TS 32

: TS 31 TS 31

*Switch# set tdmop mode cesopsn mef

*Switch# set port mode tdmop 4

*Switch# set port frame e1 hdb3 crc4

*Switch# set tdmop group 4 e1 2 10-21

*Switch# set tdmop format 4 2 00:02:03:04:05:0a CX2200_VLAN_0100 ecid 200

*Switch#

*Switch# set tdmop mode cesopsn mef

*Switch# set port mode tdmop 1

*Switch# set port frame e1 hdb3 crc4

*Switch# set tdmop group 1 e1 1 1-12

*Switch# set tdmop format 1 1 00:02:03:04:05:0b CX2200_VLAN_0100 ecid 200

*Switch#

Page 265: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

TDM Functions

2-201

Examples of connection conditions of the above CX2200-A and CX2200-B are listed below.

Setting item Set value Remarks

TDMoP operation mode SAToP Default

Packet format TDM over UDP/IP

Frame type E1 Default

Line code HDB3 Default

Frame format CRC4 multiframe Default

Number of TSs to be transmitted/received

32 TSs Fixed when SAToP is set.

Number of transmitted frames 4

Existence/absence of RTP headers

Absent

CoS value 7

VLAN ID (VLAN name) 1000

Flow identification method UDP port (dst) + IP (src)

IP address of CX2200-A 192.168.1.100

IP address of CX2200-B 192.168.1.200

Destination UDP port number 50000

TTL value 128 Default

DSCP value 63

Jitter buffer control method Static mode Default

Jitter buffer variation tolerance 4ms Default

Connection conditions of the above CX2200-B and the external device are listed below.

Setting item Set value Remarks

Frame type E1 Default

Line code HDB3 Default

Frame format CRC4 multiframe Default

Page 266: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

TDM Functions

2-202

Examples of command input for each of the units are described below.

An example of CX2200-A settings:

An example of CX2200-B settings:

*Switch# set tdmop mode satop udp-ip 192.168.1.200 udp-dst 4 rtp_off

*Switch# set port mode tdmop 15

*Switch# set port frame e1 hdb3 crc4

*Switch# set tdmop group 15 e1 1 all

*Switch# set tdmop jitter 15 1 16ms

*Switch# set tdmop format 15 1 00:02:03:04:05:0c 1000 7 192.168.1.100 udp 50000

dscp 63

*Switch#

*Switch# set tdmop mode satop udp-ip 192.168.1.100 udp-dst 4 rtp_off

*Switch# set port mode tdmop 4

*Switch# set port frame e1 hdb3 crc4

*Switch# set tdmop group 4 e1 1 all

*Switch# set tdmop jitter 4 1 16ms

*Switch# set tdmop format 4 1 00:02:03:04:05:0d 1000 7 192.168.1.200 udp 50000

dscp 63

*Switch#

Page 267: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

TDM Functions

2-203

Clearing path setting Clears a path setting by the single specification of the group number or per port basis.

Commands

clear tdmop format Clearing of TDMoP path setting (format setting: to another device)

clear tdmop connection Clearing of TDMoP path setting (connection setting: loopback within self line card)

Memo When the loopback is set, the path setting for the loopback destination is also cleared.

Memo A group number to which a TDMoP group is not set cannot be specified.

Memo When a line number is specified, the execution is confirmed and then the setting is cleared.

Input examples

The following example shows how to clear the path settings when the command is input by specifying a single group number. (When a format is set.)

The following example shows how to clear the path settings when the command is input per port basis. (When connection is set.)

*Switch# clear tdmop connection 8

Would you like to clear the configuration? :(Y/N): y

*Switch# clear tdmop format 1 1

*Switch#

Page 268: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

TDM Functions

2-204

Displaying path setting status Shows parameters which are specified by the path setting commands.

The setting can be displayed by the single group specification with in a line, multiple group specification, per line basis, or per device basis.

Commands

show tdmop format Display of TDMoP path setting status (format setting: to another device)

show tdmop connection Display of TDMoP path setting status (connection setting: loopback within self line card)

Input examples

The following example shows how to display per device basis. (Format setting in the case of TDM over Ether (MEF8): to another device)

*Switch# show tdmop format

TDMoP Mode Configuration Table

==============================

Frame TDMoP Packet Filter Frame RTP Jitter

Module Type Mode Format Mode Count Header Mode

---------------------------------------------------------------

line1 e1 satop mef --- 8 on static

TDMoP Format L2 Configuration Table

===================================

Source Destination

Port Group MAC Address MAC Address VID CoS ECID

---------------------------------------------------------------------

1 1 00:30:13:a1:2a:aa 00:30:13:a1:2a:bb 1 0 1

16 16 00:30:13:a1:2a:aa 00:30:13:a1:2a:dd 4094 7 1048575

TDMoP Format L3 Configuration Table

===================================

No entry in the table.

*Switch#

Page 269: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

TDM Functions

2-205

The following example shows how to display per device basis. (Connection setting in the case of TDM over UDP/IP: loopback within the self line card)

*Switch# show tdmop connection

TDMoP Mode Configuration Table

==============================

Frame TDMoP Packet Filter Frame RTP Jitter

Module Type Mode Format Mode Count Header Mode

---------------------------------------------------------------

line1 t1 cesopsn udp-ip udp-src 1 off dynamic

TDMoP Connection L2 Configuration Table

=======================================

Port Group ECID Port Group ECID VID CoS

-----------------------------------------------------

1 1 --- 2 2 --- 1 0

16 16 --- 15 15 --- 4094 7

TDMoP Connection L3 Configuration Table

=======================================

Port Group UDP Port Port Group UDP Port

--------------------------------------------

1 1 1024 2 2 1025

16 16 65535 15 15 65534

*Switch#

Page 270: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

TDM Functions

2-206

Displaying path operation status Shows the buffer underrun status/TDMoP path blocked status.

The status can be displayed by the single group specification with in a port, multiple group specification, per port basis, or per device basis.

Command

show tdmop status Display of TDMoP path operation status information

Memo A buffer underrun status (fault) occurs when any packet on the Ether side of the TDMoP path is not received or when some problem occurs with received packets.

Input example

The following example shows how to display per device basis.

*Switch# show tdmop status

TDMoP Status Table

==================

Port Group Underrun Admin

-------------------------------

1 1 normal enabled

2 2 fault enabled

3 3 fault disabled

4 4 normal enabled

*Switch#

Page 271: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

TDM Functions

2-207

Resetting CESoP device Resets a CESoP device to recover its condition when a failure has occurred in the CESoP device mounted on a 32T1E1H line card, a 32T1E1T line card, or a 1ATM155A line card.

Resetting CESoP device Resets a CESoP device mounted on a 32T1E1H line card, a 32T1E1T line card, or a 1ATM155A line card.

Command

reset cesop-device Resetting of CESoP device

Memo If a path has been set under the following condition, a CESoP device failure occurs when the path is cleared and reconfigured: either the frame type or the number of time slots (set in the TDMoP group setting for the TDMoP format setting) of the local unit disagrees with the one of the associated unit. This command is used to recover the CESoP device from the above CESoP device failure.

Memo During the "reset cesop-device" command execution, the continuity on the TDMoP path set in the unit is stopped. A buffer underrun error occurs in the associated unit.

Input example

*Switch# reset cesop-device

Would you like to reset cesop-device? :(Y/N): y

Page 272: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

TDM Functions

2-208

Practical procedures to recover a CESoP device from a failure using the "reset cesop-device" command are described below.

Memo In the case of the following example, disagreement of the numbers of TSs has occurred between the local unit and the associated unit. In the case of frame type disagreement, reconfiguration of the TDMoP operation mode is required.

*Switch# set tdmop group 1 e1 32 1-15

*Switch# set tdmop jitter 1 32 8ms

*Switch# set tdmop format 1 32 00:02:03:04:05:06 CX2200_VLAN_0100 ecid 100

*Switch# clear tdmop format 1 32

*Switch# clear tdmop group 1 e1 32

*Switch# set tdmop group 1 e1 32 1-10

*Switch# set tdmop jitter 1 32 8ms

*Switch#

*Switch# set tdmop format 1 32 00:02:03:04:05:06 CX2200_VLAN_0100 ecid 100

21157 : Since the fault of CESoP device has occurred, the specified command cannot

be executed until the CESoP device is reset.

*Switch#

01/02/2000 02:06:23

===================

WR CESOP DEVICE FAULT DETECTED (LINE#1)

*Switch#

*Switch# reset cesop-device

Would you like to reset cesop-device? :(Y/N): y

*Switch#

01/02/2000 02:07:18

===================

CL CESOP DEVICE FAULT DETECTED (LINE#1)

*Switch#

*Switch# set tdmop format 1 32 00:02:03:04:05:06 CX2200_VLAN_0100 ecid 100

*Switch#

Reconfigure the TDMoP group setting.

A CESoP device failure caused by the TDMoP path reconfiguration has occurred.

The original number of TSs is “10”.

Reset the CESoP device to recover it from the failure.

Reconfigure the TDMoP path.

Page 273: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

TDM Functions

2-209

Displaying CESoP device status Displays condition information of a CESoP device.

Command

show cesop-device status Display of CESoP device status

Input example

*Switch# show cesop-device status

CESoP Device Status Table

=========================

Module Status

--------------

line1 normal

*Switch#

Page 274: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

EtherOAM Functions

2-210

2.6 EtherOAM Functions 2.6.1 EtherOAM Function With EtherOAM function, continuity status between units can be checked using frames that are ETH-CC (Ethernet Continuity Check), ETH-LB (Ethernet LoopBack), ETH-LT (Ethernet Link trace), ETH-DM (Ethernet Delay Measurement), and ETH-LM (Ethernet Loss Measurement) frames. To use this function, groups need to be organized in units of MEG (ME Group), and end points (MEP: MEG End Point) needs to be registered in units of port, VLAN, and MEG Level.

Diagram of unit configuration when EtherOAM function is used is shown below.

As shown in the above figure, MEGs can be hierarchized by using MEG Levels. Thus EtherOAM function can be used by each of the managers of customers, providers and operators separately. Note that MEGs must be in nested configuration and a MEG in the lower level cannot exceed the range of the upper level MEG.

Operator layer A

CX2200 (Unit A)

Core SW (Aggregation

SW)

B

MEP

MIP (*1) MEG: Level 7

MEG: Level 4

MEG: Level 2

MEG: Level 0

VLAN=1

VLAN=1

VLAN=2

VLAN=3 VLAN=2

Port Port

CX2200 (Unit B)

Core SW (Aggregation

SW)

*1: Not supported by this device

Page 275: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

EtherOAM Functions

2-211

Periodically exchanging ETH-CCM frames between MEPs belonging to the same MEG Level enables failure trap notification to maintenance personnel if there are continuity errors. Also, sending ETH-LBM frames, ETH-LTM frames, ETH-DMM frames and ETH-LMM frames from MEPs to MIPs of the relay route or to associated MEPs enables check of frame continuity status between units with the response results.

ETH-CC failure type If failures have occurred when MEPs monitor each failure information at ETH-CCM frame transmission and reception, traps in units of MEP are notified. The default status is no failure status.

(1) LOC (Loss Of Continuity)

Failure content

No reception of ETH-CCM frames from an associated MEP.

Detection condition

No reception of ETH-CCM frames during the period 3.5 times as long as the period value set to a MEP in the reception side.

Cancel condition

Reception of three ETH CCM frames during the period 3.5 times as long as the period value set to a MEP in the reception side.

(2) RDI (Remote Defect Indication)

Failure content

Reception of ETH-CCM frames to which ETH-RDI information is added from an associated MEP.

Detection condition

Reception of ETH-CCM frames to which ETH-RDI information is added at a MEP in the reception side.

Cancel condition

Reception of ETH-CCM frames to which ETH-RDI information is not added at a MEP in the reception side.

(3) Unexpected MEG Level

Failure content

Reception of an ETH-CCM frame which has a different MEG Level.

Detection condition

Reception of an ETH-CCM frame which has a MEG Level value lower than the MEG Level value set to a MEP in the reception side.

Cancel condition

During the period 3.5 times as long as the period value set to a MEP in the reception side, no reception of an ETH-CCM frame which has a MEG Level value lower than the MEG Level value set to a MEP in the reception side.

Page 276: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

EtherOAM Functions

2-212

(4) Mismerge

Failure content

Reception of an ETH-CCM frame which has a different MEG ID.

Detection condition

Reception of an ETH-CCM frame which has a correct MEG Level value and a MEG ID which is not set to the MEP in the reception side.

Cancel condition

During the period 3.5 times as long as the period value set to a MEP in the reception side, no reception of an ETH-CCM frame which has a correct MEG Level value and a MEG ID which is not set to the MEP in the reception side.

(5) Unexpected MEP

Failure content

Reception of an ETH-CCM frame which has a different MEP ID.

Detection condition

Reception of an ETH-CCM frame which has a correct MEG Level value and MEG ID and an associated MEP ID which is not set to a MEP in the reception side.

Cancel condition

During the period 3.5 times as long as the period value set to a MEP in the reception side, no reception of an ETH-CCM frame which has a correct MEG Level value and MEG ID and a MEP ID which is not set to the MEP in the reception side.

(6) Unexpected Period

Failure content

Reception of an ETH-CCM frame which has a different Period.

Detection condition

Reception of an ETH-CCM frame which has a correct MEG Level value and MEG ID and MEP ID, and a Period value which is not set to a MEP in the reception side.

Cancel condition

During the period 3.5 times as long as the period value set to a MEP in the reception side, no reception of an ETH-CCM frame which has a correct MEG Level value and MEG ID and MEP ID, and a Period value which is not set to a MEP in the reception side.

Memo Failure monitoring is continued without failure trap control at port link down.

Page 277: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

EtherOAM Functions

2-213

Set frame common information.

Set MEG

Set LBR returning period.

Set MEP.

Set the ID of an associated MEP.

Set ETH-RDI information addition.

Activate the loopback function.

Set ETH-CCM frame transmission and reception.

Setting EtherOAM commands Each command needs to set to function the EtherOAM functions. Follow the procedure below.

Setting EtherOAM frame common information 2-215

Setting reply frame returning period 2-217

Setting MEG 2-218

Setting MEP 2-220

Setting associated MEP IDs 2-222

Setting ETH-CC transmission and reception 2-224

Setting ETH-RDI operation 2-226

Executing EtherOAM Loop Back test 2-229

Page 278: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

EtherOAM Functions

2-214

Activate the link trace function.

Activate the delay measurement function.

Set a test target MEP.

Activate the loss measurement function.

Executing EtherOAM Link Trace test 2-231

Executing EtherOAM Frame Delay Measurement test 2-233

Setting test target MEPs 2-235

Executing EtherOAM Frame Loss Measurement test 2-237

Page 279: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

EtherOAM Functions

2-215

Setting EtherOAM frame common information Sets destination multicast MAC addresses and protocol type values which are used for EtherOAM frames. The set values are used for EtherOAM frame transmission and reception.

Commands

set ether-oam frame Setting of EtherOAM frame common information

show ether-oam frame Display of EtherOAM frame common information

Among set multicast addresses, select destination multicast addresses of ETH-CCM and ETH-LBM frames (Class#1), and destination multicast address of ETH-LTM frames (Class#2). Multicast addresses (Class#1) are used when multicast CC and multicast LB are executed. The following shows how to figure Class#1.

Class#1 = (Set MAC address AND FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:F0) OR MEG Level [0-7]

Class#2 = (Set MAC address AND FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:F8) OR MEG Level [0-7]

[Usage Example]

If "01:80:c3:00:00:ff" is set as a multicast address:

The following multicast addresses are set as the destination multicast address of the EtherOAM frames transmitted from the MEPs belonging to the MEG whose MEG Level is "1".

Class1 = (01:80:c3:00:00:ff && FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:F0) || 1 = 01:80:c3:00:00:f1

Class2 = (01:80:c3:00:00:ff && FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:F8) || 1 = 01:80:c3:00:00:f9

Memo A frame which has a set MAC address and a protocol type is treated as an EtherOAM frame. Check the setting contents before using EtherOAM.

Memo Protocol type that has been set is reflected to the R-APS control frames for EtherRing.

Memo Multicast addresses 01:80:C2:00:00:00 to 01:80:C2:00:00:2F/ 01:19:A7:00:00:00 to 01:19:A7:00:00:FF cannot be specified as destination MAC addresses.

Memo By default, the following values are specified.

Multicast MAC address (Class#1): 01:80:c2:00:00:30 Multicast MAC address (Class#2): 01:80:c2:00:00:38 Protocol type: 0x8902

Note Set the same setting as other switches using EtherOAM. If the setting is different, correct operation is not guaranteed.

Note Do not set this setting during ETH-CCM frame transmission and reception, loopback test,

Page 280: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

EtherOAM Functions

2-216

link trace, delay measurement and loss measurement.

Note If you set the values that are reserved for other purposes by IANA such as 0x8100(IEEE 802.Q) or 0x0800(IPv4) as the protocol type, it may result in an unexpected operations.

Setting examples

With the above example, EtherOAM function between Unit A and Unit B is implemented.

As the example indicates, set identical values for MAC addresses of both Unit A and Unit B. Also, set an identical value for the protocol type of both Unit A and Unit B.

<Unit A>

*Switch# set ether-oam frame 01:80:c3:00:00:70 0xfffe

*Switch# show ether-oam frame

Ether OAM Frame Multicast MAC Address

=====================================

Class1 : 01:80:c3:00:00:70

Class2 : 01:80:c3:00:00:78

Ether OAM Frame Protocol Type

=============================

Protocol Type : 0xfffe

Switch#

<Unit B>

*Switch# set ether-oam frame 01:80:c3:00:00:70 0xfffe

*Switch# show ether-oam frame

Ether OAM Frame Multicast MAC Address

=====================================

Class1 : 01:80:c3:00:00:70

Class2 : 01:80:c3:00:00:78

Ether OAM Frame Protocol Type

=============================

Protocol Type : 0xfffe

Switch#

Page 281: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

EtherOAM Functions

2-217

Setting reply frame returning period At loopback (multicast) test or link trace test, you can set per unit whether to return response frames of received ETH-LB or ETH-LT after the random time from 0 to 1 second or return them immediately.

In the default setting, after a loopback frame is received in an associated MEP, the response frame is returned after the random time from 0 to 1 second. Also, when link trace frame is received in an associated MEP, the response frame is returned immediately.

Commands

set ether-oam reply-period Setting of Reply frame returning period

show ether-oam reply-period Display of Reply frame returning period

Setting examples

With the above example, both of the response frames for ETH-LB or ETH-LT are returned immediately on Unit A.

<Unit A>

*Switch# set ether-oam reply-period loopback immediately

*Switch# set ether-oam reply-period linktrace immediately

*Switch# show ether-oam reply-period

Ether OAM Reply Period Information

==================================

Reply Frame Reply Period

-------------------------

ETH-LBR immediately

ETH-LTR immediately

Switch#

Page 282: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

EtherOAM Functions

2-218

Setting MEG To use EtherOAM function, set MEG groups first. In the MEG setting, specify transmission period of MEG ID, MEG Level, and ETH-CC by each group. The setting unit of ETH-CC transmission period is 3.33, 10 and 100 milliseconds, 1, 10, and 60 seconds. Setting MEGs enables MEP setting for corresponding groups.

Commands

set ether-oam meg Setting of MEG

show ether-oam meg Display of MEG setting information

clear ether-oam meg Clearing of MEG

Memo MEGs can be set up to 128 MEGs for unit.

Memo When MEPs are set to MEGs, the MEGs cannot be cleared. To clear the MEGs, clear all related MEPs first.

Memo Character string within 13 characters or 32-digit number (hexadecimal) can be specified for a MEG ID.

Page 283: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

EtherOAM Functions

2-219

Setting examples

With the above example, the following MEG group settings are applied to Unit A and Unit B: MEG ID=‘NEC0000000001’, MEG Level=0 and ETH-CC transmission period =1s.

<Unit A>

*Switch# set ether-oam meg 1 NEC0000000001 0 period 1s

*Switch# show ether-oam meg

Ether OAM MEG Information

=========================

Total number of entries:1

MEG Index MEG ID MEG Level ETH-CC Period

-----------------------------------------------------------------------

1 NEC0000000001 0 1sec

*Switch#

<Unit B>

*Switch# set ether-oam meg 1 NEC0000000001 0 period 1s

*Switch#

Page 284: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

EtherOAM Functions

2-220

Setting MEP Sets MEPs after setting MEG groups. In this MEP setting, link among ports, VLANs, MEGs, and MEP IDs is created. With this link, EtherOAM function can be used between MEPs within the same MEG. In the case of a port with tagbase VLAN settings, specifying untag parameter instead of VLAN to enable transmission and reception of EtherOAM frames without VLAN tags.

Commands

set ether-oam mep Setting of MEP

show ether-oam mep Display of MEP setting information

clear ether-oam mep Clearing of MEP

Memo After checking that MEGs are set, set MEPs.

Memo Up to 64 MEPs can be set per port. Only one MEP can be set for the port to which the EtherRing function is enabled.

Memo If an unsupported OpCode frame is received, they are discarded regardless of the MEG level.

Note If a MEP is set for a port which is a part of a link aggregation, EtherOAM function may not work properly for the MEP.

Note If the VLAN which is used for MEP has not been registered or accidentally cleared, EtherOAM function does not work after that.

Page 285: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

EtherOAM Functions

2-221

Setting examples

With the above example, MEP settings are applied to the MEG group set for Unit A and Unit B.

In the example, VLAN (ID=100) and MEP related to the MEG group (level=0) are set to Port 25 of Unit A. Also, VLAN (ID=100) and MEP related to the MEG group (level=0) are set to Port 25 of Unit B.

With the above settings, EtherOAM frames of VLAN ID=100 and MEG Level=0 can be transmitted/received between Port25 of Unit A and Port25 of Unit B.

<Unit A>

*Switch# set vlan tagbase 25 100

*Switch# set ether-oam meg 1 NEC0000000001 0 period 1s

*Switch# set ether-oam mep 1 25 100 1 10

*Switch# show ether-oam mep index

Ether OAM MEP Information

==========================

MEP Index : 1 Port : 25

==========================

VID : 100

MEG Level : 0

MEG Index : 1

MEG ID : NEC0000000001

Position : outside

MEP ID : 10

CC Priority : 7

Transmit : disabled

Receive : disabled

Kind : ---

DES MAC Address : ---

RDI : disabled

*Switch#

<Unit B>

*Switch# set vlan tagbase 25 100

*Switch# set ether-oam meg 1 NEC0000000001 0 period 1s

*Switch# set ether-oam mep 1 25 100 1 20

*Switch#

Page 286: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

EtherOAM Functions

2-222

Setting associated MEP IDs Sets associated MEPs per MEP. ETH-CCM frame reception from associated MEPs registered here can be monitored. ETH-CCM frames received from associated MEPs which are not registered are treated as abnormal frames. For each associated MEP, the reception monitoring can be enabled or disabled.

Commands

set ether-oam peer-mep Setting of associated MEP ID

clear ether-oam peer-mep Clearing of associated MEP ID

show ether-oam mep Display of MEP setting information

Memo After checking that MEPs are set, register associated MEPs. If associated MEPs are not registered, failure monitoring is not performed.

Memo Up to 64 associated MEPs can be registered per port. Only one MEP can be set for the port to which the EtherRing function is enabled.

Memo An associated MEP ID of a specified MEP can be cleared in the following cases.

- When the reception in units of local MEP is disabled, IDs of all associated MEPs for the corresponding local MEP can be cleared.

- When the reception in units of local MEP is enabled and the reception in units of the associated MEP is disabled, only the corresponding associated MEP ID for the corresponding local MEP can be cleared.

Page 287: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

EtherOAM Functions

2-223

Setting examples

With the above example, associated MEPs of the MEPs set for Unit A and Unit B are set.

In the example, the MEP set for Unit B (ID=20) is specified as the associated MEP of the MEP set for Unit A. Also, the MEP set for Unit A (ID=10) is specified as the associated MEP of the MEP set for Unit B.

<Unit A>

*Switch# set vlan tagbase 25 100

*Switch# set ether-oam meg 1 NEC0000000001 0 period 1s

*Switch# set ether-oam mep 1 25 100 1 10

*Switch# set ether-oam peer-mep 1 20 receive-enable

*Switch# show ether-oam mep index 1

Ether OAM MEP Information

==========================

MEP Index : 1 Port : 25

==========================

VID : 100

MEG Level : 0

MEG Index : 1

MEG ID : NEC0000000001

Position : outside

MEP ID : 10

CC Priority : 7

Transmit : disabled

Receive : disabled

Kind : ---

DES MAC Address : ---

RDI : disabled

ETH-CC Fault Table

==================

Status : normal

Ether OAM Peer MEP Information

==============================

Peer MEP ID Condition RDI-Received

------------------------------------

20 disabled disabled

*Switch#

Page 288: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

EtherOAM Functions

2-224

Setting ETH-CC transmission and reception ETH-CCM frame transmission and reception between MEPs set in the local unit and associated MEPs enables check of connection with associated units. ETH-CCM frame transmission and reception monitoring can be set separately. Enabling reception monitoring starts monitoring of ETH-CCM frame reception from associated MEPs. Enabling transmission monitoring starts ETH-CCM frame transmission according to transmission period of a MEG to which a MEP belongs. When failures are detected, autonomous message and traps are output.

Commands

set ether-oam cc Setting of EtherOAM Continuity Check transmission

show ether-oam mep Display of MEP setting information

Memo After checking that MEPs and the associated MEPs are set, set the ETH-CC transmission and reception setting.

Memo Even in ports where link is down, MEP monitors ETH-CC reception.

Note If destination MAC addresses are specified in this ETH-CC transmission and reception setting, ETH-CCM frame is sent only to one corresponding address. To transmit ETH-CCM frames to multiple associated MEPs, specify multicast transmission.

Page 289: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

EtherOAM Functions

2-225

Setting examples

With the above example, ETH-CCM frames are transmitted and received between MEPs set for Unit A and Unit B.

In the example, multicast ETH-CCM frames are transmitted from the MEP set for Unit A and receptions of ETH-CCM frames from the specified associated MEP (ID=20) are monitored. Also, multicast ETH-CCM frames are transmitted from the MEP set for Unit B and receptions of ETH-CCM frames from the specified associated MEP (ID=10) are monitored.

<Unit A>

*Switch# set vlan tagbase 25 100

*Switch# set ether-oam meg 1 NEC0000000001 0 period 1s

*Switch# set ether-oam mep 1 25 100 1 10

*Switch# set ether-oam peer-mep 1 20 receive-enable

*Switch# set ether-oam cc 1 transmit-enable receive-enable

*Switch# show ether-oam mep index 1

Ether OAM MEP Information

=========================

MEP Index : 1 Port : 25

==========================

VID : 100

MEG Level : 0

MEG Index : 1

MEG ID : NEC0000000001

Position : outside

MEP ID : 10

CC Priority : 7

Transmit : enabled

Receive : enabled

Kind : multicast

DES MAC Address : 01:80:c3:00:00:70

RDI : disabled

ETH-CC Fault Table

==================

Status : normal

Ether OAM Peer MEP Information

==============================

Peer MEP ID Condition RDI-Received

------------------------------------

20 normal disabled

*Switch#

Page 290: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

EtherOAM Functions

2-226

Setting ETH-RDI operation This is the function to send ETH-CCM frames which are transmitted to a MEP set as a local unit from an associated MEP with adding ETJ-RDI information when LOC is detected due to timeout of ETH-CC receiving. This function keeps sending ETH-CCM frames with ETH-RDI information to the other unit until the LOC is recovered. Enabling this function allows the associated MEP to be noticed that a local unit has an LOC failure.

Command

set ether-oam rdi Setting of ETH-RDI operation

Memo ETH-CCM frames with ETH-RDI information are not transmitted unless the ETH-CCM frame transmission is enabled in the ETH-CC transmission and reception setting.

Page 291: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

EtherOAM Functions

2-227

Setting examples

<Unit A> *Switch# set vlan tagbase 25 100 *Switch# set ether-oam meg 1 NEC0000000001 0 period 1s *Switch# set ether-oam mep 1 25 100 1 10 *Switch# set ether-oam peer-mep 1 20 receive-enable *Switch# set ether-oam cc 1 transmit-enable receive-enable *Switch# set ether-oam rdi 1 enable *Switch# show ether-oam mep index 1 Ether OAM MEP Information ========================== MEP Index : 1 Port : 25 ========================== VID : 100 MEG Level : 0 MEG Index : 1 MEG ID : NEC0000000001 Position : outside MEP ID : 10 CC Priority : 7 Transmit : enabled Receive : enabled Kind : multicast DES MAC Address : 01:80:c3:00:00:70 RDI : enabled ETH-CC Fault Table ================== Status : normal Ether OAM Peer MEP Information ============================== Peer MEP ID Condition RDI-Received ------------------------------------ 20 normal no-rdi *Switch# <Unit B> *Switch# set vlan tagbase 25 100 *Switch# set ether-oam meg 1 NEC0000000001 0 period 1s *Switch# set ether-oam mep 1 25 100 1 20 *Switch# set ether-oam peer-mep 1 10 receive-enable *Switch# set ether-oam cc 1 transmit-enable receive-enable *Switch# set ether-oam rdi 1 enable *Switch#

Page 292: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

EtherOAM Functions

2-228

With the above example, ETH-RDI information is attached to ETH-CCM frames transmitted from a MEP if a LOC failure has been detected from it among the MEPs set for Unit A and Unit B.

In the example, when a LOC failure is detected in the MEP of Unit A, multicast ETH-CCM frames with ETH-RDI information are transmitted from the MEP. MEP of Unit B receives the ETH-CCM frames (with ETH-RDI information) from the associated MEP (in this case, MEP of Unit A) and detects the RDI failure.

For LOC failure and RDI failure, refer to the page "2-211".

Page 293: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

EtherOAM Functions

2-229

Executing EtherOAM Loop Back test This is the function to transmit ETH-LB M (LookBack Message) frame from a specified MEP and check reception of frames returned back in a MIP in a relay route or associated MEP. Unicast LB and multicast LB functions are supported.

To perform unicast LB, send ETH-LBM (LoopBack Message) frame with a specified MAC address as the destination MAC address. MEPs or MIPs which belong to the same MEG Level and have the corresponding MAC address return ETH-LBR frames in response to each ETH-LBM frame. Thus, connection normality can be checked between the two points.

To perform multicast LB, send ETH-LBM frames to which multicast DA is given. All MEPs belonging to the same MEG Level return ETH-LBR frames in response to each ETH-LBM frame. Thus, existence of all the MEPs in the corresponding MEG Level can be checked.

In the source MEPs, ETH-LBR frame reception is monitored for up to five seconds, and the reception results are shown.

Command

loopback ether-oam Executing of EtherOAM Loop Back test

Memo After checking that MEPs are set, execute ETH-LB.

Memo For the detailed test procedures of ETH-LB, refer to 4.2.1.1.

Note Multiple commands of ETH-LB execution cannot be executed simultaneously. Also, multiple commands of ETH-LB execution, ETH-LT execution, ETH-DM execution and ETH-LM execution cannot be executed simultaneously.

Page 294: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

EtherOAM Functions

2-230

Execution examples

With the above example, multicast ETH-LBM frames are transmitted from the MEP of Unit A and responses from the MEP of Unit B are received. The MAC address of the port to which the MEP of Unit B is set "00:30:13:b0:01:01" is displayed as the execution result.

<Unit A>

*Switch# set vlan tagbase 25 100

*Switch# set ether-oam meg 1 NEC0000000001 0 period 1s

*Switch# set ether-oam mep 1 25 100 1 10

*Switch# loopback ether-oam 1

Ether OAM Loopback Port Information

===================================

Port : 25

MAC Address : 00:30:13:a0:01:01

VID : 100

MEG ID : NEC0000000001

MEP ID : 10

MEG Level : 0

Ether OAM Multicast Loopback Result Information

===============================================

1 00:30:13:b0:01:01

*Switch#

<Unit B>

*Switch# set vlan tagbase 25 100

*Switch# set ether-oam meg 1 NEC0000000001 0 period 1s

*Switch# set ether-oam mep 1 25 100 1 20

*Switch#

Page 295: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

EtherOAM Functions

2-231

Executing EtherOAM Link Trace test This is the function to transmit ETH-LTM (Link Trace Message) frames from a specified MEP and check the route between the specified MEP and a MIP on the relay route or the associated MEP.

ETH-LTM (Link Trace Message) frames are transmitted from the MEP to the specified MAC address by a command. If the associated MEP receives the frames, it returns ETH-LTR frames to the source MEP (i.e. the MEP which sent the LTM frames) after checking that the Target MAC address has been learned. At this time, the ETH-LTM frames are terminated.

Also, MIPs on the relay route and associated MEPs return ETH-LTR frames to the source MEP to terminate the ETH-LTM frames, even when each MAC address agree with the Target MAC address.

The source MEP displays the source MAC addresses of the received ETH-LTR frames in the TTL order after monitoring for 5 seconds or 10 seconds.

Command

linktrace ether-oam Executing of EtherOAM Link Trace test

Memo Information that indicates whether the response is generated because the Target MAC address has been learned (RlyFDB) or because the Target MAC address agrees with the MAC address of a MIP on the relay route or the associated MEP (RlyHit) is attached to ETH-LTR frames.

Memo After checking that MEPs are set, execute ETH-LT.

Note Multiple commands of ETH-LT execution cannot be executed simultaneously. Also, multiple commands of ETH-LT execution, ETH-LB execution, ETH-DM execution and ETH-LM execution cannot be executed simultaneously.

Page 296: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

EtherOAM Functions

2-232

Execution examples

With the above example, the MEP of Unit A sends ETH-LTM frames to the MEP of Unit B. Then, the MEP of Unit A receives responses from the MEP of Unit B. The MAC address of the port to which the MEP of Unit B is set "00:30:13:b0:01:01" will be displayed as the execution result.

If an aggregation SW exists on the route between the MEP of Unit A and MEP of Unit B, and a MIP related to the MEG level and VLAN which are identical with the ones set to Unit A and Unit B is set, responses from the MIP are also received. The MAC address of the port to which the MIP is set "00:30:13:a0:01:f9" is displayed as the execution result.

<Unit A>

*Switch# set vlan tagbase 25 100

*Switch# set ether-oam meg 1 NEC0000000001 0 period 1s

*Switch# set ether-oam mep 1 25 100 1 10

*Switch# linktrace ether-oam 1 00:30:13:b0:01:01 wait 5s ttl 5

Ether OAM Link Trace Port Information

=====================================

Port : 25

MAC Address : 00:30:13:a0:01:01

VID : 100

MEG ID : NEC0000000001

MEP ID : 10

MEG Level : 0

Ether OAM Link Trace Result Information for 00:30:13:b0:01:01

=============================================================

TTL MAC Address Relay Action

------------------------------------

4 00:30:13:a0:01:f9 RlyFDB

3 00:30:13:b0:01:01 RlyHit

Trace Complete

*Switch#

<Unit B>

*Switch# set vlan tagbase 25 100

*Switch# set ether-oam meg 1 NEC0000000001 0 period 1s

*Switch# set ether-oam mep 1 25 100 1 20

*Switch#

Page 297: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

EtherOAM Functions

2-233

Executing EtherOAM Frame Delay Measurement test This is the function to send ETH-DMM (Delay Measurement Message) frames from a specified MEP and measure delay time of frames to an associated MEP. In ETH-DM execution, the local MEP sends an ETH-DMM frame storing frame transmission time (TxTimeStampf) to a specified MAC address destination.

After receiving the ETH-DMM frame, an associated MEP stores the reception time (RxTimeStampf) and the transmission time (TxTimeStampb) newly in the frame time information and send the information as an ETH-DMR (Delay Measurement Reply) frame to the originating MEP.

After receiving the ETH-DMR frame, the originating MEP measures frame delay time by comparing the frame time information with frame reception time in the local unit (RxTimeb).

This unit sends ETH-DMM periodically to measure the maximum of frame delay time (Delay Maximum), the minimum (Delay Minimum), the average (Delay Average), and the variation (Delay Variation).

Command

dm ether-oam Executing of EtherOAM Frame Delay Measurement test

Memo Only Two-way ETH-DM is supported for this unit.

Memo Frame delay time (Frame Delay) is calculated by the following calculating formula.

Frame Delay = (RxTimeb - TxTimeStampf) – (TxTimeStampb – RxTimeStampf)

If this unit receives ETH-DMM frames, values (TxTimeStampb, RxTimeStampf) to be stored in ETH-DMR are 0.

Memo After checking that MEPs are set, execute ETH-DM.

Note Multiple commands of ETH-DM execution cannot be executed simultaneously. Also, multiple commands of ETH-DM execution, ETH-LB execution, ETH-LT execution and ETH-LM execution cannot be executed simultaneously.

Page 298: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

EtherOAM Functions

2-234

Execution examples

With the above example, the MEP of Unit A sends ETH-DMM frames to the MEP of Unit B. Then, the MEP of Unit A receives responses from the MEP of Unit B. In the example, the measurement of the response delay time is implemented for 10 times. The minimum/maximum/average/deviation values of the delay time are displayed as the execution results.

<Unit A>

*Switch# set vlan tagbase 25 100

*Switch# set ether-oam meg 1 NEC0000000001 0 period 1s

*Switch# set ether-oam mep 1 25 100 1 10

*Switch# dm ether-oam 1 00:30:13:b0:01:01 count 10 second-period 1

Ether OAM Delay Measurement Port Information

============================================

Port : 25

MAC Address : 00:30:13:a0:01:01

VID : 100

MEG ID : NEC0000000001

MEP ID : 10

MEG Level : 0

During an ETH-DM examination........

Ether OAM Delay Measurement Result Information for 00:30:13:b0:01:01

====================================================================

Request DMM : 10

Receive DMR : 10

Delay Minimum(msec) : 0.11

Delay Maximum(msec) : 0.11

Delay Average(msec) : 0.11

Delay Variation(msec) : 0.00

Error Count : 0

Result : complete

*Switch#

<Unit B>

*Switch# set vlan tagbase 25 100

*Switch# set ether-oam meg 1 NEC0000000001 0 period 1s

*Switch# set ether-oam mep 1 25 100 1 20

*Switch#

Page 299: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

EtherOAM Functions

2-235

Setting test target MEPs This is the function to set IDs of the test target MEPs which are required for loss measurements of frames. This function registers the priority of test target frames and the measurement target MEPs.

Commands

set ether-oam lm Setting of test target MEP

show ether-oam lm Display of test target MEP

clear ether-oam lm Clearing of test target MEP

Memo After checking that MEPs are set, set test target MEPs.

Memo The priority of the count target frames can be specified only when the MEP is set on the port with tagbase VLAN setting. If the MEP is set on the port with portbase VLAN setting, frames of all the priorities become the measurement targets.

Memo To specify the priority of frames, the MEPs of both the local device and the associated device must be set on ports with tagbase VLAN setting. In addition, an identical priority must be specified for both the local device and the associated device.

Page 300: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

EtherOAM Functions

2-236

Setting examples

With the above example, MEPs set for Unit A and Unit B are specified as the test target MEPs of ETH-LM.

In the example, the test target MEPs are set by specifying "all" for the priority of the test target frame.

With the above settings, transmissions and receptions of the measurement target frames on the ports to which the test target MEPs are set are counted. Note that if the test target MEPs are set by specifying "all" for the frame priority, transmissions and receptions are counted regardless of the frame priorities.

<Unit A>

*Switch# set vlan tagbase 25 100

*Switch# set ether-oam meg 1 NEC0000000001 0 period 1s

*Switch# set ether-oam mep 1 25 100 1 10

*Switch# set ether-oam lm 1 all

*Switch#

<Unit B>

*Switch# set vlan tagbase 25 100

*Switch# set ether-oam meg 1 NEC0000000001 0 period 1s

*Switch# set ether-oam mep 1 25 100 1 20

*Switch# set ether-oam lm 1 all

*Switch#

Page 301: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

EtherOAM Functions

2-237

Executing EtherOAM Frame Loss Measurement test This is the function to measure the frame loss between the specified test target MEP and the test target MEP set to the associated device by sending ETH-LMM (Loss Measurement Message) frames from the specified test target MEP. During ETH-LM execution, LMM (Loss Measurement Message) frames that store the frame transmission counters (TxFcf) are sent from the MEP of the local device to the specified MAC address.

The MEP of the associated device receives ETH-LMM frames, then, newly inserts ETH-LMM frame reception counters (RxFcf) and ETH-LMR frame transmission counters (TxFcb) into the transmission counters of the received frames and returns them to the source device as ETH-LMR (Loss Measurement Reply) frames.

The source MEP receives the ETH-LMR frames, then, measures the frame loss number by using the difference between the received ETH-LMM frame reception counter (RxFcf) and the ETH-LMR frame transmission counter (TxFcb) in its own device and the difference between the frame transmission counter information (TxFcf) and the frame reception counter information (TxFcl) in own device.

Transmission frame loss number (far_end) and reception frame loss number (near_end) can be measured in this device by sending ETH-LMM frames periodically.

Command

lm ether-oam Executing of EtherOAM Frame Loss Measurement test

Memo Only ETH-LM frames in Single-ended method are supported by this device.

Memo Frame loss number (Frame Loss) is calculated by the following calculating formulas.

Frame Loss (far_end) = | TxFcf - previous TxFcf | - | RxFcf - previous RxFcf | Frame Loss (near_end) = | TxFcb - previous TxFcb | - | RxFcl - previous RxFcl |

Memo After checking that MEPs are set, execute ETH-LM.

Memo The ETH-LM function enables loss measurements of the following frames:

- User frames

- EtherOAM frames of the MEG level which is higher than the MEG level of the test target MEP

- ETH-CCM frames of the MEG level which is equivalent to the MEG level of the test target MEP

Note Multiple commands of ETH-LM execution cannot be executed simultaneously. Also, multiple commands of ETH-LM execution, ETH-LB execution, ETH-LT execution and ETH-DM execution cannot be executed simultaneously.

Page 302: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

EtherOAM Functions

2-238

Execution examples

<Unit A>

*Switch# set vlan tagbase 25 100

*Switch# set ether-oam meg 1 NEC0000000001 0 period 1s

*Switch# set ether-oam mep 1 25 100 1 10

*Switch# set ether-oam lm 1 all

*Switch# lm ether-oam 1 00:30:13:b0:01:01 count 10 second-period 1

Ether OAM Loss Measurement Port Information

===========================================

Port : 25

MAC Address : 00:30:13:a0:01:01

VID : 100

MEG ID : NEC0000000001

MEP ID : 10

MEG Level : 0

During an ETH-LM examination.....

Ether OAM Loss Measurement Result Information for 00:30:13:b0:01:01

===================================================================

Examination MEP Index : 1

Examination MEP ID : 10

Target Priority : all

Request LMM : 11

Receive LMR : 11

Transmit Frame Near : 100

Receive Frame Far : 100

Transmit Frame Far : 100

Receive Frame Near : 100

Sum of Frame Loss Far : 0

Rate of Frame Loss Far : 0.00%

Sum of Frame Loss Near : 0

Rate of Frame Loss Near : 0.00%

Error Count : 0

Result : complete

*Switch#

Page 303: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

EtherOAM Functions

2-239

With the above example, the MEP of Unit A sends ETH-LMM frames to the MEP of Unit B. Then, the MEP of Unit A receives responses from the MEP of Unit B. In the example, the measurement of the frame loss is implemented for 10 times. The following values are displayed as the execution results.

- Total number of frames sent from Unit A to Unit B : Transmit Frame Near

- Total number of frames received at Unit B : Receive Frame Far

- Loss value of frames sent from Unit A to Unit B : Sum of Frame Loss Far

- Loss rate of frames sent from Unit A to Unit B : Rate of Frame Loss Far

- Total number of frames sent from Unit B to Unit A : Transmit Frame Far

- Total number of frames received at Unit A : Receive Frame Near

- Loss value of frames sent from Unit B to Unit A : Sum of Frame Loss Near

- Loss rate of frames sent from Unit B to Unit A : Rate of Frame Loss Near

<Unit B>

*Switch# set vlan tagbase 25 100

*Switch# set ether-oam meg 1 NEC0000000001 0 period 1s

*Switch# set ether-oam mep 1 25 100 1 20

*Switch# set ether-oam lm 1 all

*Switch#

Page 304: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

EtherOAM Functions

2-240

Supplements Frame formats of the frames which are transmitted and received with EtherOAM function are shown below.

ETH-CCM frame format

1 2 3 4

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

1 MEL Version OpCode Flags TLV Offset

5 Sequence Number

9 MEP ID

13

17

:

MEG ID

57

61 Reserved

:

73 End TLV

- MEL: Level of the MEG which includes the frame transmitting MEP

- Version: 0

- OpCode: CCM

- Flags: RDI detection bit/Period values

- TLV Offset: 70

- Sequence Number: 0

- MEP ID: ID of the frame transmitting MEP

- MEG ID: ID of the MEG which includes the frame transmitting MEP

- End TLV: 0

Page 305: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

EtherOAM Functions

2-241

ETH-LBM frame format

1 2 3 4

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

1 MEL Version OpCode Flags TLV Offset

5 Transaction ID

9

: Data TLV

last End TLV

- MEL: Level of the MEG which includes the frame transmitting MEP

- Version: 0

- OpCode: LBM

- Flags: 0

- TLV Offset: 4

- Transaction ID: Value incremented at every transmission of LBM frame

- Data TLV: Type/Length/Data Pattern

- End TLV: 0

ETH-LBR frame format

1 2 3 4

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

1 MEL Version OpCode Flags TLV Offset

5 Transaction ID

9

: Data TLV

last End TLV

- OpCode: LBR

- Other fields: Values same as the ones of the received LBM frame

Page 306: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

EtherOAM Functions

2-242

ETH-LTM frame format

1 2 3 4

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

1 MEL Version OpCode Flags TLV Offset

5 Transaction ID

9 TTL OriginMAC Address

13

17 TargetMAC Address

21 End TLV

25

: Reserved

45

- MEG Level: Level of the MEG which includes the frame transmitting MEP

- Version: 0

- OpCode: LTM

- Flags: HW only

- TLV Offset: 17

- Transaction ID: Value incremented at every transmission of LTM frame

- TTL: Value decremented when passing Time to Live MIP

- Origin MAC Address: MAC address of the port to which the frame transmitting MEP is set

- Target MAC Address: MAC address of the targeted endpoint

- End TLV: 0

Page 307: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

EtherOAM Functions

2-243

ETH-LTR frame format

1 2 3 4

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

1 MEL Version OpCode Flags TLV Offset

5 Transaction ID

9 TTL Relay Action End TLV

17

: Reserved

45

- OpCode: LTR

- TLV Offset: 6

- TTL: Time to Live value after decrementing TTL of the ETH-LTM frame

- RelayAction: RlyHit/RlyFDB

- Other fields: Values same as the ones of the received ETH-LTM frame

Page 308: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

EtherOAM Functions

2-244

ETH-DMM frame format

1 2 3 4

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

1 MEL Version OpCode Flags TLV Offset

5

9 TxTimeStampf

13

17

Reserved for DMM receiving equipment (for RxTimeStampf)

21

25

Reserved for DMR (for TxTimeStampb)

29

33 Reserved for DMR receiving equipment

37 End TLV Reserved

41

45

- MEG Level: Level of the MEG which includes the frame transmitting MEP

- Version: 0

- OpCode: DMM

- Flags: 0

- TLV Offset: 32

- TxTimeStampf: Time stamp when transmitting the ETH-DMM frame

- Reserved for DMM receiving equipment: 0

- Reserved for DMR: 0

- Reserved for DMR receiving equipment: 0

- END TLV: 0

Page 309: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

EtherOAM Functions

2-245

ETH-DMR frame format

1 2 3 4

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

1 MEL Version OpCode Flags TLV Offset

5

9 TxTimeStampf

13

17 RxTimeStampf

21

25 TxTimeStampb

29

33

Reserved for DMR receiving equipment (for RxTimeStampb)

37 End TLV Reserved

41

45

- OpCode: DMR

- RxTimeStampf: 0 (Not supported)

- TxTimeStampb: 0 (Not supported)

- Other fields: Values same as the ones of the received DMM frame

Page 310: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

EtherOAM Functions

2-246

ETH-LMM frame format

1 2 3 4

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

1 MEL Version OpCode Flags TLV Offset

5 TxFCf

9 Reserved for RxFCf in LMR

13 Reserved for TxFCb in LMR

17 End TLV Reserved

:

45

- MEG Level: Level of the MEG which includes the frame transmitting MEP

- Version: 0

- OpCode: LMM

- Flags: 0

- TLV Offset: 12

- TxFCF: Frame transmission counter value when transmitting the ETH-LMM frame (32 bit unsigned integer)

- Reserved for RxFCf in LMR: 0

- Reserved for TxFCb in LMR: 0

- END TLV: 0

Page 311: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

EtherOAM Functions

2-247

ETH-LMR frame format

1 2 3 4

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

1 MEL Version OpCode Flags TLV Offset

5 TxFCf

9 RxFCf

13 TxFCb

17 End TLV Reserved

:

45

- OpCode: LMR

- RxFCf: Frame reception counter value when receiving the ETH-LMM frame (32 bit unsigned integer)

- TxFCb: Frame transmission counter value when transmitting the ETH-LMR frame (32 bit unsigned integer)

- Other fields: Values same as the ones of the received LMM frame

Page 312: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

EtherOAM Functions

2-248

2.6.2 EtherRing Function CX2200 provides the EtherRing function which is compliant with ITU-T G.8032/Y.1731. The EtherRing function switches over protections in a ring topology using ETH-CC (Ethernet Continuity Check) of EtherOAM and R-APS_PDU for ring control.

This function supports 2GBE line card only.

The EtherRing function in CX2200 supports the following functions.

Supported Function Remarks

Switchover control Single ring (per port) Switchover for a group (instance) which consists of multiple VLANs is not supported.

Switchback mode Revertive (automatic switchback)

Non-revertive (automatic switchback) is not supported.

In a steady state where one node with a RPL port is set among nodes that are connected in the form of a ring, the EtherRing function unblocks the RPL port and blocks the failed port to switchover paths in case of a line failure in the ring.

R-APS frame

User frame

RPL port

When a failure occurred

When no failure occurred (steady state)

Unblocked port

Blocked port

Failure occurred Block the failed port

Unblock the RPL port

RPL Owner

Page 313: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

EtherOAM Functions

2-249

Note The EtherRing function does not work for ports where the spanning tree function is enabled.

Note The EtherRing function does not work for ports where the link aggregation function is enabled.

Page 314: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

EtherOAM Functions

2-250

Glossary Words and terms used for the EtherRing function are described below.

Term Description

RL (Ring Link) port Port included in the ring

RPL (Ring Protection Link) port

Port which blocks communications with user frames and R-APS control frames to prevent loops in a ring in a steady state

RPL Owner Node which has the RPL port in the ring

Ring index Identifier assigned for the device within the ring

Ring ID ID used to identify the ring

R-APS control frame Frame used to control ring switching

Page 315: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

EtherOAM Functions

2-251

EtherRing status The following node and port states can be caused by the EtherRing function.

Node status Node status is described below.

Node status Description

idle State where only an RPL port has been blocked and no fault has occurred at every link in the ring

protection State where one or more failures occurred at a link(s) in the ring, or switchback has been performed after a fault recovery

Port status Port statuses are described below.

Port status Description

rpl-block State where an RPL port has been blocked

This state can be caused at a port that has been set as an RPL port.

forward State where user frames and R-APS control frames can be communicated

signal-fail State where a link fault was detected and the port with the fault has been blocked

recovery State where a link fault has been recovered

wait-to-restore State where a switchback to the steady state has been performed after a link fault recovery

This state can be caused at a port that has been set as an RPL port.

Page 316: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

EtherOAM Functions

2-252

Correlation between node status and port status Correlation between node status and port status is described below.

Port status

Node status rpl-block forward signal-fail recovery wait-to-

restore

idle

protection

: Correlated

: Not correlated

Status change trigger Triggers for change of node and port status are described below.

Status change trigger Description

local-nr Status change caused by NR order from local node

local-sf Status change caused by SF detection at local node

remote-nr Status change caused by NR order from remote node

remote-sf Status change caused by SF detection at remote node

Memo The port status and status change trigger displayed by the "show ether-ring status" command is "---" by default of ring setting.

Page 317: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

EtherOAM Functions

2-253

Types of EtherRing failure Failures detected in EtherRing are described below.

SF failure The following failures lead the EtherRing function to switch a path as signal-fail (SF) failures.

Failure Description

Link down Link down of a port was detected.

Link down caused by a port block is detected without any protection time.

LOC (Loss Of Continuity)

LOC was detected by EtherOAM ETH-CC function.

LOC of lower level than the MEG level which has been set for the control VLAN of EtherRing is detected.

R-APS failure The EtherRing function monitors the following failure as an R-APS failure.

Failure Description

Loop Detection Frame loop was detected in the ring.

<Detection condition>

Detected when 16 R-APS control frames are received within 10msec per instance

<Release condition>

Released at a deletion by the command

Page 318: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

EtherOAM Functions

2-254

Enable EtherRing.

Set the EtherRing control VLAN.

Set the RPL port.

Set various timers for EtherRing.

Disables EtherRing.

Setting EtherRing Each command needs to be set to get the EtherRing function to work. Follow the procedure below.

Enabling EtherRing 2-254

Setting EtherRing control VLAN 2-255

Setting RPL port 2-255

Setting EtherRing timer 2-256

The following command needs to be set to disable the EtherRing function.

Disabling EtherRing 2-264

Enabling EtherRing Enables the EtherRing function. Select the ports to be used and also set the switchback mode.

Commands

set ether-ring Setting of EtherRing enable/disable

show ether-ring config Display of EtherRing configuration information

Page 319: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

EtherOAM Functions

2-255

Setting EtherRing control VLAN Sets the control VLAN. Set the ring ID, control VLAN, MEG Level and priority value.

Commands

set ether-ring control-vlan Setting of EtherRing control VLAN

show ether-ring config Display of EtherRing configuration information

Memo Ring ID is used for the value of lower 1 byte of the destination MAC address of the R-APS control frame.

Note The value of the ring ID, control VLAN, MEG Level and priority need to be set with a common value among all nodes in the ring.

Note This unit supports the single ring only. "1" can be set for the ring ID.

Note If you have performed the VLAN setting for the port to be used in the ring before executing this command, a loop may occur. Be sure to execute this command to check EtherRing operation before setting the VLAN for the relevant port.

Setting RPL port Sets an RPL port. Select one node out of the all nodes within the ring, and execute this command for any port that belongs to the ring. When you set an RPL port, the R-APS control frames transmission to each node starts.

Commands

set ether-ring rpl-owner Setting of EtherRing RPL port

show ether-ring config Display of EtherRing configuration information

Note If you set or clear an RPL port during operation, the EtherRing status of the node is switched to the default state.

Note If you set multiple RPL ports within the same ring, switching operation does not performed correctly because the ring is split. Be sure to set one RPL port in one ring.

Page 320: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

EtherOAM Functions

2-256

Setting EtherRing timer (1) WTR (Wait to Restore) timer

Sets the protection time to switchback operation after a SF failure recovery. The protection time can be set only for the node to which the RPL port setting has been performed.

Default value 5min

Customizable range 5 to 12min (in increments of 1min)

Commands

set ether-ring time Setting of EtherRing timer

show ether-ring config Display of EtherRing configuration information

(2) Guard timer

Set the time for temporarily discarding the received R-APS control frames to prevent inconsistency of status among other units in case of a SF failure recovery. Set a higher value than the round trip time of one ring for this timer.

Default value 500msec

Customizable range 10 to 2000msec (in increments of 10msec)

Commands

set ether-ring time Setting of EtherRing timer

show ether-ring config Display of EtherRing configuration information

Page 321: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

EtherOAM Functions

2-257

Setting examples

As the configuration shown below, EtherRing settings are performed for port 25 and 26 of the 2GBE line card in Unit A,B and C. Communication is performed between ports 17 of CPUSW card in Unit A, B and C.

CX2200 Unit A CX2200 Unit C

CX2200 Unit B

Port 25 Port 26

Port 25

Port 26

Port 25

Port 26

RPL Owner

RPL port

Unblocked port Blocked port

MEP ETH-CCM frame flow

R-APS control frame flow

User frame

26 25

A

B

C

25 26

25 26

Page 322: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

EtherOAM Functions

2-258

The setting procedure to use EtherRing with the network configuration given in the previous page is described below for each unit.

When using the EtherRing function, executing the command in the wrong order may cause a frame loop. To prevent this, it is recommended to set EtherRing in the following order.

<Unit A>

(1) Enabling EtherRing

(2) Setting EtherRing control VLAN

(3) Setting EtherRing Guard timer

(4) Setting a tagbase VLAN for control VLAN

(5) Setting MEG, MEP and associated MEP

(6) Setting ETH-CCM frame transmission/reception

(7) Setting portbase/tagbase VLAN for user VLAN

Page 323: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

EtherOAM Functions

2-259

(Continued to the next page)

*Switch# set ether-ring 1 enable 25 26 revertive

*Switch# set ether-ring control-vlan 1 enable 1 3000 7 5

*Switch# set ether-ring time 1 guard 1000

*Switch# set vlan member 3000 tagbase 25,26

*Switch# set ether-oam meg 10 MEG123 5 period 3.33ms

*Switch# set ether-oam mep 110 25 3000 10 110

*Switch# set ether-oam mep 111 26 3000 10 111

*Switch# set ether-oam peer-mep 110 100

*Switch# set ether-oam peer-mep 111 121

*Switch# set ether-oam cc 110 transmit-enable receive-enable

*Switch# set ether-oam cc 111 transmit-enable receive-enable

*Switch# set vlan member 10 portbase 17 tagbase 25,26

*Switch#

*Switch# show ether-ring config

Ether Ring Configuration

========================

Revertive RPL Guard

Index Port Mode Owner WTR(min) Time(msec)

--------------------------------------------------------

1 25,26 revertive --- --- 1000

Ether Ring Frame Configuration

==============================

Multicast MAC Address : 01:19:A7:00:00:(RingID)

Protocol Type : 0x8902

===============================================

Index RingID Control VID MEG Level Priority

-----------------------------------------------

1 1 3000 7 5

*Switch#

(6)

(5)

(4)(3)(2)(1)

(7)

Page 324: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

EtherOAM Functions

2-260

<Unit B>

(1) Enabling EtherRing

(2) Setting EtherRing control VLAN

(3) Setting RPL port

(4) Setting EtherRing Guard timer

(5) Setting EtherRing WTR timer

(6) Setting tagbase VLAN for control VLAN

(7) Setting MEG, MEP and associated MEP

(8) Setting ETH-CCM frame transmission/reception

(9) Setting portbase/tagbase VLAN for user VLAN

Page 325: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

EtherOAM Functions

2-261

(Continued to the next page)

*Switch# set ether-ring 1 enable 25 26 revertive

*Switch# set ether-ring control-vlan 1 enable 1 3000 7 5

*Switch# set ether-ring rpl-owner 1 enable 26

*Switch# set ether-ring time 1 guard 1000

*Switch# set ether-ring time 1 wtr 12

*Switch# set vlan member 3000 tagbase 25,26

*Switch# set ether-oam meg 10 MEG123 5 period 3.33ms

*Switch# set ether-oam mep 100 25 3000 10 100

*Switch# set ether-oam mep 101 26 3000 10 101

*Switch# set ether-oam peer-mep 100 110

*Switch# set ether-oam peer-mep 101 120

*Switch# set ether-oam cc 100 transmit-enable receive-enable

*Switch# set ether-oam cc 101 transmit-enable receive-enable

*Switch# set vlan member 10 portbase 17 tagbase 25,26

*Switch#

*Switch# show ether-ring config

Ether Ring Configuration

========================

Revertive RPL Guard

Index Port Mode Owner WTR(min) Time(msec)

--------------------------------------------------------

1 25,26 revertive 26 12 1000

Ether Ring Frame Configuration

==============================

Multicast MAC Address : 01:19:A7:00:00:(RingID)

Protocol Type : 0x8902

===============================================

Index RingID Control VID MEG Level Priority

-----------------------------------------------

1 1 3000 7 5

*Switch#

(1)(2)(3)(4)(5)(6)

(7)

(8)

(9)

Page 326: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

EtherOAM Functions

2-262

<Unit C>

(1) Enabling EtherRing

(2) Setting EtherRing control VLAN

(3) Setting EtherRing Guard timer

(4) Setting a tagbase VLAN for control VLAN

(5) Setting MEG, MEP and associated MEP

(6) Setting ETH-CCM frame transmission/reception

(7) Setting portbase/tagbase VLAN for user VLAN

Page 327: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

EtherOAM Functions

2-263

*Switch# set ether-ring 1 enable 25 26 revertive

*Switch# set ether-ring control-vlan 1 enable 1 3000 7 5

*Switch# set ether-ring time 1 guard 1000

*Switch# set vlan member 3000 tagbase 25,26

*Switch# set ether-oam meg 10 MEG123 5 period 3.33ms

*Switch# set ether-oam mep 120 25 3000 10 120

*Switch# set ether-oam mep 121 26 3000 10 121

*Switch# set ether-oam peer-mep 120 101

*Switch# set ether-oam peer-mep 121 111

*Switch# set ether-oam cc 120 transmit-enable receive-enable

*Switch# set ether-oam cc 121 transmit-enable receive-enable

*Switch# set vlan member 10 portbase 17 tagbase 25,26

*Switch#

*Switch# show ether-ring config

Ether Ring Configuration

========================

Revertive RPL Guard

Index Port Mode Owner WTR(min) Time(msec)

--------------------------------------------------------

1 25,26 revertive --- --- 1000

Ether Ring Frame Configuration

==============================

Multicast MAC Address : 01:19:A7:00:00:(RingID)

Protocol Type : 0x8902

===============================================

Index RingID Control VID MEG Level Priority

-----------------------------------------------

1 1 3000 7 5

*Switch#

(1)(2)

(3)(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

Page 328: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

EtherOAM Functions

2-264

Disabling EtherRing Disables the EtherRing function. Control VLAN, RPL port setting and timer setting are all cleard all together.

Commands

set ether-ring Setting of EtherRing enable/disable

show ether-ring config Display of EtherRing configuration information

Disabling the EtherRing function when VLAN setting is still remained on the port may cause a frame loop. To prevent this, it is recommended to disable the function in the following order for every node.

(1) Clearing the portbase VLAN for user VLAN (tagbase VLAN setting [without VLAN])

(2) Clearing tagbase VLAN for control/user VLAN

(3) Disabling EtherRing

*Switch# set vlan tagbase 17

*Switch#

*Switch# clear vlan tagbase 25

Would you like to clear the configuration? :(Y/N): y

*Switch#

*Switch# clear vlan tagbase 26

Would you like to clear the configuration? :(Y/N): y

*Switch#

*Switch# set ether-ring 1 disable

*Switch#

*Switch#

*Switch# show ether-ring config

Ether Ring Configuration

========================

No entry in the table.

Ether Ring Frame Configuration

==============================

No entry in the table.

*Switch#

(3)

(2)

(1)

Page 329: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

EtherOAM Functions

2-265

Troubleshooting When using the EtherRing function, some settings related to other functions or settings between nodes within a ring may affect the operation of EtherRing function. Frequently encountered trouble is given below. If you have encountered the same symptom, check the items to be confirmed and solutions.

Symptom check point Action

Is the network configuration in the form of a ring?

Configure the network in the form of a ring with the ports to be used with EtherRing.

Have the VLAN that was specified as an EtherRing control VLAN been set with tagbase for every port to be used with EtherRing?

Set the VLAN ID that has been specified for the R-APS control frame with tagbase for every port to be used with EtherRing.

Is the value of EtherRing control VLAN setting the same among all nodes within the ring?

Set a common value among all nodes for a ring ID, control VLAN ID and MEG Level.

EtherRing does not start and is still in the initial status after the EtherRing settings

Haven't RPL Owner been set, or have it been set for multiple nodes?

Set one node within one ring as the RPL Owner.

Page 330: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Configuration Data

2-266

This subsection describes the structure of the CX2200 configuration data.

This subsection describes three types of configuration data used in CX2200.

2.7 Configuration Data 2.7.1 About Configuration Data This section discusses the following topics.

2.7.1.1 Structure of configuration data 2-267

2.7.1.2 Types of configuration data 2-268

Page 331: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Configuration Data

2-267

2.7.1.1 Structure of configuration data Configuration data refers to the set of data that determines the behavior of CX2200.

The following figure shows the structure of the CX2200 configuration data.

Built-in Flash memory

Main memory

Running configuration

data

Startup configuration

data

Initial configuration

data

Reference show startup-config command upload startup-config command

Setting write memory command clear startup-config command download startup-config command

Copy at startup

Save write memory command

Automatically set by software if startup-config does not exist in ACT at startup

Reference show running-config command upload running-config command

Setting set/clear commands download running-config command

Page 332: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Configuration Data

2-268

2.7.1.2 Types of configuration data CX2200 has three types of configuration data - running configuration data, startup configuration data, and initial configuration data.

All these types of configuration data can be added, changed, referenced, and deleted as necessary. The procedures, however, differ depending on the type of configuration data.

Running configuration data

The running configuration data is the setting information used in the current operating status of CX2200.

The running configuration data is all deleted at the time of startup, and the startup configuration data is copied if it exists.

If the startup configuration data does not exist, the initial configuration data is copied.

If you want to use the currently used running configuration data again the next time you start up CX2200, save the configuration data to built-in flash memory by using the "write memory" command.

The running configuration data can be added, changed, and deleted by using the set/clear commands and "download running-config" command.

The set data can be retrieved by using the "show running-config" command or "upload running-config" command.

Startup configuration data

The startup configuration data is the setting information that is stored in the CX2200 built-in flash memory for backup purposes.

The startup configuration data is not lost even if the power is turned off.

The startup configuration data is copied to the running configuration data file at the time of startup.

If you want to get the currently stored startup configuration data reflected on the operation, you need to restart.

The startup configuration data cannot be added.

The startup configuration data can be changed and deleted by using the "write memory"/"clear startup-config" command or the "download startup-config" command.

The set data can be retrieved by using the "show startup-config" command and the "upload startup-config" command.

Page 333: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Configuration Data

2-269

Initial configuration data

The initial configuration data is the setting information applied in the initial status of CX2200.

If the startup configuration data has been cleared and is not available or remains in the factory-set condition, the software copies the initial configuration data to the running configuration data file.

The initial configuration data cannot be added, changed, deleted, or retrieved.

Page 334: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Configuration Data

2-270

This subsection describes how to set and reference the CX2200 running configurationdata.

This subsection describes how to set and reference the CX2200 startup configurationdata.

This subsection describes how to manage the CX2200 configuration data using an FTP server.

2.7.2 Configuration Data Management This section discusses the following topics.

2.7.2.1 Setting and referencing the running configuration data 2-271

2.7.2.2 Setting and referencing the startup configuration data 2-272

2.7.2.3 Managing configuration data using a server 2-276

Page 335: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Configuration Data

2-271

2.7.2.1 Setting and referencing the running configuration data

Setting the running configuration data The running configuration data is the setting information concerning the current operating status.

Therefore, it can be updated using the relevant setting commands.

These are typically those commands beginning with set or clear that you can enter in the privileged mode.

Referencing the running configuration data The running configuration data can be referenced using the "show running-config" command.

Memo When the set/clear command is executed from another session during displaying data by the "show running-config" command, the setting is reflected to the system, but it is not reflected to the running "show running-config" command. In addition, when the "show running-config" commands are executed by multiple sessions, the data will not be reflected until the display for all the sessions is completed.

Note The "show running-config" command displays data in the set and clear command format.

The setting commands displayed by the "show running-config" command are only those that differ from the initial configuration data.

Command

show running-config Display of running configuration

Page 336: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Configuration Data

2-272

2.7.2.2 Setting and referencing the startup configuration data

Setting the startup configuration data The "write memory" command allows you to save the current running configuration data to built-in flash memory as the startup configuration data.

Also, the "clear startup-config" command clears all the startup configuration data simultaneously.

Commands

write memory Saving of setting information

clear startup-config Clearing of startup configuration

Referencing the startup configuration data The startup configuration data can be referenced using the "show startup-config" command.

Note The "show startup-config" command displays data in the set and clear command format.

The setting commands displayed by the "show startup-config" command are only those that differ from the initial configuration data.

Command

show startup-config Display of startup configuration

Page 337: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Configuration Data

2-273

Displaying differences between the startup and running configuration data If there is any difference between the startup configuration data and running configuration data, "*" appears in front of the command prompt.

When the "write memory" command saves the running configuration data to built-in flash memory as the startup configuration data, "*" disappears.

Changing the running configuration data after executing the "write memory" command results in differences in the configuration data. The configuration data difference indicator is displayed even if you undo the changes you have made.

Memo If the system does not have its own startup configuration data, there are no differences because it cannot check for configuration data difference at startup.

Memo If the system starts with corrupted startup configuration data, it is considered that there are configuration data differences. In that case, it seems that no startup configuration data is set.

Memo If the system starts in a condition that the device configuration has been changed since the startup configuration had been saved, it is considered that there are configuration data differences.

Page 338: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Configuration Data

2-274

Recovery configuration and boot-up messages If any startup configuration data has not been set, the system restarts with the initial configuration status. In this case, the restart completion message will be as follows.

Standard TRAP MIB Message Additional information 1

(Cause of restart) Meaning

POWER-ON RESET Restart caused by Power on

COMMAND RESET Restart caused by a reset command

cold start IF DEFAULT CONFIG BOOT UP (CAUSE:%s)

PROCESSOR FAILURE Restart caused by a failure

If the startup configuration data has been set, the system checks whether the startup configuration setting can be reflected. If it can be, the system restarts with the startup configuration status. If the startup configuration data has been damaged, the system restarts with the emergency configuration data.

If the device configuration has been changed since the startup configuration data had been saved, only the corresponding line card and CPUSW setting are reflected using startup configuration data. The restart completion message is as follows.

Standard TRAP MIB Message Additional information 1

(Cause of restart)

Additional information 2 (For recovery configuration)

POWER-ON RESET STARTUP CONFIG

COMMAND RESET EMERGENCY CONFIG

warm start IF RECOVER CONFIG BOOT UP

(CAUSE:%s,BOOT:%s)

PROCESSOR FAILURE PART OF STARTUP CONFIG

Page 339: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Configuration Data

2-275

The detailed information for the additional information 2 (For recovery configuration) is as follows.

For recovery configuration Meaning Condition Configuration content

STARTUP CONFIG Reflects the startup configuration data

Startup configuration data has been saved.

The whole startup configuration data will be reflected.

EMERGENCY CONFIG

Reflects the emergency configuration data

Startup configuration data has been damaged.

Default configuration

PART OF STARTUP CONFIG

Partly reflects the startup configuration data

Line card configuration has been changed.

Configuration data of CPUSW and line cards corresponding to the configuration will be reflected using startup configuration data.

Memo If the system configuration is changed, the system restarts with the configuration data partly reflected using the startup configuration data even if line card setting has not been performed for the new configuration.

Memo Even if the system has been restarted using partly reflected the startup configuration data, the whole contents of the startup configuration data can be reflected when restarting the system restoring the configuration to the one as the startup configuration data had been saved.

Page 340: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Configuration Data

2-276

2.7.2.3 Managing configuration data using a server CX2200 allows the running and startup configuration data to be uploaded to a server for backup purposes and to be downloaded from the server for data restoration. The server enables the files you upload and download to be managed and edited in text format.

Note If the software version of the client to which the data is downloaded is different from that used when uploading, the configuration data may not be set properly.

Setting the console port and server Managing the configuration data requires an FTP server.

Connect the console port and the server via a network.

Either the outbound or inbound console port may be used.

For details, see "3.2 Settings for Network Connection > 3.2.5 Settings for Remote Maintenance" of this manual.

Page 341: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Configuration Data

2-277

Uploading and downloading the running configuration data The "upload running-config" command allows you to upload the running configuration data to an FTP server for storage.

The "download running-config" command lets you download the running configuration data from the FTP server to make additional settings in the current running configuration data.

Note The "download running-config" command is intended to overwrite or add new settings to the currently set running configuration data.

Any command that conflicts with the current system configuration results in an execution error. Only those commands that can be executed will be reflected in the running configuration data.

In the event of this error, the following reply message is output:

Because there is execution error command in downloaded configuration, this part has not been reflected. : <number of configuration data items not reflected>. First Error : <line number of the first configuration data that caused the error>.

Check the downloaded text configuration data, and enter the command again.

Note While the "download running-config" command is executing, you cannot initialize the line card.

Note 0.xxx.xxx.xxx/127.xxx.xxx.xxx and 224.xxx.xxx.xxx to 255.xxx.xxx.xxx cannot be set as the server IP address. ("xxx" is a string of arbitrary numbers.)

Also, if the server resides in either of the following network addresses, 192.168.128.0/24 and 192.168.129.0/24, that server can be configured although communication cannot be accomplished normally.

"10.42.74.25" is assumed as the IP address of the FTP server that stores the CX2200 configuration data, and the "config.txt" file stored in "/backup" is downloaded as the running configuration data.

Page 342: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Configuration Data

2-278

Input example

Commands

upload running-config Uploading of running configuration to FTP server

download running-config Downloading of running configuration from FTP server

*Switch# download running-config 10.42.74.25 /backup/config.txt

FTP Login Name : cx2200

FTP Login Password :

Data Transferring..

Data setting...

*Switch#

Page 343: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Configuration Data

2-279

Uploading and downloading the startup configuration data The "upload startup-config" command allows you to upload the startup configuration data to an FTP server for storage.

The "download startup-config" command lets you download the startup configuration data from the FTP server to set the downloaded data as new startup configuration data replacing all the current data.

Note The "download startup-config" command clears all the startup configuration data currently stored in built-in flash memory and saves the downloaded data to built-in flash memory as new startup configuration data.

Note If the downloaded startup configuration data contains any command that causes an execution error due to an invalid command format or other reason, all the downloaded configuration data will be discarded and the startup configuration data stored in built-in flash memory will not be updated.

Note 0.xxx.xxx.xxx/127.xxx.xxx.xxx and 224.xxx.xxx.xxx to 255.xxx.xxx.xxx cannot be set as the server IP address. ("xxx" is a string of arbitrary numbers.)

Also, if the server resides in either of the following network addresses, 192.168.128.0/24 and 192.168.129.0/24, that server can be configured although communication cannot be accomplished normally.

"10.42.74.25" is assumed as the IP address of the FTP server that stores the CX2200 configuration data, and the "config.txt" file stored in "/backup" is downloaded as the startup configuration data.

Page 344: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Configuration Data

2-280

Input example

Commands

upload startup-config Uploading of startup configuration to FTP server

download startup-config Downloading of startup configuration from FTP server

*Switch# download startup-config 10.42.74.25 /backup/config.txt

FTP Login Name : cx2200

FTP Login Password :

Data Transferring..

Data setting..

Writing Flash Memory.........

*Switch#

Page 345: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Configuration Data

2-281

About configuration files in the FTP server You can edit the configuration data uploaded to the FTP server by using a text editor.

The edited configuration data can be downloaded as running or startup configuration data.

Note The file names and path names of the files uploaded to the FTP server are subject to the limitations shown in the following table.

Characters usable in file names

Alphanumeric characters plus the following characters:

‘%’ ‘&’ ‘,’ ‘.’ ‘=’ ‘[’ ‘]’ ‘^’ ‘_’ ‘’ ‘’ ‘~’ ‘-’

Characters usable in path names

Alphanumeric characters plus the following characters:

‘%’ ‘&’ ‘,’ ‘/’ ‘:’ ‘=’ ‘[’ ‘\’ ‘]’ ‘^’ ‘_’ ‘’ ‘’ ‘~’ ‘-’

Memo The upload and download time may become longer due to such factors as the size of data being transferred, traffic volume on the network, performance of the FTP server, and LAN cabling.

You can force the ongoing communication with the FTP server to end, by pressing the Ctrl + c key combination.

After checking the size of the data to be downloaded and the conditions of the network and FTP server, enter the command again.

Page 346: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

(blank page)

Page 347: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Installation

3-1

3 Installation

3.1 Outline..........................................3-2

3.2 Settings for Network Connection ........................................3-3

3.2.1 Installation Procedure..................................... 3-3

3.2.2 Unit Mounting ................................................. 3-4

3.2.3 Cable Connection ........................................... 3-7

3.2.4 Power on and Login...................................... 3-21

3.2.5 Settings for Remote Maintenance ................ 3-34

3.2.6 Basic Settings after Purchase....................... 3-54

Page 348: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Outline

3-2

3.1 Outline This chapter describes the procedure for installing the CX2200, connecting cables and power, and setting consoles.

Page 349: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Settings for Network Connection

3-3

Select the connection mode corresponding to the network environment to be configured and connect cables.

Mount the CX2200 in the 19-inch rack.

Turn on the CX2200 and log in it.

Perform settings for remote maintenance by inband network communication and outband network communication.

Perform basic settings of the CX2200 after purchase.

3.2 Settings for Network Connection 3.2.1 Installation Procedure This section describes the procedure for installation of the CX2200.

3.2.2 Unit Mounting 3-4

3.2.3 Cable Connection 3-7

3.2.4 Power on and Login 3-21

3.2.5 Settings for Remote Maintenance 3-34

3.2.6 Basic Settings after Purchase 3-54

Page 350: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Settings for Network Connection

3-4

3.2.2 Unit Mounting

Confirming mounting location The CX2200 can be mounted on the 19-inch rack. To mount it in the 19-inch rack, use the screws in the standard accessories.

Be sure not to mount the unit in the following locations to prevent operation errors, troubles, electric shocks, etc.:

• Unsteady locations (such as shaking stands and sloping locations)

• Locations where the unit may be bathed in water or chemicals

• Locations near devices emitting strong magnetism

• Locations preventing radiation and ill-ventilated locations

The place of installation is restricted toTelecommunication Center and similar environment.

Temporary transmission quality dagration may occur due to by electromagnetic distubances such as lightning or ESD.

Use shielded cables only for line cables.

Mounting procedure Be sure to follow the following procedure to mount the CX2200 on the 19-inch rack:

1. Mount the brackets (non-accessories) at the 19-inch rack side.

Prepare mounting rails for the rack separately or ask the dealer for them.

Page 351: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Settings for Network Connection

3-5

2. Mount the CX2200 in the 19-inch rack and fix it with large screws (M5) at the left and right sides of the front.

3. Mount the FAN module and the cards.

4. Connect the ground and power cables. (See "3.2.4 Power on and Login".)

Notes

(1) The mounting and replacement work should be performed by the maintenance personnel. Be sure to wear the wrist strap connected to the ESD terminal of the unit during the work.

(2) The screws are used to mount the chassis to the rack. Tighten the screws firmly using tools.

(3) When mounting the power module, fan module and cards, insert them horizontally along with the rails in the chassis up to the back. Mount each card, not applying excessive force to it by using the ejectors or knobs at both ends of the card. For details, see "4.2.12 Replacement".

(4) Mount each card in its correct slot. If a card is mounted in an incorrect slot, the card and chassis may be destroyed.

(5) If a LINE1 or LINE2 card is not installed, mount a dedicated blank panel instead.

Page 352: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Settings for Network Connection

3-6

The metal fittings are a set of flanges (for right and left sides) of the following size. These flanges have already been attached to the unit. The flanges cannot be mounted in some cases depending on the type of the 19-inch rack. So, confirm that they can be mounted in advance. If they cannot be mounted, prepare mounting rails for the rack separately or ask the dealer for them.

The metal fittings, conforming to the Kawamura Electric manufactured-[HD RACK] and its size, are 19-inch rack-dedicated metal fittings.

Fig. Flanges (L)

Page 353: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Settings for Network Connection

3-7

3.2.3 Cable Connection

3.2.3.1 Network connection mode The CX2200 allows various types of network connection modes.

CX2200 connection example

Higher unitHigher unitBase station Base station

Ether unit

Console terminalConsole terminal

CX2200

Page 354: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Settings for Network Connection

3-8

3.2.3.2 Cable connection

Ethernet cable types Ethernet

See the following table for the Ethernet cable types.

Table Ethernet Cable Types

System Connector Cable type Max. cable length

10/100BASE-TX RJ-45 STP category 5 or higher 100 m (full duplex)

The CX2200 mounts the 10/100BASE-TX (8-pin modular jack type RJ-45 connector).

Giga-bit Ethernet

See the following table for the Giga-bit Ethernet cable types.

Table Giga-bit Ethernet Cable Types

System Connector Cable type Core Max. cable length

1000BASE-SX LC Multi-mode optical fiber

50 μm 500 m (full duplex)

1000BASE-LX LC Single-mode optical fiber

9 μm 10000 m (full duplex)

1000BASE-ZX LC Single-mode optical fiber

9 μm 70000 m (full duplex)

1000BASE-BX LC Single-mode optical fiber

9 μm 10000 m (full duplex)

1000BASE-T RJ-45 STP category 5E or higher

− 100 m (full duplex)

Page 355: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Settings for Network Connection

3-9

T1/E1

The T1/E1 cable is connected by the MDR68-pin (female). The following table describes the terminal accommodation. The T1 impedance is 100 Ω and the E1 impedance is 120 Ω or 75 Ω. Use the cable with the same impedance when possible.

Table Accommodation of T1/E1 Interface (1/2)

Pin# Signal Name Pin# Signal Name

1 GND 35 GND

2 CH16_IN+ 36 CH16_IN-

3 CH16_OUT+ 37 CH16_OUT-

4 CH15_IN+ 38 CH15_IN-

5 CH15_OUT+ 39 CH15_OUT-

6 CH14_IN+ 40 CH14_IN-

7 CH14_OUT+ 41 CH14_OUT-

8 CH13_IN+ 42 CH13_IN-

9 CH13_OUT+ 43 CH13_OUT-

10 CH12_IN+ 44 CH12_IN-

11 CH12_OUT+ 45 CH12_OUT-

12 CH11_IN+ 46 CH11_IN-

13 CH11_OUT+ 47 CH11_OUT-

14 CH10_IN+ 48 CH10_IN-

15 CH10_OUT+ 49 CH10_OUT-

16 CH9_IN+ 50 CH9_IN-

17 CH9_OUT+ 51 CH9_OUT-

18 CH8_IN+ 52 CH8_IN-

19 CH8_OUT+ 53 CH8_OUT-

20 CH7_IN+ 54 CH7_IN-

21 CH7_OUT+ 55 CH7_OUT-

22 CH6_IN+ 56 CH6_IN-

23 CH6-OUT+ 57 CH6-OUT-

24 CH5_IN+ 58 CH5_IN-

25 CH5_OUT+ 59 CH5_OUT-

26 CH4_IN+ 60 CH4_IN-

27 CH4_OUT+ 61 CH4_OUT-

28 CH3_IN+ 62 CH3_IN-

Page 356: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Settings for Network Connection

3-10

Pin# Signal Name Pin# Signal Name

29 CH3_OUT+ 63 CH3_OUT-

30 CH2_IN+ 64 CH2_IN-

31 CH2_OUT+ 65 CH2_OUT-

32 CH1_IN+ 66 CH1_IN-

33 CH1_OUT+ 67 CH1_OUT-

34 GND 68 GND

Table Accommodation of T1/E1 Interface (2/2)

Pin# Signal Name Pin# Signal Name

1 GND 35 GND

2 CH48_IN+ 36 CH48_IN-

3 CH48_OUT+ 37 CH48_OUT-

4 CH47_IN+ 38 CH47_IN-

5 CH47_OUT+ 39 CH47_OUT-

6 CH46_IN+ 40 CH46_IN-

7 CH46_OUT+ 41 CH46_OUT-

8 CH45_IN+ 42 CH45_IN-

9 CH45_OUT+ 43 CH45_OUT-

10 CH44_IN+ 44 CH44_IN-

11 CH44_OUT+ 45 CH44_OUT-

12 CH43_IN+ 46 CH43_IN-

13 CH43_OUT+ 47 CH43_OUT-

14 CH42_IN+ 48 CH42_IN-

15 CH42_OUT+ 49 CH42_OUT-

16 CH41_IN+ 50 CH41_IN-

17 CH41_OUT+ 51 CH41_OUT-

18 CH40_IN+ 52 CH40_IN-

19 CH40_OUT+ 53 CH40_OUT-

20 CH39_IN+ 54 CH39_IN-

21 CH39_OUT+ 55 CH39_OUT-

22 CH38_IN+ 56 CH38_IN-

23 CH38-OUT+ 57 CH38-OUT-

24 CH37_IN+ 58 CH37_IN-

Page 357: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Settings for Network Connection

3-11

Pin# Signal Name Pin# Signal Name

25 CH37_OUT+ 59 CH37_OUT-

26 CH36_IN+ 60 CH36_IN-

27 CH36_OUT+ 61 CH36_OUT-

28 CH35_IN+ 62 CH35_IN-

29 CH35_OUT+ 63 CH35_OUT-

30 CH34_IN+ 64 CH34_IN-

31 CH34_OUT+ 65 CH34_OUT-

32 CH33_IN+ 66 CH33_IN-

33 CH33_OUT+ 67 CH33_OUT-

34 GND 68 GND

STM-1/OC-3 ATM

See the table below for the ATM cable types.

Table ATM Cable Types

Connector Cable type Core Max. cable length

SONET OC3 IR-1 LC Single-mode optical fiber

10 μm 15 km

SONET OC3 LR-1 LC Single-mode optical fiber

10 μm 40 km

SONET OC3 LR-2 LC Single-mode optical fiber

10 μm 80 km

Page 358: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Settings for Network Connection

3-12

Cable connection method The procedure for connecting cables to the CX2200 is described below. For more information of the cable connection method, see each item in the flowchart.

1000BASE-SX port connection 3-13 1000BASE-LX/ZX port connection 3-13 1000BASE-BX port connection 3-14 1000BASE-T port connection 3-14 10/100BASE-TX port connection 3-15

T1/E1 port connection 3-16

STM-1/OC-3 port connection 3-17

Connecting clock interface 3-17

Local console connection 3-18

Ethernet (for CONSOLE) connection 3-19 1000BASE-SX port connection 3-13

1000BASE-LX/ZX port connection 3-13

1000BASE-BX port connection 3-14

1000BASE-T port connection 3-14

10/100BASE-TX port connection 3-15

Remote maintenance by outband network communication

Remote maintenance by inband network communication

Ether port connection

Local console port connection

Connection for remote maintenance

STM1/OC-3port connection

T1/E1port connection

Clock interface connection

Page 359: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Settings for Network Connection

3-13

1000BASE-SX port connection The CX2200 mounts the 1000BASE-SX port (LC connector).

The connection procedure is described below.

(1) Prepare a Giga-bit Ethernet HUB mounting the 1000BASE-SX port and LC connector optical fiber cables (two cables per interface).

(2) Connect one end of one LC connector optical fiber cable to the 1000BASE-SX TX port of this unit and the other end to the 1000BASE-SX RX port of the HUB.

(3) Connect one end of the other LC connector optical fiber cable to the 1000BASE-SX RX port of this unit and the other end to the 1000BASE-SX TX port of the HUB.

Prepare optical fiber cables (multi-mode) conforming to the 1000BASE-SX port specifications of this unit.

1000BASE-LX/ZX port connection The CX2200 mounts the 1000BASE-LX/ZX port (LC connector).

The connection procedure is described below.

(1) Prepare a Giga-bit Ethernet HUB mounting the 1000BASE-LX/ZX port and LC connector optical fiber cables (two cables per interface).

(2) Connect one end of one LC connector optical fiber cable to the 1000BASE-LX/ZX TX port of this unit and the other end to the 1000BASE-LX/ZX RX port of the HUB.

(3) Connect one end of the other LC connector optical fiber cable to the 1000BASE-LX/ZX RX port of this unit and the other end to the 1000BASE-LX/ZX TX port of the HUB.

Prepare optical fiber cables (single-mode) conforming to the 1000BASE-LX/ZX port specifications of this unit.

RX

1000BASE-SX port

TX RX

Multi-mode optical fiber cable with LC connectors Another unit (such as CX2600)TX

RX

TX RX

1000BASE-LX/ZX port Single mode optical fiber cable with LC connectors TX

Another unit (such as CX2600)

Page 360: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Settings for Network Connection

3-14

1000BASE-BX port connection The CX2200 mounts the 1000BASE-BX port (LC connector).

The connection procedure is described below.

(1) Prepare a Giga-bit Ethernet HUB mounting the 1000BASE-BX port and LC connector optical fiber cables (one cable per interface).

(2) Connect one end of one LC connector optical fiber cable to the 1000BASE-BX port of this unit and the other end to the 1000BASE-BX port of the HUB.

Prepare optical fiber cables (single-mode) conforming to the 1000BASE-BX port specifications of this unit.

Use a 1000BASE-BX10-D SFP and a 1000BASE-BX10-U SFP as one pair between the units.

1000BASE-T port connection The CX2200 mounts the 1000BASE-T port (RJ45 connector).

The connection procedure is described below.

For connection with a router

(1) Prepare a router mounting the 1000BASE-T and an RJ-45 STP (category 5E or higher) straight cable.

(2) Connect one end of the RJ-45 STP (category 5E or higher) straight cable to the 1000BASE-T port of this unit.

(3) Connect the other end of the RJ-45 STP (category 5E or higher) straight cable to the 1000BASE-T port of the router.

Fig. Connection to 1000BASE-T of Router

1000BASE-BX port Single mode optical fiber cable with LC connectors

Another unit (such as CX2600)

RJ-45 STP straight cable 1000BASE-T port Router

Page 361: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Settings for Network Connection

3-15

10/100BASE-TX port connection The CX2200 mounts the 10/100BASE-TX port (8-pin modular jack type RJ-45 connector).

The connection procedure is described below.

For connection with a HUB

(1) Prepare an Ethernet HUB mounting the 10/100BASE-TX and an RJ-45 STP (category 3 or higher for the 10BASE-TX connection and category 5 or higher for the 100BASE-TX connection) straight cable.

(2) Connect one end of the RJ-45 STP (category 3 or higher for 10BASE-TX connection and category 5 or higher for 100BASE-TX connection) straight cable to the 10/100BASE-TX port of this unit.

(3) Connect the other end of the RJ-45 STP (category 3 or higher for 10BASE-TX connection and category 5 or higher for 100BASE-TX connection) straight cable to the 10/100BASE-TX port of the HUB.

RJ-45 STP straight cable

10/100BASE-TXport HUB

Fig. HUB Connection to 10/100BASE-TX

For connection to the 10/100BASE-T cascade port (MDI) of the HUB, when the Ether port auto negotiation is disabled, use the RJ-45 STP (category 3 or higher for 10BASE-T connection and category 5 or higher for 100BASE-T connection) crossing cable.

Page 362: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Settings for Network Connection

3-16

T1/E1 port connection The CX2200 mounts the T1/E1 port (MDR 68-pin female connector).

The connection procedure is described below.

(1) Prepare a TDM unit/ATM (when ATMP is connected) unit mounting T1/E1 interface and an RJ-45 STP cable with one end which accommodates signals defined in ANSI T1.403. (For signal accommodation of CX2200, see "1.3.2 Interface Specifications > 1.3.2.1 Line interface specifications > T1/E1 interface" in this manual. Use a straight cable or crossing cable in accordance with signal accommodation of the remote device and the connector type.)

(2) Connect the MDR 68-pin side of the RJ-45 STP cable to the T1/E1 port of this unit.

(3) Connect the other end of the RJ-45 STP cable to the T1/E1 port of the TDM unit/ATM unit.

Fig. T1/E1 Cable Connection

When connecting CX2200 T1/E1 ports between stations, use the special conversion box [option CONVU-DS] or [option CONVU-RJ].

The conversion box supports T1 (100Ω)/ E1 (120Ω) and converts from the MDR68 connector to Dsub37 or RJ45 connector. The conversion box does not support E1 (75Ω).

For connection between the CX2200 and the conversion box, use the special connection cable [option MDR68-MDR68 cable].

For the detailed specification, refer to the [Option CONVU-DS] or [Option CONVU-RJ] Instruction Manual or check with your distributor.

Fig. T1/E1 cable connection (Connection between stations)

専用ケーブル

T1/E1ポート(D-Sub 37ピン(メス))

TDM装置(交換機、

基地局等)RJ-45等T1/E1 port (MDR 68-pin (female))

Dedicated cableRJ-45, etc.

TDM unit (switch, base station, etc.)

CX2200 Special connection cable(MDR68-MDR68)

Conversion box Connection cable (Dsub37/RJ45))

The other station

Page 363: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Settings for Network Connection

3-17

STM-1/OC-3 port connection The CX2200 mounts the STM-1/OC-3 port (SFP supported connector).

The connection procedure is described below.

(1) Prepare an ATM switch etc. mounting a STM-1/OC-3 interface and optical fiber cables (two cables per one interface).

(2) Connect the one end of the optical fiber cable to the STM-1/OC-3 TX port of the unit, and connect the other end of the cable to the STM-1/OC-3 RX port of the ATM switch etc.

(3) Connect the one end of the other optical fiber cable to the STM-1/OC-3 RX port of the unit, and connect the other end of the cable to the STM-1/OC-3 TX port of the ATM switch etc.

Prepare optical fiber cables (single mode) which are complied with the STM-1/OC-3 port specification of this unit.

Connecting clock interface The CX2200 is equipped with a clock interface port to synchronize with the network clock.

Connect to the clock supply destination using the clock supply cable [Dsub 9-pin cable]. The procedure is as follows:

(1) Prepare the clock supply destination and the Dsub 9-pin cable. (For CX2200 signal installation, refer to "1.3.2.3 Clock interface specification" of this manual.) Prepare a cable according to the signal storage on the clock supply destination side and the connector shape.

(2) Connect one end of the Dsub 9-pin cable to the clock interface port of this unit.

(3) Connect the other end of the Dsub 9-pin cable to the clock input port of the clock supply destination.

Fig. Clock interface cable connection

EXTCLK interface D-Sub 9-pin Cable Clock supply destination

TX RX

STM-1/OC-3 port Optical fiber cable ATM switch etc.

RX

TX

Page 364: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Settings for Network Connection

3-18

Local console connection The CX2200 mounts the console port (asynchronous serial DCE mode).

Connect the unit to a device with which asynchronous transmission is performed by using a console communication cable [optional CX2200 console cable].

To operate the CX2200, a console terminal enabling non-procedural asynchronous communication by RS-232C is required.

The default communication parameter setting values are as follows:

- 9600 baud, 8 data bits, no parity, 1 stop bit

The connection procedure is as follows:

(1) Prepare a console communication cable [optional CX2200 console cable].

(2) Connect the RJ-45 side of the console communication cable [optional CX2200 console cable to the RS-232C port of this unit.

(3) Connect the D-Sub 9-pin side of the console communication cable [optional CX2200 console cable] to a console terminal (such as a PC).

Fig. Console Terminal Connection

When the console terminal mounts an RS-232C port having a different form, prepare an RS-232C conversion adapter or a male/female conversion adapter.

CX2200 console cable RS-232C port Console terminal

Page 365: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Settings for Network Connection

3-19

Ethernet (for CONSOLE) connection The Ethernet (for CONSOLE) connection procedure is described below.

For connection with HUB MDI-X port

(1) Prepare an Ethernet HUB mounting the 10BASE-T or 100BASE-T and an RJ-45 STP (category 3 or higher for the 10BASE-T connection and category 5 or higher for the 100BASE-T connection) straight cable.

(2) Connect one end of the RJ-45 STP (category 3 or higher for the 10BASE-T connection and category 5 or higher for the 100BASE-T connection) straight cable to the 10/100BASE-T port (CONSOLE) of this unit.

(3) Connect the other end of the RJ-45 STP (category 3 or higher for the 10BASE-T connection and category 5 or higher for the 100BASE-T connection) straight cable to the 10/100BASE-T (MDI-X) port of the HUB.

Fig. HUB Connection to 10/100BASE-T (MDI-X)

For connection to HUB 10/100BASE-T cascade port (MDI), use an RJ-45 STP (category 3 or higher for the 10BASE-T connection and category 5 or higher for the 100BASE-T connection) crossing cable.

RJ-45 UTP ストレートケーブル

コンソールポート HUBConsole port RJ-45 STP straight cable

Page 366: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Settings for Network Connection

3-20

For connection to a console terminal (such as PC)

(1) Prepare a console terminal (PC) mounting the 10BASE-T or 100BASE-T and an RJ-45 STP (category 3 or higher for the 10BASE-T connection and category 5 or higher for the 100BASE-T connection) crossing cable.

(2) Connect one end of the RJ-45 STP (category 3 or higher for the 10BASE-T connection and category 5 or higher for the 100BASE-T connection) crossing cable to the 10/100BASE-T port (CONSOLE) of this unit.

(3) Connect the other end of the RJ-45 STP (category 3 or higher for the 10BASE-T connection and category 5 or higher for the 100BASE-T connection) crossing cable to the 10BASE-T port or the 100BASE-T port of the console terminal.

Fig. Terminal (Such as PC) Connection (10/100BASE-T)

RJ-45 UTP クロスケーブル 保守用端末

コンソールポートConsole port RJ-45 STP crossing cable

Maintenance terminal

Page 367: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Settings for Network Connection

3-21

Confirm cable connection between console port and console terminal.

Connect power cables and confirm display of login message and login prompt.

Log in CX2200 through the local console connection and set the password required for login.

3.2.4 Power on and Login This section describes the procedure to log in the CX2200 by the local console connection.

In addition to the local console connection, you can log in the CX2200 through up to four sessions by the telnet connection from a remote console.

For remote console settings, see "3.2 Settings for Network Connection > 3.2.5 Settings for Remote Maintenance".

3.2.4.1 Confirming console port connection 3-22

3.2.4.2 Power on 3-22

3.2.4.3 Login 3-27

Page 368: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Settings for Network Connection

3-22

3.2.4.1 Confirming console port connection Confirm that the cable is connected to the console port correctly.

3.2.4.2 Power on

Power cable connection The CX2200 uses a DC-48V power supply.

When restarting this unit after turning power off, turn on power after a while. If you turn on the power immediately, this may cause a failure.

After turning on the power, be sure not to turn off the power until this unit is completely started. If this unit is turned off during its start, this may cause a failure.

Ground connection

Be sure to connect the ground by using the FG cable with the ground terminal on the front of this unit.

The ground connection decreases the damage by lightning strike and prevents electric shock and noises.

Note Be sure to connect the grounding wire for safety.

Note Be sure not to connect the grounding wire to a gas pipe. If connected, a fire may be caused.

Note Be sure to turn the power off before connecting/disconnecting the grounding wire.

Page 369: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Settings for Network Connection

3-23

DC Power cable connection

The connection procedure is described below.

(1) Prepare a DC power supply (-48 V) having the power capacity necessary for using this unit.

(2) Gather power cables by using the provided power connector.

Page 370: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Settings for Network Connection

3-24

(3) Connect the power connector to the power of the unit.

Fig. DC Power Connection

Note Connect/disconnect the power cables with the ground conductor connected.

Note Be sure to turn the power off before connecting/disconnecting the power cables.

Note Measure the voltages at the DC power connection terminals (-48V and G) to confirm the voltages are 0 (power off).

Page 371: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Settings for Network Connection

3-25

System start procedure after power-on When power is turned on, the system starts in the following order:

(1) The system boots and the diagnosis executed..

(2) The DRAM memory area is cleared.

(3) A boot entry is executed and the program file set in the built-in flash memory is loaded in DRAM as a running program.

(4) The startup configuration data in the built-in flash memory is loaded in DRAM as running configuration data. If the startup configuration data is not found, the initial configuration contents are loaded in DRAM as running configuration data for starting.

For more information of the configuration data, see "2.7 Configuration Data > 2.7.1 About Configuration Data" of this manual.

(5) When self diagnosis/memory diagnosis and configuration data loading terminate normally, the "Welcome to CX2200 System" message and the login prompt are displayed as shown in the following example.

If you need to end the operation after turning the power on, confirm that the prompt is displayed and no commands are executed and then turn the power off.

When the system is restarted by the reset system command, it starts in the same order as that performed when power is turned on, excluding the self diagnosis/memory diagnosis,. In this case, all running configuration data before the restart is lost.

Page 372: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Settings for Network Connection

3-26

Input example

System Boot

Copyright 2001-2002 NEC

CPU: PPC 405GP

Version: 5.4

BSP version: 1.2/5

Boot version: K01.00

Creation date: Mar 31 2004, 14:38:54

Press [Ctrl]+[c] key to enter recover mode...

memory test start ...... end

... coming up latest image

auto-booting...

Starting at 0x10038...

Attaching interface lo0...done

Adding 6418 symbols for standalone.

System is coming up now ..............

Welcome to CX2200 System

Switch>

Page 373: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Settings for Network Connection

3-27

3.2.4.3 Login

About user authority The CX2200 login modes include the "general mode" and "privileged mode".

In each mode, commands corresponding to the mode can be input. For more information of the commands, refer to the "Command Reference" (separate manual).

• General mode

This mode is used by general users. In this mode only a part of commands can be used. Setting commands excluding autonomous message and scroll control commands cannot be used.

• Privileged mode

This mode is used by privileged users. All setting commands and display commands can be used.

Command prompt display • The command prompt displayed on the screen indicates which user authority is available.

<General mode>

In the general mode, the prompt is indicated by ">".

Input example

<Privileged mode>

In the privileged mode, the prompt is indicated by "#".

Input example

Switch>

Switch#

Page 374: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Settings for Network Connection

3-28

• When there are differences between startup-config settings and running-config settings, "*" is displayed at the beginning of the command prompt.

<When there are no differences>

When there are no differences, a "space" is displayed at the beginning of the prompt.

Input example

<When there are differences>

When there are differences, "*" is displayed at the beginning of the prompt.

Input example

Memo Characters "Switch" displayed in the prompt are set as the default.

The prompt name can be changed to a new prompt name by setting of the prompt display change using the set terminal prompt command for identifying the unit.

Note If "!" is displayed at the beginning of the prompt, the start processing did not terminate normally or a CR failure (critical failure) occurred. In this state, normal operations are not assured.

Command

set terminal prompt Setting of terminal prompt

Switch#

*Switch#

Page 375: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Settings for Network Connection

3-29

Login authentication The CX2200 login authentication methods include "mode login authentication" and "account name login authentication". When an account is not registered, "mode login authentication" is performed. When an account is registered, "account name login authentication" is performed.

Mode login authentication Login authentication is performed by inputting a login password. After login authentication, the general mode screen is displayed. When no login password is set, the general mode screen is displayed without login authentication.

The general mode can be changed to the privileged mode by executing the "enable" command in the general mode and inputting a privileged mode password. If a privileged mode password is not set, the privileged mode screen is displayed by the [Enter] key.

Memo When a password is set for each mode, password authentication is performed.

Note After login, set a password for security.

Note When an account is registered, login by "mode login authentication" is disabled. A login password and a privileged mode password can be set. They are enabled when the account is deleted.

Fig. Mode Transition Diagram during Mode Login Authentication

General mode

Mode login authentication

Login password

Privilege mode

exit exit

Power ON Connection from telnet

enable Privilege mode

password

disable

Page 376: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Settings for Network Connection

3-30

Commands

disable Switch from privileged mode to general mode

enable Switch from general mode to privileged mode

exit Logout

set enable password Setting of privileged mode password

clear enable password Clearing of privileged mode password

set login password Setting of login password

clear login password Clearing of login password

Account name login authentication Login authentication is performed by inputting an account and a password. After login authentication, the general mode or privileged mode screen is displayed according to the user authority.

Memo The account used for login can be confirmed by the "show session" command.

Fig. Mode Transition Diagram during Account Name Login Authentication

General mode

Account name login authentication

Account Password

Privilege mode

exit exit

Power ON Connection from telnet

Account Password

Page 377: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Settings for Network Connection

3-31

Forcible logout due to time out A time out event occurs when no commands are input for a predetermined period of time after login, and the CX2200 performs forcible logout.

Commands

set terminal logout Setting of automatic logout time

show terminal config Display of terminal information

Account management When an account is registered, "account name login authentication" is performed from the next login. To register the account, the general mode (read-only) or privileged mode (read-write) user authority is required and a password containing four to 16 characters must be registered.

The registered password can be changed by specifying the registered account name and the user authority and inputting the registered password.

When a new account is registered, login with default account "admin" is enabled. The initial password of the default account is "admin". The default account password can be changed. The default account cannot be cleared.

Excluding the default account, up to six accounts can be registered.

Memo When no accounts are registered, also the default account is not displayed by the "show user account" command.

Note After a new account is registered, change the password of default account "admin" for security.

Commands

set user account Registration of user account

show user account Display of user account

clear user account Clearing of user account

Page 378: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Settings for Network Connection

3-32

Session management Up to four sessions can be set up by login to the CX2200 by telnet connection from a remote console in addition to from a local console. Session management displays login statuses and clears login sessions forcibly.

For remote console settings, see "3.2 Settings for Network Connection > 3.2.5 Settings for Remote Maintenance" of this manual.

If the link with a remote console is disconnected due to a failure in the line, session information is held for five minutes and deleted.

Commands

show session Display of session

clear session Clearing of session

Page 379: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Settings for Network Connection

3-33

Autonomous message The CX2200 outputs an autonomous message to each console if events such as a failure and information occur. The "set terminal monitor" command sets the output setting of the autonomous message. (The default setting of the autonomous message output is "enable" for a serial console and "disable" for a remote console.)

[1] Occurrence date and time [2] Message [3] Additional information

Memo When a login password is set or an account is registered, the autonomous message is output after login authentication.

Note If a large amount of events occurs and the number of autonomous messages waiting to be output exceeds 16000, the autonomous message after that is not be output. If this happens, the following message is output: "IF MESSAGE DISCARDED (CAUSE:RESOURCE BUSY)". When the output restarts, "IF MESSAGE DISCARDED RECOVER" is output.

If the number of autonomous messages waiting to be output exceeds the upper accumulation limit, the autonomous message after that is not be output either. If this happens, the following message is output: "There were some autonomous messages discarded by the buffer overflow."

Commands

set terminal monitor Setting of autonomous message output

show terminal config Display of terminal information

01/01/2000 00:00:37

===================

IF DEFAULT CONFIG BOOT UP (CAUSE:POWER-ON RESET)

[1]

[3] [2]

Page 380: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Settings for Network Connection

3-34

Input example

Autonomous message output is set. For RS-232C, the default value is set to output enabled and for telnet, it is set to output disabled.

3.2.5 Settings for Remote Maintenance The CX2200 calls communication through the FastEther (FE) port and GigabitEther (GbE) port "in-band network communication" and communication through the console port "out-band network communication". The remote communications enable remote maintenance using telnet from a remote console.

To enable access from a remote console using telnet, IP addresses must be set. No IP addresses are factory set for the CX2200. IP addresses setting for the CX2200 is made from the local console.

When IP address setting is completed and telnet connection is enabled, all commands that can be used from the local console become available from a remote console.

This section explains the settings to enable access to the CX2200 in the network from a remote console using a network example shown in the following figure.

In the following figure, communications from remote hosts 1 and 2 are enabled through in-band network communication and communications from remote hosts 3, 4, and 5 are enabled through out-band network communication.

*Switch# setal monitor enable

*Switch# show terminal config

Current Terminal Configuration

==============================

Console TimeOut (minutes) : 5

Output Length : 22

Alarm Monitor : enabled

Default Terminal Configuration

==============================

Console TimeOut (minutes) : 5

Output Length : 22

*Switch#

Page 381: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Settings for Network Connection

3-35

For telnet connection, up to four sessions including connections through in-band network communication and connections through out-band network communication, can be started at the same time.

192.168.1.254Gateway

169.127.10.1

Remote host 1 169.127.10.3

CX2200

Higher switch

Local console

RS-232

FE/GbE port

Remote host 2 192.168.1.4

Out-band network

10.42.74.0/16 Console port 1

Remote host 3 10.42.74.25 Remote host 4

10.40.36.123

In-band network 192.168.1.0/24

10.42.74.254 Gateway

10.40.36.1

10.42.74.253

Gateway 10.41.18.1

Remote host 5 10.41.18.124

Page 382: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Settings for Network Connection

3-36

Connect cables for in-band network communication.

Allocate IP addresses to CX2200.

Allocate VLAN ID to CX2200.

Set port blocking or unblocking for in-bandport.

3.2.5.1 Setting IP addresses 0.xxx.xxx.xxx/127.xxx.xxx.xxx and 224.xxx.xxx.xxx to 255.xxx.xxx.xxx cannot be set as IP addresses. ("xxx" are any number.)

Network addresses 192.168.128.0/24 and 192.168.129.0/24 cannot be set.

IP address where all host part bits are 0 or 1 cannot be set.

When IP addresses of gateways and various types of servers and managers are set, 0.xxx.xxx.xxx/127.xxx.xxx.xxx and 224.xxx.xxx.xxx to 255.xxx.xxx.xxx cannot be set. When gateways and various types of servers and managers exist in network addresses 192.168.128.0/24 and 192.168.129.0/24, the servers and managers can be configured but correct communications cannot be implemented.

3.2.5.2 Remote maintenance through in-band network When remote maintenance through in-band network communication is performed for the CX2200, access by telnet is enabled by the following procedure:

Until the procedure is completed, operations from a remote console are disabled.

Connecting in-band network 3-38

Setting IP addresses 3-38

Setting VLAN ID 3-39

Setting port blocking 3-40

Page 383: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Settings for Network Connection

3-37

Limit login through telnet communication.

Check the CX2200 and the remote consoletelnet communication status.

Save the set data contents.

Log into CX2200 through telnet communication from remote console.

Setting telnet connection access list 3-42

Checking communication statuses 3-43

Saving set data 3-44

Login from remote console 3-44

Make settings of a terminal to be used as a remote console (such as a PC) by reading the operation manual of the terminal so that telnet can be used.

Page 384: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Settings for Network Connection

3-38

Connecting in-band network Connect a remote maintenance terminal to a network through the FastEther (FE) port and GigabitEther (GbE) port.

Setting IP addresses To perform remote maintenance using telnet from a remote console through in-band, IP addresses must be allocated to the CX2200. And set a default gateway as needed.

The set IP address is used also for SNMP, ftp, and file update.

One IP address can be set as the in-band system IP address per unit.

When setting a default gateway, set the gateway belonging to either the out-band network or the in-band network as the default gateway. If the default gateway belongs to neither of the networks, communications may not be set up correctly.

Note 0.xxx.xxx.xxx/127.xxx.xxx.xxx and 224.xxx.xxx.xxx to 255.xxx.xxx.xxx cannot be set as IP addresses. ("xxx" is any number.) Network addresses 192.168.128.0/24 and 192.168.129.0/24 cannot be set.

Note IP address where all host part bits are 0 or 1 cannot be set.

Page 385: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Settings for Network Connection

3-39

Setting VLAN ID To perform remote maintenance using the in-band port, a VLAN ID must be set.

Note Only one VLAN ID can be set for the in-band port. The same VLAN ID must be set for the port of the CX2200 connected to the network (or the higher switch) to which the remote host is connected.

Commands

set ip address in-band Setting of in-band IP address

set in-band vid Setting of in-band port VLAN

set ip route default Setting of default gateway

show ip config Display of network information

clear ip address in-band Clearing of in-band IP address

clear in-band vid Clearing of in-band port VLAN

clear ip route default Clearing of default gateway

Page 386: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Settings for Network Connection

3-40

Setting port blocking Sets port blocking or unblocking for the in-band port and refers the setting.

Commands

set in-band admin Block/unblock of in-band port

show in-band information Display of in-band port setup information

Input example (1/2)

"192.168.1.10" is set as the IP address of the CX2200, "255.255.255.0" is set as the subnet mask, and "192.168.1.254" is set as the default gateway address.

100 is set as the VLAN ID for the in-band port and unblock the maintenance port.

(Continued to the next page)

Switch# set ip address in-band 192.168.1.10 255.255.255.0

*Switch# set ip route default 192.168.1.254

*Switch# show ip config

IP Table

========

Management Port MAC Address IP Address Netmask

-------------------------------------------------------------------

out-band 00:0b:6d:02:31:4b 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0

in-band 00:0b:6d:02:31:4c 192.168.1.10 255.255.255.0

IP Routing Table

================

Destination Gateway

Index Address Netmask Address Port

------------------------------------------------------------------

- 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 192.168.1.254 in-band

*Switch#

Page 387: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Settings for Network Connection

3-41

Input example (2/2)

*Switch# set in-band vid 100

*Switch# set in-band admin enable

*Switch# show in-band information

In-band Configuration

=====================

Admin: enabled

VID : 100

Name : default

*Switch#

Page 388: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Settings for Network Connection

3-42

Setting telnet connection access list The CX2200 provides the telnet connection access list function that allows login by telnet from remote consoles having specific IP addresses or remote consoles in specific networks only. How to set the telnet connection access list is described below.

When no telnet connection access lists are set, login from all remote consoles are enabled.

Setting of access lists is available also for setting for the out-band network.

Note 0.xxx.xxx.xxx/127.xxx.xxx.xxx, and 224.xxx.xxx.xxx to 255.xxx.xxx.xxx cannot be set as IP addresses. ("xxx" is any number.)

Network addresses 192.168.128.0/24 and 192.168.129.0/24 can be set, however, correct communication cannot be set up.

Commands

set session ip-permit Setting of access list

show session ip-permit Display of access list

clear session ip-permit Clearing of access list

Input example

IP address "192.168.1.4" is set in access list 1 and acceptable network "169.127.10.0/24" is set in access list 2.

*Switch# set session ip-permit 1 192.168.1.4 255.255.255.255

*Switch# set session ip-permit 2 169.127.10.0 255.255.255.0

*Switch# show session ip-permit

Telnet Filter Table

===================

No IP Address Netmask

------------------------------------

1 192.168.1.4 255.255.255.255

2 169.127.10.0 255.255.255.0

*Switch#

Page 389: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Settings for Network Connection

3-43

Checking communication statuses Checks the status of telnet communication between the CX2200 and a remote console from the local console.

Command

ping Checking of connection with host

Input example

Confirm that communication between the CX2200 and the remote console having IP address "192.168.1.4" is set up.

*Switch# ping 192.168.1.4

PING 192.168.1.4: 56 data bytes

64 bytes from 192.168.1.4: icmp_seq=0 ttl=128 time=5ms

64 bytes from 192.168.1.4: icmp_seq=1 ttl=128 time<5ms

64 bytes from 192.168.1.4: icmp_seq=2 ttl=128 time<5ms

64 bytes from 192.168.1.4: icmp_seq=3 ttl=128 time<5ms

--- 192.168.1.4 ping statistics ---

4 packets transmitted, 4 packets received, 0% packet loss

round-trip min/avg/max/stddev = 0.000/1.250/5.000/2.165 ms

*Switch#

Page 390: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Settings for Network Connection

3-44

Saving set data Saves the contents set in the CX2200 into the built-in flash memory.

When IP addresses used in the out-band network are used, restart by executing the "write memory" command and the "reset system" command in this order is required after the IP addresses in the in-band network are set.

Command

write memory Saving of setting status

Login from remote console Logs into the CX2200 from a remote console through telnet communication.

For the login method, see "3.2 Settings for Network Connection > 3.2.4 Power on and Login > 3.2.4.3 Login" of this manual.

Input example

telnet connection to the CX2200 from a remote console is established. After the command prompt is displayed, the same operation as that for the local console is enabled.

> telnet 192.168.1.10

Switch>

Page 391: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Settings for Network Connection

3-45

Connect cables for out-band network communication.

Allocate IP addresses to CX2200.

Modify speed for out-band or flow control settings.

Limit login by telnet communication.

Check the CX2200 and the remote console telnet communication status.

Save the set data contents.

Log into CX2200 from remote console by telnet communication.

3.2.5.3 Remote maintenance through out-band network When remote maintenance is performed for the CX2200 through out-band network communication, access by telnet is enabled by the following procedure.

Until the procedure is completed, operations from the remote console are disabled.

Connecting out-band network 3-46

Setting IP addresses 3-46

Setting speed of maintenance port 3-47

Setting telnet connection access list 3-49

Checking communication statuses 3-50

Saving set data 3-51

Login from remote console 3-51

Make settings of a terminal to be used as a remote console (such as a PC) by reading the operation manual of the terminal so that telnet can be used.

Page 392: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Settings for Network Connection

3-46

Connecting out-band network Connect a remote maintenance terminal to a network through the console port.

Setting IP addresses To perform remote maintenance using telnet from a remote console through out-band, IP addresses must be allocated to the CX2200. And set a default gateway as needed.

The set IP addresses are used also for SNMP, ftp, and file update.

One IP address can be set as the out-band system IP address per unit.

When setting a default gateway, set the gateway belonging to either the out-band network or the in-band network as the default gateway. If the default gateway belongs to neither of the networks, communications may not be set up correctly.

Note 0.xxx.xxx.xxx/127.xxx.xxx.xxx and 224.xxx.xxx.xxx to 255.xxx.xxx.xxx cannot be set as IP addresses. ("xxx" is any number.) Network addresses 192.168.128.0/24 and 192.168.129.0/24 cannot be set.

Note IP address where all host part bits are 0 or 1 cannot be set.

Commands

set ip address out-band Setting of out-band IP address

set ip route default Setting of default gateway

show ip config Display of network information

clear ip address out-band Clearing of out-band IP address

clear ip route default Clearing of default gateway

Page 393: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Settings for Network Connection

3-47

Setting speed of maintenance port Sets speed, duplex mode or flow control for the out-band port and refer the settings.

Commands

set out-band speed Setting of out-band port speed/communication direction

set out-band flowcontrol Setting of out-band port flow control

show out-band information Display of out-band port setup information

Input example (1/2)

"10.42.74.100" is set as the IP address for out-band network communication of the CX2200, "255.255.0.0" is set as the subnet mask, and "10.42.74.254" is set as the default gateway address. Also, "auto" is set for maintenance port speed.

(Continued to the next page)

*Switch# set ip address out-band 10.42.74.100 255.255.0.0

*Switch# set ip route default 10.42.74.254

*Switch# show ip config

IP Table

========

Management Port MAC Address IP Address Netmask

---------------------------------------------------------------------

out-band 00:0b:6d:02:31:4b 10.42.74.100 255.255.255.0

in-band 00:0b:6d:02:31:4c 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0

IP Routing Table

================

Destination Gateway

Index Address Netmask Address Port

------------------------------------------------------------------

- 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 10.42.74.254 out-band

*Switch#

Page 394: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Settings for Network Connection

3-48

Input example (2/2)

*Switch# set out-band speed auto

*Switch# show out-band information

Out-Band Table

==============

Port Link Flowcontrol Flowcontrol

Speed Status MDI Configuration Status

-------------------------------------------------------

auto 100m-full auto disabled disabled

*Switch#

Page 395: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Settings for Network Connection

3-49

Setting telnet connection access list The CX2200 provides the telnet connection access list function that allows login by telnet from remote consoles having specific IP addresses or remote consoles in specific networks only. The setting method of telnet connection access lists is described below.

When no telnet connection access lists are set, login from all remote consoles are enabled.

Setting of access lists is available also for setting for the in-band network.

Note 0.xxx.xxx.xxx/127.xxx.xxx.xxx, and 224.xxx.xxx.xxx to 255.xxx.xxx.xxx cannot be set as IP addresses. ("xxx" is any number.)

Network addresses 192.168.128.0/24 and 192.168.129.0/24 can be set, however, correct communication cannot be set up.

Commands

set session ip-permit Setting of access list

show session ip-permit Display of access list

clear session ip-permit Clearing of access list

Input example

IP address "10.42.74.25" is set in access list 1 and acceptable network "10.40.36.0/24" is set in access list 2.

*Switch# set session ip-permit 1 10.42.74.25 255.255.255.255

*Switch# set session ip-permit 2 10.40.36.0 255.255.255.0

*Switch# show session ip-permit

Telnet Filter Table

===================

No IP Address Netmask

------------------------------------

1 10.42.74.25 255.255.255.255

2 10.40.36.0 255.255.255.0

*Switch#

Page 396: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Settings for Network Connection

3-50

Checking communication statuses Checks the status of telnet communication, between the CX2200 and a remote console, through out-band network communication from the local console.

Command

ping Checking of connection with host

This command enables the local console to confirm the status of telnet communication between the CX2200 and a remote console through out-band network communication.

Input example

Confirm that communication between the CX2200 and the remote console having IP address "10.42.74.25" is set up.

*Switch# ping 10.42.74.25

PING 10.42.74.100: 56 data bytes

64 bytes from 10.42.74.25: icmp_seq=0 ttl=128 time=5ms

64 bytes from 10.42.74.25: icmp_seq=1 ttl=128 time<5ms

64 bytes from 10.42.74.25: icmp_seq=2 ttl=128 time<5ms

64 bytes from 10.42.74.25: icmp_seq=3 ttl=128 time<5ms

--- 10.42.74.25 ping statistics ---

4 packets transmitted, 4 packets received, 0% packet loss

round-trip min/avg/max/stddev = 0.000/1.250/5.000/2.165 ms

*Switch#

Page 397: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Settings for Network Connection

3-51

Saving set data Saves the contents set in the CX2200 into the built-in flash memory.

When IP addresses used in the in-band network are used, restart by executing the "write memory" command and the "reset system" command in this order is required after the IP addresses in the out-band network are set.

Command

write memory Saving of setting status

Login from remote console Logs into the CX2200 from a remote console in the out-band network through telnet communication.

For the login method, see "3.2 Settings for Network Connection > 3.2.4 Power on and Login > 3.2.4.3 Login" of this manual.

Input example

telnet connection to the CX2200 from a remote console in the out-band network is established. After the command prompt is displayed, the same operation as that for the local console is enabled.

> telnet 10.42.74.100

Switch>

Page 398: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Settings for Network Connection

3-52

3.2.5.4 Maintenance network construction When a LAN including two or more gateways is constructed while a maintenance network is constructed, gateways excluding the default gateway can be set for the CX2200 by the following procedure.

Adding static routes 3-52

Adding static routes Adds gateways excluding the default gateway as static gateways.

Up to 32 static routes can be set.

Memo When setting a static route, set a gateway belonging to either the out-band network or the in-band network as the default gateway.

Note If the gateway belongs to neither of the out-band and in-band networks, communications with a network set by destination may not be set up correctly.

Note When both in-band and out-band network IP addresses are set and gateways belong to both of the networks, set the gateway in a network in which many network address parts match. To set the gateway in a network in which few network address parts match, set the IP address, which is different from one in the network in which many network address parts match, as the gateway IP address.

Note 0.xxx.xxx.xxx/127. and 224.xxx.xxx.xxx to 255.xxx.xxx.xxx cannot be set as IP addresses. ("xxx" is any number.) Network addresses 192.168.128.0/24 and 192.168.129.0/24 cannot be set. A gateway address can be set to 192.168.128.0/24 and 192.168.129.0/24 network addresses, but communications cannot be performed correctly.

Note It is recommended to stop the communication currently in progress. If not, communications with a network set by destination may not be set up correctly.

Page 399: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Settings for Network Connection

3-53

Commands

set ip route Setting of static route

clear ip route Clearing of static route

show ip config Display of network information

Input example

Gateway "10.42.74.253" to the remote host "10.41.18.124" is set as the 32nd static route.

*Switch# set ip route 32 10.41.18.124 255.255.255.0 10.42.74.253

*Switch# show ip config

IP Table

========

Management Port MAC Address IP Address Netmask

---------------------------------------------------------------------

out-band 00:0b:6d:02:31:4b 10.42.74.100 255.255.255.0

in-band 00:0b:6d:02:31:4c 192.168.1.10 255.255.255.0

IP Routing Table

================

Destination Gateway

Index Address Netmask Address Port

------------------------------------------------------------------

- 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 10.42.74.254 out-band

32 10.41.18.0 255.255.255.0 10.42.74.253 out-band

*Switch#

Page 400: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Settings for Network Connection

3-54

Set current date and time.

Set system information according to CX2200 operation mode.

Set each function according to CX2200 operation mode.

Save the set and modified data.

3.2.6 Basic Settings after Purchase This section describes the procedure for basic settings by the CLI (command interface) to be performed after purchase of the CX2200.

3.2.6.1 Setting date and time 3-55

3.2.6.2 Setting system information 3-59

3.2.6.3 Setting functions 3-59

3.2.6.4 Saving set information 3-60

Page 401: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Settings for Network Connection

3-55

3.2.6.1 Setting date and time The CX2200 provides the clock function. It sets the time zone, current date and time, and daylight saving time period and synchronizes the time by the NTP function. The CX2200 can deal with years 2000 to 2099.

Time zone setting Sets the time lag from Greenwich mean time. The local time is set to the unit based on the time zone setting when the time is synchronized by the NTP function.

Note The default setting of the time zone is +09:00. If the date and time is before 2000/01/01 00:00:00 by the time zone setting, the date and time of the unit is 2000/01/01 00:00:00.

Commands

set system timezone Setting of timezone

show system date Display of date and time

Input example

The time zone is set to -06:00.

*Switch# set system timezone -06:00

*Switch# show system date

System Date

===========

Date : 01/01/2000

Time : 00:00:02

Time Zone: GMT -06:00

*Switch#

Page 402: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Settings for Network Connection

3-56

Date and time setting Sets the date and time entered to the unit.

Memo Years 2000 to 2099 can be set.

Commands

date Setting of date and time

show system date Display of date and time

Input example

The date and time is set to 2006/10/22 12:00:00.

*Switch# date 10/22/06 12:00:00

*Switch# show system date

System Date

===========

Date : 10/22/2006

Time : 12:00:03

Time Zone: GMT -06:00

*Switch#

Page 403: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Settings for Network Connection

3-57

Daylight saving time setting The daylight saving time is a function to set the time ahead during the period set. The daylight saving period can be set by specifying a date or a day of the week. The time is automatically set ahead when the daylight saving time period starts and is set back when it ends. The time difference can be set freely.

Memo If the time difference is omitted in setting the daylight saving time, 01:00 is assumed.

Memo In specifying a date, the same date cannot be set as the start and the end date of daylight saving time. In specifying a day of the week, the same month/week/day of the week cannot be set as the start and the end date of daylight saving time.

Memo If daylight saving time is shorter than time difference by daylight saving time, the specified end date is changed to that of the next year.

Memo If the start date or the end date is Feb. 29, daylight saving time is applied only to leap years. If Feb. 29 is set as the start date and the daylight saving time is shorter than time difference by daylight saving time, the end date is changed to that of the next year of the leap year. If Feb. 29 is set as the end date and the daylight saving time is shorter than time difference by daylight saving time, the start date is changed to that of the previous year of a leap year.

Memo During daylight saving time, (DST) is shown in the current time.

Commands

set system daylight-time Setting of daylight saving time

clear system daylight-time Clearing of daylight saving time

show system date Display of date and time

Page 404: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Settings for Network Connection

3-58

Input example

Daylight saving time is set as starting from 00:00 on the first Sunday in April and ending in 00:00 on the last Sunday in October.

NTP setting The CX2200 provides the NTP function. The NTP function is a protocol that synchronizes the network time between the NTP server and the CX2200. This synchronization enables respective events to be related according to time information during system log creation or at event occurrence.

For the details of the NTP function setting method, see "4.2.14 NTP function" of this manual.

*Switch# set system daylight-time first sunday 4 00:00 last sunday 10 12:00

*Switch# show system date detail

System Date

===========

Current Date : 10/22/2006

Current Time : 13:00:07 (DST)

Time Zone : GMT -06:00

Daylight Time Start : 04/02/2006 00:00

Daylight Time End : 10/29/2006 12:00

Daylight Time Offset: 01:00

*Switch#

Page 405: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Settings for Network Connection

3-59

3.2.6.2 Setting system information Sets system information of the CX2200.

System information includes an administrator to contact, a system name and a system location. This information can be referenced as maintenance information during SNMP access and telnet access from a remote host.

Commands

set system contact Setting of administrator contact

set system name Setting of system name

set system location Setting of system location

show system information Display of system information

3.2.6.3 Setting functions Performs various types of settings according to the CX2200 operation mode.

Functions are set by CLI commands. For details of the setting method, see "2.3 Setting of Basic Functions" of this manual.

If you have configuration data to be set, copy the necessary setting data and paste it in the console screen of this unit. Input the data as is as a command. Some communication software allows you to set the configuration data as is in batch mode by sending it to this unit. For details of the setting method, see "2.7 Configuration Data > 2.7.2 Configuration Data Management" of this manual.

Page 406: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Settings for Network Connection

3-60

3.2.6.4 Saving set information The set/modified data is written as running configuration data in the DRAM area. So, if power is turned off, the data disappears.

The running configuration data is saved in built-in flash memory as startup configuration data so that the set/modified data will not disappear even if power is turned off.

Command

write memory Saving of setting status

Page 407: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Maintenance

4-1

4 Maintenance

4.1 Outline..........................................4-2

4.2 Method of Operating Maintenance and Management Functions.............4-3

4.2.1 Loopback Test ................................................ 4-3

4.2.2 Connection Test............................................ 4-18

4.2.3 SNMP-based Management .......................... 4-20

4.2.4 Counter Monitoring ....................................... 4-26

4.2.5 Fault Monitoring............................................ 4-53

4.2.6 Faults............................................................ 4-56

4.2.7 syslog Functions........................................... 4-57

4.2.8 MAC Learning............................................... 4-62

4.2.9 Port Mirroring................................................ 4-65

4.2.10 System Reboot ........................................... 4-69

4.2.11 Initialization................................................. 4-71

4.2.12 Replacement............................................... 4-73

4.2.13 Resource Monitoring................................... 4-86

4.2.14 NTP Function.............................................. 4-88

4.3 Useful Functions .......................4-91

4.3.1 Version Up.................................................... 4-91

4.3.2 Trap Transmission Selection Function ......... 4-98

4.4 Troubleshooting......................4-103

Page 408: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Outline

4-2

4.1 Outline This chapter describes how to operate the functions for network and system maintenance and management through monitoring and logging. Also, this chapter describes the procedures for upgrade and troubleshooting (solutions and restoration to the default state required in trouble).

Page 409: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Method of Operating Maintenance and Management Functions

4-3

4.2 Method of Operating Maintenance and Management Functions 4.2.1 Loopback Test CX2200 has the following loopback test functions:

(1) Ether network loopback test

This test function checks the status of the transmission path between the CX2200 Ether port and the distant device.

(2) ATM transmission path loopback tes

This test function checks the status of the ATM transmission path state between the CX2200 and the other unit (segment-to-end or end-to-end).

Page 410: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Method of Operating Maintenance and Management Functions

4-4

4.2.1.1 Ether network loopback test Loopback tests for Ether network can be conducted by using ETH-LB of the EtherOAM function.

ETH-LB test procedure

Setting the MEP A MEP must be set in advance to the device to be tested (local device/distant device) before conducting the ETH-LB test.

For the setting of MEP, see "Command Reference".

Starting the ETH-LB test Select one of the following tests for the ETH-LB test.

(1) Unicast ETH-LB test

Conducts a loopback test to the specified device on the Ether network. Test count can be specified in the range of 1 to 127 times. Also, interval can be specified in the range of 1 to 10 seconds.

(2) Multicast ETH-LB test

Conducts loopback test to multiple devices by transmitting multicast frames.

Memo The test count for multicast ETH-LB test is fixed to "1".

The "loopback ether-oam" command starts the ETH-LB test. Parameters are shown below.

MEP index A value whose range is from 1 to 128 can be specified.

Destination MAC address The MAC address of the distant device port is specified.

LBM transmission count A value whose range is from 1 to 127 can be specified.

Transmission period A value whose range is from 1 to 10 (sec) can be specified.

PDU size A value whose range is from 46 to 8982 can be specified.

Priority A value whose range is from 0 to 7 can be specified.

Page 411: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Method of Operating Maintenance and Management Functions

4-5

The following parameters are optional. If they are omitted, the values in parentheses will be assumed.

Destination MAC address (Multicast MAC Address set by set ether-oam frame)

LBM transmission count (4 times)

Transmission period (1 sec)

PDU size (46)

Priority (7)

Memo When the destination MAC address is omitted, transmission count/ transmission interval cannot be specified.

Command

loopback ether-oam Transmission of ETH-LB

Memo Set the transmission of ETH-LB after confirming that the MEP is set. For the setting of MEP, see "Command Reference".

Note You cannot activate two or more of this command simultaneously. Also, you cannot activate this command and the ETH-DM transmission command simultaneously.

Page 412: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Method of Operating Maintenance and Management Functions

4-6

Terminating the ETH-LB test To terminate the ETH-LB test, press Ctrl+ c .

Memo If the Multicast ETH-LB test is conducted, the test will stop automatically.

If the Unicast ETH-LB test is conducted, the test will stop automatically when the test count reaches to the specified count.

Input examples Example The following example conducts the Unicast ETH-LB test.

Switch# loopback ether-oam 123 00:4c:c4:1e:20:5c count 3 period 1 size 46 priority 7

Ether OAM Loopback Port Information

===================================

Port : 25

MAC Address : 00:4c:c4:12:34:56

VID : 100

MEG ID : TEST123456789

MEP ID : 20

MEG Level : 3

result 00:4c:c4:1e:20:5c seq=1 bytes=46 time=300ms

result 00:4c:c4:1e:20:5c seq=2 bytes=46 timeout

result 00:4c:c4:1e:20:5c seq=3 bytes=46 time=500ms

Ether OAM Loopback Result Information for 00:4c:c4:1e:20:5c

===========================================================

request = 3, test ok = 2, test fail = 1 (33% failure)

delay minimum = 300ms, maximum = 500ms, average = 400ms

delay variation = 100ms

Switch#

Page 413: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Method of Operating Maintenance and Management Functions

4-7

Example The following example conducts the Multicast ETH-LB test.

Switch# loopback ether-oam 123

Ether OAM Multicast Loopback Port Information

=============================================

Port : 25

MAC Address : 00:4c:c4:12:34:56

VID : 100

MEG ID : TEST123456789

MEP ID : 20

MEG Level : 3

Ether OAM Multicast Loopback Result Information

===============================================

1 00:4c:c4:1e:20:1c

2 00:4c:c4:1e:20:2c

3 00:4c:c4:1e:20:5c

4 00:4c:c4:1e:20:4c

5 00:4c:c4:1e:20:3c

Switch#

Page 414: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Method of Operating Maintenance and Management Functions

4-8

4.2.1.2 ATM transmission path loopback test CX2200 has the following functions to check normality of ATM transmission paths:

(1) Loopback test function

(2) Loopback monitoring function

Transmitted loopback cell setting procedure

Setting the source ID for the ATM loopback test The source ID is the local device ID used when CX2200 transmits loopback cells. It is a common value shared by the loopback test function and loopback monitoring function.

Upon receipt of a loopback cell from the other unit, the source ID is compared with the location ID in the received cell. If they match, a response is returned.

* For operations on ATM loopback cell reception, refer to "11 List of Operations on ATM Loopback Cell Reception" in Appendix.

Commands

set loopback atm source-id Setting of ATM loopback source ID

show loopback atm source-id Display of ATM loopback source ID

Memo The values, all bits as "0" and all bits as "1" (0xffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffff) cannot be set.

Page 415: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Method of Operating Maintenance and Management Functions

4-9

Checking the source ID for transmitted loopback cells To check the source ID for transmitted loopback cells, use the "show loopback atm source-id" command.

Input example Example In the following example, "FFAA33" is set as the source ID for transmitted loopback

cells.

*Switch# set loopback atm source-id FFAA33

*Switch# show loopback atm source-id

ATM Loopback Source-ID Table

============================

Source-ID : 0x00000000000000000000000000FFAA33

*Switch#

Page 416: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Method of Operating Maintenance and Management Functions

4-10

Loopback test procedure You can conduct the ATM transmission path loopback test on a specified connection for a specified number of times (1 to 1000).

Starting the loopback test

To start the loopback test, use the "loopback atm" command. Parameters are shown below.

Level Either f4 for the VP level or f5 for the VC level can be specified.

PVC identifier Port number VPI value

Port number VPI value/VCI value

PVC name

Values can be specified in one of the above three patterns.

Test section Either "segment" (internode) or "end-end" (termination) can be specified.

Location ID A value can be specified within the range from 0x1 to 0xffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffff.

Indication check Either "enable" or "disable" can be specified.

Test count A value can be specified within the range from 1 to 1000 (counts).

Response wait time A value can be specified within the range from 5 to 10 (seconds).

Test direction Output direction of loopback cells can be specified.

outside: Line direction (from CPUSW to ATM line card)

inside: SW direction (from ATM line card to CPUSW)

The following parameters are optional. If they are omitted, the values in parentheses will be assumed.

Test section (end-end)

Location ID (0xffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffff)

Indication check (enable)

Test count (1)

Response wait time (5 seconds)

Test direction (outside)

Page 417: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Method of Operating Maintenance and Management Functions

4-11

Command

loopback atm Starting of ATM loopback test

Note If you execute the "write memory" command during the loopback test, the test status will not be saved in startup-config.

Note The loopback test automatically stops if the system is rebooted.

Memo Multiple loopback tests (by specifying 0x0 as the location ID) are not available.

Terminating the loopback test To terminate the loopback test, press Ctrl+ c .

Memo If the loopback test count is 1, the test will stop automatically; you do not need to perform this step.

Page 418: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Method of Operating Maintenance and Management Functions

4-12

Input example Example The following example conducts the loopback test.

*Switch# loopback atm f4 1 0 end-end enable count 3 wait 5 inside

result 1 seq=1 time=470ms

result 1 seq=2 time=460ms

result 1 seq=3 timeout

loopback statistics for 1 0

level f4

section end

indication-check enabled

wait 5s

location-ID 0xffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffff

direction inside

count = 3, ok = 2, fail = 1 (33% failure)

minimum = 460ms, maximum = 470ms, average = 465ms

*Switch#

*Switch# loopback atm f5 1 0/32 segment enable count 5 wait 5 outside

result 1 seq=1 timeout

result 1 seq=2 timeout

result 1 seq=3 timeout

result 1 seq=4 timeout

result 1 seq=5 timeout

loopback statistics for 1 0/32

level f5

section segment

indication-check enabled

wait 5s

location-ID 0xffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffff

direction outside

count = 5, ok = 0, fail = 5 (100% failure)

minimum = 0ms, maximum = 0ms, average = 0ms

*Switch#

Page 419: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Method of Operating Maintenance and Management Functions

4-13

Loopback monitoring procedure You can perform loopback monitoring on a specified connection.

Setting loopback monitoring To set loopback monitoring, specify "enable" or "disable" in the "set loopback atm keepalive-mode" command.

Command

set loopback atm keepalive-mode Setting of ATM loopback monitoring mode

Note Enabling loopback monitoring clears the monitoring statistics.

Setting the loopback monitoring configuration data To set the loopback monitoring configuration data, use the "set loopback atm keepalive" command. Parameters are shown below.

level Either f4 for the VP level or f5 for the VC level can be specified.

PVC identifier Port number VPI value

Port number VPI value/VCI value

PVC name

Values can be specified in one of the above three patterns.

Test section Either "segment" (internode) or "end-end" (termination) can be specified.

Location ID A value can be specified within the range from 0x1 to 0xffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffff.

Loopback monitoring result (success) change threshold

A threshold value can be specified within the range from 1 to 10 (counts).

Loopback monitoring result (fail) change threshold

A threshold value can be specified within the range from 1 to 10 (counts).

Test direction Output direction of loopback cells can be specified.

outside: Line direction (from CPUSW to ATM line card)

inside: SW direction (from ATM line card to CPUSW)

Page 420: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Method of Operating Maintenance and Management Functions

4-14

The following parameters are optional. If they are omitted, the values in parentheses will be assumed.

Test section (end-end)

Location ID (0xffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffff)

Loopback monitoring result success change threshold (1)

Loopback monitoring result fail change threshold (1)

Test direction (outside)

Command

set loopback atm keepalive Setting of ATM loopback monitoring function

Memo ATM loopback monitoring is performed on a port-by-port basis, beginning with the smallest VPI/VCI number.

Memo The timeout value is 5 seconds per PVC. The monitoring cycle for all PVCs is 5 minutes.

Memo Changing the monitoring configuration data deletes the monitoring statistics for the target PVC.

Memo Multiple loopback monitoring configuration (by specifying 0x0 as the location ID) is not available.

Note If the target PVC is deleted, the setting of this function is cleared.

Page 421: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Method of Operating Maintenance and Management Functions

4-15

Clearing the loopback monitoring configuration data To clear the loopback monitoring configuration data, use the "clear loopback atm keepalive" command. The parameters are level (f4 for the VP level or f5 for the VC level) and PVC identifier (port number VPI or VPI/VCI PVC name).

Command

clear loopback atm keepalive Clearing of ATM loopback monitoring function

Displaying the ATM loopback monitoring configuration data To display the ATM loopback monitoring configuration data, use the "show loopback atm keepalive config" command. The parameter is the PVC identifier (line number VPI or VPI/VCI PVC name).

If the parameter is omitted, the loopback monitoring configuration data for all ports will be displayed.

Command

show loopback atm keepalive config Display of ATM loopback monitoring configuration

Displaying the ATM loopback monitoring information To display the ATM loopback monitoring information, use the "show loopback atm keepalive information" command. The parameter is the PVC identifier (line number VPI or VPI/VCI PVC name).

If the parameter is omitted, the loopback monitoring information for all ports will be displayed.

Command

show loopback atm keepalive information

Display of ATM loopback monitoring information

Page 422: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Method of Operating Maintenance and Management Functions

4-16

Input example Example The following example conducts loopback monitoring.

*Switch# set loopback atm keepalive-mode enable

*Switch# set loopback atm keepalive f4 3 0 segment 0x1234 success 10 fail 5

*Switch# set loopback atm keepalive f5 4 0/32

*Switch# show loopback atm keepalive config

ATM Loopback Configuration Table

================================

Keepalive-Mode : enabled

ATM Loopback Cell F4 Configuration Table

========================================

Port VPI Section Direction Success Threshold Fail Threshold

----------------------------------------------------------------

3 0 segment outside 10 5

ATM Loopback Cell F4 Location-ID

================================

Port VPI Location-ID

---------------------------------------------

3 0 0x00000000000000000000000000001234

ATM Loopback Cell F5 Config Table

=================================

Port VPI/VCI Section Direction Success Threshold Fail Threshold

--------------------------------------------------------------------

4 0/32 end outside 1 1

ATM Loopback Cell F5 Location-ID

================================

Port VPI/VCI Location-ID

-------------------------------------------------

4 0/32 0xffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffff

*Switch#

Page 423: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Method of Operating Maintenance and Management Functions

4-17

*Switch# show loopback atm keepalive information

ATM Loopback Configuration Table

================================

Keepalive-Mode : enabled

ATM Loopback F4 Status Table

============================

Port VPI Section Direction Test Status Last Result Count(ok/test)

-----------------------------------------------------------------------

3 0 segment outside success ok 10/10

ATM Loopback F5 Status Table

============================

Port VPI/VCI Section Direction Test Status Last Result Count(ok/test)

--------------------------------------------------------------------------

-

4 0/32 end outside fail timeout 0/1

*Switch#

Page 424: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Method of Operating Maintenance and Management Functions

4-18

4.2.2 Connection Test This test lets you check whether CX2200 is connected to a specified host properly.

4.2.2.1 Connection test procedure • Enter the "ping" command.

• To suspend the connection test, press the Ctrl+ c key combination.

Note 0.xxx.xxx.xxx/127.xxx.xxx.xxx and 224.xxx.xxx.xxx to 255.xxx.xxx.xxx cannot be set as an IP address. ("xxx" is a string of arbitrary numbers.)

Also, communication to the network addresses 192.168.128.0/24 and 192.168.129.0/24 cannot be accomplished normally.

Command

ping Checking of connection with host

Page 425: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Method of Operating Maintenance and Management Functions

4-19

Input example

The following example tests the connection with 10.40.36.196.

[1] A timeout occurred 4 times, indicating that the connection failed to be confirmed after 4 test frame transmissions.

[2] Four packets were transmitted, and 4 packets were received, with the packet loss rate of 0%, indicating that the connection was successfully confirmed (4 times).

Switch# ping 10.40.36.196

PING 10.40.36.196: 56 data bytes

Request timed out

Request timed out

Request timed out

Request timed out

--- 10.40.36.196 ping statistics ---

4 packets transmitted, 0 packets received, 100% packet loss

Switch# ping 10.40.36.196

PING 10.40.36.196: 56 data bytes

64 bytes from 10.40.36.196: icmp_seq=0 ttl=128 time=5.000 ms

64 bytes from 10.40.36.196: icmp_seq=1 ttl=128 time<1.000 ms

64 bytes from 10.40.36.196: icmp_seq=2 ttl=128 time<1.000 ms

64 bytes from 10.40.36.196: icmp_seq=3 ttl=128 time<1.000 ms

--- 10.40.36.196 ping statistics ---

4 packets transmitted, 4 packets received, 0% packet loss

round-trip min/avg/max/stddev = 0.000/1.250/5.000/2.165 ms

Switch #

[1]

[2]

Page 426: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Method of Operating Maintenance and Management Functions

4-20

4.2.3 SNMP-based Management As the network management protocol, CX2200 supports SNMP v1 (Simple Network Management Protocol Version 1) defined by RFC 1157 and SNMP v2c (Community-based SNMP Version 2) defined by RFC 1901.

If the system fails or the need arises to report some event, an SNMP trap can be issued to an SNMP manager to notify the maintenance personnel of the event.

If you do not intend to perform network management, it is not necessary to make the SNMP-related settings described below.

CX2200 stores its operating status information as objects in an MIB. The SNMP manager can grasp the CX2200 status using reference requests and update the CX2200 settings remotely using set requests.

Community name

One parameter you need to specify when setting SNMP-based network management is a community name. A community name defines the range of the network (community) to be managed by the SNMP manager. It is used as an authentication feature to limit access from the SNMP manager to CX2200.

It is also possible to specify more than one SNMP manager and trap manager for a single community. When adding different addresses, you need to enter the relevant command for each additional address.

Page 427: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Method of Operating Maintenance and Management Functions

4-21

Setting procedure Make the settings necessary for SNMP-based network management using the following procedure:

Set SNMP.

Set the SNMP manager.

Set SNMP unauthorized access trap transmission.

Set the trap manager.

Save the set data.

4.2.3.1 Setting SNMP - set snmp 4-22

4.2.3.2 Setting the SNMP manager - set snmp manager 4-23

4.2.3.3 Setting SNMP unauthorized access trap issuance - set snmp authen-trap 4-24

4.2.3.4 Setting the trap manager - set snmp trap-manager 4-24

4.2.3.5 Saving the set data - write memory 4-25

Page 428: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Method of Operating Maintenance and Management Functions

4-22

4.2.3.1 Setting SNMP CX2200 has the function to set SNMP and to show the set SNMP data. The "set snmp" command enables SNMP to allow the SNMP manager to find and set the network management information by means of the SNMP management functions. Also, CX2200 faults can be reported to the trap manager.

Commands

set snmp Setting of SNMP enable/disable

show snmp Display of SNMP setting information

Page 429: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Method of Operating Maintenance and Management Functions

4-23

4.2.3.2 Setting the SNMP manager The "set snmp manager" command sets the community name and access privilege, which are used to authenticate messages exchanged between networks managed by the SNMP manager, as well as the IP address of the host of the SNMP manager. As the access privilege, you can set one of the two options - read-only and read-write.

Up to 20 SNMP managers can be registered. CX2200 has the functions to set, show, and clear SNMP managers.

Note 0.xxx.xxx.xxx/127.xxx.xxx.xxx and 224.xxx.xxx.xxx to 255.xxx.xxx.xxx cannot be set as the manager IP address. ("xxx" is a string of arbitrary numbers.)

Also, if the manager resides in either of the following network addresses, 192.168.128.0/24 and 192.168.129.0/24, that manager can be configured although communication cannot be accomplished normally.

Note A response timeout error may occur in SNMP managers in the following cases.

• Response delay due to network congestion

• Response delay due to simultaneous access from multiple SNMP managers.

• Response delay due to search of next MIB specified according to configuration conditions.

If the error occurs, extend the response monitoring timer for SNMP managers.

Commands

set snmp manager Setting of SNMP manager

clear snmp manager Clearing of SNMP manager settings

show snmp Display of SNMP setting information

Page 430: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Method of Operating Maintenance and Management Functions

4-24

4.2.3.3 Setting SNMP unauthorized access trap issuance CX2200 can transmit a trap in the event of an unauthorized SNMP access attempt. The "set snmp authen-trap" command enables the SNMP unauthorized access trap issuance function to permit this trap to be issued.

Commands

set snmp authen-trap Setting of SNMP unauthorized access trap transmission

show snmp Display of SNMP setting information

4.2.3.4 Setting the trap manager The "set snmp trap-manager" command sets a host that serves as the trap manager that manages traps. The parameters for the trap manager are the community name, IP address, and device name. Up to 10 trap managers can be registered, each managed by its respective manager number. CX2200 has the functions to set, show, and clear trap managers.

Note 0.xxx.xxx.xxx/127.xxx.xxx.xxx and 224.xxx.xxx.xxx to 255.xxx.xxx.xxx cannot be set as the manager IP address. ("xxx" is a string of arbitrary numbers.)

Also, if the manager resides in either of the following network addresses, 192.168.128.0/24 and 192.168.129.0/24, that manager can be configured although communication cannot be accomplished normally.

Note If a large number of events occur simultaneously, trap data may not be transmitted. In that case "IF MESSAGE DISCARDED (CAUSE:RESOURCE BUSY)" will be transmitted. When the trap transmission has been restarted, "IF MESSAGE DISCARDED RECOVER" is transmitted.

Commands

set snmp trap-manager Setting of SNMP trap manager

clear snmp trap-manager Clearing of SNMP trap manager settings

show snmp Display of SNMP setting information

Page 431: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Method of Operating Maintenance and Management Functions

4-25

4.2.3.5 Saving the set data Saves the set data to the startup configuration data file after finishing the data setting.

Command

write memory Saving of setting information

Limitation

• About the date

In order for traps to contain the date and time information, you need to set the date and time in advance. For information about how to set the date and time, see "Method of initial setup".

Page 432: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Method of Operating Maintenance and Management Functions

4-26

4.2.4 Counter Monitoring CX2200 offers counter monitoring functions that allow monitoring on a per port basis as well as on a per VLAN basis.

4.2.4.1 Port counters CX2200 has a per port counter monitoring function to collect and read the number of transmitted and received frames.

The counter values can be shown in the following two ways:

• Displaying in real time

• Displaying details

Note This function does not work for other than the GbE and FE port.

Displaying in real time CX2200 provides two real-time display functions - one collects the counter values showing the number of frames transmitted and received by each port and shows the collected data in real time, and the other clears the counter values.

The values of the counters shown below are collected.

The transmitted frame counter value and received frame counter value of each port are shown in real time.

These counter values are updated at every 2 seconds until the Ctrl+c key combination is pressed.

Clearing the counter values clears the corresponding SNMP MIB values as well.

Display item Description

Pkts(Rx) Number of received frames

Pkts(Tx) Number of transmitted frames

Commands

clear counter port Clearing of port counter

show counter port Display of port counter

Page 433: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Method of Operating Maintenance and Management Functions

4-27

Displaying details CX2200 can collect and show the detail counter values of a specified port.

This function shows the detail counter values of a specified port.

The counter values that are the latest at the time of command input are shown only once.

The values of the counters listed below are collected. For the data collecting conditions for counter monitoring, see Appendix "5 Counter Monitoring Condition List".

CX2200 has the functions to show and clear collected counter values. Clearing the counter values clears the corresponding MIB values as well.

Display item Description

RxOctets Number of received octets

RxPkts Number of received frames

RxDropEvents Number of drop events *

RxErrors Number of reception error frames

RxUndersizePkts Number of received frames with data length shorter than 64 octets

RxFragments Number of received error frames with data length shorter than 64 octets

Rx64octs Number of received frames with data length of 64 octets

Rx65to127octs Number of received frames with data length of 65 to 127 octets

Rx128to255octs Number of received frames with data length of 128 to 255 octets

Rx256to511octs Number of received frames with data length of 256 to 511 octets

Rx512to1023octs Number of received frames with data length of 512 to 1023 octets

Rx1024to1518octs Number of received frames with data length of 1024 to 1518 octets

RxCRCErrors Number of alignment or FCS error frames received

RxOversizePkts Number of received frames with the data length of 1519 octets or bigger, Number of received error frames

RxJabbers Number of received error frames with the data length of 1519 octets

RxUcastPkts Number of received unicast frames

RxMcastPkts Number of received multicast frames

RxBcastPkts Number of received broadcast frames

RxUnsupp Number of unsupported frames that were received and discarded

RxDiscards Number of frames discarded for reasons other than reception errors

TxOctets Number of transmitted octets

TxPkts Number of transmitted frames

TxErrors Number of transmission error frames

Page 434: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Method of Operating Maintenance and Management Functions

4-28

Display item Description

TxCollisions Number of transmitted collision frames *

TxUcastPkts Number of transmitted unicast frames

TxMcastPkts Number of transmitted multicast frames

TxBcastPkts Number of transmitted broadcast frames

TxUnsupp Number of unsupported frames that were transmitted and discarded

TxDiscards Number of frames discarded for reasons other than transmission errors

* When display is executed, 0 is always displayed.

Commands

clear counter port Clearing of port counter

show counter port Display of port counter

Page 435: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Method of Operating Maintenance and Management Functions

4-29

Displaying discard counter details CX2200 can collect and show the detail data about the discard counter values of a specified port.

The "show counter discard" command shows the counter values that are the latest at the time of command input only once.

The values of the counters listed below are collected. For the data collecting conditions for counter monitoring, see Appendix "5 Counter Monitoring Condition List".

Note This function does not work for other than GbE and FE port.

CX2200 has the functions to show and clear collected counter values. Clearing the counter values clears the corresponding MIB values as well.

The discard counter values are collected at two points - line card and L2SW.

Line card discard counters The following table lists the counters of frames discarded by the line card.

Display item Description

RxUnknownTPID Number of unsupported TPID received frames discarded or Ethernet type 0x8100 received frames discarded at a portbase untagged port

RxUnknownVID Number of unsupported VID frames received and discarded

TxUnknownTPID Number of unsupported TPID transmitted frames discarded or Ethernet type 0x8100 transmitted frames discarded at a portbase untagged port

Line card L2SW

Rx

Tx

Page 436: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Method of Operating Maintenance and Management Functions

4-30

L2SW discard counters The following table lists the counters of frames discarded by the L2SW.

Display item Description

RxDropPkts Number of received frames discarded by the L2SW as invalid frames or number of received frames discarded with the following cases:

- The case that transfer destination ports (including mirroring output destination ports) do not exist

- The case that RPL Owner receives R-APS control frames regularly with the EtherRing function or the case that the switching of the EtherRing function occurs at an RL port

TxDropPkts Number of transmitted frames discarded by the L2SW before being placed into the transmission queue.

TxQueue0DisPkts Number of transmitted no-class frames discarded by the L2SW

TxQueue1DisPkts Number of transmitted Class-D frames discarded by the L2SW

TxQueue2DisPkts Number of transmitted Class-C frames discarded by the L2SW

TxQueue3DisPkts Number of transmitted Class-B frames discarded by the L2SW

TxQueue4DisPkts Number of transmitted Class-A frames discarded by the L2SW

TxQueue5DisPkts Number of transmitted frames of control frames from the CPU discarded by the L2SW

RxDisInQoSPkts Number of received frames discarded by the maximum bandwidth limit function of the input port

RxFilterPkts Number of received frames discarded by the input filtering function

TxDisOutQoSPkts Number of transmitted frames discarded by the maximum bandwidth limit function of the output port

Commands

clear counter port Clearing of port counter

show counter discard Display of discard counter

Page 437: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Method of Operating Maintenance and Management Functions

4-31

4.2.4.2 VLAN counters CX2200 has a per VLAN counter monitoring function to collect and read the number of transmitted and received frames. Also, collected counter information for each VLAN can be displayed for each priority in the VLAN counter information detail display.

There are two ways of collecting VLAN counter information. Specify either method when registering VLAN counters.

• Short-cycle collection VLAN counter: Collects VLAN counter information at intervals of about one second.

• Long-cycle collection VLAN counter: Collects VLAN counter information at intervals of about 25 seconds.

Note This function does not work for other than the GbE and FE port.

Registering a VLAN counter The "set counter vlan entry" command registers VLAN counter collection conditions. Use this command before using the per VLAN counter monitoring function.

Commands

set counter vlan entry Registration of VLAN counter

clear counter vlan entry Clearing of VLAN counter registration

show counter vlan entry Display of VLAN counter registration information

For the short-cycle collection VLAN counter, there are three ways of displaying collected VLAN counter information as described below:

• Displaying in real time

• Displaying details

• Displaying details in real time

Memo The long-cycle collection VLAN counter cannot display counter information in real time/detail counter information in real time.

Page 438: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Method of Operating Maintenance and Management Functions

4-32

Note If the short-cycle collection VLAN counter and long-cycle collection VLAN counter are registered in the same port with the same VID, the long-cycle collection VLAN counter collects VLAN counter information at intervals of about one second only for the redundant VID.

Displaying in real time CX2200 provides two real-time display functions - one collects counter values showing the number of transmitted frames and received frames under VLAN counter collection conditions set in the real-time display function and shows the collected data in real time, and the other clears the counter values.

The values of the counters shown below are collected.

Counter values for transmitted frames and received frames under registered VLAN counter collection conditions are shown in real time.

These counter values are updated at every 2 seconds until the Ctrl+c key combination is pressed.

Clearing the counter values clears the corresponding SNMP MIB values as well.

Display item Description

Pkts(Rx) Number of received frames

Pkts(Tx) Number of transmitted frames

Commands

clear counter vlan value Clearing of VLAN counter

show counter vlan value Display of VLAN counter

set counter vlan entry Registration of VLAN counter

show counter vlan entry Display of VLAN counter registration information

Page 439: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Method of Operating Maintenance and Management Functions

4-33

Displaying details/displaying details in real time CX2200 can collect and show the detail counter values under registered VLAN counter collection conditions.

The detail counter values under registered VLAN counter collection conditions are shown. Also, collected counter information for each VLAN can be displayed for each priority and each class.

For the detail display, the latest counter values for each type at the time of command input are shown only once.

For the real-time detail display, the latest counter values for each type are shown in real time, and these counter values are updated at every 2 seconds until the Ctrl+c key combination is pressed.

The values of the counters listed below are collected. For the data collecting conditions for counter monitoring, see "5 Counter Monitoring Condition List" in Appendix.

CX2200 has the functions to show and clear collected counter values. Clearing the counter values clears the corresponding MIB values as well.

Display item Description

RxOcts Number of received octets

RxUcastOcts Number of received unicast octets

RxMcastOcts Number of received multicast octets

RxBcastOcts Number of received broadcast octets

RxDisInQoSOcts Number of received octets discarded by the maximum bandwidth limit function for input ports *

RxPkts Number of received frames

RxUcastPkts Number of received unicast frames

RxMcastPkts Number of received multicast frames

RxBcastPkts Number of received broadcast frames

RxDisInQoSPkts Number of received frames discarded by the maximum bandwidth limit function for input ports *

TxOcts Number of transmitted octets

TxUcastOcts Number of transmitted unicast octets

TxMcastOcts Number of transmitted multicast octets

TxBcastOcts Number of transmitted broadcast octets

TxPkts Number of transmitted frames

TxUcastPkts Number of transmitted unicast frames

TxMcastPkts Number of transmitted multicast frames

TxBcastPkts Number of transmitted broadcast frames

* When FE port information is shown, 0 is always shown.

Page 440: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Method of Operating Maintenance and Management Functions

4-34

Commands

clear counter vlan value Clearing of VLAN counter

show counter vlan value Display of VLAN counter

set counter vlan entry Registration of VLAN counter

show counter vlan entry Display of VLAN counter registration information

Page 441: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Method of Operating Maintenance and Management Functions

4-35

Input example

The following example registers VLAN ID 4094 of port 17 as the short-cycle collection VLAN counter and shows the detail VLAN counter information about priority value 0.

Switch# set counter vlan entry short 17 4094

*Switch# show counter vlan entry short

VLAN Counter Entry (Short Cycle)

================================

Entry Count : 1

Port VID Name

--------------------------------------------

17 4094 VID-4094

*Switch# show counter vlan value short detail 17 4094 0

VLAN Counter Table (Short Cycle)

================================

Port : 17

VID : 4094

Name : VID-4094

Kind : Priority.0

---------------------------------------------------------------------------

Item Counts | Item Counts

====================================+=======================================

RxOcts : 1000000 | TxOcts : 0

RxUcastOcts : 1000000 | TxUcastOcts : 0

RxMcastOcts : 0 | TxMcastOcts : 0

RxBcastOcts : 0 | TxBcastOcts : 0

RxDisInQoSOcts : 0 |

RxPkts : 10000 | TxPkts : 0

RxUcastPkts : 10000 | TxUcastPkts : 0

RxMcastPkts : 0 | TxMcastPkts : 0

RxBcastPkts : 0 | TxBcastPkts : 0

RxDisInQoSPkts : 0 |

*Switch#

Page 442: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Method of Operating Maintenance and Management Functions

4-36

Input example

The following example registers VLAN ID 4094 of port 24 as the long-cycle collection VLAN counter and shows the detail VLAN counter information.

Switch# set counter vlan entry long 24 4094

*Switch# show counter vlan entry long

VLAN Counter Entry (Long Cycle)

===============================

Entry Count : 1

Port VID Name

--------------------------------------------

24 4094 VID-4094

*Switch# show counter vlan value long 24 4094

VLAN Counter Table (Long Cycle)

===============================

Port : 24

VID : 4094

Name : VID-4094

Kind : All

----------------------------------------------------------------------------

Item Counts | Item Counts

======================================+=====================================

RxOcts : 18446744073709551616 | TxOcts : 18446744073709551616

RxUcastOcts : 18446744073709551616 | TxUcastOcts : 18446744073709551616

RxMcastOcts : 0 | TxMcastOcts : 0

RxBcastOcts : 0 | TxBcastOcts : 0

RxDisInQoSOcts : 0 |

RxPkts : 288230376151711744 | TxPkts : 288230376151711744

RxUcastPkts : 288230376151711744 | TxUcastPkts : 288230376151711744

RxMcastPkts : 0 | TxMcastPkts : 0

RxBcastPkts : 0 | TxBcastPkts : 0

RxDisInQoSPkts : 0 |

*Switch#

Page 443: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Method of Operating Maintenance and Management Functions

4-37

4.2.4.3 ATM counters CX2200 has the following ATM counter monitoring functions.

• Registering PVC for OAM counter

• Collecting cell counters

• Displaying/clearing cell counters

Registering PVC for OAM counters • Registers PVC to collect OAM counters.

• For OAM counters, up to 32 PVC can be registered per device.

Following commands are used for PVC registration for OAM counter.

Commands

set counter pvc entry Registration of PVC for OAM counter

clear counter pvc entry Clearing of PVC for OAM counter

show counter pvc entry Display of PVC for OAM counter

Page 444: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Method of Operating Maintenance and Management Functions

4-38

Collecting cell counters The following are cell counter collection intervals.

Counter

Classification Per port

(User, discard cell)Per PVC

(User cell) Per F4

(OAM cell) (*1) Per F5

(OAM cell) (*1)

Interval One second One second Five seconds Five seconds

*1 Only when an OAM cell is registered as the counter, the corresponding counter is collected.

The cell counter values are collected at points as follows.

1) Counter collection for a 32T1E1H (ATMoP) line card

[1] (Per Port) collection point of transmission and reception cell counter and reception error discard counter

[3] (Per F4/F5) collection point of transmission and reception OAM cell counter

- Ingress direction terminated/ transparent OAM cell count.

- Egress direction transparent OAM cell count

[5] (Per PVC) collection point of transmission and reception cell counter

[7] (Per Port) collection point of transmission shaper discard counter

Note F4/F5END-AIS transmitted from [4] to the egress direction at the device fault detection is counted at the transmission counters of [1] and [3].

Note Because PHY is the blocking point when the port is blocked, the reception counter is not counted. However, the transmission counter is counted.

Note When PVC is blocked, the reception counter of [1] is counted because [2] is the discard point for the ingress direction. The transmission shaper discard counter of [7] is counted because [6] is the discard point for the egress direction.

Discard at P

VC

B

locking

OA

M

Termination

PV

C

Counter

[2] [4] [5] [6]

OA

M

Counter

ATM

C

apsulation

IMA

P

rocessor

[3] [1] [7]

(Egress)

Discard at P

VC

B

locking

L2SW

(Ingress)

ATM network

Page 445: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Method of Operating Maintenance and Management Functions

4-39

2) Counter collection points for a 1ATM155A line card

[1] (Per Port) collection point of transmission and reception cell counter and reception error

discard counter

[3] (Per F4/F5) collection point of transmission and reception OAM cell counter

- Ingress direction terminated/ transparent OAM cell count.

- Egress direction transparent OAM cell count

[5] (Per PVC) collection point of transmission and reception cell counter

[7] (Per Port) collection point of transmission shaper discard counter

Note F4/F5END-AIS transmitted from [4] to the egress direction at the device fault detection is counted at the transmission counters of [1] and [3].

Note Because PHY is the blocking point when the port is blocked, the reception counter is not counted. However, the transmission counter is counted.

Note When PVC is blocked, the reception counter of [1] is counted because [2] is the discard point for the ingress direction. The transmission shaper discard counter of [7] is counted because [6] is the discard point for the egress direction.

Discard at P

VC

B

locking

OA

M

Termination

PV

C

Counter

[2] [4] [5] [6]

OA

M

Counter

ATM

C

apsulation

SD

H

Framer

[3] [1] [7]

(Egress) Discard at P

VC

B

locking

ATM network L2SW

(Ingress)

Page 446: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Method of Operating Maintenance and Management Functions

4-40

Displaying / Clearing cell counter The cell counter display function provides real time and detailed display.

The real-time display function updates the display of the counter values every 2 seconds until the Ctrl+c key combination is pressed.

Display items for the real-time display function are shown below.

Display item Description

Cells(Rx) Number of received cells

Cells(Tx) Number of transmitted cells

The detail display function shows more items.

Display items for the detail display function are shown below.

Display item Description

RxCells Number of received cells

RxErrors Number of received error discard cells

RxQoSDiscards Number of received shaper discard cells

RxF4SegAIS Received segment VP-AIS cells

RxF4SegRDI Received segment VP-RDI cells

RxF4SegLoopback Received F4 level segment loopback cells

RxF4SegOthers Received F4 level segment other OAM cells

RxF4EndAIS Received end VP-AIS cells

RxF4EndRDI Received end VP-RDI cells

RxF4EndLoopback Received F4 level end loopback cells

RxF4EndOthers Received F4 level end other OAM cells

RxF5SegAIS Received segment VC-AIS cells

RxF5SegRDI Received segment VC-RDI cells

RxF5SegLoopback Received F5 level segment loopback cells

RxF5SegOthers Received F5 level segment other OAM cells

RxF5EndAIS Received end VC-AIS cells

RxF5EndRDI Received end VC-RDI cells

RxF5EndLoopback Received F5 level end loopback cells

RxF5EndOthers Received F5 level end other OAM cells

TxCells Number of transmitted cells

Page 447: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Method of Operating Maintenance and Management Functions

4-41

Display item Description

TxErrors Number of transmitted error discard cells

TxQoSDiscards Number of transmitted shaper discard cells

TxF4SegAIS Transmitted segment VP-AIS cells

TxF4SegRDI Transmitted segment VP-RDI cells

TxF4SegLoopback Transmitted F4 level segment loopback cells

TxF4SegOthers Transmitted F4 level segment other OAM cells

TxF4EndAIS Transmitted end VP-AIS cells

TxF4EndRDI Transmitted end VP-RDI cells

TxF4EndLoopback Transmitted VP-loopback cells-end

TxF4EndOthers Transmitted F4 level end other OAM cells

TxF5SegAIS Transmitted segment VC-AIS cells

TxF5SegRDI Transmitted segment VC-RDI cells

TxF5SegLoopback Transmitted F5 level segment loopback cells

TxF5SegOthers Transmitted F5 level segment other OAM cells

TxF5EndAIS Transmitted end VC-AIS cells

TxF5EndRDI Transmitted end VC-RDI cells

TxF5EndLoopback Transmitted F5 level end loopback cells

TxF5EndOthers Transmitted F5 level end other OAM cells

Following commands are used for the cell counter.

Commands

show counter cell Display of cell counter information per port (Display of cell counter information per IMA group at IMA group setting)

show counter cell f4 Display of cell counter information per F4

show counter cell f5 Display of cell counter information per F5

show counter cell ima-port Display of cell counter information per IMA group port

clear counter cell Clearing of cell counter information

Note Number of transmitted cells and received cells for show counter cell f4/ show counter cell

f5 indicates counters per PVC.

Page 448: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Method of Operating Maintenance and Management Functions

4-42

Counter clear event

Each counter is cleared in the following events.

Counter Type

OAM Event Per port Per PVC

Per F4 Per F5

Device restart (*1)

Registration of PVC

Clearing of PVC (Port collectively)

Clearing of PVC (VP collectively)

Clearing of PVC (VC connection singularly) (*3)

clear counter cell (Port collectively) (*1)

clear counter cell (VP collectively)

clear counter cell (VC connection singularly)

Registration of PVC for OAM counter (*2)

Clearing of PVC for OAM counter (Port collectively)

Clearing of PVC for OAM counter (VP collectively)

Clearing of PVC for OAM counter (VC connection singularly)

(*3)

Registration of IMA groups, Change of the root port

(*1)

Change of IMA group configuration ports (*4)

Clearing of IMA groups (*1)

Change of port modes (*5)

*1 When an IMA group is set, the IMA group counter and the port counter under the group are cleared.

*2 Only at the first PVC registration under a VP, counters are cleared.

*3 Only at the last PVC deletion under a VP, counters are cleared.

*4 Only counters for changed ports are cleared.

*5 Only at change of ATMoP<->other modes, counters are cleared.

Page 449: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Method of Operating Maintenance and Management Functions

4-43

Input example

The following example shows PVC registration for OAM counter for port1, in the range of PVC0/32-43.

*Switch# set counter pvc entry 1 0/32-43

*Switch# show counter pvc entry

PVC Counter Entry

=================

Entry Count : 12

Port VPI/VCI Name

-----------------------------------------------

1 0/32

1 0/33

1 0/34

1 0/35

1 0/36

1 0/37

1 0/38

1 0/39

1 0/40

1 0/41

1 0/42

1 0/43

*Switch#

Page 450: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Method of Operating Maintenance and Management Functions

4-44

The following example shows the per F5 cell counter real-time information for port1, in the range of PVC0/32-43.

*Switch# show counter cell f5 real 1 0/32-43

F5-Cell Counter Table

=====================

Port : 1

VPI/VCI Cells(Rx) Cells(Tx)

--------------------------------------------------

0/32 18446744073709551615 51539607563

0/33 42949672969 34359738375

0/34 25769803781 17179869187

0/35 18446744073709551615 51539607563

0/36 42949672969 34359738375

0/37 25769803781 17179869187

0/38 18446744073709551615 51539607563

0/39 42949672969 34359738375

0/40 25769803781 17179869187

0/41 18446744073709551615 51539607563

0/42 42949672969 34359738375

0/43 25769803781 17179869187

Count-End with [Ctrl]+[c]

*Switch#

Page 451: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Method of Operating Maintenance and Management Functions

4-45

The following example shows the per F4 cell counter detailed information for PVC0/32 and VPI0 of the port2 registered as OAM counter.

*Switch# show counter cell f4 detail 2 0

F4-Cell Counter Table

=====================

Port : 2

VPI : 0

Item Counts | Item Counts

-------------------------------- ---+---------------------------------------

RxCells : 206158430247 | TxCells : 309237645375

RxErrors : 0 | TxErrors : 0

RxQoSDiscards : 0 | TxQoSDiscards : 0

RxF4SegAIS : 4294967296 | TxF4SegAIS : 8

RxF4SegRDI : 1 | TxF4SegRDI : 4294967305

RxF4SegLoopback : 4294967298 | TxF4SegLoopback : 18446744073709551615

RxF4SegOthers : 3 | TxF4SegOthers : 4294967307

RxF4EndAIS : 4294967300 | TxF4EndAIS : 12

RxF4EndRDI : 5 | TxF4EndRDI : 4294967309

RxF4EndLoopback : 4294967302 | TxF4EndLoopback : 14

RxF4EndOthers : 7 | TxF4EndOthers : 4294967311

RxF5SegAIS : 12884901936 | TxF5SegAIS : 12884901960

RxF5SegRDI : 12884901939 | TxF5SegRDI : 12884901963

RxF5SegLoopback : 12884901942 | TxF5SegLoopback : 12884901966

RxF5SegOthers : 12884901945 | TxF5SegOthers : 12884901969

RxF5EndAIS : 12884901948 | TxF5EndAIS : 12884901972

RxF5EndRDI : 12884901951 | TxF5EndRDI : 12884901975

RxF5EndLoopback : 12884901954 | TxF5EndLoopback : 12884901978

RxF5EndOthers : 12884901930 | TxF5EndOthers : 12884901933

*Switch#

Page 452: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Method of Operating Maintenance and Management Functions

4-46

The following example shows the cell counter real-time information per IMA group port for the port1 to 4 to which the IMA group is set with the port1 to 4 and the detailed information with the port 4.

*Switch# show counter cell ima-port real 1-4

Cell Counter Table

==================

Port Cells(Rx) Cells(Tx)

--------------------------------------------------

1 25769803781 17179869187

2 18446744073709551615 51539607563

3 42949672960 34359738368

4 25769803781 17179869187

Count-End with [Ctrl]+[c]

*Switch#

*Switch# show counter cell ima-port detail 4

Cell Counter Table

==================

Port : 4

Item Counts | Item Counts

----------------------------------+-------------------------------------

RxCells : 25769803781 | TxCells : 17179869187

RxErrors : 8590366356 | TxErrors : 0

*Switch#

Page 453: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Method of Operating Maintenance and Management Functions

4-47

4.2.4.4 Line quality counters CX2200 can collect and display the line quality counters on a per port basis.

The line quality counters display the counter with the show command input and clears the relevant counter.

Displaying line quality counters The line quality counters display the counter from the last show command input to the latest show command input.

Display items for the line quality counters are shown below.

• When the 1ATM155A card is installed

Display item Description

Section BIP-8 Number of BIP-8 detection for relay section errors in the section overhead

Line BIP-24 Number of BIP-24 detection for section errors in the section overhead

Line FEBE Number of line level far end block errors detected

Path BIP-8 Number of BIP-8 detection for path errors in the path overhead

Path FEBE Number of path level far end block errors detected

• When the 32T1E1H card is installed

Display item Description

FER Number of framing bit errors detected

OOF/FEBE OOF: Number of out of frame errors detected (T1 mode)

FEBE: Number of far end block errors detected (E1 mode)

Bit/CRC Error Bit Error: Number of bit errors detected (T1 mode)

CRC Error: Number of cyclic redundancy check errors detected (E1 mode)

LCV Error Number of LineCode violation errors detected

Note Since the line quality counters are counted while the quality is degrading, the counting

continues during a link down.

Memo When the 32T1E1H card is installed and the frame format is "Unframed", only LCV Errors are counted. The value of other counters is fixed to "0".

Page 454: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Method of Operating Maintenance and Management Functions

4-48

The following command is used for the line quality counters.

Command

show counter port pmon Display of line quality counter

Input example

When the 1ATM155A card is installed

When the 32T1E1H card is installed

*Switch# show counter port pmon 1

Performance Monitor Counter

===========================

Port : 1

Item Counts | Item Counts

--------------------------+---------------------------

Section BIP-8 : 65535 |

Line BIP-24 : 1089 | Line FEBE : 2438

Path BIP-8 : 246 | Path FEBE : 11

*Switch#

*Switch# show counter port pmon 1

Performance Monitor Counter

===========================

Port : 1

Item Counts | Item Counts

--------------------------+---------------------------

FER : 34 | OOF/FEBE : 15

Bit/CRC Error : 34 | LCV Error : 0

*Switch#

Page 455: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Method of Operating Maintenance and Management Functions

4-49

4.2.4.5 EtherOAM counter The CX2200 has the transmitted/received EtherOAM frame count collection/display function as the EtherOAM counter monitoring function.

To collect counter information, register the EtherOAM counter collection conditions in advance. The conditions can be registered in the unit of VLAN, MEG Level, and OpCode of the EtherOAM frame to be counted. The table below lists the OpCodes of the EtherOAM frames that are supported by this unit. Registration and collection can be performed within the range from 0 to 255.

OP-Code EtherOAM frame type OP-Code EtherOAM frame

type

1 CMM 2 LBR

3 LBM 4 LTR

5 LTM 39 E-APS

40 R-APS 42 LMR

43 LMM 46 DMR

47 DMM

Note The counter cannot be re-registered for the registered line number. To change counter registration, the existing registration must be deleted.

Commands

set counter ether-oam entry Registration of the EtherOAM counter

show counter ether-oam entry Display of EtherOAM counter registration

clear counter ether-oam entry Deletion of EtherOAM counter registration

Page 456: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Method of Operating Maintenance and Management Functions

4-50

See below for the items displayed for the counter values that are collected.

Counter display items

Display item Description

RxPkts Displays the number of received frames that match the registered collection condition.

TxPkts Displays the number of transmitted frames that match the registered collection condition.

Commands

show counter ether-oam value Display of the EtherOAM counter

Memo The counter values that were collected are cleared when they are displayed by 'show counter ether-oam value'.

Page 457: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Method of Operating Maintenance and Management Functions

4-51

Input example

The EtherOAM counters of ports 25 and 26 are registered under the conditions of VLAN ID 55, MEG level 6, and OP-Code 1 and the counter information is displayed for transmission/reception of the EtherOAM frames of ports 25 and 26 that match the registration conditions for ports 25 and 26.

*Switch# set counter ether-oam entry 25 55 6 1

*Switch# set counter ether-oam entry 26 55 6 1

*Switch#

*Switch# show counter ether-oam entry

Ether OAM Counter Entry

=======================

Port VLAN-ID MEG Level OP-Code

---------------------------------

25 55 6 1

26 55 6 1

*Switch#

*Switch#

*Switch# show counter ether-oam value

Ether OAM Frame Count

=====================

Port RxPkts TxPkts

----------------------------

25 2307 2307

26 2086 2087

*Switch#

*Switch# clear counter ether-oam entry 25

*Switch# clear counter ether-oam entry 26

*Switch#

Page 458: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Method of Operating Maintenance and Management Functions

4-52

The EtherOAM counters of ports 25 and 26 are registered under the conditions of all EtherOAM frame specification and the counter information is displayed for transmission/reception of the EtherOAM frames that match the registration conditions.

*Switch# set counter ether-oam entry 25 all

*Switch# set counter ether-oam entry 26 all

*Switch#

*Switch# show counter ether-oam entry

Ether OAM Counter Entry

=======================

Port VLAN-ID MEG Level OP-Code

---------------------------------

25 all all all

26 all all all

*Switch#

*Switch#

*Switch# show counter ether-oam value

Ether OAM Frame Count

=====================

Port RxPkts TxPkts

----------------------------

25 2307 2307

26 2086 2087

*Switch#

*Switch# clear counter ether-oam entry

Would you like to clear the configuration? :(Y/N): y

*Switch#

Page 459: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Method of Operating Maintenance and Management Functions

4-53

4.2.5 Fault Monitoring CX2200 monitors devices for hardware faults, as well as line faults, during operation. Upon detection of a fault, it transmits an SNMP trap to notify the SNMP manager of the fault while at the same time showing the relevant message on the local and remote consoles.

For the fault types and actions, see "3 Fault List" in Appendix.

You can check whether a device is experiencing a fault by having its status shown using the relevant command.

The fault information can be read using the relevant command.

This section describes the following functions:

Line status

Protection time setting

Fault information

Restart cause

Line status CX2200 lets you check the line status by examining the on/off status of the LED on the line card.

Setting protection time CX2200 shows a fault message or issues a trap notification when the preset protection time elapses after a change in the port link status is detected. The "set port protection-time" command sets either forward protection time (link down) or backward protection time (link up).

• Forward protection time:

Time allowed to elapse from the detection of link down in the link up status until a status transition to link down occurs and a fault message and trap issuance are provided. If the port link status changes during the protection time, a status transition will not occur and a fault message and trap issuance will not be provided.

Page 460: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Method of Operating Maintenance and Management Functions

4-54

• Backward protection time:

Time allowed to elapse from the detection of link up in the link down status until a status transition to link up occurs and a fault message and trap issuance are provided. If the port link status changes during the protection time, a status transition will not occur and a fault message and trap issuance will not be provided.

Commands

set port protection-time Setting of port link down occurrence/recovery detection time

show port information Display of port setting and status information

Input example

The following example sets the forward protection time to 2 seconds and the backward protection time to 1 second.

Switch# set port protection-time 17 link-down 2000

*Switch# set port protection-time 17 link-up 1000

*Switch# show port information 17

Cpusw Port Information Table

============================

Port Link

Port Admin Speed Status MDI

------------------------------------------------------

17 enabled auto link-down auto mdi/mdi-x

Flowcontrol Flowcontrol

Port Configuration Status

--------------------------------

17 disabled disabled

Link Trap Protection Time Protection Time

Port Status Link Up(msec) Link Down(msec)

-------------------------------------------------

17 enabled 1000 2000

*Switch#

Page 461: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Method of Operating Maintenance and Management Functions

4-55

Displaying fault information Shows fault information. The following two types of fault information are provided. Collect fault information, and contact your local distributor for assistance.

(1) Hardware fault information

Information about hardware-caused faults detected by the monitoring function of CX2200’s CPU. The fault information may include external factors such as power and line cable connections, installation location, and ambient environment.

(2) Software fault information (exception information and error information)

Information storing the CPU’s internal status recorded when a software-triggered fault occurred. These faults are due to CX2200’s internal factors. Collect the local log data (using the Input example: the "show syslog local all" command) along with the fault information, and contact your local distributor.

As for the existing faults, the "show fault present" command shows both the hardware fault information and software fault information. The "show fault past" command shows the information on the past software faults. If there are no past software faults, the command will show "No entry in the table.".

Commands

show fault present Display of current fault and alarm information

show fault past Display of past fault information

Displaying restart cause Shows the cause of the restart.

For details of the restart causes, see "7 Restart Cause List" in Appendix.

Command

show reset Display of reset factor

Page 462: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Method of Operating Maintenance and Management Functions

4-56

4.2.6 Faults In the event of a fault, CX2200 transmits an SNMP trap to notify the SNMP manager of the fault while at the same time showing the relevant message on the local and remote consoles. Check the content of the shown message, and take an action appropriate for the reported fault.

CX2200 has the link trap transmission setting function that lets you enable or disable per port link status change notification.

By default, if a WDTOVF or EXCEPTION fault is detected, the module in which that fault is detected will be rebooted in 10 seconds. You can set CX2200 not to reboot the module.

Commands

set port link-trap Setting of SNMP link trap transmission

set terminal monitor Setting of autonomous message output

set fault auto-reboot Setting of autonomous rebooting enable/disable in case of reboot requiring fault

show terminal config Display of terminal information

show fault auto-reboot Display of autonomous rebooting settings in case of reboot requiring fault

Page 463: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Method of Operating Maintenance and Management Functions

4-57

4.2.7 syslog Functions CX2200 implements the syslog functions defined by RFC 3164.

Enabling the syslog functions makes it possible to send information on the CX2200 operating status to a remote server (remote logging) and to save such information in built-in flash memory (local logging).

This section describes the following functions:

• Local logging

• Remote logging

• Mapping

Local logging CX2200 has the local logging function that records and shows the information described below together with the occurrence time, as well as the local log clearing function.

About up to 2 MB of log data (about 20000 log records when the length of each character string to be saved is assumed to be 80 characters) can be recorded.

Local log data is recorded as local system events only by the system that detects or executes the event. Also, rebooting or powering off the system does not clear the log data.

Local log data can be uploaded to an FTP server.

For information about the settings necessary to use an FTP server, see "3.2 Settings for Network Connection > 3.2.5 Settings for Remote Maintenance" of this manual.

For the fault numbers and severity levels shown in fault information, see "3 Fault List" in Appendix of this manual.

Information to be collected as local log data

1 Setting command execution log excluding terminal setting (normally ended commands only)

2 Telnet-related log (login, logout, idle timeout, forced disconnection, connection rejection, login authentication failure)

3 Fault information

4 Device status transition information (ACH, etc.)

5 Configuration setting log from the SNMP agents (only switchbacks due to setting and setting errors)

* Character strings "UNDO" are added in the last part of setting switchback logs.

Page 464: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Method of Operating Maintenance and Management Functions

4-58

Commands

clear syslog local Clearing of local log

show syslog local Display of local log

upload local-syslog Uploading of system log to ftp server

Memo The upload time may become longer due to such factors as the size of data being transferred, traffic volume on the network, performance of the FTP server, and LAN cabling.

You can force the ongoing communication with the FTP server to end, by pressing the Ctrl+c key combination.

After checking the conditions of the network and FTP server, enter the command again.

Note 0.xxx.xxx.xxx/127.xxx.xxx.xxx and 224.xxx.xxx.xxx to 255.xxx.xxx.xxx cannot be set as the server IP address. ("xxx" is a string of arbitrary numbers.) Also, if the server resides in either of the following network addresses, 192.168.128.0/24 and 192.168.129.0/24, that manager can be configured although communication cannot be accomplished normally.

Note If a large number of events occur simultaneously, local log data may not be collected, in which case "IF MESSAGE DISCARDED (CAUSE:RESOURCE BUSY)" will be sent. Then, if the logging resumes, "IF MESSAGE DISCARDED RECOVER" will be sent.

Page 465: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Method of Operating Maintenance and Management Functions

4-59

Remote logging CX2200 supports the remote logging function (syslog) that allows it to transmit the same messages as in local logging to the syslog server.

The syslog server needs to be set up using the "syslogd" command. For information about the syslogd setup, see the setup method of UNIX (including Linux and FreeBSD).

Up to 5 syslog servers and facilities from Local0 to Local7 can be registered per CX2200.

Note 0.xxx.xxx.xxx/127.xxx.xxx.xxx and 224.xxx.xxx.xxx to 255.xxx.xxx.xxx cannot be set as the server IP address. ("xxx" is a string of arbitrary numbers.)

Also, if the server resides in either of the following network addresses, 192.168.128.0/24 and 192.168.129.0/24, that server can be configured although communication cannot be accomplished normally.

Note If a large number of events occur simultaneously, remote log data may not be transmitted, in which case "IF MESSAGE DISCARDED (CAUSE:RESOURCE BUSY)" will be sent. Then, if the logging resumes, "IF MESSAGE DISCARDED RECOVER" will be sent.

Commands

set syslog server Setting of syslog server and message facility

set syslog remote Setting of remote log enable/disable

clear syslog server Clearing of syslog server

show syslog server Display of syslog server configuration information

Page 466: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Method of Operating Maintenance and Management Functions

4-60

Input example

The following example sets the IP address of the syslog server to 192.168.2.200, sets the facility to local7, and enables remote logging.

Mapping CX2200’s remote logging function maps groups of remote logging events to several levels according to their severity. These levels are listed below.

Groups mapped to a certain level may be remapped to another level.

Level Meaning

LOG_CRIT Critical condition

LOG_ERR Error condition

LOG_WARNING Warning condition

LOG_INFO Informational message

Switch# set syslog server 1 192.168.2.200 local7

*Switch# set syslog remote enable

*Switch# show syslog server

Syslog Remote Configuration

===========================

Syslog Remote: enabled

Syslog Server Table

===================

Index IP Address Facility

----------------------------------

1 192.168.2.200 local7

*Switch#

Page 467: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Method of Operating Maintenance and Management Functions

4-61

The following table shows the groups of remote logging events and their default levels.

Group Meaning Level

TRAP_SYSFLT System status fault message

Reboot fault message

LOG_CRIT

TRAP_SYSMJR System status fault message LOG_ERR

TRAP_SYSMNR System status minor fault message LOG_ERR

TRAP_SYSWAR System status warning message LOG_WARNING

TRAP_SYSCLR System status fault recovery message LOG_INFO

TRAP_SYSINF System informational message LOG_INFO

TRAP_PORTMJR Port fault occurrence message LOG_ERR

TRAP_PORTCLR Port recovery message LOG_INFO

TRAP_PORTINF Port information message LOG_INFO

TRAP_ROUTEMJR Route control fault message LOG_ERR

TRAP_ROUTEMNR Route control minor fault message LOG_ERR

TRAP_ROUTEWAR Route control warning message LOG_WARNING

TRAP_ROUTECLR Route control fault recovery message LOG_INFO

TRAP_ROUTEINF Route control informational message LOG_INFO

COMMAND_LOG Setting command execution log excluding terminal setting (Normally ended commands only)

LOG_INFO

SNMP_LOG Configuration setting log from SNMP agents (Only switchbacks due to setting and setting errors)

LOG_INFO

Commands

set syslog map Setting of syslog message level remapping

clear syslog map Clearing of syslog message level remapping

show syslog map Display of syslog message level mapping status

Limitation

The reboot completion message and those logs collected before the NTP server is accessed at the time of reboot may use the default date value - "2000/01/01".

Page 468: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Method of Operating Maintenance and Management Functions

4-62

4.2.8 MAC Learning CX2200 has the following MAC learning functions:

- CPUSW MAC learning function

This function shows and clears the MAC address information learned by the CPUSW.

4.2.8.1 CPUSW MAC learning function This system learns and stores the source MAC address of each received frame on a per line and per VLAN basis. It references the learned information when transferring frames. Received frames containing the learned MAC address as the destination address are unicast, while those whose destination MAC address is not learned are flooded within the same VLAN.

If no frame is received from a source MAC address for a defined period of time, then that MAC address will age and be cleared from the learning information table.

You can check the current number of learned entries and the learning information on a per port or per VLAN basis, by using the relevant command. It is also possible to clear information stored in the learning table. For details, see "Command Reference".

The following functions are described:

• Aging

• Displaying the number of learned MAC entries for the CPUSW

• Displaying the MAC learning information for the CPUSW

• Clearing the MAC learning information

Memo Regarding the MAC learning information of the ATMoP and TDMoP group, the MAC addresses of the line group a shown for each line group.

Note While CX2200 can learn up to 16K MAC addresses, there may be cases where MAC addresses cannot be learned depending on learning conditions and the 16K table cannot be fully used.

Note Aging function is common among CPUSWs.

Note More than the maximum learned MAC entry count may be shown when information is registered to and cleared from the MAC learning information repeatedly due to port move and other operations.

Page 469: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Method of Operating Maintenance and Management Functions

4-63

Aging Clears learned MAC addresses after a defined period of time. By default, learned MAC addresses are retained in the table for 5 minutes and automatically cleared if they are not learned again during the 5-minute period. The period of time to retain learned MAC addresses can be changed in the range of 10 to 1000000 seconds by using the relevant command.

Commands

set fdb agingtime Setting of aging time

show fdb agingtime Display of aging time

Displaying the number of learned MAC entries for the CPUSW Shows the number of learned MAC entries on a per device, per port, or per VLAN basis.

Commands

show fdb count all Display of MAC learning count per device

show fdb count port Display of MAC learning count per port

show fdb count vid Display of MAC learning count per VLAN

Page 470: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Method of Operating Maintenance and Management Functions

4-64

Displaying the MAC learning information for the CPUSW Shows the MAC learning information on a per port or per VLAN basis without sorting.

Commands

show fdb table port Display of MAC learning information per port

show fdb table vid Display of MAC learning information per VLAN

Memo The information sorted by the MAC addresses per port basis is shown for the per port basis display.

Clearing the MAC learning information Clears the MAC learning information on a per port or per VLAN basis.

Commands

clear fdb table port Clearing of MAC learning information per port

clear fdb table vid Clearing of MAC learning information per VLAN

Memo As for the all MAC learning information clearing event, a trap is sent indicating that all entries have been cleared after the input of the command.

Page 471: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Method of Operating Maintenance and Management Functions

4-65

4.2.9 Port Mirroring This system has the function to mirror traffic of a specific port to a port which is specified as a mirroring output destination. With this function, traffic on network can be monitored.

Setting condition In the mirroring function, one mirroring output destination port can be set per system.

Note Note the bandwidth of the mirroring origination. If multiple ports whose bandwidth use rate is high are mirrored, the mirrored frames may get congested and be discarded.

Note This function cannot be set for other than the GbE and FE port.

Setting mirroring The following are set as the mirroring start settings.

[1] Mirroring output destination port

Specified traffic to be mirrored is output by mirroring of the traffic.

[2] Mirroring target port (input side: in-port)

A frame input from a specified port is mirrored.

[3] Mirroring target port (output side: out-port)

A frame output from a specified port is mirrored.

The mirroring start settings cannot be configured in the following cases.

- If the mirroring output destination port and a port to be mirrored are redundantly set.

- If a VLAN is set for a port to be specified as the mirroring output destination port.

- If link aggregation is set for a port to be specified as the mirroring output destination port.

Note The mirroring setting is not the target of write memory.

Page 472: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Method of Operating Maintenance and Management Functions

4-66

Frame contents to be mirrored [1] When a mirroring target port is a portbase VLAN.

When mirroring in the input side (in-port) is performed, a frame after tags for Ethernet type (0x8100) to be used inside the device and the portbase VLAN ID setting are added is output to the mirroring output destination port.

Also, a frame after QoS control and filtering are applied is the mirroring target.

When mirroring in the output side (out-port) is performed, like the mirroring in the input side (in-port), a frame before tags are removed is output to the mirroring output destination port.

Also, a frame before QoS control and filtering are applied is the mirroring target.

Bandwidth

priority control Filterin g

CX2200

Switch

Mirroring in the

input sideOutput the mirrored frame

Portbase VLAN (Add a tag)

Port

Portbase VLAN (Remove the

tag)

Port

Port

Bandw

idth/priority control lFilterin gB

andwidth/

priority control Filterin g

CX2200

Mirroring in the output side

Output the mirrored frame

Portbase VLAN (Add a tag)

Port

Portbase VLAN (Remove the

tag)

Switch Port

Port

Bandw

idth/priority control lFilteringB

andwidth/

priority control Filterin g

Bandw

idth/ priority control Filterin g

Page 473: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Method of Operating Maintenance and Management Functions

4-67

[2] When a mirroring target port is a tagbase VLAN

When mirroring in the input side (in-port) is performed, the Ethernet type is converted to 0x8100. If VLAN tag swapping has been set, frames whose tag was swapped are output to the mirroring output destination port.

Also, a frame after QoS control and filtering are applied is the mirroring target.

When mirroring in the output side (out-port) is performed, the Ethernet type is converted to 0x8100. If VLAN tag swapping has been set, frames are output to the mirroring output destination port before their tag is swapped.

Also, a frame before QoS control and filtering are applied is the mirroring target.

Note If the frame size is set to the mirroring output destination port, the frame size setting value is the allowed frame size in the output side. Any frames that exceed the size will not be mirrored.

Tagbase VLAN (Tag swapping

setting)

CX2200

Output the mirrored frame.

Tagbase VLAN (Tag swapping setting)

Switch

Port

Port

Port Mirroring in the

input side

Bandw

idth/priority control Filtering

Bandw

idth/ priority control Filterin g

Bandw

idth/ priority control Filtering

CX2200

Mirroring in the output

side Output the mirrored frame.

Tagbase VLAN (Tag swapping setting)

Switch

Port

Port

Port

Tagbase VLAN (Tag swapping

setting)

Bandw

idth/priority control Filterin g

Bandw

idth/ priority control Filtering

Bandw

idth/ priority control Filtering

Page 474: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Method of Operating Maintenance and Management Functions

4-68

Commands

mirror port Setting of mirroring start or stop

show mirror port Display of mirroring settings

Input example

The following example shows how to mirror the traffic of the input side of the port 17 to be mirrored to the mirroring output destination port 24.

[1] Indicates the mirroring output destination port.

[2] Indicates the mirroring target port (input side).

[3] Indicates the mirroring target port (output side)

Note Protocol control frame can be monitored only at the input side port of the mirroring target.

*Switch# mirror port start 24 in-port 17

*Switch#

*Switch# show mirror port

Mirror Information

==================

Mirror To

---------

Port: 24

Mirror From

---------------------------

In Port : 17

Out Port:

*Switch#

*Switch# mirror port stop

*Switch#

[1]

[2] [3]

Page 475: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Method of Operating Maintenance and Management Functions

4-69

4.2.10 System Reboot There are two methods to reboot CX2200, as described below. Since the rebooting procedure differs with the method, choose the appropriate reboot method as needed.

Rebooting procedure Power off Reset

Self diagnosis

Program load

Startup configuration data load

Clearing of DRAM

: To be done : Not to be done

Rebooting by turning the power off and then on This reboot method involves self diagnosis, program load, startup configuration data load, and clearing of DRAM.

Reboot method

Make sure that no command is running, and then turn all the power switches to OFF. Wait for about 30 seconds. Then, turn the power switches to ON again, and the system will automatically reboot.

Page 476: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Method of Operating Maintenance and Management Functions

4-70

Rebooting by using the reset command This reboot method involves program load, startup configuration data load, and clearing of DRAM.

Command

reset system Resetting of entire device

Reboot method

The "reset system" command reboots the system.

[1] Enter the command.

[2] You will be asked to confirm your intention to reboot the system. Press y and then Enter.

*Switch# reset system

Would you like to reboot System? :(Y/N): y

System is under closing....

System Reset Process is running. Please wait....

System Boot

Copyright 2001-2002 NEC

<Omitted>

Welcome to CX2200 System

Switch>

[1]

[2]

Page 477: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Method of Operating Maintenance and Management Functions

4-71

4.2.11 Initialization To reset all the data to their factory-set values, initialize CX2200. Once initialized, CX2200 can be accessed only from the local console.

Initializing CX2200 clears the running configuration and startup configuration data settings.

To maintain the current running configuration and startup configuration data settings, back up the data before initialization, as described in "2.7 Configuration Data" of this manual.

The time and date settings will remain unchanged even after initialization.

Initialization procedure Take the following two steps:

(1) Clear the startup configuration data.

(2) Reboot the system by using the reset command.

(1) Clearing the startup configuration data Clear the startup configuration data.

Command

clear startup-config Clearing of startup configuration

(2) Rebooting the system by using the reset command Reboot CX2200 to validate the clearance of the startup configuration data in (1).

Command

reset system Resetting of entire device

Page 478: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Method of Operating Maintenance and Management Functions

4-72

Input example

[1] Enter the command.

[2] You will be asked to confirm your intention to clear the configuration data. Press y and then Enter.

[3] Enter the command.

[4] You will be asked to confirm your intention to reboot the system. Press y and then Enter.

Switch# clear startup-config all

Would you like to delete config data? :(Y/N): y

Clearing Flash Memory...

*Switch#

*Switch# reset system

Would you like to reboot System? :(Y/N): y

System is under closing....

System Reset Process is running. Please wait....

System Boot

Copyright 2001-2002 NEC

<Omitted>

Welcome to CX2200 System

Switch>

[3]

[1]

[2]

[4]

Page 479: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Method of Operating Maintenance and Management Functions

4-73

4.2.12 Replacement This section describes how to replace, expand, remove and add line cards and fan modules.

When you work on replacement

When inserting/removing cards and modules, pay attention to the following points.

[1] Insert/remove FAN units or cards wearing gloves.

[2] Insert/remove FAN units or cards with the unit installed in the rack.

[3] When inserting/removing FAN units and cards, hold the handle, ejectors, card front boards, and hand screws using both hands.

[4] When removing LINE1/LINE2/CPUSW cards, make sure to turn off the power switch (PWR) on the device front, and pull out the power cable. (FAN units can be inserted/removed without turning off the power.)

[5] When LINE1/LINE2 cards are not installed, attach the dedicated blank panels instead of the cards.

LINE1 card LINE2 card

CPUSW card FAN unit

Page 480: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Method of Operating Maintenance and Management Functions

4-74

Describes the procedure for replacing a line card.

Describes the procedure for replacing a line card.

Describes the procedure for replacing a CPUSW card.

Describes the procedure for replacing a FANmodule.

Describes the procedure for replacing the fuse of the CPUSWE card.

4.2.12.1 Replacing LINE1 card 4-75

4.2.12.2 Replacing LINE2 card 4-77

4.2.12.3 Replacing a CPUSW card 4-79

4.2.12.4 Replacing a FAN unit 4-83

4.2.12.5 Replacing the fuse of the CPUSWE card 4-85

Page 481: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Method of Operating Maintenance and Management Functions

4-75

4.2.12.1 Replacing LINE1 card Removal

[1] First, loosen the hand screws on both sides of the LINE1 card. Then, hold the both hand screws and remove the LINE1 card while placing fingers on the card front side. (Some pressure is put on the fingertips, but the card can be removed smoothly.)

Note Do not remove a line card while the PWR1 and PWR2 lamps are lit in green. Doing so may cause an equipment failure.

Note Be sure to pull the two screws simultaneously with equal force; otherwise, the system may be warped or damaged.

Loosen the hand screws.

Page 482: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Method of Operating Maintenance and Management Functions

4-76

Insertion

[1] Set the both sides of a LINE1 card along the upper slot on the chassis and move it backward.

[2] When moving the card backward, push the front panel side using both hands until you feel the resistance due to connection of the card and the chassis connector.

Insert the card until gap between the rack mount side and the card front board is almost cleared.

* Note: Do not push parts when inserting the card.

[3] Tighten the hand screws on the both sides by turning them clockwise using fingers. Tighten the left and right hand screws together until almost no step between the front board and rack mount side disappears and they contact each other.

Upper slot

Left hand screw

Right hand screw

Page 483: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Method of Operating Maintenance and Management Functions

4-77

4.2.12.2 Replacing LINE2 card Removal

[1] First, loosen the hand screws on both sides of the LINE2 card. Then, hold the both hand screws and remove the LINE2 card while placing fingers on the card front side. (Some pressure is put on the fingertips, but the card can be removed smoothly.)

Note Do not remove a line card while the PWR1 and PWR2 lamps are lit in green. Doing so may cause an equipment failure.

Note Be sure to pull the two screws simultaneously with equal force; otherwise, the system may be warped or damaged.

Loosen the hand screws.

Page 484: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Method of Operating Maintenance and Management Functions

4-78

Insertion

[1] Set the both sides of a LINE2 card along the upper slot on the chassis and move it backward.

[2] When moving the card backward, push the front panel side using both hands until you feel the resistance due to connection of the card and the chassis connector.

Insert the card until gap between the rack mount side and the card front board is almost cleared.

* Note: Do not push parts when inserting the card.

[3] Tighten the hand screws on the both sides by turning them clockwise using fingers. Tighten the left and right hand screws together until almost no step between the front board and rack mount side disappears and they contact each other.

Upper slot

Left hand screw Right hand screw

Page 485: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Method of Operating Maintenance and Management Functions

4-79

4.2.12.3 Replacing a CPUSW card Removal

[1] First, loosen the hand screws on both sides of the SW card. Then, pull the CPUSW card while slowly turning the ejectors on both sides outward. The card can be removed smoothly without pressure on fingertips

Note Do not remove a line card while the PWR1 and PWR2 lamps are lit in green. Doing so may cause an equipment failure.

Note Be sure to pull the two levers simultaneously with equal force; otherwise, the system may be warped or damaged.

[2] Pull out the CPUSW card toward you.

Note When replacing a CPUSW card, be sure to remove it after all the other line cards are removed.

Left hand screw Right hand screw

Loosen the hand screws.

Page 486: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Method of Operating Maintenance and Management Functions

4-80

Insertion

[1] Set the both sides of a CPUSW card along the lower slot on the chassis. Open the ejectors on both sides of the card parallel to the card width and then move the card backward.

[2] When moving the card backward, push the card until you feel the resistance due to connection of the card and the chassis connector.

[3] Insert the card furthermore while slowly turning the ejectors on the both sides inward using both hands.

Lower slot

CPUSW card

Left ejector Right ejector

Page 487: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Method of Operating Maintenance and Management Functions

4-81

[4] When the ejectors are parallel to the cart front board, confirm that the gap between the device rack mount side and the card front board is about 1 mm.

[5] Tighten the hand screws by turning them clockwise using fingers. Tighten the left and right hand screws together until almost no step between the card front board and rack mount side disappears and they contact each other.

Gap 1 mm

Hand screw

Contact

Page 488: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Method of Operating Maintenance and Management Functions

4-82

[Note when a CPUSW card is inserted]

The underside of a CPUSW card front board is engaged with the underside of the chassis at three points of the left, center, and right parts. If you cannot insert the SW card, insert the card again to engage the parts like the figure of the device underside.

Figure The center part which is not engaged (Figure shown from the side)

* When inserting a CPUSW card, make sure that the chassis is fixed to the rack.

Figure State that the SW card is inserted into the chassis

Three engaged points

Underside of the CPUSW card front board

Device underside

Page 489: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Method of Operating Maintenance and Management Functions

4-83

4.2.12.4 Replacing a FAN unit Removal

[1] Loosen the hand screw in the fan unit front board by turning it counterclockwise using fingers.

[2] The hand screw is removed. Hold the handle and pull out it using fingers.

Note Keep your hands away from the rotating fans; otherwise, you may get your fingers caught and be injured. Make sure that the rotation of the fans comes to a complete halt, before removing the module.

Insertion

[3] After pushing the card completely (see the picture shown on the right), tighten the hand screw on the fan unit by turning it clockwise using fingers. Tighten the hand screw to insert the unit furthermore until there is almost no step between the card front board and the rack mount side and they contact each other.

[1] Insert a fan unit by pushing the center part of the front board using fingers.

[2] Push the fan unit until the gap between the fan unit front board and the rack mount side is 1 mm.

Pull out the unit.Loosen the screw.

Completion of insertionTighten the screw.Push the unit. Insert the unit.

About 1 mm

FAN unit front board

Rack mount

Details of a FAN unit

Handle

Page 490: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Method of Operating Maintenance and Management Functions

4-84

Note When replacing the fan unit, make sure that the fans are removed (the fans are at a complete halt) for not longer than 2 minutes under the environment where the temperature is below 45°C. Normal operation cannot be guaranteed if the fans are removed for over 2 minutes. In addition, replacing the fan unit under the environment where the temperature is above 45°C is not covered under warranty.

Note Lifetime of a fan unit is 3 years. Replace it periodically.

Page 491: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Method of Operating Maintenance and Management Functions

4-85

4.2.12.5 Replacing the fuse of the CPUSWE card

[1] Remove the CPUSWE card from the CPUSW slot according to the procedure described in 4.2.12.3 Replacing a CPUSW card.

[2] Remove the fuse cover of the RWR1 or RWR2 fuse to be replaced.

[3] Remove the fuse whose cover was removed from the fuse folder.

[4] Using the tester, check that the fuse that was removed is damaged.

[5] Check that the replacement fuse is not damaged using the tester.

[6] Replace the damaged fuse with the replacement fuse and mount it in the fuse folder that was removed.

[7] Mount the fuse cover on the fuse folder that was mounted.

[8] Insert the CPUSWE card with new fuse in the CPUSW slot according to the procedure described in 4.2.12.3 Replacing a CPUSW card.

[9] Turn on the power switch after connecting the power cable and check that the power is supplied to the fuse that was replaced.

↓ Front of the unit

↑ Rear of the unit

PWR1 fuse (F1 3.15AH/250VP)

PWR2 fuse (F2 3.15AH/250VP)

Page 492: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Method of Operating Maintenance and Management Functions

4-86

4.2.13 Resource Monitoring CX2200 monitors the rate of CPU use and the rate of memory use.

Displaying the rate of CPU use Shows the rate of CPU use is measured at 5-second, 1-minute, and 5-minute intervals, and the latest average CPU use rates, as well as the peak values of the average CPU use rates measured between the last read time and the current time, respectively.

Memo Each time this command is entered, the previously stored peak values are cleared.

Command

show resource cpu Display of CPU usage

Input example

The following example shows the rate of CPU use.

*Switch# show resource cpu

CPU Activity Information

========================

Last Read Time :--/--/---- --:--:--

Current Time :01/01/2004 03:39:27

The Rate of CPU Use

===================

Measure Time Current(%) Peak(%) (Last Read ->Current)

--------------------------------------------------------

5 (sec) 7 11 (01/01/2004 03:36:40)

1 (min) 6 7 (01/01/2004 03:39:15)

5 (min) 6 6 (01/01/2004 03:39:04)

[1]

[2]

[6] [5] [4]

[3]

Page 493: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Method of Operating Maintenance and Management Functions

4-87

[1] The last read time is shown.

[2] The current time is shown.

[3] The average CPU use rate measurement time is shown.

[4] The latest average CPU use rate is shown.

[5] The peak value of the average CPU use rates measured between the last read time and the current time is shown.

[6] The time when the peak value in [5] was recorded is shown.

Displaying the rate of memory use Shows the rate of memory use, the size of memory space currently used, and the size of memory space actually available.

Command

show resource memory Display of memory usage

Input example

The following example shows the rate of memory use.

*Switch# show resource memory

The Rate of Memory Use

======================

Rate(%) Used Size(byte) / Actual Size(byte)

----------------------------------------------

39 17042776 / 42925880

*Switch#

Page 494: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Method of Operating Maintenance and Management Functions

4-88

4.2.14 NTP Function The CX2200 supports the NTP function. NTP is a protocol for synchronizing the network times between the NTP server and the CX2200. On the CX2200, two NTP servers can be set including the priority (primary) server and alternate (secondary) server, and this ensures correct network time synchronization. Time synchronization makes it possible to associate events by using the time information when a system log is written or a certain event occurs.

The NTP function of the CX2200 uses SNTP (Simple Network Time Protocol) Version3. Make sure that the server you want to specify supports SNTP.

When the network time is synchronized, the console shows the execution result. The following shows the list of trap messages.

Execution result Display

Normal termination for priority server

IF NTP SERVER ACCESS SUCCEEDED

Abnormal termination for priority server

IF NTP SERVER ACCESS FAILED (PRIMARY:%s,SECONDARY:%s)

If the synchronization with the priority server terminates abnormally, synchronization with the network time of the alternate server is executed and the execution result of the priority server and the alternate server is shown as additional information. The following shows the content of additional information.

Additional information 1 Additional information 2 Meaning

Priority server error factor Alternate server error factor

NO ENTRY NO ENTRY

NO MEMORY NO MEMORY

BAD ARGUMENT BAD ARGUMENT

DEVICE ADDRESS SETTING ERROR

DEVICE ADDRESS SETTING ERROR

NO SERVER NO SERVER

SOCKET ERROR SOCKET ERROR

ADDRESS ALREADY IN USE ADDRESS ALREADY IN USE

BIND ERROR BIND ERROR

IOCTL ERROR IOCTL ERROR

TIMER ERROR TIMER ERROR

SIGNAL ERROR SIGNAL ERROR

NTP server access error

Page 495: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Method of Operating Maintenance and Management Functions

4-89

Additional information 1 Additional information 2 Meaning

SYNCHRONIZATION FAILED SYNCHRONIZATION FAILED

OTHER ERROR OTHER ERROR

SUCCEEDED

When (SUCCEEDED) is shown as the alternate server error factor of additional information 2, synchronization with the network time is successful.

Set up the NTP server as follows. If the NTP server is inaccessible, network time synchronization cannot be performed. It is recommended to confirm accessibility using the "ping" command.

Synchronize the network time after setting the IP address of the NTP server when the NTP access time is already set on the NTP server, or after setting the access time to the NTP server when the IP address of the NTP server is already set.

If the IP addresses of both the priority and alternate servers of the NTP server are set, first synchronize the network time with the priority server. Only if it fails, synchronize the network time with the alternate server.

• Set the IP address of the NTP server (set ntp server).

• Set the NTP access time to the NTP server (set ntp access-time).

To disable the NTP function, set the access time to 0.

Note As the server IP address, you cannot set 0.xxx.xxx.xxx/127.xxx.xxx.xxx or 224.xxx.xxx.xxx to 255.xxx.xxx.xxx ("xxx" can be any number). If a server exists at the network address of 192.168.128.0/24 or 192.168.129.0/24, you can set up the server but you cannot make it communicate correctly.

Note When the time difference between the time set to CX2200 and the time of the NTP server is 34 years or more, the time cannot be set properly.

Commands

set ntp server Setting of IP address of NTP server

set ntp access-time Setting of NTP access time

show ntp Display of NTP server setting information

clear ntp server Clearing of IP address of NTP server

Page 496: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Method of Operating Maintenance and Management Functions

4-90

Input example

The IP address of the priority server is set to 192.168.2.212, the IP address of the alternate priority server to 192.168.2.201, and the access time to eight hours.

Switch# set ntp server primary 192.168.2.212

*Switch# set ntp server secondary 192.168.2.201

*Switch#

*Switch# set ntp access-time 8

*Switch#

*Switch# show ntp

NTP Server Configuration

========================

Primary IP Address : 192.168.2.212

Secondary IP Address : 192.168.2.201

Retrieval Time (hour): 8

*Switch#

Page 497: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Useful Functions

4-91

4.3 Useful Functions 4.3.1 Version Up When a new version software program or new-version hardware data is released, update is possible. For the version up, the new program file is downloaded from the ftp server through a network, using the ftp client function of the CX2200.

You can use either a local console or a remote console to access the CX2200, as long as it can access the CX2200.

Page 498: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Useful Functions

4-92

Confirm that the network between the CX2200 and the ftp server is normal.

Specify the ftp server IP address and the file to be updated.

Specify user name of the ftp server.

Input password of the specified user name.

Execute update.

Confirm that the write was executed normally.

Restart the CX2200.

Confirm that update was performed successfully.

4.3.1.1 Version up procedure When the program file is updated, the unit needs to be restarted. At this time, automatically-created statistical information and MAC learning table information are lost.

Perform the version up by the following procedure.

1 Pre-preparation 4-93

2 Executing download command 4-93

3 Specifying user name 4-94

4 Specifying password 4-94

5 Executing update 4-94

6 Confirming version 4-95

7 Restart 4-95

8 Confirming version 4-96

Page 499: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Useful Functions

4-93

1 Pre-preparation (1) Send a ping to the ftp server to check that the network between this unit and the ftp server is

normal.

(2) Save the running configuration data in the startup configuration data by the "write memory" command.

Memo It is recommended to display the startup configuration data or the running configuration data on the screen by the "show running-config" command and to save the data in a file such as an editor log file for the worst.

Commands

ping Checking of connection with host

write memory Saving of setting information

2 Executing download command Specify the IP address of the ftp server and the name of the file to be updated. The file name is composed of a software version and a model name.

Note 0.xxx.xxx.xxx/127.xxx.xxx.xxx and 224.xxx.xxx.xxx to 255.xxx.xxx.xxx cannot be specified for the server IP address. ("xxx" is any number.) If the server exists in network addresses 192.168.128.0/24 and 192.168.129.0/24, the server can be set but correct communication cannot be set up.

Commands

download software Downloading of software

download fpga Downloading of FPGA

Page 500: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Useful Functions

4-94

3 Specifying user name Specify the user name of the server in which the file is saved.

4 Specifying password Specify the password of the user account specified by the user name.

5 Executing update Read the update software from the server and write it in the built-in flash memory.

Memo The down load time may become longer depending on any reasons such as the size of data to be transferred, network traffic, ftp server performance, and LAN cable cabling.

The communication with the ftp server can be stopped forcibly by pressing Ctrl+c key combination during download.

Confirm the size of data to be downloaded and the statuses of the network and ftp server. Then, re-enter the command.

Note If the update does not terminate normally due to a network load, ftp server problems, or the like, try the procedure again from step 1.

Page 501: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Useful Functions

4-95

6 Confirming version Confirm the displayed version to see if the write in the built-in flash memory was executed normally.

Use the "show system revision" command for the confirmation.

By checking the Latest Soft Ver or Latest Hard Ver, confirm that the version downloaded by steps 2 to 5 is displayed.

Note If the Latest Hard Ver indicates ff.ff.ff even though the "download fpga" command was executed, the version is not updated. Try the procedure again from step 2.

Command

show system revision Display of various version information

7 Restart Execute a restart to validate the updated software.

Command

reset system Resetting of entire device

Note When executing the "download fpga" command (download of FPGA), specify fpga-version-up for the first parameter of the "reset system" command.

Page 502: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Useful Functions

4-96

8 Confirming version Confirm the version display to see if the update was executed normally.

Use the "show system revision" command for the confirmation.

By checking the Current Software or Current Hardware, confirm that the version downloaded by steps 2 to 5 is indicated.

Version up procedure example The following network is assumed for explanation.

The program file of a new version is named cx2200_soft_020010.dlm.

Local console

ftp server (192.168.0.10)

Remote console

Higher switch

CX2200

CX2600/220CX2600/220

Page 503: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Useful Functions

4-97

Input example

*Switch# download software 192.168.0.10 cx2200_soft_020010.dlm

FTP Login Name : cx2200

FTP Login Password :

Data Transferring.......................

Writing Flash Memory......................

*Switch# show system revision

System Revision

===============

Current Latest Backup Current Latest

Module Install Software Software Software Hardware Hardware

-------------------------------------------------------------------------

Cpusw : cpusw 01.00.07 02.00.10 01.00.07 01.01.01 01.01.01

Line1 : 32t1e1h --- --- --- 01.02.0a 01.02.0a

Line2 : 2gbe --- --- --- 01.02.0a 01.02.0a

*Switch#

Page 504: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Useful Functions

4-98

4.3.2 Trap Transmission Selection Function The CX2200 groups messages in the unit of functions and enables and disables each group to be sent as autonomous messages, Trap messages, local log messages, or remote log messages.

Trap groups A group is composed of two or more members. Each member is composed of messages classified according to their functions.

Group Group explanation Member Member explanation

critical critical error *1

major major error *1

minor minor error

fault Failure message

warning warning error *1

sfp SFP change information

− −

ntp NTP access error − −

connect telnet login and logout telnet telnet message

fail telnet abnormality

out-band Maintenance network load (Out-band)

maintenance-network Maintenance network message

in-band Maintenance network load (In-band)

spantree Spanning tree − −

fdb MAC learning − −

aggregation Link aggregation − −

detect-f1f3 F1/F2/F3 alarm detection

detect-f4f5 F4-F5 alarm detection

atm-oam ATM OAM alarm

detect-minor MN alarm detection

unexpect-level Unexpect MEG Level

mismerge Mismerge

ether-oam EtherOAM alarm

unexpect-mep Unexpect MEP

Page 505: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Useful Functions

4-99

Group Group explanation Member Member explanation

unexpect- period

Unexpect Period

loc LOC

rdi RDI

t1e1 T1E1OAM information

− −

tdmop TDMoP information − −

ima IMA group − −

loopback-atm ATM loopback event − −

ether-ring EtherRing event − −

command Command (only for remote-log/ local-log)

− −

snmp SNMP (only for remote-log/ local-log)

− −

*1. When disabled is set for the member, note that fatal failures are not notified.

Some groups have elements. Elements indicate message additional information such as port numbers (including information such as individual Trap number and Trap-ID).

Group Group explanation Element Element explanation

private-trap Individual Trap 1-999 Individual Trap number

trap-id Trap-ID 1-999 Trap-ID number *1

port Port message 1-26, 33-48 Port number

link Link change *2 1-26, 33-48 Port number

*1. Element number 12 of the trap-id group corresponds to the SNMP authentication error

notification message. This message can be set only for Trap messages. (Other settings cause setting errors.) In addition to this setting, also the "set snmp authen-trap" command can enables/disables the sending. No Trap messages are sent if either this function or this command disables the sending.

*2. In addition to this function, the "set port link-trap" command can enable/disable the sending. Either this function or this command disables the sending, no Trap messages are sent.

Page 506: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Useful Functions

4-100

Note When a message belongs two or more members/elements, the message is sent only if enabled is set for all of the members.

Memo For Trap messages corresponding to each group, see "the group correspondence table for each specific trap and group correspondence table for each standard trap" in Appendix.

Enabling/disabling Trap transmission selection Enables or disables Trap transmission selection for each message type, each group, and each member/element. Sending of all messages can be enabled or disabled by omitting message types and groups when the command is entered.

Command

set message transmit Setting of trap transmission selection

Page 507: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Useful Functions

4-101

Displaying setting status of Trap transmission selection Shows the setting status of Trap transmission selection.

Command

show message transmit config Display of trap transmission selection setting status

Input example (1/2)

Display the setting status of Trap transmission selection

(Continued to the next page)

*Switch# show message transmit config

Message Transmit Configuration(Member)

======================================

Group Member Monitor Trap Remote-log Local-log

---------------------------------------------------------------------------

fault : critical enabled enabled enabled enabled

major enabled enabled enabled enabled

minor enabled enabled enabled enabled

warning enabled enabled enabled enabled

sfp : --- enabled enabled enabled enabled

ntp : --- enabled enabled enabled enabled

Page 508: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Useful Functions

4-102

Input example (2/2)

Memo Whether to enable or disable message transmission cannot be set for monitor and trap of the command group and monitor, remote-log, and local-log of the trap-id group element 12, so "---" is displayed.

telnet : connect enabled enabled enabled enabled

fail enabled enabled enabled enabled

maintenance-network : out-band enabled enabled enabled enabled

in-band enabled enabled enabled enabled

spantree : --- enabled enabled enabled enabled

fdb : --- enabled enabled enabled enabled

aggregation : --- enabled enabled enabled enabled

atm-oam : detect-f1f3 enabled enabled enabled enabled

detect-f4f5 enabled enabled enabled enabled

detect-minor enabled enabled enabled enabled

ether-oam : unexpect-level enabled enabled enabled enabled

mismerge enabled enabled enabled enabled

unexpect-mep enabled enabled enabled enabled

unexpect-period enabled enabled enabled enabled

loc enabled enabled enabled enabled

rdi enabled enabled enabled enabled

t1e1 : --- enabled enabled enabled enabled

tdmop : --- enabled enabled enabled enabled

ima : --- enabled enabled enabled enabled

loopback : --- enabled enabled enabled enabled

ether-ring : --- enabled enabled enabled enabled

command : --- --- --- enabled enabled

snmp : --- --- --- enabled enabled

Message Transmit Configuration(Element)

=======================================

Group Element Monitor Trap Remote-log Local-log

-----------------------------------------------------------------

trap-id : 9 disabled disabled disabled disabled

12 --- disabled --- ---

*Switch#

Page 509: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Troubleshooting

4-103

4.4 Troubleshooting When the local console cannot be used

Confirm the following points:

1) Is a straight cable used as the console cable?

2) Is local console communication set correctly?

3) Are the CX2200 power cables connected?

When communication is disabled

When communication to a specific network is disabled Confirm continuity by using the "ping" command to the routers of the network with which communication is disabled.

Check the continuity with the routers one by one, starting from the nearest to the using terminal to the network with which continuity is disabled.

Thus, which router disables the communication can be determined. Confirm the routing table, address, and cable of the determined router.

When communication is disabled intermittently Confirm the traffic and load of the line. Also confirm that the cables are connected correctly and that the used cables conform to the standard.

When communication is disabled completely Confirm that all routers in the route are turned on and operate normally, or the communication cables are not loose.

Page 510: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Troubleshooting

4-104

When the unit does not start When the unit does not start, confirm the following items and take appropriate action:

When the ALM lamp on the front of the unit is turned on When this lamp is turned on, confirm the installation environment of the unit (temperature, humidity, etc.). If this lamp is turned on even though the installation environment is correct, contact the dealer or the service center in charge.

When the PWR1/2 lamp on the front of the unit is turned off When this lamp is turned off, confirm that both of the two power cords are connected correctly.

If the PWR1/2 lamp is turned off even though the cords are connected correctly, the CPUSW card may be faulty.

Contact the dealer or the service center in charge.

When none of the lamps on the front of the unit is turned on Confirm that power cords are connected correctly. If none of the lamps is turned on even though the power cords are connected correctly, contact the dealer or the service center in charge.

Page 511: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Troubleshooting

4-105

When the unit restarts automatically When the unit restarts automatically due to a failure of this unit, the following information items as well as the status when the failure occurred are required.

Before contact the dealer or the service center in charge, collect the information.

1) Status when the failure occurred

Were installation works, such as network installation and terminal addition, being performed?

2) Statuses of the lamps on the front of this unit

Are the lamps on the front of this unit, such as the ALM, PWR and INS lamps, turned on?

3) Network configuration

In which network configuration and in which location, is the CX2200 used?

4) Setting information and failure information

Failure information collected immediately before the restart is automatically saved in RAM. Collect the information by the following "failure information collection method".

If such an automatic restart occurs, your setting information and failure information are required. The information is surely required for software failure analysis. If the information is not provided, the failure cannot be analyzed.

5) Event information

If event information collection is set, collect the event information at occurrence of the failure.

Failure information collection method

Display the failure information by the "show fault" command to confirm the information.

Page 512: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Troubleshooting

4-106

To delete configuration data

To return running configuration data settings to startup configuration data settings To delete running configuration data settings and to return to startup configuration data settings, restart the unit by the "reset system" command. In this case, the data settings are not saved in the built-in flash memory.

Note Note that temporary data (including statistical information and automatically-collected routing tables) is also deleted.

To return running configuration data settings to factory-set settings To delete running configuration data settings and return to factory-set settings, delete the data in the built-in flash memory by the "clear startup-config all" command and restart the unit by the "reset system" command.

Page 513: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Troubleshooting

4-107

When self diagnosis does not terminate normally When the INS lamp indicating that the self diagnosis is in progress is kept turned on in yellow, confirm the installation environment (temperature and humidity).

When the environment is normal, contact the dealer or the service center in charge.

When there is no command response In addition to the contents displayed by the "show fault" command, collect the system log information displayed by entering a relevant command (such as the "show syslog local" command) and contact the dealer or a sales personnel.

When software failure information occurs When any information excluding "No entry in the table" is displayed for Exception Information, by entering the "show fault past" command, a software failure has occurred. Automatic restore has already been executed; however, service will be deteriorated if the same phenomenon occurs in the future. So in addition to the contents displayed by the "show fault" command, collect the system log information displayed by entering a relevant command (such as the "show syslog local" command) and contact the dealer or a sales personnel.

Page 514: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

(blank page)

Page 515: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Appendix

1

Appendix

1 Outline ..................................................................................3

2 Alarm Transfer Mechanism ................................................3

3 Fault List ............................................................................ 18

4 Trap List ............................................................................. 24

5 Counter Monitoring Condition List .................................. 75

6 Command Error List.......................................................... 87

7 Restart Cause List ........................................................... 113

8 IMA State List................................................................... 114

Page 516: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Appendix

2

9 Remote Device Interface Speed-by-Speed Connection List ..................................................................116

10 ATM Shaper Setting Bandwidth Value List ................. 119

11 List of Operations on ATM Loopback Cell Reception ............................................................................121

Page 517: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Appendix

3

1 Outline This appendix lists faults, counter monitoring conditions, command errors, restart causes, and restrictions.

2 Alarm Transfer Mechanism CX2200 monitors the line status of ports on the 32T1E1H/32T1E1T/1ATM155A line card. If an error occurs, CX2200 sends an alarm to the maintenance interface and sends a notification to the remote device.

* For F4/F5 alarms, two types of alarms, segment-segment and end-segment, exist respectively.

Page 518: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Appendix

4

Alarm transfer mechanism of 32T1E1H/32T1E1T line card 1. Alarm transfer operation with TDM mode setting

* : Alarm output point, : Alarm detection point

*1) When multiple TDM paths exists in the same line, AIS is output only if LOS/AIS/LOF are detected at all the associated paths.

LOS AIS LOF

RAI RAI

AIS

LOS/AIS/LOF detection at the associated path side (Note1)

ACT-FLT

Page 519: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Appendix

5

2. Alarm transfer operation with TDMoP mode (SAToP) setting

* : Alarm output point, : Alarm detection point, : Alarm transparent point, ×: Alarm discard point

* L bit, M bit and R bit are bits for failure notification in the CESoP Control word field in an Ether packet.

* CESoP Buffer Underrun is detected when there are no packets received at the Ether side.

*1) When the frame format is unframed, LOF/RAI are not monitored since F-bit/F-byte are also treated as user data.

*2) When CESoP Buffer Underrun is detected in SAToP mode, frames with all '1' pattern are inserted from CESoP devices, and AIS is notified to the remote device.

LOS

AIS ACT-FLT

L bit

AIS L bit

CESoP Buffer Underrun

AIS

RAI LOF

R bit

AIS

Detected when the frame format is other than unframed (Note1)

R bit ×

ALL1 data output (Note2)

Page 520: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Appendix

6

3. Alarm transfer operation with TDMoP mode (CESoPSN) setting

* : Alarm output point, : Alarm detection point, ×: Alarm discard point

* L bit, M bit and R bit are bits for failure notification in the CESoP Control word field in an Ether packet.

* CESoP Buffer Underrun is detected when there are no packets received at the Ether side.

*1) When multiple TDM paths exists in the same line, the line alarm transfer operation is performed for all the paths.

*2) When multiple TDM paths exists in the same line, L bit is output for all the paths; otherwise, AIS is output only if CESoP Buffer Underrun is detected.

LOS

ACT-FLT

L bit (Note1)

AIS L bit (Note2)

CESoP Buffer Underrun (Note2)

LOF RAI

AIS

RAI M bit (Note1)

AIS

R bit (Note1)

M bit ×

R bit ×

Page 521: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Appendix

7

4. Alarm transfer operation with ATMoP mode setting

* : Alarm output point, : Alarm detection point

*1) For an IMA group, alarms are mapped to F4/F5 alarms only when the number of normal physical lines does not satisfy the number of minimum required links.

*2) AIS is transmitted only when a line card device fault (CR) has occurred.

LOS (F1) AIS (F1)

RAI (F1)

LCD (F3)

LODS (F3)

RDI-IMA (F3)

LIF (F3) IMA-RDI (F3)

LOF (F1)

Mapped to F4/F5 alarms (Note1)

RAI (F1)

AIS (F1)

Page 522: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Appendix

8

Alarm transfer mechanism of 1ATM155A line card

* : Alarm output point, : Alarm detection point

LOS (F1) LOF (F1)

MS-RDI (F2)

LOP (F3) LCD (F3)

MS-REI (F2)

P-AIS (F3)

MS-REI (F2)

Mapped to F4/F5 alarms

MS-AIS (F2)MS-SD (F2)

MS-RDI (F2)MS-ERR (F2)

Page 523: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Appendix

9

F4/F5 alarm transfer mechanism 1. Alarm transfer operation with VP connection setting 1.1. Alarm transfer operation with F4 end point setting

* : Alarm output point, : Alarm detection point, : Alarm transparent point, ×: Alarm discard point

* F4/F5 level alarms include both Segment/End-to-End flows.

* The flow point setting for the F5 level alarm at the device side is always transparent due to the fixed connecting point.

VP-AIS (F4)

VP-RDI (F4) VP-RDI (F4)

VC-AIS (F5)

VC-RDI (F5)

VC-RDI (F5)

VC-AIS (F5)

VP-AIS (F4)

VP-RDI (F4)

VP-AIS (F4) VP-AIS (F4)

ACT-FLT

Mapping by F1-F3 alarm detection

Page 524: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Appendix

10

1.2. Alarm transfer operation with F4 connecting point setting

* : Alarm output point, : Alarm detection point, : Alarm transparent point, ×: Alarm discard point

* F4/F5 level alarms include both Segment/End-to-End flows.

* The flow point setting for the F5 level alarm at the device side is always transparent due to the fixed connecting point.

VP-AIS (F4)

VP-RDI (F4)

VC-AIS (F5)

VC-RDI (F5)

VC-RDI (F5)

VC-AIS (F5)

VP-AIS (F4)

VP-RDI (F4)

VP-AIS (F4) VP-AIS (F4)

ACT-FLT

Mapping by F1-F3 alarm detection

Page 525: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Appendix

11

1.3. Alarm transfer operation without F4 flow point setting

* : Alarm output point, : Alarm detection point, : Alarm transparent point, ×: Alarm discard point

* F4/F5 level alarms include both Segment/End-to-End flows.

* The flow point setting for the F5 level alarm at the device side is always transparent due to the fixed connecting point.

VP-AIS (F4)

VP-RDI (F4)

VC-AIS (F5)

VC-RDI (F5)

VC-RDI (F5)

VC-AIS (F5)

VP-AIS (F4)

VP-RDI (F4)

VP-AIS (F4)

ACT-FLT

Page 526: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Appendix

12

2. Alarm transfer operation with VC connection setting 2.1. Alarm transfer operation with F4/F5 end point setting

* : Alarm output point, : Alarm detection point, : Alarm transparent point, ×: Alarm discard point

* F4/F5 level alarms are Segment flow only.

* The flow point setting for the F5 level alarm at the device side is always transparent due to the fixed connecting point.

VP-AIS (F4)

VP-RDI (F4) VP-RDI (F4)

VC-AIS (F5)

VC-RDI (F5)

VC-RDI (F5)

VC-AIS (F5)

VP-AIS (F4)

VP-RDI (F4)

VC-AIS (F5) VC-AIS (F5)

ACT-FLT

VC-RDI (F5)

F4 to F5 option settingMapping by F1-F3 alarm detection

×

×

Page 527: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Appendix

13

2.2. Alarm transfer operation with F4 end point/F5 connecting point setting

* : Alarm output point, : Alarm detection point, : Alarm transparent point, ×: Alarm discard point

* F4/F5 level alarms include both Segment/End-to-End flows.

* The flow point setting for the F5 level alarm at the device side is always transparent due to the fixed connecting point.

VP-AIS (F4)

VP-RDI (F4) VP-RDI (F4)

VC-AIS (F5)

VC-RDI (F5)

VC-RDI (F5)

VC-AIS (F5)

VP-AIS (F4)

VP-RDI (F4)

VC-AIS (F5) VC-AIS (F5)

ACT-FLT

F4 to F5 optional settingMapping by F1-F3 alarm detection

×

×

Page 528: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Appendix

14

2.3. Alarm transfer operation without F4 end point/F5 flow point setting

* : Alarm output point, : Alarm detection point, : Alarm transparent point, ×: Alarm discard point

* F4/F5 level alarms are Segment flow only.

* The flow point setting for the F5 level alarm at the device side is always transparent due to the fixed connecting point.

VP-AIS (F4)

VP-RDI (F4) VP-RDI (F4)

VC-AIS (F5)

VC-RDI (F5)

VC-RDI (F5)

VC-AIS (F5)

VP-AIS (F4)

VP-RDI (F4)

VC-AIS (F5)

ACT-FLT

Mapping by F1-F3 alarm detection

×

×

Page 529: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Appendix

15

2.4. Alarm transfer operation without F4 flow point setting/with F5 end point setting

* : Alarm output point, : Alarm detection point, : Alarm transparent point, ×: Alarm discard point

* F4/F5 level alarms are Segment flow only.

* The flow point setting for the F5 level alarm at the device side is always transparent due to the fixed connecting point.

VP-AIS (F4)

VP-RDI (F4)

VC-AIS (F5)

VC-RDI (F5)

VC-RDI (F5)

VC-AIS (F5)

VP-AIS (F4)

VP-RDI (F4)

VC-AIS (F5) VC-AIS (F5)

ACT-FLT

VC-RDI (F5)

Mapping by F1-F3 alarm detection

×

×

×

×

Page 530: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Appendix

16

2.5. Alarm transfer operation without F4 flow point setting/with F5 connecting point setting

* : Alarm output point, : Alarm detection point, : Alarm transparent point, ×: Alarm discard point

* F4/F5 level alarms are Segment flow only.

* The flow point setting for the F5 level alarm at the device side is always transparent due to the fixed connecting point.

VP-AIS (F4)

VP-RDI (F4)

VC-AIS (F5)

VC-RDI (F5)

VC-RDI (F5)

VC-AIS (F5)

VP-AIS (F4)

VP-RDI (F4)

VC-AIS (F5) VC-AIS (F5)

ACT-FLT

Mapping by F1-F3 alarm detection

×

×

×

×

Page 531: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Appendix

17

2.6. Alarm transfer operation without F4/F5 flow point setting

* : Alarm output point, : Alarm detection point, : Alarm transparent point, ×: Alarm discard point

* F4/F5 level alarms include both Segment/End-to-End flows.

* The flow point setting for the F5 level alarm at the device side is always transparent due to the fixed connecting point.

VP-AIS (F4)

VP-RDI (F4)

VC-AIS (F5)

VC-RDI (F5)

VC-RDI (F5)

VC-AIS (F5)

VP-AIS (F4)

VP-RDI (F4)

VC-AIS (F5)

ACT-FLT

×

×

×

×

Page 532: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Appendix

18

3 Fault List The table below indicates the meanings of the importance levels used in the fault list.

Meanings of importance levels

Importance level CR (Critical) MJ (Major) MN (Minor) WR (Warning) CL (Cleared) IF (Information)

Meaning Critical fault Major fault Minor fault Warning Fault recovery Information

Fault level High Low − −

Page 533: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Appendix

19

Details of device fault importance levels

Function name Function details

CR (Critical): Critical fault Indicates that a situation affecting the continuity and device state has occurred and that immediate recovery processing is required. This level is reported, for example, when the continuity of the management object is stopped and its capability must be recovered.

The device notifies the maintenance personnel and takes immediate actions (stop of autonomous operation at temperature failure in the high-temperature side).

ALM-LED is turned on. This level of fault is recovered only when the device is reset.

MJ (Major): Major fault Indicates that a situation affecting the continuity and device state is worsening and that urgent recovery processing is required. This level is reported, for example, when the capability of the management object is materially degraded and the capability must be recovered to the normal state.

The device notifies the maintenance personnel of a partial fault only and takes an action.

A partial fault causes ALM-LED to blink and is recovered. Other faults are recovered only when the device is reset.

MN (Minor): Minor fault Indicates that there is a fault not affecting the continuity and device state and that recovery processing is required to protect against the occurrence of a more serious fault (e.g., a fault that affects the continuity or device state). This level is reported, for example, when the state of a detected alarm has not affected the capability of the management object yet.

ALM-LED is not turned on. The state already recovered is indicated.

WR (Warning): Warning Indicates a situation where a latent or imminent fault that affects the continuity or device state is detected before a serious influence emerges. If necessary, a detailed diagnosis should be made and a corrective action should be taken to prevent the situation from further worsening to a serious fault that affects the continuity and device state.

A partial fault causes ALM-LED to blink and is recovered. Other faults are recovered only when the device is reset.

CL (Cleared): Fault recovery Indicates a situation recovered from a fault that affects the continuity or device state or a situation recovered from a latent or imminent fault that affects the continuity or device state before a serious influence emerges.

IF (Information): Information Posts information about node autonomous/remote controlled results, state changes, and actions.

Page 534: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Appendix

20

Details of line fault importance levels

Line type Fault level Fault description

CR (Critical): Critical fault None

MJ (Major): Major fault Indicates that the port link is down. (Protection time is specified by a command.)

MN (Minor): Minor fault None

Ethernet

CL (Cleared): Fault recovery Indicates that the port link is up. (Protection time is specified by a command.)

CR (Critical): Critical fault None

MJ (Major): Major fault Indicates that a transmission path alarm is continuously detected for more than one second.

MN (Minor): Minor fault Indicates that a transmission path alarm is detected, but it is recovered within one second.

ATM

CL (Cleared): Fault recovery Indicates that recovery of a transmission path alarm is continued for more than one second.

CR (Critical): Critical fault None

MJ (Major): Major fault Indicates that a transmission path alarm is continuously detected for more than one second.

MN (Minor): Minor fault None

T1/E1

CL (Cleared): Fault recovery Indicates that a transmission path alarm is continuously detected for more than one second.

Page 535: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Appendix

21

CPUSW card/line card state transitions for each importance level

For each importance level, the table below indicates CPUSW card/line card state transitions made when a fault has occurred.

CPUSW card fault Line card fault

CR (Critical): Critical fault The CPUSW card makes a transition to the fault state (FAULT).

In this device, a CPUSW card fault (FAULT) is a device fault.

The LINE card makes a transition to the fault state (FAULT).

In this device, a LINE card fault (FAULT) is a device fault.

MJ (Major): Major fault No CPUSW card state transition occurs.

No LINE card state transition occurs.

No LINE card state transition occurs.

No CPUSW card state transition occurs.

MN (Minor): Minor fault No CPUSW card state transition occurs.

No LINE card state transition occurs.

No LINE card state transition occurs.

No CPUSW card state transition occurs.

WR (Warning): Warning No CPUSW card state transition occurs.

No LINE card state transition occurs.

No LINE card state transition occurs.

No CPUSW card state transition occurs.

CL (Cleared): Recovery The CPUSW card, if faulty, is recovered. The LINE card, if faulty, is recovered.

Page 536: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Appendix

22

Fault list

No. Fault description Level CPUSWLED

LINE LED

Suspect component Remarks

1 Fan fault MJ ⎯ FAN

2 Fan fault recovery CL ⎯ FAN

3 System CPU fault (CR) CR ⎯ CPUSW This is autonomously reset 10 to 20 seconds later. (Note 1)

4 CPUSW card device fault (CR) CR ⎯ CPUSW

5 CPUSW card device fault (MJ) MJ ⎯ ⎯ CPUSW

6 CPUSW card device fault (MN) MN ⎯ ⎯ CPUSW

7 CPUSW card device fault (WR) WR ⎯ ⎯ CPUSW

8 CPUSW card device fault recovery CL -⎯ ⎯ CPUSW

9 Software fault (CR) CR ⎯ ⎯ CPUSW

10 Software fault (WR) WR ⎯ ⎯ CPUSW

11 Software fault recovery CL ⎯ ⎯ CPUSW

12 LINE card device fault (CR) CR LINE

13 LINE card device fault (MJ) MJ ⎯ ⎯ LINE

14 LINE card device fault (MN) MN ⎯ ⎯ LINE

15 LINE card device fault (WR) WR ⎯ ⎯ LINE

16 LINE card device fault recovery CL ⎯ ⎯ LINE

17 System temperature fault (CR) CR ⎯ ⎯ The power is shut down 10 seconds later.

18 System temperature fault (WR) WR ⎯ ⎯

19 System temperature fault recovery CL ⎯ ⎯

20 Power fault (MJ) MJ ⎯ ⎯ POWER

Page 537: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Appendix

23

No. Fault description Level CPUSWLED

LINE LED

Suspect component Remarks

21 Power fault recovery CL ⎯ ⎯ POWER

*1) When the "set fault auto-reboot" function to be used for autonomous reset upon a fault is disabled, no reset occurs.

However, a reset occurs at the time of detection before restart completion, regardless of whether the function is disabled.

* CPUSW/LINE-LED column: : ALM turned on, : ALM blinking, : ALM blinking canceled

Page 538: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Appendix

24

4 Trap List Specific trap number definition

Specific

trap number

Trap name Level Description syslog group

1 cx22-mbhTrapSessionStatus IF User login state TRAP_SYSINF

2 cx22-mbhTrapNtpAccess IF NTP access result TRAP_SYSINF

3 cx22-mbhTrapMessageDiscarded IF TRAP message discard state TRAP_SYSINF

4 cx22-mbhTrapNetworkOverload WR Blocking due to network overload TRAP_SYSWAR

5 cx22-mbhTrapNetworkOverloadRcv CL Unblocking due to network overload recovery TRAP_SYSCLR

6 cx22-mbhTrapStpNewRootBridge IF New root switch detected TRAP_ROUTEINF

7 cx22-mbhTrapStpTopologyChange IF Network topology change detected TRAP_ROUTEINF

8 cx22-mbhTrapStpProtocolMigration IF STP frame received from remote side during RSTP operation

TRAP_ROUTEINF

9 cx22-mbhTrapStpInvalidBpduReceived IF Invalid BPDU detected during STP operation TRAP_ROUTEINF

10 cx22-mbhTrapFdbTableClearStatus IF All FDB clearing request completed TRAP_ROUTEINF

11 cx22-mbhTrapLagPortStatusChange IF Operation verification in LACPDU reception/non-reception

TRAP_ROUTEINF

12 cx22-mbhTrapLagLoopDetect IF Loopback detected TRAP_ROUTEINF

CR TRAP_SYSFLT 13 cx22-mbhTrapFltInfSystemSoftware

WR

Software fault occurred

TRAP_SYSWAR

14 cx22-mbhTrapFltInfSystemSoftwareRecover CL Software fault recovered TRAP_SYSCLR

Page 539: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Appendix

25

Specific trap

number Trap name Level Description syslog group

CR TRAP_SYSFLT 15 cx22-mbhTrapFltInfSystemTemp

WR

Temperature fault occurred

TRAP_SYSWAR

16 cx22-mbhTrapFltInfSystemTempRecover CL Temperature fault recovered TRAP_SYSCLR

17 cx22-mbhTrapFltInfSystemProcessor CR CPU fault occurred TRAP_SYSFLT

18 cx22-mbhTrapFltInfSystemFan MJ FAN fault occurred TRAP_SYSMJR

19 cx22-mbhTrapFltInfSystemFanRecover CL FAN fault recovered TRAP_SYSCLR

CR TRAP_SYSFLT

MJ TRAP_SYSMJR

MN TRAP_SYSMNR

20 cx22-mbhTrapFltInfCpuswDevice

WR

CPUSW card device fault

TRAP_SYSWAR

21 cx22-mbhTrapFltInfCpuswDeviceRecover CL CPUSW card device fault recovered TRAP_SYSCLR

CR TRAP_SYSFLT

MJ TRAP_SYSMJR

MN TRAP_SYSMNR

22 cx22-mbhTrapFltInfLineDevice

WR

LINE card device fault occurred

TRAP_SYSWAR

23 cx22-mbhTrapFltInfLineDeviceRecover CL LINE card device fault recovered TRAP_SYSCLR

24 cx22-mbhTrapFltInfExternalMemory WR External memory fault occurred TRAP_SYSWAR

25 cx22-mbhTrapFltInfExternalMemoryRecover CL External memory fault recovered TRAP_SYSCLR

26 cx22-mbhTrapSystemCpuswStatus IF CPUSW operation state transition TRAP_SYSINF

27 cx22-mbhTrapSystemFanuStatus IF FAN unit operation state transition TRAP_SYSINF

28 cx22-mbhTrapInterfaceSfpStatus IF SFP operation state transition notification TRAP_PORTINF

Page 540: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Appendix

26

Specific trap

number Trap name Level Description syslog group

29 cx22-mbhTrapInterfaceSfpRxError MJ Receive optical disconnection error detection notification

TRAP_PORTMJR

30 cx22-mbhTrapInterfaceSfpRxErrorRecover CL Receive optical disconnection error recovery notification

TRAP_PORTCLR

31 cx22-mbhTrapInterfaceSfpTxError MJ Transmit optical disconnection error detection notification

TRAP_PORTMJR

32 cx22-mbhTrapInterfaceSfpTxErrorRecover CL Transmit optical disconnection error recovery notification

TRAP_PORTCLR

33 cx22-mbhTrapEtherOamUnexpectedLevel MJ Ether OAM Unexpected MEG Level detection notification

TRAP_ROUTEMJR

34 cx22-mbhTrapEtherOamUnexpectedLevelRecover

CL Ether OAM Unexpected MEG Level recovery notification

TRAP_ROUTECLR

35 cx22-mbhTrapEtherOamMismerge MJ Ether OAM Mismerge detection notification TRAP_ROUTEMJR

36 cx22-mbhTrapEtherOamMismergeRecover CL Ether OAM Mismerge recovery notification TRAP_ROUTECLR

37 cx22-mbhTrapEtherOamUnexpectedMep MJ Ether OAM Unexpected MEP detection notification

TRAP_ROUTEMJR

38 cx22-mbhTrapEtherOamUnexpectedMepRecover

CL Ether OAM Unexpected MEP recovery notification

TRAP_ROUTECLR

39 cx22-mbhTrapEtherOamUnexpectedPeriod MJ Ether OAM Unexpected Period detection notification

TRAP_ROUTEMJR

40 cx22-mbhTrapEtherOamUnexpectedPeriodRecover

CL Ether OAM Unexpected Period recovery notification

TRAP_ROUTECLR

41 cx22-mbhTrapEtherOamLoc MJ Ether OAM LOC detection notification TRAP_ROUTEMJR

42 cx22-mbhTrapEtherOamLocRecover CL Ether OAM LOC recovery notification TRAP_ROUTECLR

43 cx22-mbhTrapEtherOamRdi MJ Ether OAM RDI detection notification TRAP_ROUTEMJR

44 cx22-mbhTrapEtherOamRdiRecover CL Ether OAM RDI recovery notification TRAP_ROUTECLR

Page 541: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Appendix

27

Specific trap

number Trap name Level Description syslog group

45 cx22-mbhTrapReferenceClockReferenceChange IF Reference clock status change TRAP_SYSINF

46 cx22-mbhTrapReferenceClockFreerun IF Reference clock status change (free run status) TRAP_SYSINF

47 cx22-mbhTrapAtmOamF4SegVpAisDetect MJ Segment VP-AIS detection TRAP_ROUTEMJR

48 cx22-mbhTrapAtmOamF4SegVpAisRecover CL Segment VP-AIS recovery TRAP_ROUTECLR

49 cx22-mbhTrapAtmOamF4SegVpAisImmediateRecover

MN Segment VP-AIS immediate recovery TRAP_ROUTEMNR

50 cx22-mbhTrapAtmOamF4EndVpAisDetect MJ End-to-End VP-AIS detection TRAP_ROUTEMJR

51 cx22-mbhTrapAtmOamF4EndVpAisRecover CL End-to-End VP-AIS recovery TRAP_ROUTECLR

52 cx22-mbhTrapAtmOamF4EndVpAisImmediateRecover

MN End-to-End VP-AIS immediate recovery TRAP_ROUTEMNR

53 cx22-mbhTrapAtmOamF4SegVpRdiDetect MJ Segment VP-RDI detection TRAP_ROUTEMJR

54 cx22-mbhTrapAtmOamF4SegVpRdiRecover CL Segment VP-RDI recovery TRAP_ROUTECLR

55 cx22-mbhTrapAtmOamF4SegVpRdiImmediateRecover

MN Segment VP-RDI immediate recovery TRAP_ROUTEMNR

56 cx22-mbhTrapAtmOamF4EndVpRdiDetect MJ End-to-End VP-RDI detection TRAP_ROUTEMJR

57 cx22-mbhTrapAtmOamF4EndVpRdiRecover CL End-to-End VP-RDI recovery TRAP_ROUTECLR

58 cx22-mbhTrapAtmOamF4EndVpRdiImmediateRecover

MN End-to-End VP-RDI immediate recovery TRAP_ROUTEMNR

59 cx22-mbhTrapAtmOamF5SegVcAisDetect MJ Segment VC-AIS detection TRAP_ROUTEMJR

60 cx22-mbhTrapAtmOamF5SegVcAisRecover CL Segment VC-AIS recovery TRAP_ROUTECLR

61 cx22-mbhTrapAtmOamF5SegVcAisImmediateRecover

MN Segment VC-AIS immediate recovery TRAP_ROUTEMNR

62 cx22-mbhTrapAtmOamF5EndVcAisDetect MJ End-to-End VC-AIS detection TRAP_ROUTEMJR

63 cx22-mbhTrapAtmOamF5EndVcAisRecover CL End-to-End VC-AIS recovery TRAP_ROUTECLR

Page 542: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Appendix

28

Specific trap

number Trap name Level Description syslog group

64 cx22-mbhTrapAtmOamF5EndVcAisImmediateRecover

MN End-to-End VC-AIS immediate recovery TRAP_ROUTEMNR

65 cx22-mbhTrapAtmOamF5SegVcRdiDetect MJ Segment VC-RDI detection TRAP_ROUTEMJR

66 cx22-mbhTrapAtmOamF5SegVcRdiRecover CL Segment VC-RDI recovery TRAP_ROUTECLR

67 cx22-mbhTrapAtmOamF5SegVcRdiImmediateRecover

MN Segment VC-RDI immediate recovery TRAP_ROUTEMNR

68 cx22-mbhTrapAtmOamF5EndVcRdiDetect MJ End-to-End VC-RDI detection TRAP_ROUTEMJR

69 cx22-mbhTrapAtmOamF5EndVcRdiRecover CL End-to-End VC-RDI recovery TRAP_ROUTECLR

70 cx22-mbhTrapAtmOamF5EndVcRdiImmediateRecover

MN End-to-End VC-RDI immediate recovery TRAP_ROUTEMNR

71 cx22-mbhTrapAtmOamStatusF1LosDetect MJ LOS detection TRAP_ROUTEMJR

72 cx22-mbhTrapAtmOamStatusF1LosRecover CL LOS recovery TRAP_ROUTECLR

73 cx22-mbhTrapAtmOamStatusF1LofDetect MJ LOF detection TRAP_ROUTEMJR

74 cx22-mbhTrapAtmOamStatusF1LofRecover CL LOF recovery TRAP_ROUTECLR

75 cx22-mbhTrapAtmOamStatusF2MsAisDetect MJ MS-AIS detection TRAP_ROUTEMJR

76 cx22-mbhTrapAtmOamStatusF2MsAisRecover CL MS-AIS recovery TRAP_ROUTECLR

77 cx22-mbhTrapAtmOamStatusF2MsSdDetect MJ MS-SD detection TRAP_ROUTEMJR

78 cx22-mbhTrapAtmOamStatusF2MsSdRecover CL MS-SD recovery TRAP_ROUTECLR

79 cx22-mbhTrapAtmOamStatusF2MsRdiDetect MJ MS-RDI detection TRAP_ROUTEMJR

80 cx22-mbhTrapAtmOamStatusF2MsRdiRecover CL MS-RDI recovery TRAP_ROUTECLR

81 cx22-mbhTrapAtmOamStatusF2MsErrDetect MJ MS-ERR detection TRAP_ROUTEMJR

82 cx22-mbhTrapAtmOamStatusF2MsErrRecover CL MS-ERR recovery TRAP_ROUTECLR

83 cx22-mbhTrapAtmOamStatusF2MsReiDetect MJ MS-REI detection TRAP_ROUTEMJR

Page 543: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Appendix

29

Specific trap

number Trap name Level Description syslog group

84 cx22-mbhTrapAtmOamStatusF2MsReiRecover CL MS-REI recovery TRAP_ROUTECLR

85 cx22-mbhTrapAtmOamStatusF3LopDetect MJ LOP detection TRAP_ROUTEMJR

86 cx22-mbhTrapAtmOamStatusF3LopRecover CL LOP recovery TRAP_ROUTECLR

87 cx22-mbhTrapAtmOamStatusF3PAisDetect MJ P-AIS detection TRAP_ROUTEMJR

88 cx22-mbhTrapAtmOamStatusF3PAisRecover CL P-AIS recovery TRAP_ROUTECLR

89 cx22-mbhTrapAtmOamStatusF3LcdDetect MJ LCD detection TRAP_ROUTEMJR

90 cx22-mbhTrapAtmOamStatusF3LcdRecover CL LCD recovery TRAP_ROUTECLR

91 cx22-mbhTrapFltInfSystemPower MJ POWER fault TRAP_SYSMJR

92 cx22-mbhTrapFltInfSystemPowerRecover CL POWER fault recovered TRAP_SYSCLR

93 cx22-mbhTrapT1E1OamPortDetect MJ Line warning occurred (LOS/AIS/LOF/RAI) TRAP_ROUTEMJR

94 cx22-mbhTrapT1E1OamPortRecover CL Line warning recovered (NORMAL) TRAP_ROUTECLR

95 cx22-mbhTrapInterfaceSfpFault MJ SFP fault detection notification TRAP_PORTMJR

96 cx22-mbhTrapInterfaceSfpFaultRecover CL SFP fault recovery notification TRAP_PORTCLR

97 cx22-mbhTrapTdmBufferunderrunDetect MJ Lack of reception amount of Ether frames to be loaded on TDMoP T1/E1 frames

TRAP_ROUTEMJR

98 cx22-mbhTrapTdmBufferunderrunRecover CL Lack of reception amount of Ether frames to be loaded on TDMoP T1/E1 frames resolved

TRAP_ROUTECLR

99 cx22-mbhTrapTdmAdaptiveClockStatusChange IF Adaptive Clock status change TRAP_SYSINF

100 cx22-mbhTrapAtm155AdaptiveClockStatusChange

IF Adaptive Clock status change TRAP_SYSINF

101 cx22-mbhTrapImaGroupTrafficDown MJ IMA group traffic status DOWN detection notification

TRAP_ROUTEMJR

102 cx22-mbhTrapImaGroupTrafficDownRecover CL IMA group traffic status DOWN recovery notification

TRAP_ROUTECLR

Page 544: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Appendix

30

Specific trap

number Trap name Level Description syslog group

103 cx22-mbhTrapAtmOamStatusF1LosImmediateRecover

MN LOS immediate recovery TRAP_ROUTEMNR

104 cx22-mbhTrapAtmOamStatusF1LofImmediateRecover

MN LOF immediate recovery TRAP_ROUTEMNR

105 cx22-mbhTrapAtmOamStatusF2MsAisImmediateRecover

MN MS-AIS immediate recovery TRAP_ROUTEMNR

106 cx22-mbhTrapAtmOamStatusF2MsSdImmediateRecover

MN MS-SD immediate recovery TRAP_ROUTEMNR

107 cx22-mbhTrapAtmOamStatusF2MsRdiImmediateRecover

MN MS-RDI immediate recovery TRAP_ROUTEMNR

108 cx22-mbhTrapAtmOamStatusF2MsErrImmediateRecover

MN MS-ERR immediate recovery TRAP_ROUTEMNR

109 cx22-mbhTrapAtmOamStatusF2MsReiImmediateRecover

MN MS-REI immediate recovery TRAP_ROUTEMNR

110 cx22-mbhTrapAtmOamStatusF3LopImmediateRecover

MN LOP immediate recovery TRAP_ROUTEMNR

111 cx22-mbhTrapAtmOamStatusF3PAisImmediateRecover

MN P-AIS immediate recovery TRAP_ROUTEMNR

112 cx22-mbhTrapAtmOamStatusF3LcdImmediateRecover

MN LCD immediate recovery TRAP_ROUTEMNR

113 cx22-mbhTrapAtmLoopOverload MN Loopback cell discard notification TRAP_SYSMNR

114 cx22-mbhTrapAtmKeepaliveF4StatusChange IF F4 loopback monitoring result transition notification

TRAP_ROUTEINF

115 cx22-mbhTrapAtmKeepaliveF5StatusChange IF F5 loopback monitoring result transition notification

TRAP_ROUTEINF

116 cx22-mbhTrapCesopDeviceFaultDetect WR CESoP device fault occurred TRAP_SYSWAR

Page 545: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Appendix

31

Specific trap

number Trap name Level Description syslog group

117 cx22-mbhTrapCesopDeviceFaultRecover CL CESoP device fault recovered TRAP_SYSCLR

118 cx22-mbhTrapEtherRingStatusChange IF EtherRing transmission path state transition notification

TRAP_ROUTEINF

119 cx22-mbhTrapEtherRingDetectLoop MJ EtherRing transmission path state LOOP detection notification

TRAP_ROUTEMJR

120 cx22-mbhTrapEtherRingDetectLoopRecover CL EtherRing transmission path state LOOP recovery notification

TRAP_ROUTECLR

121 cx22-mbhTrapReferenceClockMultipleSourceChange

IF Line-independent clock reference clock state transition

TRAP_SYSINF

122 cx22-mbhTrapSystemResourceCPUStatusBusy IF CPU overload (one minute or more) TRAP_SYSINF

123 cx22-mbhTrapSystemResourceCPUStatusBusyRecover

IF CPU overload is recovered TRAP_SYSINF

Page 546: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Appendix

32

Specific trap list

No. Trap ID Output character string (Trap/syslog/local log/autonomous message)

Additional information 1

Additional information 2

Additional information 3 Description

1 13 IF TELNET LOGIN (TERMINAL:%s) Terminal IP address

telnet login

2 14 IF TELNET LOGOUT (TERMINAL:%s) Terminal IP address

telnet logout

3 15 IF TELNET ACCESS DENIED (TERMINAL:%s) Terminal IP address

telnet connection reject

4 16 IF TELNET SESSION CLEAR (TERMINAL:%s,EXECUTION TERMINAL:%s)

Terminal IP address

Clear session entry terminal address

telnet session clear

5 17 IF TELNET AUTO LOGOUT (TERMINAL:%s) Terminal IP address

telnet timeout

6 18 IF TELNET LOGIN AUTHENTICATION FAILED (TERMINAL:%s)

Terminal IP address

telnet login failure five times

7 19 IF TELNET LOGIN (TERMINAL:%s,USER:%s) Terminal IP address

telnet login (account name login)

8 20 IF TELNET LOGOUT (TERMINAL:%s,USER:%s)

Terminal IP address

Terminal login account name

telnet logout (account name login)

9 21 IF TELNET SESSION CLEAR (TERMINAL:%s,USER:%s,EXECUTION TERMINAL:%s)

Terminal IP address

Terminal login account name

telnet session clear (account name login)

10 22 IF TELNET AUTO LOGOUT (TERMINAL:%s,USER:%s)

Terminal IP address

Terminal login account name

Clear session entry terminal IP address

telnet timeout (account name login)

11 23 IF LOCAL-CONSOLE LOGIN Serial login

12 24 IF LOCAL-CONSOLE LOGOUT Serial logout

Page 547: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Appendix

33

No. Trap ID Output character string (Trap/syslog/local log/autonomous message)

Additional information 1

Additional information 2

Additional information 3 Description

13 25 IF LOCAL-CONSOLE AUTO LOGOUT Serial timeout

14 26 IF LOCAL-CONSOLE LOGIN AUTHENTICATION FAILED

Serial login failure five times

15 27 IF LOCAL-CONSOLE LOGIN (USER:%s) Terminal login account name

Serial login (account name login)

16 28 IF LOCAL-CONSOLE LOGOUT (USER:%s) Terminal login account name

Serial logout (account name login)

17 29 IF LOCAL-CONSOLE AUTO LOGOUT (USER:%s)

Terminal login account name

Serial timeout (account name login)

Primary access result

Secondary access result

NO ENTRY NO ENTRY

NO MEMORY NO MEMORY

BAD ARGUMENT BAD ARGUMENT

DEVICE ADDRESS SETTING ERROR

DEVICE ADDRESS SETTING ERROR

NO SERVER NO SERVER

SOCKET ERROR SOCKET ERROR

ADDRESS ALREADY IN USE

ADDRESS ALREADY IN USE

BIND ERROR BIND ERROR

IOCTL ERROR IOCTL ERROR

18 30 IF NTP SERVER ACCESS FAILED (PRIMARY:%s,SECONDARY:%s)

TIMER ERROR TIMER ERROR

NTP access result

Page 548: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Appendix

34

No. Trap ID Output character string (Trap/syslog/local log/autonomous message)

Additional information 1

Additional information 2

Additional information 3 Description

SIGNAL ERROR SIGNAL ERROR

SYNCHRONIZATION FAILED

SYNCHRONIZATION FAILED

OTHER ERROR OTHER ERROR

SUCCEEDED

19 31 IF NTP SERVER ACCESS SUCCEEDED NTP access result (success)

20 32 IF MESSAGE DISCARDED (CAUSE:RESOURCE BUSY)

TRAP message discard state

21 33 IF MESSAGE DISCARDED RECOVER TRAP message discard state

22 34 WR NETWORK OVERLOAD OUTBAND PORT DOWN

Blocking due to network overload (out-band)

23 36 WR NETWORK OVERLOAD INBAND PORT DOWN

Blocking due to network overload (in-band)

24 35 CL NETWORK OVERLOAD OUTBAND PORT UP Unblocking due to network overload recovery (out-band)

25 37 CL NETWORK OVERLOAD INBAND PORT UP Unblocking due to network overload recovery (in-band)

Port number Port roll state

Additional information 4

26 38 IF STP NEW ROOT BRIDGE DETECTED (/%d, STATUS:%s, BRIDGE:%s, CAUSE:%s)

New root switch detection cause

ROOT PORT

Bridge identifier

(Switch priority + MAC address)

When a new root switch is detected, the MAC address of the root switch is output as well

Page 549: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Appendix

35

No. Trap ID Output character string (Trap/syslog/local log/autonomous message)

Additional information 1

Additional information 2

Additional information 3 Description

BRIDGE INITIALIZATION

PORT PRIORITY CHANGE

BRIDGE PRIORITY CHANGE

PORT INFO AGING

SUPERIOR MESSAGE RECEIVE

PORT PATHCOST CHANGE

PORT ADMIN EDGE CHANGE

PORT DEFAULT PATH COST CHANGE

SPANTREE DISABLE

27 39 IF STP TOPOLOGY CHANGED Outputs when a network topology change is detected

STP version

STP

28 40 IF STP PROTOCOL MIGRATION (%d,VERSION:%s)

Port number

RSTP

Outputs when a port receives an STP frame from the remote side during RSTP operation

Page 550: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Appendix

36

No. Trap ID Output character string (Trap/syslog/local log/autonomous message)

Additional information 1

Additional information 2

Additional information 3 Description

Detailed cause of invalid BPDU information

PROTOCOL_ID

BPDU_TYPE

TCN_LENGTH

RST_LENGTH

CONFIG_LENGTH

MAX_AGE

FWD_DELAY

29 41 IF STP INVALID BPDU RECEIVED (%d,CAUSE:%s,DETAIL:%d)

Port number

HELLO_TIME

Detailed value of invalid BPDU information

Outputs the cause of each invalid BPDU detected on a port during STP operation

30 42 IF ALL CLEAR FDB TABLE ENTRY FINISHED Posts that all FDB table entries have been cleared in response to a request.

ACTIVE

STANDBY

DOWN

31 43 IF LAG PORT STATUS CHANGED (%d,INDEX:%d,STATUS:%s)

Port number LAG index

BLOCK

Confirmation of recovery in reception/non-reception of LAG:LACPDU

32 44 IF LAG LOOPBACK DETECTED (%d,INDEX:%d)

Port number LAG index LAG: loopback detection (supporting dot3ad/passive mode)

33 45 CR SYSTEM SOFTWARE FAULT (CATEGORY:%x,DETAIL:%x)

Fault category Detailed information

Posts that system software fault has occurred

Page 551: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Appendix

37

No. Trap ID Output character string (Trap/syslog/local log/autonomous message)

Additional information 1

Additional information 2

Additional information 3 Description

34 46 WR SYSTEM SOFTWARE FAULT (CATEGORY:%x,DETAIL:%x)

Fault category Detailed information

Posts that system software fault has occurred

35 47 CL SYSTEM SOFTWARE FAULT (CATEGORY:%x)

Fault category Detailed information

Posts that system software fault has recovered

36 48 CR SYSTEM TEMPERATURE FAULT (CATEGORY:%x,DETAIL:%x)

Fault category Detailed information

Posts that system temperature fault has occurred

37 49 WR SYSTEM TEMPERATURE FAULT (CATEGORY:%x,DETAIL:%x)

Fault category Detailed information

Posts that system temperature fault has occurred

38 50 CL SYSTEM TEMPERATURE FAULT (CATEGORY:%x)

Fault category Detailed information

Posts that system temperature fault has recovered

39 51 CR SYSTEM PROCESSOR FAULT (CATEGORY:%x,DETAIL:%x)

Fault category Detailed information

Posts that system CPU fault has occurred

40 52 MJ FAN DEVICE FAULT (FAN#%d,CATEGORY:%x,DETAIL:%x)

FAN number Fault category Detailed information

Posts that fan fault has occurred

41 53 CL FAN DEVICE FAULT (FAN#%d,CATEGORY:%x)

FAN number Fault category Posts that fan fault has recovered

42 54 CR CPUSW DEVICE FAULT (CATEGORY:%x,DETAIL:%x)

Fault category Detailed information

Posts that CPUSW card device fault has occurred

43 55 MJ CPUSW DEVICE FAULT (CATEGORY:%x,DETAIL:%x)

Fault category Detailed information

Posts that CPUSW card device fault has occurred

Page 552: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Appendix

38

No. Trap ID Output character string (Trap/syslog/local log/autonomous message)

Additional information 1

Additional information 2

Additional information 3 Description

44 57 MN CPUSW DEVICE FAULT (CATEGORY:%x,DETAIL:%x)

Fault category Detailed information

Posts that CPUSW card device fault has occurred

45 58 WR CPUSW DEVICE FAULT (CATEGORY:%x,DETAIL:%x)

Fault category Detailed information

Posts that CPUSW card device fault has occurred

46 56 CL CPUSW DEVICE FAULT (CATEGORY:%x) Fault category Posts that CPUSW card device fault has recovered

47 59 CL CPUSW DEVICE FAULT (CATEGORY:%x) Fault category Posts that CPUSW card device fault has recovered

48 60 CR LINE DEVICE FAULT (%s,CATEGORY:%x,DETAIL:%x)

LINE card number

LINE#1-2

Fault category Detailed information

Posts that LINE card device fault has occurred

49 61 MJ LINE DEVICE FAULT (%s,CATEGORY:%x,DETAIL:%x)

LINE card number

LINE#1-2

Fault category Detailed information

Posts that LINE card device fault has occurred

50 63 MN LINE DEVICE FAULT (%s,CATEGORY:%x,DETAIL:%x)

LINE card number

LINE#1-2

Fault category Detailed information

Posts that LINE card device fault has occurred

51 64 WR LINE DEVICE FAULT (%s,CATEGORY:%x,DETAIL:%x)

LINE card number

LINE#1-2

Fault category Detailed information

Posts that LINE card device fault has occurred

52 62 CL LINE DEVICE FAULT (%s,CATEGORY:%x) LINE card number

LINE#1-2

Fault category Posts that LINE card device fault has recovered

53 65 CL LINE DEVICE FAULT (%s,CATEGORY:%x) LINE card number

LINE#1-2

Fault category Posts that LINE card device fault has recovered

Page 553: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Appendix

39

No. Trap ID Output character string (Trap/syslog/local log/autonomous message)

Additional information 1

Additional information 2

Additional information 3 Description

54 66 WR EXTERNAL MEMORY DEVICE FAULT (CATEGORY:%x,DETAIL:%x)

Fault category Detailed information

Posts that external memory fault has occurred

55 67 CL EXTERNAL MEMORY DEVICE FAULT (CATEGORY:%x,DETAIL:%x)

Fault category Detailed information

Posts that external memory fault has recovered

56 68 IF CPUSW STATUS CHANGED (STATUS:%s,CAUSE:%s)

ACT

ACT-FLT

COMMAND WAS INPUTTED

RESTARTED

FAULT OCCURRED

Posts that SW module state has changed

57 69 IF FANU STATUS CHANGED (STATUS:%s, SPEED:%s)

UNMOUNT

MOUNT

NONE

HIGH

LOW

Posts that FAN unit state has changed

UNMOUNTED 58 70 IF SFP STATUS CHANGED (%d,STATUS:%s) Port number

MOUNTED

Posts that SFP module state has changed

59 71 MJ SFP RX ERROR (%d) Port number SFP optical input fault

Posts that receive optical disconnection error has occurred

60 72 CL SFP RX ERROR (%d) Port number SFP optical input fault recovery

Posts that receive optical disconnection error has recovered

61 73 MJ SFP TX ERROR (%d) Port number SFP optical output fault

Posts that transmit optical disconnection error has occurred

62 74 CL SFP TX ERROR (%d) Port number SFP optical output fault recovery

Posts that transmit optical disconnection error has recovered

Page 554: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Appendix

40

No. Trap ID Output character string (Trap/syslog/local log/autonomous message)

Additional information 1

Additional information 2

Additional information 3 Description

MEG Index MEP Index

Additional information 4

Additional information 5

63 75 MJ ETHER UNEXPECTED MEG LEVEL DETECTED (MEG INDEX:%d,MEP INDEX:%d,MEG LEVEL:%d,MEG ID:%s,MEP ID:%d)

MEG ID MEP ID

MEG Level Trap to be transmitted when MEP of EtherOAM has transited to the Unexpected MEG Level state

MEG Index MEP Index

Additional information 4

Additional information 5

64 76 CL ETHER UNEXPECTED MEG LEVEL DETECTED (MEG INDEX:%d,MEP INDEX:%d,MEG LEVEL:%d,MEG ID:%s,MEP ID:%d)

MEG ID MEP ID

MEG Level Trap to be transmitted when MEP of EtherOAM recovers from the Unexpected MEG Level state

MEG Index MEP Index

Additional information 4

Additional information 5

65 77 MJ ETHER MISMERGE DETECTED (MEG INDEX:%d,MEP INDEX:%d,MEG LEVEL:%d,MEG ID:%s,MEP ID:%d)

MEG ID MEP ID

MEG Level Trap to be transmitted when MEP of EtherOAM has transited to the Mismerge state

MEG Index MEP Index

Additional information 4

Additional information 5

66 78 CL ETHER MISMERGE DETECTED (MEG INDEX:%d,MEP INDEX:%d,MEG LEVEL:%d,MEG ID:%s,MEP ID:%d)

MEG ID MEP ID

MEG Level Trap to be transmitted when MEP of EtherOAM recovers from the Mismerge state

MEG Index MEP Index

Additional information 4

Additional information 5

67 79 MJ ETHER UNEXPECTED MEP DETECTED (MEG INDEX:%d,MEP INDEX:%d,MEG LEVEL:%d,MEG ID:%s,MEP ID:%d)

MEG ID MEP ID

MEG Level Trap to be transmitted when MEP of EtherOAM has transited to the Unexpected MEP state

MEG Index MEP Index

Additional information 4

Additional information 5

68 80 CL ETHER UNEXPECTED MEP DETECTED (MEG INDEX:%d,MEP INDEX:%d,MEG LEVEL:%d,MEG ID:%s,MEP ID:%d)

MEG ID MEP ID

MEG Level Trap to be transmitted when MEP of EtherOAM recovers from the Unexpected MEP state

Page 555: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Appendix

41

No. Trap ID Output character string (Trap/syslog/local log/autonomous message)

Additional information 1

Additional information 2

Additional information 3 Description

MEG Index MEP Index

Additional information 4

Additional information 5

69 81 MJ ETHER UNEXPECTED PERIOD DETECTED (MEG INDEX:%d,MEP INDEX:%d,MEG LEVEL:%d,MEG ID:%s,MEP ID:%d)

MEG ID MEP ID

MEG Level Trap to be transmitted when MEP of EtherOAM has transited to the Unexpected Period state

MEG Index MEP Index

Additional information 4

Additional information 5

70 82 CL ETHER UNEXPECTED PERIOD DETECTED (MEG INDEX:%d,MEP INDEX:%d,MEG LEVEL:%d,MEG ID:%s,MEP ID:%d)

MEG ID MEP ID

MEG Level Trap to be transmitted when MEP of EtherOAM recovers from the Unexpected Period state

MEG Index MEP Index MEG Level

Additional information 4

Additional information 5

Additional information 6

71 83 MJ ETHER LOC DETECTED (MEG INDEX:%d,MEP INDEX:%d,MEG LEVEL:%d,MEG ID:%s,MEP ID:%d,PEER MEP ID:%d)

MEG ID MEP ID PeerMEP ID

Trap to be transmitted when MEP of EtherOAM is transited to the LOC state

MEG Index MEP Index MEG Level

Additional information 4

Additional information 5

Additional information 6

72 84 CL ETHER LOC DETECTED (MEG INDEX:%d,MEP INDEX:%d,MEG LEVEL:%d,MEG ID:%s,MEP ID:%d,PEER MEP ID:%d)

MEG ID MEP ID PeerMEP ID

Trap to be transmitted when MEP of EtherOAM recovers from the LOC state

MEG Index MEP Index MEG Level

Additional information 4

Additional information 5

Additional information 6

73 85 MJ ETHER RDI DETECTED (MEG INDEX:%d,MEP INDEX:%d,MEG LEVEL:%d,MEG ID:%s,MEP ID:%d,PEER MEP ID:%d)

MEG ID MEP ID PeerMEP ID

Trap to be transmitted when MEP of EtherOAM is transited to the RDI state

MEG Index MEP Index MEG Level

Additional information 4

Additional information 5

Additional information 6

74 86 CL ETHER RDI DETECTED (MEG INDEX:%d,MEP INDEX:%d,MEG LEVEL:%d,MEG ID:%s,MEP ID:%d,PEER MEP ID:%d)

MEG ID MEP ID PeerMEP ID

Trap to be transmitted when MEP of EtherOAM recovers from the RDI state

Page 556: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Appendix

42

No. Trap ID Output character string (Trap/syslog/local log/autonomous message)

Additional information 1

Additional information 2

Additional information 3 Description

Clock status

NORMAL

75 87 IF REFERENCE-CLOCK CHANGED (PRIORITY:%d, STATUS:%s)

Priority

1-3

ACQUIRING

Trap to be transmitted when the reference clock has changed to an other-priority source clock

76 88 IF REFERENCE-CLOCK CHANGED (%s) STANDALONE Trap to be transmitted when the reference clock has changed to free-run state

77 89 MJ SEGMENT VP-AIS DETECTED (%d,VPC:%d)

Port number VPI value Trap to be transmitted when Segment VP-AIS is detected

78 90 CL SEGMENT VP-AIS DETECTED (%d,VPC:%d)

Port number VPI value Trap to be transmitted upon recovery from the Segment VP-AIS state

79 91 MN SEGMENT VP-AIS DETECTED (%d,VPC:%d)

Port number VPI value Trap to be transmitted when Segment VP-AIS immediate recovery is detected

80 92 MJ END-TO-END VP-AIS DETECTED (%d,VPC:%d)

Port number VPI value Trap to be transmitted when End-to-End VP-AIS is detected

81 93 CL END-TO-END VP-AIS DETECTED (%d,VPC:%d)

Port number VPI value Trap to be transmitted upon recovery from the End-to-End VP-AIS state

82 94 MN END-TO-END VP-AIS DETECTED (%d,VPC:%d)

Port number VPI value Trap to be transmitted when End-to-End VP-AIS immediate recovery is detected

Page 557: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Appendix

43

No. Trap ID Output character string (Trap/syslog/local log/autonomous message)

Additional information 1

Additional information 2

Additional information 3 Description

83 95 MJ SEGMENT VP-RDI DETECTED (%d,VPC:%d)

Port number VPI value Trap to be transmitted when Segment VP- RDI is detected

84 96 CL SEGMENT VP-RDI DETECTED (%d,VPC:%d)

Port number VPI value Trap to be transmitted upon recovery from the Segment VP-RDIstate

85 97 MN SEGMENT VP-RDI DETECTED (%d,VPC:%d)

Port number VPI value Trap to be transmitted when Segment VP-RDI immediate recovery is detected

86 98 MJ END-TO-END VP-RDI DETECTED (%d,VPC:%d)

Port number VPI value Trap to be transmitted when End-to-End VP-RDI is detected

87 99 CL END-TO-END VP-RDI DETECTED (%d,VPC:%d)

Port number VPI value Trap to be transmitted upon recovery from the End-to-End VP-RDI state

88 100 MN END-TO-END VP-RDI DETECTED (%d,VPC:%d)

Port number VPI value Trap to be transmitted when End-to-End VP-RDI immediate recovery is detected

89 101 MJ SEGMENT VC-AIS DETECTED (%d,PVC:%d/%d)

Port number VPI value VCI value Trap to be transmitted when Segment VC-AIS is detected

90 102 CL SEGMENT VC-AIS DETECTED (%d,PVC:%d/%d)

Port number VPI value VCI value Trap to be transmitted upon recovery from the Segment VC-AIS state

91 103 MN SEGMENT VC-AIS DETECTED (%d,PVC:%d/%d)

Port number VPI value VCI value Trap to be transmitted when Segment VC-AIS immediate recovery is detected

Page 558: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Appendix

44

No. Trap ID Output character string (Trap/syslog/local log/autonomous message)

Additional information 1

Additional information 2

Additional information 3 Description

92 104 MJ END-TO-END VC-AIS DETECTED (%d,PVC:%d/%d)

Port number VPI value VCI value Trap to be transmitted when End-to-End VC-AIS is detected

93 105 CL END-TO-END VC-AIS DETECTED (%d,PVC:%d/%d)

Port number VPI value VCI value Trap to be transmitted upon recovery from the End-to-End VC-AIS state

94 106 MN END-TO-END VC-AIS DETECTED (%d,PVC:%d/%d)

Port number VPI value VCI value Trap to be transmitted when End-to-End VC-AIS immediate recovery is detected

95 107 MJ SEGMENT VC-RDI DETECTED (%d,PVC:%d/%d)

Port number VPI value VCI value Trap to be transmitted when Segment VC-RDI is detected

96 108 CL SEGMENT VC-RDI DETECTED (%d,PVC:%d/%d)

Port number VPI value VCI value Trap to be transmitted upon recovery from the Segment VC-RDI state

97 109 MN SEGMENT VC-RDI DETECTED (%d,PVC:%d/%d)

Port number VPI value VCI value Trap to be transmitted when Segment VC-RDI immediate recovery is detected

98 110 MJ END-TO-END VC-RDI DETECTED (%d,PVC:%d/%d)

Port number VPI value VCI value Trap to be transmitted when End-to-End VC-RDI is detected

99 111 CL END-TO-END VC-RDI DETECTED (%d,PVC:%d/%d)

Port number VPI value VCI value Trap to be transmitted upon recovery from the End-to-End VC-RDI state

Page 559: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Appendix

45

No. Trap ID Output character string (Trap/syslog/local log/autonomous message)

Additional information 1

Additional information 2

Additional information 3 Description

100 112 MN END-TO-END VC-RDI DETECTED (%d,PVC:%d/%d)

Port number VPI value VCI value Trap to be transmitted when End-to-End VC-RDI immediate recovery is detected

101 113 MJ LOS DETECTED (%d) Port number Outputs when LOS is detected

102 114 CL LOS DETECTED (%d) Port number Outputs when LOS is recovered

103 115 MJ LOF DETECTED (%d) Port number Outputs when LOF is detected

104 116 CL LOF DETECTED (%d) Port number Outputs when LOF is recovered

105 117 MJ MS-AIS DETECTED (%d) Port number Outputs when MS-AIS is detected

106 118 CL MS-AIS DETECTED (%d) Port number Outputs when MS-AIS is recovered

107 119 MJ MS-SD DETECTED (%d) Port number Outputs when MS-SD is detected

108 120 CL MS-SD DETECTED (%d) Port number Outputs when MS-SD is recovered

109 121 MJ MS-RDI DETECTED (%d) Port number Outputs when MS-RDI is detected

110 122 CL MS-RDI DETECTED (%d) Port number Outputs when MS-RDI is recovered

111 123 MJ MS-ERR DETECTED (%d) Port number Outputs when MS- ERR is detected

112 124 CL MS-ERR DETECTED (%d) Port number Outputs when MS-ERR is recovered

Page 560: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Appendix

46

No. Trap ID Output character string (Trap/syslog/local log/autonomous message)

Additional information 1

Additional information 2

Additional information 3 Description

113 125 MJ MS-REI DETECTED (%d) Port number Outputs when MS-REI is detected

114 126 CL MS-REI DETECTED (%d) Port number Outputs when MS-REI is recovered

115 127 MJ LOP DETECTED (%d) Port number Outputs when LOP is detected

116 128 CL LOP DETECTED (%d) Port number Outputs when LOP is recovered

117 129 MJ P-AIS DETECTED (%d) Port number Outputs when P-AIS is detected

118 130 CL P-AIS DETECTED (%d) Port number Outputs when P-AIS is recovered

119 131 MJ LCD DETECTED (%d) Port number Outputs when LCD is detected

120 132 CL LCD DETECTED (%d) Port number Outputs when LCD is recovered

121 133 MJ POWER DEVICE FAULT (POWER#%d,CATEGORY:%x,DETAIL:%x)

POWER number Fault category Detailed information

Posts that POWER fault has occurred

122 134 CL POWER DEVICE FAULT (POWER#%d,CATEGORY:%x)

POWER number Fault category Posts that POWER fault has recovered

123 135 MJ LINK ALARM DETECTED (%d,STATUS:%s) Port number Line fault occurrence status (LOS/AIS/LOF/ RAI)

Outputs when line failure occurrence of is detected

124 136 CL LINK ALARM DETECTED (%d,STATUS:%s) Port number Line fault occurrence status (NORMAL)

Outputs when line failure occurrence of is recovered

Page 561: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Appendix

47

No. Trap ID Output character string (Trap/syslog/local log/autonomous message)

Additional information 1

Additional information 2

Additional information 3 Description

125 137 MJ SFP FAULT (%d,%x) Port number SFP fault Posts that SFP fault has occurred

126 138 CL SFP FAULT (%d) Port number Posts that SFP fault has recovered

127 139 MJ TDMOP BUFFER UNDERRUN DETECTED (%s,GROUP:%d)

Port number Group number Outputs when Buffer Underrun has occurred

128 140 CL TDMOP BUFFER UNDERRUN DETECTED (%s,GROUP:%d)

Port number Group number Outputs when Buffer Underrun is recovered

129 141 IF ADAPTIVE-CLOCK STATUS CHANGED (%s,GROUP:%d,STATUS:%s)

Port number Group number Adaptive Clock status (NOT-RUNNING/FREERUN/ HOLDOVER/ ACQUIRING/ ACQUIRED)

Outputs when the Adaptive Clock status has changed

130 142 IF ADAPTIVE-CLOCK STATUS CHANGED (%s,STATUS:%s)

LINE card number

LINE#1-2

Adaptive Clock status (NOT-RUNNING/FREERUN/ HOLDOVER/ ACQUIRING/ ACQUIRED)

Outputs when the Adaptive Clock status has changed

131 143 MJ IMA GROUP TRAFFIC DOWN DETECTED (INDEX:%d)

IMA group number

Outputs when IMA group traffic down has occurred

132 144 CL IMA GROUP TRAFFIC DOWN DETECTED (INDEX:%d)

IMA group number

Outputs when IMA group traffic down is recovered

133 145 MN LOS DETECTED (%d) Port number Trap to be transmitted when LOS immediate recovery is detected

Page 562: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Appendix

48

No. Trap ID Output character string (Trap/syslog/local log/autonomous message)

Additional information 1

Additional information 2

Additional information 3 Description

134 146 MN LOF DETECTED (%d) Port number Trap to be transmitted when LOF immediate recovery is detected

135 147 MN MS-AIS DETECTED (%d) Port number Trap to be transmitted when MS-AIS immediate recovery is detected

136 148 MN MS-SD DETECTED (%d) Port number Trap to be transmitted when MS-SD immediate recovery is detected

137 149 MN MS-RDI DETECTED (%d) Port number Trap to be transmitted when MS-RDI immediate recovery is detected

138 150 MN MS-ERR DETECTED (%d) Port number Trap to be transmitted when MS-ERR immediate recovery is detected

139 151 MN MS-REI DETECTED (%d) Port number Trap to be transmitted when MS-REI immediate recovery is detected

140 152 MN LOP DETECTED (%d) Port number Trap to be transmitted when LOP immediate recovery is detected

141 153 MN P-AIS DETECTED (%d) Port number Trap to be transmitted when P-AIS immediate recovery is detected

142 154 MN LCD DETECTED (%d) Port number Trap to be transmitted when LCD immediate recovery is detected

Page 563: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Appendix

49

No. Trap ID Output character string (Trap/syslog/local log/autonomous message)

Additional information 1

Additional information 2

Additional information 3 Description

143 155 MN ATM LOOPBACK CELL OVERLOAD (%s) LINE card number

LINE#1-2

Outputs when loopback cell discard has occurred

F4 loopback monitoring result

SUCCESS

144 156 IF ATM KEEPALIVE TEST STATUS CHANGED (%s,VPC:%d,%s)

Port number VPI value

FAIL

Outputs when F4 loopback monitoring result has changed

Port number VPI value VCI value

Additional information 4

F5 loopback monitoring result

SUCCESS

145 157 IF ATM KEEPALIVE TEST STATUS CHANGED (%s,PVC:%d/%d,%s)

FAIL

Outputs when F5 loopback monitoring result has changed

146 158 WR CESOP DEVICE FAULT DETECTED (%s) LINE card number

LINE#1-2

Outputs when a CESoP device fault has occurred

147 159 CL CESOP DEVICE FAULT DETECTED (%s) LINE card number

LINE#1-2

Outputs when a CESoP device fault is recovered

MEG Index MEP Index

Additional information 4

Additional information 5

148 160 MJ ETHER UNEXPECTED MEG LEVEL DETECTED (MEG INDEX:%d,MEP INDEX:%d,MEG LEVEL:%d,MEG ID:0x%x,MEP ID:%d)

MEG ID MEP ID

MEG Level Trap to be transmitted when MEP of EtherOAM has transited to the Unexpected MEG Level state

(MEG ID: Hex. display is supported)

Page 564: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Appendix

50

No. Trap ID Output character string (Trap/syslog/local log/autonomous message)

Additional information 1

Additional information 2

Additional information 3 Description

MEG Index MEP Index

Additional information 4

Additional information 5

149 161 CL ETHER UNEXPECTED MEG LEVEL DETECTED (MEG INDEX:%d,MEP INDEX:%d,MEG LEVEL:%d,MEG ID: 0x%x,MEP ID:%d)

MEG ID MEP ID

MEG Level Trap to be transmitted when MEP of EtherOAM recovers from the Unexpected MEG Level state

(MEG ID: Hex. display is supported)

MEG Index MEP Index

Additional information 4

Additional information 5

150 162 MJ ETHER MISMERGE DETECTED (MEG INDEX:%d,MEP INDEX:%d,MEG LEVEL:%d,MEG ID: 0x%x,MEP ID:%d)

MEG ID MEP ID

MEG Level Trap to be transmitted when MEP of EtherOAM has transited to the Mismerge state

(MEG ID: Hex. display is supported)

MEG Index MEP Index

Additional information 4

Additional information 5

151 163 CL ETHER MISMERGE DETECTED (MEG INDEX:%d,MEP INDEX:%d,MEG LEVEL:%d,MEG ID: 0x%x,MEP ID:%d)

MEG ID MEP ID

MEG Level Trap to be transmitted when MEP of EtherOAM recovers from the Mismerge state

(MEG ID: Hex. display is supported)

MEG Index MEP Index

Additional information 4

Additional information 5

152 164 MJ ETHER UNEXPECTED MEP DETECTED (MEG INDEX:%d,MEP INDEX:%d,MEG LEVEL:%d,MEG ID: 0x%x,MEP ID:%d)

MEG ID MEP ID

MEG Level Trap to be transmitted when MEP of EtherOAM has transited to the Unexpected MEP state

(MEG ID: Hex. display is supported)

Page 565: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Appendix

51

No. Trap ID Output character string (Trap/syslog/local log/autonomous message)

Additional information 1

Additional information 2

Additional information 3 Description

MEG Index MEP Index

Additional information 4

Additional information 5

153 165 CL ETHER UNEXPECTED MEP DETECTED (MEG INDEX:%d,MEP INDEX:%d,MEG LEVEL:%d,MEG ID: 0x%x,MEP ID:%d)

MEG ID MEP ID

MEG Level Trap to be transmitted when MEP of EtherOAM recovers from the Unexpected MEP state

(MEG ID: Hex. display is supported)

MEG Index MEP Index

Additional information 4

Additional information 5

154 166 MJ ETHER UNEXPECTED PERIOD DETECTED (MEG INDEX:%d,MEP INDEX:%d,MEG LEVEL:%d,MEG ID: 0x%x,MEP ID:%d)

MEG ID MEP ID

MEG Level Trap to be transmitted when MEP of EtherOAM has transited to the Unexpected Period state

(MEG ID: Hex. display is supported)

MEG Index MEP Index

Additional information 4

Additional information 5

155 167 CL ETHER UNEXPECTED PERIOD DETECTED (MEG INDEX:%d,MEP INDEX:%d,MEG LEVEL:%d,MEG ID: 0x%x,MEP ID:%d)

MEG ID MEP ID

MEG Level Trap to be transmitted when MEP of EtherOAM recovers from the Unexpected Period state

(MEG ID: Hex. display is supported)

MEG Index MEP Index MEG Level

Additional information 4

Additional information 5

Additional information 6

156 168 MJ ETHER LOC DETECTED (MEG INDEX:%d,MEP INDEX:%d,MEG LEVEL:%d,MEG ID: 0x%x,MEP ID:%d,PEER MEP ID:%d)

MEG ID MEP ID PeerMEP ID

Trap to be transmitted when MEP of EtherOAM has transited to the LOC state

(MEG ID: Hex. display is supported)

MEG Index MEP Index MEG Level

Additional information 4

Additional information 5

Additional information 6

157 169 CL ETHER LOC DETECTED (MEG INDEX:%d,MEP INDEX:%d,MEG LEVEL:%d,MEG ID: 0x%x,MEP ID:%d,PEER MEP ID:%d)

MEG ID MEP ID PeerMEP ID

Trap to be transmitted when MEP of EtherOAM recovers from the LOC state

(MEG ID: Hex. display is supported)

Page 566: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Appendix

52

No. Trap ID Output character string (Trap/syslog/local log/autonomous message)

Additional information 1

Additional information 2

Additional information 3 Description

MEG Index MEP Index MEG Level

Additional information 4

Additional information 5

Additional information 6

158 170 MJ ETHER RDI DETECTED (MEG INDEX:%d,MEP INDEX:%d,MEG LEVEL:%d,MEG ID: 0x%x,MEP ID:%d,PEER MEP ID:%d)

MEG ID MEP ID PeerMEP ID

Trap to be transmitted when MEP of EtherOAM has transited to the RDI state

(MEG ID: Hex. display is supported)

MEG Index MEP Index MEG Level

Additional information 4

Additional information 5

Additional information 6

159 171 CL ETHER RDI DETECTED (MEG INDEX:%d,MEP INDEX:%d,MEG LEVEL:%d,MEG ID: 0x%x,MEP ID:%d,PEER MEP ID:%d)

MEG ID MEP ID PeerMEP ID

Trap to be transmitted when MEP of EtherOAM recovers from the RDI state

(MEG ID: Hex. display is supported)

Port state

RPL-BLOCK

FORWARD

SIGNAL-FAIL

RECOVERY

Ring index number

Port number

WAIT-TO-RESTORE

Additional information 4

Additional information 5

Node state MEP ID

IDLE LOCAL-NR

PROTECTION LOCAL-SF

REMOTE-NR

160 172 IF ETHER RING STATUS CHANGED (INDEX:%d,PORT#%d,PORT STATUS:%s,NODE STATUS:%s,REQUEST:%s)

REMOTE-SF

Outputs when either the port state or node state of the port used by the port has transited

Page 567: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Appendix

53

No. Trap ID Output character string (Trap/syslog/local log/autonomous message)

Additional information 1

Additional information 2

Additional information 3 Description

161 173 MJ ETHER RING LOOP DETECTED (PORT#%d)

Port number Outputs when the loop state of the control frame has occurred in the port used by the ring

162 174 CL ETHER RING LOOP DETECTED (PORT#%d)

Port number Outputs when the loop state of the control frame is recovered in the port used by the ring

163 175 IF REFERENCE-CLOCK MULTIPLE-SOURCE STATUS CHANGED (GROUP:%d,STATUS:%s)

Reference clock group number

Clock state

FAIL

NORMAL

ACQUIRING

Trap to be transmitted when the reference clock state of a line-independent clock has transited

164 176 IF TELNET SESSION CLEAR (SYSTEM STATUS CHANGED) (TERMINAL:%s)

Terminal IP address

Telnet session deletion due to unit status change

165 177 IF TELNET SESSION CLEAR (SYSTEM STATUS CHANGED) (TERMINAL:%s,USER:%s)

Terminal IP address

Terminal login account name

Telnet session deletion due to unit status change (account name login)

166 178 IF CPU RESOURCE BUSY (DETAIL:%x) Detailed information

CPU overload (one minute or more)

167 179 IF CPU RESOURCE BUSY RECOVER CPU overload is recovered

Page 568: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Appendix

54

Standard trap list

Trap ID

Standard trap MIB

Output character string (Trap/syslog/local log/autonomous

message)

Additional information 1

Additional information 2

Additional information 3 Description

Restart cause

POWER-ON RESET

COMMAND RESET

1 coldStart IF DEFAULT CONFIG BOOT UP (CAUSE:%s)

PROCESSOR FAILURE

Completion of restart by default config

(When default config is used, SNMP is not set. So, coldStart-Trap is not issued with this device.)

Restart cause Target of recover config

POWER-ON RESET

STARTUP CONFIG

COMMAND RESET

EMERGENCY CONFIG

2 warmStart IF RECOVER CONFIG BOOT UP (CAUSE:%s,BOOT:%s)

PROCESSOR FAILURE

PART OF STARTUP CONFIG

Completion of restart by recover config

3 linkDown MJ LINK DOWN (%d) Port number Port Link Down

4 linkUp CL LINK UP 10M HALF DUPLEX (%d) Port number Port Link Up

5 linkUp CL LINK UP 10M FULL DUPLEX (%d) Port number Port Link Up

6 linkUp CL LINK UP 100M HALF DUPLEX (%d) Port number Port Link Up

7 linkUp CL LINK UP 100M FULL DUPLEX (%d) Port number Port Link Up

8 linkUp CL LINK UP 1000M FULL DUPLEX (%d) Port number Port Link Up

9 linkUp CL LINK UP 155M (%d) Port number Port Link Up

Page 569: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Appendix

55

Trap ID

Standard trap MIB

Output character string (Trap/syslog/local log/autonomous

message)

Additional information 1

Additional information 2

Additional information 3 Description

10 linkUp CL LINK UP T1 1.5M (%d) Port number Port Link Up

11 linkUp CL LINK UP E1 2.048M (%d) Port number Port Link Up

12 authenticationFailure

- Access from an unauthorized manager

(Only the SNMP trap is issued.)

Page 570: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Appendix

56

Group correspondence table for each specific trap

No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Trap-ID 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22

Specific trap number 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

private-trap 1-999

trap-id 1-999

port 1-26

link 1-26

fault critical

major

minor

warning

sfp -

ntp -

telnet connect

fail

maintenance-network out-band

in-band

spantree -

fdb -

aggregation -

atm-oam detect-f1f3

detect-f4f5

detect-minor

ether-oam unexpect-level

mismerge

unexpect-mep

unexpect-period

loc

rdi

t1e1 -

tdmop -

ima -

loopback-atm -

ether-ring -

* The numbers in the "No." row match those on the specific trap list.

Page 571: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Appendix

57

No. 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

Trap-ID 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32

Specific trap number 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 3

private-trap 1-999

trap-id 1-999

port 1-26

link 1-26

fault critical

major

minor

warning

sfp -

ntp -

telnet connect

fail

maintenance-network out-band

in-band

spantree -

fdb -

aggregation -

atm-oam detect-f1f3

detect-f4f5

detect-minor

ether-oam unexpect-level

mismerge

unexpect-mep

unexpect-period

loc

rdi

t1e1 -

tdmop -

ima -

loopback-atm -

ether-ring -

* The numbers in the "No." row match those on the specific trap list.

Page 572: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Appendix

58

No. 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30

Trap-ID 33 34 36 35 37 38 39 40 41 42

Specific trap number 3 4 4 5 5 6 7 8 9 10

private-trap 1-999

trap-id 1-999

port 1-26

link 1-26

fault critical

major

minor

warning

sfp -

ntp -

telnet connect

fail

maintenance-network out-band

in-band

spantree -

fdb -

atm-oam detect-f1f3

detect-f4f5

detect-minor

ether-oam unexpect-level

mismerge

unexpect-mep

unexpect-period

loc

rdi

t1e1 -

tdmop -

ima -

loopback-atm -

ether-ring -

* The numbers in the "No." row match those on the specific trap list.

Page 573: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Appendix

59

No. 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40

Trap-ID 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52

Specific trap number 11 12 13 13 14 15 15 16 17 18

private-trap 1-999

trap-id 1-999

port 1-26

link 1-26

fault critical

major

minor

warning

sfp -

ntp -

telnet connect

fail

maintenance-network out-band

in-band

spantree -

fdb -

aggregation -

atm-oam detect-f1f3

detect-f4f5

detect-minor

ether-oam unexpect-level

mismerge

unexpect-mep

unexpect-period

loc

rdi

t1e1 -

tdmop -

ima -

loopback-atm -

ether-ring -

* The numbers in the "No." row match those on the specific trap list.

Page 574: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Appendix

60

No. 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50

Trap-ID 53 54 55 57 58 56 59 60 61 63

Specific trap number 19 20 20 20 20 21 21 22 22 22

private-trap 1-999

trap-id 1-999

port 1-26

link 1-26

fault critical

major

minor

warning

sfp -

ntp -

telnet connect

fail

maintenance-network out-band

in-band

spantree -

fdb -

aggregation -

atm-oam detect-f1f3

detect-f4f5

detect-minor

ether-oam unexpect-level

mismerge

unexpect-mep

unexpect-period

loc

rdi

t1e1 -

tdmop -

ima -

loopback-atm -

ether-ring -

* The numbers in the "No." row match those on the specific trap list.

Page 575: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Appendix

61

No. 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60

Trap-ID 64 62 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72

Specific trap number 22 23 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30

private-trap 1-999

trap-id 1-999

port 1-26

link 1-26

fault critical

major

minor

warning

sfp -

ntp -

telnet connect

fail

maintenance-network out-band

in-band

spantree -

fdb -

aggregation -

atm-oam detect-f1f3

detect-f4f5

detect-minor

ether-oam unexpect-level

mismerge

unexpect-mep

unexpect-period

loc

rdi

t1e1 -

tdmop -

ima -

loopback-atm -

ether-ring -

* The numbers in the "No." row match those on the specific trap list.

Page 576: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Appendix

62

No. 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70

Trap-ID 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82

Specific trap number 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40

private-trap 1-999

trap-id 1-999

port 1-26

link 1-26

fault critical

major

minor

warning

sfp -

ntp -

telnet connect

fail

maintenance-network out-band

in-band

spantree -

fdb -

aggregation -

atm-oam detect-f1f3

detect-f4f5

detect-minor

ether-oam unexpect-level

mismerge

unexpect-mep

unexpect-period

loc

rdi

t1e1 -

tdmop -

ima -

loopback-atm -

ether-ring -

* The numbers in the "No." row match those on the specific trap list.

Page 577: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Appendix

63

No. 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80

Trap-ID 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92

Specific trap number 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50

private-trap 1-999

trap-id 1-999

port 1-26

link 1-26

fault critical

major

minor

warning

sfp -

ntp -

telnet connect

fail

maintenance-network out-band

in-band

spantree -

fdb -

aggregation -

atm-oam detect-f1f3

detect-f4f5

detect-minor

ether-oam unexpect-level

mismerge

unexpect-mep

unexpect-period

loc

rdi

t1e1 -

tdmop -

ima -

loopback-atm -

ether-ring -

* The numbers in the "No." row match those on the specific trap list.

Page 578: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Appendix

64

No. 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90

Trap-ID 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102

Specific trap number 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60

private-trap 1-999

trap-id 1-999

port 1-26

link 1-26

fault critical

major

minor

warning

sfp -

ntp -

telnet connect

fail

maintenance-network out-band

in-band

spantree -

fdb -

aggregation -

atm-oam detect-f1f3

detect-f4f5

detect-minor

ether-oam unexpect-level

mismerge

unexpect-mep

unexpect-period

loc

rdi

t1e1 -

tdmop -

ima -

loopback-atm -

ether-ring -

* The numbers in the "No." row match those on the specific trap list.

Page 579: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Appendix

65

No. 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100

Trap-ID 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112

Specific trap number 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70

private-trap 1-999

trap-id 1-999

port 1-26

link 1-26

fault critical

major

minor

warning

sfp -

ntp -

telnet connect

fail

maintenance-network out-band

in-band

spantree -

fdb -

aggregation -

atm-oam detect-f1f3

detect-f4f5

detect-minor

ether-oam unexpect-level

mismerge

unexpect-mep

unexpect-period

loc

rdi

t1e1 -

tdmop -

ima -

loopback-atm -

ether-ring -

* The numbers in the "No." row match those on the specific trap list.

Page 580: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Appendix

66

No. 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110

Trap-ID 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122

Specific trap number 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80

private-trap 1-999

trap-id 1-999

port 1-26

link 1-26

fault critical

major

minor

warning

sfp -

ntp -

telnet connect

fail

maintenance-network out-band

in-band

spantree -

fdb -

aggregation -

atm-oam detect-f1f3

detect-f4f5

detect-minor

ether-oam unexpect-level

mismerge

unexpect-mep

unexpect-period

loc

rdi

t1e1 -

tdmop -

ima -

loopback-atm -

ether-ring -

* The numbers in the "No." row match those on the specific trap list.

Page 581: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Appendix

67

No. 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120

Trap-ID 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132

Specific trap number 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90

private-trap 1-999

trap-id 1-999

port 1-26

link 1-26

fault critical

major

minor

warning

sfp -

ntp -

telnet connect

fail

maintenance-network out-band

in-band

spantree -

fdb -

aggregation -

atm-oam detect-f1f3

detect-f4f5

detect-minor

ether-oam unexpect-level

mismerge

unexpect-mep

unexpect-period

loc

rdi

t1e1 -

tdmop -

ima -

loopback-atm -

ether-ring -

* The numbers in the "No." row match those on the specific trap list.

Page 582: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Appendix

68

No. 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130

Trap-ID 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142

Specific trap number 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100

private-trap 1-999

trap-id 1-999

port 1-26

link 1-26

fault critical

major

minor

warning

sfp -

ntp -

telnet connect

fail

maintenance-network out-band

in-band

spantree -

fdb -

aggregation -

atm-oam detect-f1f3

detect-f4f5

detect-minor

ether-oam unexpect-level

mismerge

unexpect-mep

unexpect-period

loc

rdi

t1e1 -

tdmop -

ima -

loopback-atm -

ether-ring -

* The numbers in the "No." row match those on the specific trap list.

Page 583: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Appendix

69

No. 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140

Trap-ID 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152

Specific trap number 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110

private-trap 1-999

trap-id 1-999

port 1-26

link 1-26

fault critical

major

minor

warning

sfp -

ntp -

telnet connect

fail

maintenance-network out-band

in-band

spantree -

fdb -

aggregation -

atm-oam detect-f1f3

detect-f4f5

detect-minor

ether-oam unexpect-level

mismerge

unexpect-mep

unexpect-period

loc

rdi

t1e1 -

tdmop -

ima -

loopback-atm -

ether-ring -

* The numbers in the "No." row match those on the specific trap list.

Page 584: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Appendix

70

No. 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150

Trap-ID 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162

Specific trap number 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 33 34 35

private-trap 1-999

trap-id 1-999

port 1-26

link 1-26

fault critical

major

minor

warning

sfp -

ntp -

telnet connect

fail

maintenance-network out-band

in-band

spantree -

fdb -

aggregation -

atm-oam detect-f1f3

detect-f4f5

detect-minor

ether-oam unexpect-level

mismerge

unexpect-mep

unexpect-period

loc

rdi

t1e1 -

tdmop -

ima -

loopback-atm -

ether-ring -

* The numbers in the "No." row match those on the specific trap list.

Page 585: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Appendix

71

No. 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160

Trap-ID 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172

Specific trap number 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 118

private-trap 1-999

trap-id 1-999

port 1-26

link 1-26

fault critical

major

minor

warning

sfp -

ntp -

telnet connect

fail

maintenance-network out-band

in-band

spantree -

fdb -

aggregation -

atm-oam detect-f1f3

detect-f4f5

detect-minor

ether-oam unexpect-level

mismerge

unexpect-mep

unexpect-period

loc

rdi

t1e1 -

tdmop -

ima -

loopback-atm -

ether-ring -

* The numbers in the "No." row match those on the specific trap list.

Page 586: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Appendix

72

No. 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170

Trap-ID 173 174 175 176 177

Specific trap number 119 120 121 1 1

private-trap 1-999

trap-id 1-999

port 1-26

link 1-26

fault critical

major

minor

warning

sfp -

ntp -

telnet connect

fail

maintenance-network out-band

in-band

spantree -

fdb -

aggregation -

atm-oam detect-f1f3

detect-f4f5

detect-minor

ether-oam unexpect-level

mismerge

unexpect-mep

unexpect-period

loc

rdi

t1e1 -

tdmop -

ima -

loopback-atm -

ether-ring -

* The numbers in the "No." row match those on the specific trap list.

Page 587: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Appendix

73

Group correspondence table for each standard trap

No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Trap-ID 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

private-trap 1-999

trap-id 1-999

port 1-26

link 1-26

fault critical

major

minor

warning

sfp -

ntp -

telnet connect

fail

maintenance-network out-band

in-band

spantree -

fdb -

ether-oam unexpect-level

mismerge

unexpect-mep

unexpect-period

loc

rdi

t1e1 -

tdmop -

ima -

loopback-atm -

ether-ring -

* The numbers in the "No." row match those on the standard trap list.

Page 588: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Appendix

74

No. 11 12

Trap-ID 11 12

private-trap 1-999

trap-id 1-999

port 1-26

link 1-26

fault critical

major

minor

warning

sfp -

ntp -

telnet connect

fail

maintenance-network out-band

in-band

spantree -

fdb -

ether-oam unexpect-level

mismerge

unexpect-mep

unexpect-period

loc

rdi

t1e1 -

tdmop -

ima -

loopback-atm -

ether-ring -

* The numbers in the "No." row match those on the standard trap list.

Page 589: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Appendix

75

5 Counter Monitoring Condition List Port counter collection details

The port counters collect the following counter information:

Type: Indicates the type of a counter.

Octs/Pkts/Events: Indicates whether the unit of a counter is the number of octets (O), the number of frames (F), or the number of event occurrences (Ev).

Bit width: Indicates the bit width of a counter.

Error: Indicates whether error octets/frames are included in a counter value. ("E" is indicated when error octets/frames are included.)

Function details: Indicates the function details of a counter.

Collection port counter

Type Octs / Pkts /

Events Bit width Error

Function details

RxOctets O 64bit E Number of receive octets

RxPkts F 32bit E Number of receive frames

RxDropEvents Ev 32bit Number of discard event occurrences (*)

RxErrors F 32bit E Number of receive error frames

RxUndersizePkts F 32bit Number of receive frames with data consisting of less than 64 octets

RxFragments F 32bit E Number of receive error frames with data consisting of less than 64 octets

Rx64octs F 32bit E Number of receive frames with data consisting of 64 octets

Page 590: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Appendix

76

Collection port counter

Type Octs / Pkts /

Events Bit width Error

Function details

Rx65to127octs F 32bit E Number of receive frames with data consisting of 65 to 127 octets

Rx128to255octs F 32bit E Number of receive frames with data consisting of 128 to 255 octets

Rx256to511octs F 32bit E Number of receive frames with data consisting of 256 to 511 octets

Rx512to1023octs F 32bit E Number of receive frames with data consisting of 512 to 1023 octets

Rx1024to1518octs F 32bit E Number of receive frames with data consisting of 1024 to 1518 octets

RxCRCErrors F 32bit E Number of receive frames including an alignment/FCS error

RxOversizePkts F 32bit Number of receive frames with data consisting of 1519 octets or more, number of error frames

RxJabbers F 32bit E Number of receive error frames with data consisting of 1519 octets or more

RxUcastPkts F 64bit Number of receive unicast frames

RxMcastPkts F 64bit Number of receive multicast frames

RxBcastPkts F 64bit Number of receive broadcast frames

RxUnsupp F 32bit Number of unsupported frames received and discarded

RxDiscards F 32bit Number of frames discarded for a cause other than a receive error

TxOctets O 64bit Number of transmit octets

TxPkts F 32bit E Number of transmit frames

TxErrors F 32bit E Number of transmit error frames

TxCollisions F 32bit Number of collision frames at transmission time (*)

TxUcastPkts F 64bit E Number of transmit unicast frames

TxMcastPkts F 64bit E Number of transmit multicast frames

TxBcastPkts F 64bit E Number of transmit broadcast frames

Page 591: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Appendix

77

Collection port counter

Type Octs / Pkts /

Events Bit width Error

Function details

TxUnsupp F 32bit Number of unsupported transmit frames discarded

TxDiscards F 32bit Number of frames discarded for a cause other than a transmit error

* Always displayed as "0" if the display is enabled.

Page 592: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Appendix

78

Discard counter collection details

The discard counters collect the following counter information:

Type: Indicates the type of a counter.

Octs/Pkts: Indicates whether the unit of a counter is the number of octets (O) or the number of frames (F).

Bit width: Indicates the bit width of a counter.

Error: Indicates whether error octets/frames are included in a counter value. ("E" is indicated when error octets/frames are included.)

Priority unit: Indicates whether priority unit indication is supported. ("P" is indicated when priority unit indication is supported.)

Function details: Indicates the function details of a counter.

Collection discard counter

Type Octs / Pkts

Bit width Error Priority

unit Function details

RxUnknownTPID F 32bit Number of unsupported TPID receive frames discarded or receive frames of Ethertype 0x8100 at a portbase Untag setting port that are discarded (*1)

RxUnknownVID F 32bit Number of unsupported VID frames received and discarded (*1)

TxUnknownTPID F 32bit Number of unsupported TPID transmit frames discarded or transmit frames of Ethertype 0x8100 at a portbase Untag setting port that are discarded (*2)

RxDisInQoSPkts F 32bit Number of receive frames discarded by the maximum bandwidth limit function for input ports (*3)

RxFilterPkts F 32bit Number of receive frames discarded by the input filtering function (*3)

TxDisOutQoSPkts F 32bit Number of transmit frames discarded by the maximum bandwidth limit function for output ports

Page 593: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Appendix

79

Collection discard counter

Type Octs / Pkts

Bit width Error Priority

unit Function details

RxDropPkts F 32bit Number of received frames discarded by the L2SW as invalid frames or number of received frames discarded with the following cases (*3):

- The case that transfer destination ports (including mirroring output destination ports) do not exist

- The case that RPL Owner receives R-APS control frames regularly with the EtherRing function or the case that the switching of the EtherRing function occurs at an RL port

TxDropPkts F 32bit Number of transmit frames discarded by L2SW before accumulated in transmit queue (*4)

TxQueue0DisPkts F 32bit Number of transmit frames with no class discarded by L2SW (*4)

TxQueue1DisPkts F 32bit Number of transmit frames of Class-D discarded by L2SW (*4)

TxQueue2DisPkts F 32bit Number of transmit frames of Class-C discarded by L2SW (*4)

TxQueue3DisPkts F 32bit Number of transmit frames of Class-B discarded by L2SW (*4)

TxQueue4DisPkts F 32bit Number of transmit frames of Class-A discarded by L2SW (*4)

TxQueue5DisPkts F 32bit Number of control frame transmit frames from the CPU that are discarded by L2SW (*4)

*1 Counter included in "RxUnsupp" indicated in the port counter collection details

*2 Counter included in "TxUnsupp" indicated in the port counter collection details

*3 Counter included in "RxDiscards" indicated in the port counter collection details

*4 Counter included in "TxDiscards" indicated in the port counter collection details

Page 594: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Appendix

80

VLAN counter collection details

The VLAN counters collect the following counter information:

Type: Indicates the type of a counter.

Octs/Pkts: Indicates whether the unit of a counter is the number of octets (O) or the number of frames (F).

Bit width: Indicates the bit width of a counter.

Error: Indicates whether error octets/frames are included in a counter value. ("E" is indicated when error octets/frames are included.)

Priority unit: Indicates whether priority unit indication is supported. ("P" is indicated when priority unit indication is supported.)

Function details: Indicates the function details of a counter.

Collection VLAN counter

Type Octs / Pkts

Bit width Error Priority

Unit Function details

RxOcts O 64bit P Number of receive octets

RxUcastOcts O 64bit P Number of receive unicast octets

RxMcastOcts O 64bit P Number of receive multicast octets

RxBcastOcts O 64bit P Number of receive broadcast octets

RxDisInQoSOcts O 64bit P Number of receive octets discarded by the maximum bandwidth limit function for input ports (*)

RxPkts F 24bit P Number of receive frames

RxUcastPkts F 64bit P Number of receive unicast frames

RxMcastPkts F 64bit P Number of receive multicast frames

RxBcastPkts F 64bit P Number of receive broadcast frames

Page 595: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Appendix

81

Collection VLAN counter

Type Octs / Pkts

Bit width Error Priority

Unit Function details

RxDisInQoSPkts F 64bit P Number of receive frames discarded by the maximum bandwidth limit function for input ports (*)

TxOcts O 64bit P Number of transmit octets

TxUcastOcts O 64bit P Number of transmit unicast octets

TxMcastOcts O 64bit P Number of transmit multicast octets

TxBcastOcts O 64bit P Number of transmit broadcast octets

TxPkts F 64bit P Number of transmit frames

TxUcastPkts F 64bit P Number of transmit unicast frames

TxMcastPkts F 64bit P Number of transmit multicast frames

TxBcastPkts F 64bit P Number of transmit broadcast frames

* Always displayed as "0" if the FE port display is enabled.

Page 596: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Appendix

82

Cell counter collection details

The cell counters collect the following counter information:

Type: Indicates the type of a counter.

Bit width: Indicates the bit width of a counter.

Interval: Indicates a counter collection interval. When no collection operation is performed, "-" is indicated.

Function details: Indicates the function details of a counter.

Collection cell counter

Type Bit width Interval Function details

RxCells 64bit 1sec Number of receive cells

RxErrors 64bit 1sec Number of cells discarded for reception error

RxQoSDiscards 64bit - Number of cells discarded for reception shaper

RxF4SegAIS 64bit 5sec Receive segment VP-AIS cell

RxF4SegRDI 64bit 5sec Receive segment VP-RDI cell

RxF4SegLoopback 64bit 5sec Receive F4 level segment loopback cell

RxF4SegOthers 64bit 5sec Receive F4 level segment other cell

RxF4EndAIS 64bit 5sec Receive end VP-AIS cell

RxF4EndRDI 64bit 5sec Receive end VP- RDI cell

RxF4EndLoopback 64bit 5sec Receive F4 level end loopback cell

RxF4EndOthers 64bit 5sec Receive F4 level end other cell

RxF5SegAIS 64bit 5sec Receive segment VC-AIS cell

RxF5SegRDI 64bit 5sec Receive segment VC-RDI cell

RxF5SegLoopback 64bit 5sec Receive F5 level segment loopback cell

Page 597: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Appendix

83

Collection cell counter

Type Bit width Interval Function details

RxF5SegOthers 64bit 5sec Receive F5 level segment other cell

RxF5EndAIS 64bit 5sec Receive end VC-AIS cell

RxF5EndRDI 64bit 5sec Receive end VC-RDI cell

RxF5EndLoopback 64bit 5sec Receive F5 level end loopback cell

RxF5EndOthers 64bit 5sec Receive F5 level end other cell

TxCells 64bit 1sec Number of transmit cells

TxErrors 64bit - Number of cells discarded for transmission error

TxQoSDiscards 64bit 1sec Number of cells discarded for transmission shaper

TxF4SegAIS 64bit 5sec Transmit segment VP-AIS cell

TxF4SegRDI 64bit 5sec Transmit segment VP-RDI cell

TxF4SegLoopback 64bit 5sec Transmit F4 level segment loopback cell

TxF4SegOthers 64bit 5sec Receive F4 level segment other cell

TxF4EndAIS 64bit 5sec Transmit end VP-AIS cell

TxF4EndRDI 64bit 5sec Transmit end VP-RDI cell

TxF4EndLoopback 64bit 5sec Transmit VP-loopback cell-end

TxF4EndOthers 64bit 5sec Transmit F4 level end other cell

TxF5SegAIS 64bit 5sec Transmit segment VC-AIS cell

TxF5SegRDI 64bit 5sec Transmit segment VC-RDI cell

TxF5SegLoopback 64bit 5sec Transmit F5 level segment loopback cell

TxF5SegOthers 64bit 5sec Transmit F5 level segment other cell

TxF5EndAIS 64bit 5sec Transmit end VC-AIS cell

TxF5EndRDI 64bit 5sec Transmit end VC-RDI cell

Page 598: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Appendix

84

Collection cell counter

Type Bit width Interval Function details

TxF5EndLoopback 64bit 5sec Transmit F5 level end loopback cell

TxF5EndOthers 64bit 5sec Transmit F5 level end other cell

* When an OAM counter is used, a PVC for the OAM counter must be registered.

Page 599: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Appendix

85

Line quality counter collection details

The line quality counters collect the following counter information:

Type: Indicates the type of a counter.

Bit width: Indicates the bit width of a counter.

Function details: Indicates the function details of a counter.

Collection line quality counter

Type Bit width Function details

Section BIP-8 16bit Number of BIP-8 detection for relay section errors in the section overhead (*1)

Line BIP-24 20bit Number of BIP-24 detection for section errors in the section overhead (*1)

Line FEBE 20bit Number of line level far end block errors detected (*1)

Path BIP-8 16bit Number of BIP-8 detection for path errors in the path overhead (*1)

Path FEBE 16bit Number of path level far end block errors detected (*1)

FER 7bit Number of framing bit errors detected (*2)

OOF/FEBE 10bit

OOF: Number of out of frame errors detected (T1 mode)

FEBE: Number of far end block errors detected (E1 mode) (*2)

Bit/CRC Error 10bit

Bit Error: Number of bit errors detected (T1 mode)

CRC Error: Number of cyclic redundancy check errors detected (E1 mode) (*2)

LCV Error 13bit Number of LineCode violation errors detected (*2)

*1 When a 1ATM155A line card is mounted

*2 When a 32T1E1H/32T1E1T card is mounted (If the frame format is "Unframed", only LCV Errors are counted.)

Page 600: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Appendix

86

Details of EtherOAM frame counter collection

The EtherOAM frame counter collects the information of the following counters.

Type: Displays the counter type.

Bit width: Displays the counter bit width.

Function details: Displays the function details of the counter.

Collected counter

Type Bit width Function details

RxPkts 32bit Number of frames received

TxPkts 32bit Number of frames transmitted

Page 601: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Appendix

87

6 Command Error List This section describes the indications and causes of command execution errors together with corrective actions required for those errors.

No. Indication Cause Corrective action

00002 Invalid parameter %s The specified parameter is invalid. Check the input command then reenter the command.

00003 Invalid parameter %s : %s The specified parameter is invalid. (A reason is provided.)

Check the input command then reenter the command.

00004 Specified %s has already been registered. The setting has already been registered. Check the state of setting.

00005 %s is not registered. The setting is not registered yet. Check the state of setting.

00006 Invalid number of parameters There is an excess/shortage in the parameters needed for processing.

Check the specified parameters then reenter the command.

00007 Specified %s is being used by %s. The specified device is being used by another interface, protocol, or the like.

Check the device state.

00008 Too many %s entries There are too many registered entries. Check the state of setting.

00009 %s does not exist. The indicated item is missing. Check the device state.

00010 Non-supported parameter %s. The parameter is not supported. Check the specified parameter then reenter the command.

00011 Command forcibly stopped. The command was terminated forcibly. Reenter the command after a while.

00012 Command conflict occurred. A command conflict occurred. Reenter the command after a while.

00013 %s is already in service. Service is in progress. Check the device state.

00014 %s is already out of service. Service is stopped. Check the device state.

00015 %s start-up failed. Service activation failed. Reenter the command after a while.

00016 Already %s The indicated state is already set. Check the device state.

Page 602: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Appendix

88

No. Indication Cause Corrective action

00017 The line card required for the command execution is not installed.

The line card required for the command execution is not mounted.

Check the line card mounted to the device and the command specification.

00018 Device failure A device fault occurred. Check the device state.

00019 Resource temporarily unavailable Resources for command execution are insufficient.

Reenter the command after a while.

00020 Resource temporarily unavailable %s %s %s %s %s

Resources for command execution are insufficient (with additional information).

Reenter the command after a while.

00021 %s failed. An attempt for the indicated operation failed. Reenter the command after a while.

00023 Non-supported command This command is not supported presently. This command is reserved for a future function. This command cannot be used presently.

00024 The reading of %s went wrong. The reading of the operation data failed. Reenter the command after a while.

00025 The writing of %s went wrong. The setting of the operation data failed. Reenter the command after a while.

00026 Timeout occurred during command execution. A time-out occurred during command execution.

Check the device state.

00027 Data communication error An internal communication error occurred. Reenter the command after a while.

00028 Because %s has already been registered, %s cannot be enabled. %s

The indicated item has already been registered, so that it cannot be enabled.

Check the state of setting.

00029 Because %s has already been registered, %s cannot be disabled. %s

The indicated item has already been registered, so that it cannot be disabled.

Check the state of setting.

00030 Because %s has already been registered, %s cannot be changed. %s

The indicated item has already been registered, so that it cannot be changed.

Check the state of setting.

00031 Because %s has not been registered, %s cannot be changed. %s

The indicated item has not been registered, so that it cannot be changed.

Check the state of setting.

00032 %s cannot be changed. %s The indicated item cannot be changed. Check the state of setting.

00033 Specified %s is invalid %s. %s An invalid parameter was set. Check the state of setting.

00034 Command not found. An invalid command was entered. Enter the correct command.

00035 Parameter is invalid. An invalid parameter was entered. Enter the correct parameter.

Page 603: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Appendix

89

No. Indication Cause Corrective action

00036 Buffer temporarily busy Resources for command analysis are insufficient.

Reenter the command after a while.

00037 Specified command conflicted : %s A contention occurred. "%s" processing is being executed.

Reexecute after a while.

00041 The complemented command line is over 600 characters.

A command entered in the complemented command line is longer than 600 characters.

Divide the command into multiple commands so that the command line is not exceeded.

00042 The total size of the specified VPI and VCI is over 16 bits.

The total size of the specified VPI and VCI is longer than 16 bits.

Check the specified VPI and VCI then register the VPI and VCI again.

00054 The specified command cannot be executed in the present port mode.

The specified command cannot be executed in the current port mode.

Check the state of the port mode setting.

00055 VPI registered with VP connection cannot be specified with F5 setting.

VPI registered with VP connection cannot be specified with F5 setting.

Specify PVC connection with F4 setting.

00056 VPI registered with VC connection cannot be specified with F4 setting.

VPI registered with VC connection cannot be specified with F4 setting.

Specify PVC connection with F5 setting.

00057 Invalid parameter is specified for VPI that is registered with VP connection.

Invalid parameter is specified for VPI that is registered with VP connection.

Check the entered command line.

00058 PVC name registered for VP connection cannot be specified.

PVC name for the VP connection cannot be specified.

Specify with F5 setting.

00060 PVC name registered for VC connection cannot be specified.

PVC name for the VC connection cannot be specified.

Specify with F4 setting.

00063 Number of entries exceeds the limit. Please limit the entries to a maximum of %s per system.

The number of entries exceeds the limit that can be set.

Check the number of entries that are set per unit.

01000 Invalid password The entered password is incorrect. Reexecute the command and enter the correct password.

01001 The password you entered does not match. Try again.

A new password does not match. Reexecute the command and enter the correct password.

01002 Password is too short - must be at least 4 characters.

The password is too short. Enter a password consisting of 4 characters or more.

Page 604: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Appendix

90

No. Indication Cause Corrective action

01003 Password is too long - must be less than 16 characters.

The password is too long. Enter a password consisting of 16 characters or less.

01004 Password contains some of unusable characters.

The password includes unusable characters. For a password character string, two-octet codes and control codes must not be used.

Reexecute the command and enter the correct password.

01005 Because the number of accounts reaches the maximum value, this setting cannot be made.

Accounts as many as the maximum allowable number of accounts are registered, so that execution is disabled.

Check the number of registered accounts.

01006 The account which has not been registered is specified.

An account not registered is specified. Check the account registration status.

01007 This account cannot be deleted. The default account cannot be deleted. Specify another account.

01008 Because login is done with the account name, mode shift cannot be carried out.

Login is performed using an account name, so that mode shifting is disabled.

Check the authority of the account.

02204 The combination of specified parameters %s and %s is not an effective setting.

The specified combination of parameters is not a valid setting.

Check the entered command line.

02205 Specified network address cannot be used for %s.

The specified network address cannot be used. Check the specified network address.

02206 Start date and end date are the same - must be different dates.

When setting daylight saving time, the same date, or the same week/day of week/month, cannot be specified for start and end dates or weeks.

Enter a different date, week, day of week or month for start and end date/week of daylight saving time.

02207 The Specified VLAN ID is configured as Inband VLAN. Inband VLAN ID cannot be set for two or more ports.

The specified VLAN ID is configured as Inband VLAN. Inband VLAN ID cannot be set for two or more ports.

Check the registered VLAN ID and port number.

02300 Command with invalid parameter in downloaded configuration : %s.

The downloaded configuration includes a command with an invalid parameter.

Check the contents of the configuration to be downloaded.

Page 605: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Appendix

91

No. Indication Cause Corrective action

02301 Because command execution error occurred in downloaded configuration, the entire configuration was discarded. : %s. First Error : %s.

A command execution error occurred in the downloaded configuration, so that the entire configuration was discarded.

Check the contents of the configuration to be downloaded.

02302 FTP %s failed. ftp upload/download operation failed. Check the state of the ftp server.

02303 Failed in writing to FRAM An attempt to write to FRAM failed. Replace the device.

02304 No data in downloaded file. The downloaded file includes no data. Check the contents of the file to be downloaded.

02305 Invalid characters in downloaded configuration The downloaded configuration includes invalid characters.

Check the contents of the configuration to be downloaded.

02306 File size is over the maximum size. The downloaded file is larger than the maximum allowable size.

Check the size of the file to be downloaded.

02307 The specified command cannot be executed on the present status.

In the current status, the specified command cannot be executed.

Check the state of the line card.

02309 The specified file to be downloaded is not appropriate.

The downloaded file is not proper. Check whether the file to be downloaded matches the command.

03019 Invalid parameter %s. Please specify the value in multiples of 500msec.

The specified parameter is not a multiple of 500msec.

Specify the parameter in a multiple of 500msec.

03022 Because the related configuration setting exists, this command cannot be executed.

Because the related configuration setting exists, this command cannot be executed.

Delete the related configuration setting and set the default value.

04102 Since fault has occurred in the specified port, port unblocking cannot be made.

The specified port is faulty, so that port unblocking is disabled.

Check the fault information of the specified port.

04311 Since another index has been registered on the port, this registration cannot be made.

Since another index has been registered on the port, this registration cannot be made.

Check the filtering setting.

Page 606: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Appendix

92

No. Indication Cause Corrective action

04406 The number of the registered VLAN counters exceeds the maximum registration number for the short cycle or long cycle for each system, or exceeds the maximum registration number for each port.

The number of registered VLAN counters exceeds the maximum number of registered short-cycle VLAN counters per device or registered long-cycle VLAN counters per device or the maximum number of registered VLAN counters per port.

Check the maximum number of registered short-cycle VLAN counters per device and the number of registered long-cycle VLAN counters per device and ensure that each of the maximum numbers of registered VLAN counters is not exceeded.

05000 Invalid parameter %s. Please specify the value in multiples of 25Kbps.

A bandwidth limit value that is not a multiple of 25 kbps may not be entered.

Enter a bandwidth limit value that is a multiple of 25 kbps.

05001 The rate value for the specified VLAN ID or VLAN Name is not set.

For the specified VLAN ID or VLAN name, bandwidth limit is not set.

Set bandwidth limit for the specified VLAN ID or VLAN name beforehand.

05006 The number of entries exceeds the limit value. Please set the number of entries within %s for a GbE port.

No more VLAN-by-VLAN bandwidth limit entries than a certain limit may be registered per GbE port.

Ensure that the number of bandwidth limit entries set on a VLAN-by-VLAN basis does not exceed a certain limit per GbE port.

05012 The rate value for the specified Remaining-VLAN is not set.

Bandwidth limit is not set for the specified Remaining-VLAN.

Set bandwidth limit for the Remaining-VLAN of the specified port beforehand.

05013 The same priority value cannot be specified twice in priority assignment.

In priority specification for each class, no duplicate value may be specified.

Specify priority values again.

05014 Priority value must be specified for at least 1 class. "none" cannot be specified for all classes.

Specification of None for all classes is not allowed.

Specify a priority value for at least one class.

05016 Since VLAN is registered, Remaining-VLAN cannot be deleted.

The VLAN is registered, so that the Remaining-VLAN cannot be deleted.

Check information about the VLAN registered with the specified port.

05017 Since the rate value has been specified with %s mode, the specified command cannot be executed in %s mode.

Execution is disabled in a mode other than the one specified with bandwidth limit.

Check the bandwidth setting of the specified VLAN.

05021 When the separate mode or separate-red mode is not specified, %s cannot be specified in priority mapping.

If the separate mode or separate-red mode is not specified, specification based on priority mapping is not allowed.

For specification based on priority mapping, specify the separate mode or separate-red mode.

Page 607: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Appendix

93

No. Indication Cause Corrective action

05022 When broadcast and multicast are specified for multiple classes, both broadcast and multicast must not be specified for the same class.

When broadcast/multicast is specified for multiple classes, both broadcast and multicast must not be specified for the same class.

Ensure that when broadcast/multicast is specified for each class, both broadcast and multicast are not specified for the same class.

05023 All priorities are not assigned to a class. All priorities are not assigned to a class. Specify all priorities for any of CLASS-A through CLASS-D.

05037 Invalid parameter %s. Please specify the value in multiples of 16. However, 16 cannot be specified.

Queue length other than multiples of 16 (except 16) cannot be specified for the L2 switch buffer.

Specify the queue length for the L2 switch buffer in multiple of 16 (except 16).

05038 The total queue length is not 1008packets. The total queue length is not 1008 packets. Specify with the total queue length being 1008 packets.

05041 The minimum burst value is equal to or greater than the maximum burst value.

The specified minimum allowable burst value is greater than the upper limit, or the specified maximum allowable burst value is less than the lower limit.

Check the minimum allowable burst value or the maximum allowable burst value.

05057 The shaper rate is over the maximum shaper rate.

The maximum bandwidth limit value per port basis/class basis in the output port shaper setting exceeds the physical bandwidth.

Set the maximum bandwidth limit value per port basis/class basis in the output port shaper setting below the physical bandwidth.

05058 The total of shaper rate in that multiples of 64Kbps is over the maximum shaper rate.

In separate specification of the maximum bandwidth limit value for the output port shaper, the total of shaper rate after the maximum bandwidth limit values of each class (class-a to class-d) are truncated to the multiples of 64 Kbps exceeds the physical bandwidth.

In separate specification of the maximum bandwidth limit value for the output port shaper, set the total of shaper rate after the maximum bandwidth limit values of each class (class-a to class-d) are truncated to the multiples of 64 Kbps below the physical bandwidth.

05059 FE port is not permitted to specify VLAN. FE port is not permitted to specify VLAN. Specify Remaining VLAN or specify a GbE port then reenter the command.

05060 FE port is not permitted to configure separate mode.

FE port is not permitted to specify separate mode.

Unspecify separate mode then reenter the command.

05061 The shaper rate is not the initial state. The output port shaper is not initialized. Set the default values for all the ports of the output port shaper.

Page 608: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Appendix

94

No. Indication Cause Corrective action

05062 The WRR surplus band distribution ratio value is not the initial state.

The Deficit WRR surplus bandwidth distribution ratio value is not initialized.

Set the Deficit WRR surplus bandwidth distribution ratio value by specifying the default value.

05063 This setting cannot be made with SP mode. This setting cannot be made if the output scheduling operation mode is SP mode.

Set the output scheduling operation mode to the Deficit WRR mode.

05064 The total WRR surplus band distribution ratio value including all the classes exceeds the maximum shaper rate.

The total Deficit WRR surplus bandwidth distribution ratio value of each class (class-b to class-d) exceeds the maximum bandwidth limit value for the output port shaper. Or the maximum bandwidth limit value for the output port shaper is lower than the total Deficit WRR surplus bandwidth distribution ratio value of each class (class-b to class-d).

Set the total Deficit WRR surplus bandwidth distribution ratio value of each class (class-b to class-d) below the maximum bandwidth limit value for the output port shaper. Or set the maximum bandwidth limit value for the output port shaper above the total Deficit WRR surplus bandwidth distribution ratio value of each class (class-b to class-d).

Output port shaper Deficit WRR

Maximum bandwidth limit value ≥ class-b

+

class-c

+

class-d

Page 609: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Appendix

95

No. Indication Cause Corrective action

05065 The WRR surplus band distribution ratio value of the class exceeds the maximum shaper rate for the class.

The Deficit WRR surplus bandwidth distribution ratio value of each class (class-b to class-d) exceeds the maximum bandwidth limit value for the output port shaper of each class (class-b to class-d). Or the maximum bandwidth limit value for the output port shaper of each class (class-b to class-d) is lower than the Deficit WRR surplus bandwidth distribution ratio value of each class (class-b to class-d).

Set the Deficit WRR surplus bandwidth distribution ratio value of each class (class-b to class-d) below the maximum bandwidth limit value for the output port shaper of each class (class-b to class-d). Or set the maximum bandwidth limit value for the output port shaper of each class (class-b to class-d) above the Deficit WRR surplus bandwidth distribution ratio value of each class (class-b to class-d).

Output port shaper Deficit WRR

class-b ≥ class-b

class-c ≥ class-c

class-d ≥ class-d

06201 Since Exterior VLAN ID and Interior VLAN ID are the same, this setting cannot be made.

Registration is disabled because the swap source VLAN ID and swap destination VLAN ID are the same.

Specify a swap source VLAN ID and a swap destination VLAN ID that are different from each other.

06202 Tagbased VLAN ID cannot be deleted. The tagbased VLAN ID cannot be deleted. Specify a VLAN ID set for VLAN tag swapping.

06203 Tagbased VLAN ID with VLAN tag swapping set cannot be deleted.

The tagbased VLAN ID for which a swap destination VLAN ID is set cannot be deleted.

Specify a tagbased VLAN ID.

06204 Portbased VLAN ID cannot be deleted. The portbased VLAN ID cannot be deleted. Specify a tagbased VLAN ID.

06205 Since the specified VLAN ID is the same as the Exterior VLAN ID, the VLAN ID cannot be registered.

The specified VLAN ID duplicates a swap destination VLAN ID, so that the specified VLAN ID cannot be registered.

Specify a tagbased VLAN ID that does not duplicate a swap destination VLAN ID.

06206 Since the specified VLAN ID is the same as the tagbased VLAN ID, the VLAN ID cannot be registered.

The specified VLAN ID duplicates a tagbased VLAN ID, so that the specified VLAN ID cannot be registered.

Specify a tag swap destination VLAN ID that does not duplicate a tagbased VLAN ID.

06207 The specified Exterior VLAN ID has already been registered.

The specified swap destination VLAN ID is already registered.

Specify another swap destination VLAN ID.

Page 610: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Appendix

96

No. Indication Cause Corrective action

06219 Since the EtherType value is not 0x8100, this setting cannot be made.

For a port with an Ethertype other than 0x8100 set, portbased untag specification is not allowed.

Before untag specification, set Ethertype 0x8100 with the "set vlan ethertype" command.

06220 Since portbased untag mode is configured on this port, this setting cannot be made.

For a port with portbased VLAN untag specified, specification of an Ethertype other than 0x8100 is not allowed.

Before Ethertype specification, set admit-all for Frametype with the "set vlan portbase" command.

06222 Since both portbased and tagbased modes cannot be specified at the same time, this command cannot be executed.

When a duplicate port number is specified with a portbased VLAN and tagbased VLAN, the setting cannot be made with the command.

Check the ports for which the portbased VLAN and tagbased VLAN are set.

06223 Since 100 VLAN IDs have already been registered, tagbased VLAN cannot be changed to portbased VLAN.

When more than 100 VLAN IDs are set, switching from tag-base to port-base is disabled.

For switching from tag-base to port-base when more than 100 VLAN IDs are set, use the "set vlan portbase" command, or make a setting again after VLAN deletion.

06224 The number of registered VLAN IDs exceeds the maximum registration number per system.

The number of registered VLAN IDs exceeds the maximum registration number per system.

Check the number of registered VLAN IDs and ensure that the maximum numbers of registered VLAN IDs is not exceeded.

06225 Since portbased VLAN is configured on this port, this setting is not allowed.

Setting the VLAN tag swapping is not allowed for the port for which a portbased VLAN is configured

Delete the registered portbased VLAN ID then make a setting again.

06310 Because the deletion process of all MAC address learning information is running, this command cannot be executed.

The specified command cannot be executed during processing of deletion of all MAC learning information.

Reenter the command after a while.

06500 The same port cannot be both mirror-from port and mirror-to port simultaneously.

No mirroring target port may duplicate a mirroring output destination port.

Make a setting so that no mirroring target port duplicates a mirroring output destination port.

06501 This port cannot be configured as a mirror-to-port. Please delete the VLAN setting.

The mirroring output destination port cannot be specified. Delete the VLAN from the port.

Delete the VLAN from the port beforehand.

06502 This port cannot be configured as a mirror-to-port. Please delete link aggregation.

The mirroring output destination port cannot be specified. Delete the link aggregation from the port.

Delete the link aggregation from the port beforehand.

Page 611: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Appendix

97

No. Indication Cause Corrective action

06503 This command is not allowed. The mirror-to port has already been configured.

The command cannot be executed. A mirroring output destination port is already set.

Before making the setting, delete the setting of the mirroring output destination port.

07000 The link aggregation cannot be configured. Please specify two or more ports.

The link aggregation is not generated. Specify multiple ports.

Specify multiple ports again to generate a LAG.

07001 The link aggregation is not configured. The specified ports are set at different speeds in the same group.

The link aggregation is not generated. The specified ports set at different speeds in the same group.

When generating a LAG, set the same speed for all the ports then make a setting again.

07003 The link aggregation is not configured. The specified ports have already been used in other aggregation group.

The link aggregation is not generated. The port is already used with a different LAG.

When generating a LAG, check whether the port is already used with another LAG.

07004 The link aggregation is not configured. The maximum number of aggregation ports in a group is 8.

The link aggregation is not generated. The maximum allowable number of ports is 8.

Check that the number of ports generated as link aggregations is 8 or less then make a setting again.

07005 The link aggregation cannot be deleted. The specified group does not exist.

The link aggregation is not deleted. The specified group is not found.

Check the specified link aggregation.

07006 The link aggregation is not configured. The specified ports belong to different VLAN.

The link aggregation is not generated. A different VLAN is set for a specified port.

Make a setting again by specifying the same VLAN for the ports to be specified as a group.

07007 The link aggregation is not configured. The specified name has already been used by another aggregation group.

The link aggregation is not generated. The specified name is already used by another group.

Make a setting again by specifying a name different from those already used by any other group.

07010 The standby-admit setting cannot be made. The standby-admit is allowed only in the local mode.

No standby-admit setting is made. The setting of standby-admit is allowed in the local mode only.

Check that the mode of the link aggregation to be set is the local mode then make a setting again.

07011 The Port-Isolate feature and link aggregation are not allowed together on the same port.

The port isolation function and the link aggregation function cannot be used simultaneously.

Set the command again after checking that the port isolation function and the link aggregation function are not set for the same port.

07012 The aggregation protection time is not set. Please specify the value in multiples of 100.

The link aggregation protection time is not set. Set a value that is a multiple of 100.

Make a setting again after checking that a value to be set is a multiple of 100.

Page 612: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Appendix

98

No. Indication Cause Corrective action

07013 The system priority cannot be configured. Please specify the system priority before the aggregation is configured.

The system priority cannot be set. Set a system priority before link aggregation setting.

Make a setting again after checking that no link aggregation is set for the device.

07014 The port priority cannot be configured. Please specify the port priority for a link-up port in an aggregation group.

The port priority cannot be set. Set the port priority for a link-up port of the link aggregation group.

Make a setting again after checking that the specified port belonging to the link aggregation group is not a link-down port.

07100 The STP mode cannot be changed. STP needs to be disabled before the mode change.

The STP mode cannot be changed. Disable STP before setting.

Before making a mode change, disable STP.

07101 The specified time value does not satisfy the formulas of the IEEE standard.

The formulas defined by the IEEE need to be satisfied.

Make a setting with the following formulas satisfied:

2 x (Bridge Forward Delay - 1) >= Bridge Max Age

Bridge Max Age >= 2 x (Bridge Hello Time + 1)

07102 The priority value cannot be updated. Please specify the value in multiples of 4096.

The priority is not updated. Set a value that is a multiple of 4096.

Make a setting again after checking that a value to be set is a multiple of 4096 in the RSTP mode.

07103 The port priority value cannot be updated. Please specify the value in multiples of 16.

The priority is not updated. Set a value that is a multiple of 16.

Make a setting again after checking that a value to be set is a multiple of 16 in the RSTP mode.

07104 This command is not supported in the STP mode. The current mode is not the RSTP mode.

This command is not supported in the STP mode. The current mode is not the RSTP mode.

This command is not supported in the STP mode. This command can be used when the RSTP mode is set.

09000 The specified MEG has already been associated with MEP.

The specified MEG has already been associated with MEP.

Make a setting again after checking MEP is not registered to the MEG.

09001 The specified MEG ID has already been used in this system.

The specified MEG ID has already been used in this system.

Make a setting again after checking the MEG ID already used is not specified.

09002 The MEG cannot be specified. The MEG specified does not exist.

The MEG cannot be specified. The MEG specified does not exist.

Make a setting again checking the MEG is set.

Page 613: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Appendix

99

No. Indication Cause Corrective action

09003 The MEP index cannot be changed. The MEP has already been used.

The MEP index cannot be changed. The MEP has already been used.

Make a setting again after checking the MEP index is not used.

09004 The MEP cannot be added. The number of registered MEPs for this port reaches the maximum number.

The MEP cannot be added. The number of MEPs registered for this port reaches the limit.

Make a setting again after checking the number of MEPs registered for this port does not exceed the limit.

09006 The same MEP ID which belongs to the same MEG cannot be registered.

The same MEP ID cannot be registered within a MEG.

Make a setting again after checking the same MEP ID is not registered within the MEG.

09007 The MEP cannot be specified. The MEP specified does not exist.

The MEP cannot be specified. The MEP specified does not exist.

Make a setting after checking the MEP is set.

09008 Since the ETH-CC setting is enabled currently, the MEP cannot be deleted.

The MEP cannot be deleted. The ETH-CC frame transmission/reception setting is enabled.

Delete the MEP after the ETH-CC frame for the MEP is not enabled.

09009 The peer MEP cannot be added. The number of registered peer MEPs exceeds the maximum number allowed.

The peer MEP cannot be added. The number of registered peer MEPs exceeds the maximum number allowed.

Make a setting again after checking the number of peer MEPs registered for one port does not exceed the maximum number allowed.

09010 The peer MEP ID is the same as the MEP ID registered.

The peer MEP ID is the same as the self MEP ID.

Make a setting again after checking the peer MEP ID is not the same as the self MEP ID.

09011 The peer MEP cannot be deleted. The specified peer MEP does not exist.

The peer MEP cannot be deleted. The specified peer MEP does not exist.

Delete the peer MEP after checking it is set.

09012 The MAC address cannot be configured. The Unicast MAC address must be specified.

The MAC address cannot be configured. The Unicast MAC address must be specified.

Make a setting again specifying the Unicast MAC address as MAC address.

09013 The MAC address cannot be configured. The Multicast address must be specified.

The MAC address cannot be configured. The Multicast MAC address must be specified.

Make a setting again specifying the Multicast MAC address as MAC address.

09015 The MAC address cannot be configured. The most significant byte must be 0x01.

The MAC address cannot be configured. The most significant byte must be 0x01.

Make a setting again after checking the most significant byte of the MAC address is 0x01.

09016 The MAC address cannot be configured. The specified MAC address is invalid.

The MAC address cannot be configured. The specified MAC address is invalid.

Make a setting again after checking the MAC address value is not invalid.

Page 614: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Appendix

100

No. Indication Cause Corrective action

09021 The specified MEG ID is invalid. The specified MEG ID is invalid. Make a setting again after checking the specified MEG ID is correct.

09022 The transmission interval cannot be set. The setting value is not based on the allowed granularity.

The transmission interval cannot be set. The granularity of the set value is invalid.

Make a setting again after checking the granularity of the set value is correct.

09023 The target MEP already exists in this system. The test target MEP cannot be specified. The test target MEP is already set in the device.

Make a setting again after checking that the test target MEP is not set in the device.

09024 The MEP cannot be specified. The MEP specified is not the target MEP.

The MEP cannot be specified. The specified MEP is not a test target MEP.

Execute the command again after checking that the specified MEP is registered as a test target MEP.

09027 The MEP has already been used on the same port, the same VLAN, and the same MEG level.

The MEP has already used on the same port, the same VLAN, and the same MEG level.

Make a setting again after checking the MEP has not been used on the same port, the same VLAN, and the same MEG level.

09028 The MAC address cannot be configured. The specified MAC address is source MAC address.

The MAC address cannot be configured. The specified MAC address is source MAC address.

Make a setting again after checking the MAC address is not the source MAC address.

09034 The specified MEP is not the target MEP. The specified MEP is not a test target MEP. Execute the command again after checking that the specified MEP is registered as a test target MEP.

09035 The MEP cannot be specified. The VLAN ID configured for MEP is different from that for Ether-Ring on the specified port.

MEP cannot be specified. The VLAN ID of EtherRing of the specified port is different from the one to be set for the MEP.

Check that the VLAN ID is same as the one of EtherRing and set it again.

09036 The Ether-OAM frame counter has already been registered on the specified port.

The Ether-OAM frame counter has already been registered on the specified port.

Check that the Ether-OAM frame counter is not registered on the specified port and reenter the command.

09037 The Ether-OAM frame counter is not registered on the specified port.

The Ether-OAM frame counter is not registered on the specified port.

Check that the Ether-OAM frame counter is registered on the specified port and reenter the command.

09401 The same port cannot be specified twice in Ether-Ring.

The same port cannot be set for the port to be used in EtherRing.

Set another port for the port to be used.

Page 615: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Appendix

101

No. Indication Cause Corrective action

09402 Ether-Ring and link aggregation are not allowed together on the same port.

EtherRing and link aggregation cannot be combined.

Check the EtherRing setting and link aggregation setting, and enable either of them.

09403 Ether-Ring and RSTP/STP are not allowed together on the same port.

EtherRing and RSTP/STP cannot be combined.

Check the EtherRing setting and RSTP/STP setting, and enable either of them.

09404 The specified Index has already been used in this system.

The specified Index has already been used in the unit.

Check that Index is not reduplicated.

09405 Two or more MEPs are set to the specified port.

Two or more MEPs have been set for the specified port.

Set only one MEP for the port where the EtherRing function is used.

09406 Two or more peer MEPs are set to MEP of the specified port.

Two or more associated MEPs have been set to the MEP of the specified port.

Set only one associated MEP for the MEP of the port where the EtherRing function is used.

09407 Only "1" can be entered as the Ring ID. The value other than "1" cannot be set as the Ring ID.

Set "1" for the Ring ID.

09408 Because Ether-Ring mode is disabled, the specified command cannot be executed.

The command cannot be executed because the EtherRing mode is disabled.

Enable the EtherRing mode and reenter the command.

09409 Because the Ether-Ring mode is already enabled, the parameters cannot be changed.

The setting cannot be changed because the EtherRing mode is enabled.

Disable the EtherRing mode and reenter the command.

09410 The specified VLAN ID and the VLAN ID configured as MEP are different.

The specified VLAN ID and the one that has been set to the MEP are different.

Use the VLAN ID that has been set to the MEP, or use untag MEP.

09411 Because the RPL port is already enabled, the parameters cannot be changed.

The setting cannot be changed because the RPL port is enabled.

Disable the RPL port and reenter the command.

09412 The guard time is not configured. Please specify the value in multiples of 10.

The status change protection time is not set. Specify the value in multiples of 10.

Check that the value to be set is the multiple of 10 and perform the setting again.

09413 The RPL port is not set in this system. No RPL port has been set. Set an RPL port and reenter the command.

11001 Because loopback is being employed, PVC cannot be deleted.

A loopback test is under way, so that the PVC cannot be deleted.

End the loopback test.

11003 The specified destination MAC address is invalid.

The specified destination MAC address is invalid.

Make a setting again after checking the destination MAC address to be registered.

Page 616: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Appendix

102

No. Indication Cause Corrective action

11004 The specified PVC is not registered in the ATMoP format.

The ATM-Ether conversion format is not registered to the specified PVC.

Check the setting state of the ATM-Ether conversion format with the "show atmop format" command.

11005 The combination of parameters is invalid. The combination of specified parameters is invalid.

Check the setting state of the ATMoP format with the "show atmop format" command. Check the setting state of the path connection between ATMs with the "show pvc connection" command.

11006 The ATMoP format has already been set. The ATM-Ether conversion format has already been set.

Check the setting state of the ATM-Ether conversion format with the "show atmop format" command.

11007 The number of VLAN tags or the protocol header is different from the designated mode.

The number of VLAN tags or the protocol header to be added to Ether frame is different from the designated mode.

Check the packet format with the "show atmop format" command.

11008 The specified VLAN ID has already been set for %s feature.

The specified VLAN ID has already been set for another feature (ATMoP or TDMoP).

Check the specified VLAN ID is not used for another feature.

11009 The specified PVC is not registered in the ATM connection table.

The specified PVC is not registered for an ATM connection.

Check the ATM connection setting status with the "show pvc connection" command.

11010 The ATM connection has already been set. The ATM connection has already been established.

Check the ATM connection path setting with the "show pvc connection" command.

11011 The registered PVC connection type and the specified PVC connection type do not match.

The specified PVC connection type differs from the registered PVC connection type.

Check the registered PVC connection type.

11012 The specified IP address is invalid. The specified IP address is invalid. Enter the command specifying another IP address.

11013 The combination of parameters is not allowed in this case.

The combination of specified parameters is invalid.

Specify the same PVC and VLAN ID or UDP port number for the source and destination. Otherwise, specify different PVC, VLAN ID, or UDP port number for the source or destination.

Page 617: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Appendix

103

No. Indication Cause Corrective action

11014 Only ATMoP format or PVC connection can be set for one PVC on a port, and another PVC connection cannot be made for the same PVC.

The ATMoP format and the path connection between ATMs cannot be set for one PVC on a port, and two or more path connections between ATMs cannot be set.

Enter the command changing the port number or PVC. Check the setting state with the "show atmop format" and "show pvc connection" command.

11015 Timeout value is not set. Please specify the value in multiples of 100.

Timeout value is not set. Please specify the value in multiples of 100.

Check that the value to be set is multiples of 100 and reenter the command.

11017 Same PVC is not good in the group at the multidata input.

Multiple setting of the same PVC cannot be done within a group.

Modify the PVC and reenter the command.

11018 Specified PVC is a member of other groups. Specified PVC is a member of other groups. Modify the PVC and reenter the command.

11019 The ATM Cell concatenation group has already been set.

The ATM Cell concatenation group has already been set.

Check the setting state of the ATM Cell concatenation group with the "show atmop format concatenation" command.

11020 The specified parameter cannot be overwritten. The specified parameter cannot be overwritten. To change the setting, delete the setting for the relevant function and reenter the command.

11300 The number of the registered PVC counters exceeds the maximum registration number per system.

The number of registered PVC counters exceeds the maximum registrable number of PVC counters per device.

Check the number of registered PVC counters and make a setting so that the maximum registrable number of PVC counters is not exceeded.

11301 If %s for which PVC counter has not been registered is specified, PVC counter registration cannot be deleted.

When a PVC or PVC name for which no PVC counter is registered is specified, PVC counter registration deletion is impossible.

Check the state of PVC counter registration.

11302 Because the specified port is not IMA group root port, this command cannot be executed.

This command cannot be executed because the specified port is not IMA group root port.

When setting an IMA group, enter the command specifying the root port as a port belonging to the IMA group.

12013 Since the available bandwidth range for 1ATM155A line card is from 500 Kbps up to 149500 Kbps, the specified rate cannot be configured.

When 1ATM155A is mounted as the line card type, the bandwidth value must be from 500 Kbps to 149500 Kbps.

Reenter the command after resetting the bandwidth value.

Page 618: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Appendix

104

No. Indication Cause Corrective action

12014 Since the available bandwidth range for T1 is from 64 Kbps up to 1536 Kbps, the specified rate cannot be configured.

When the frame type is T1, the bandwidth value must be from 64 Kbps to 1536 Kbps.

Reenter the command after resetting the bandwidth value.

12015 Since the available bandwidth range is from 64 Kbps up to 1920 Kbps when E1 with frame format except "unframed", the specified rate cannot be configured.

When the frame type is E1 and the frame format is other than unframed, the bandwidth value must be from 64 Kbps to 1920 Kbps.

Reenter the command after resetting the bandwidth value.

12016 Since the available bandwidth range for E1 with frame format unframed is from 64 Kbps up to 2048 Kbps, the specified rate cannot be configured.

When the frame type is E1 and the frame format is unframed, the bandwidth value must be from 64 Kbps to 2048 Kbps.

Reenter the command after resetting the bandwidth value.

12017 Since the specified rate violates bandwidth range of the current status of IMA group configuration, this setting cannot be configured.

This command cannot be executed because the rate specified for the port where the IMA group is configured is out of the bandwidth range.

Reenter the command after resetting the bandwidth value.

12018 Please specify the bandwidth value in multiples of 500Kbps when 1ATM155A line card is running.

Please specify the bandwidth value in multiples of 500 (Kbps) when 1ATM155A line card is mounted.

Reenter the command after resetting the bandwidth value.

12019 Please specify the bandwidth value in multiples of 64 Kbps when 32T1E1H line card is running.

Please specify the bandwidth value in multiples of 64 (Kbps) when 32T1E1H line card is mounted.

Reenter the command after resetting the bandwidth value.

12020 ATM Shaper allows only the root port to be specified where IMA group setting has been configured.

Only the root port can be specified where IMA group setting has been configured.

Reenter the command after specifying the root port or specifying the port where IMA group setting has not been configured.

12021 Since available c-tag range is from 0 up to 7, this command cannot be executed.

This command cannot be executed because available c-tag range is from 0 to 7.

Reenter the command after resetting the value below 7.

12022 Since the port mode is not ATMoP mode, this command cannot be executed.

This command cannot be executed because the port mode is not atmop.

Reenter the command after resetting the port mode to the ATMoP mode.

12023 Since the same priority value cannot be specified for two or more classes, this command cannot be executed.

This command cannot be executed because the same priority value cannot be specified for two or more classes.

Reenter the command after setting a different priority value.

Page 619: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Appendix

105

No. Indication Cause Corrective action

12024 Since the ATM Shaper setting has not been configured for the specified port, clear command cannot be executed.

The port where the ATM Shaper setting has not been configured cannot be deleted.

Reenter the command after specifying the port where the ATM Shaper setting has been configured.

13100 The combination of specified parameters is invalid.

The combination of the specified parameters is invalid.

Check the command line entered.

13101 Because ATM-OAM loopback test for the specified PVC or VP connection is being performed, the specified command cannot be executed.

The specified command cannot be executed because an ATM-OAM loopback test is being performed for the PVC or VP connection.

Perform the setting again after the loopback test is done.

13102 Because ATM-OAM loopback keepalive for the specified PVC or VP connection is configured, the specified command cannot be executed.

The specified command cannot be executed because the ATM-OAM loopback monitoring has been set for the specified PVC or VP connection.

Clear the loopback monitoring setting with the "clear loopback atm keepalive" command and perform the setting again.

13200 VPI specified with F5 setting cannot be specified with F4 setting.

The VPI with F5 monitoring setting cannot be specified in the F4 monitoring setting.

Check the loopback monitoring setting.

13201 VPI specified with F4 setting cannot be specified with F5 setting.

The VPI with F4 monitoring setting cannot be specified in the F5 monitoring setting.

Check the loopback monitoring setting.

13202 The specified keepalive configuration is not registered.

The specified loopback monitoring setting has not been registered.

Check the loopback monitoring setting.

13204 The ATM-OAM flow for the specified PVC or VP connection is not configured.

No ATM-OAM flow has been set for the specified PVC or VP connection.

Set an ATM-OAM flow with the "set atm-oam flow" command, and reenter the command.

13205 Because the ATM-OAM flow for the specified PVC or VP connection is set to end-point, inside cannot be set.

"inside" (switch direction) cannot be specified because the ATM-OAM flow for the specified PVC or VP connection has been set to end-point.

Set the ATM-OAM flow to the connecting point with the "set atm-oam flow" command before executing the command.

13206 Because the ATM connection for the specified PVC is registered, inside cannot be set.

"inside" (switch direction) cannot be specified because a path between ATMs has been set for the specified PVC.

Clear the path between ATMs with the "clear pvc connection" command, and reenter the command.

13402 Because LPT is being configured, the specified VLAN ID cannot be registered.

Because the link path through is configured, the specified VLAN ID cannot be specified.

Check the link path through setting.

Page 620: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Appendix

106

No. Indication Cause Corrective action

13601 When "sonet" is specified, "idle" cannot be set. When sonet is selected, idle cannot be specified.

When sonet is selected, select unassigned.

15001 IMA group cannot be created with the specified ports.

IMA group cannot be created with the specified ports.

Specify the ports 1 to 8 or ports 9 to 16 for configuring the IMA group.

15002 Since the specified ports already belong to other IMA groups, the IMA group cannot be created.

The IMA group cannot be created. The specified ports are already used for other IMA groups.

Check whether the ports are used for other IMA groups before creating an IMA group.

15003 Since the specified IMA ID has already been registered in other IMA groups, the IMA group cannot be created.

The IMA group cannot be created. The IMA ID is already used for other IMA groups.

Check whether the IMA ID is used for other IMA groups before creating an IMA group.

15004 Since the number of Minimum Required Links exceeds the specified number of ports, the IMA group cannot be created.

The IMA group cannot be created. The specified number of Minimum Required Links exceeds the specified number of ports.

Specify the number of Minimum Required Links within the specified number of ports.

15005 Since the specified delay value exceeds the maximum size of E1 mode, the IMA group cannot be created.

The IMA group cannot be created. The delay value exceeds the maximum value of E1 mode.

Specify the delay value so as not to exceed the maximum value of E1 mode.

15006 The index of a non-registered IMA group cannot be deleted.

The index of a non-registered IMA group cannot be deleted.

Check the content of the registered IMA groups.

15008 Since the specified root port does not belong to the IMA group, the IMA group cannot be created.

The IMA group cannot be created. The specified port is not registered in the IMA group.

Specify one of the ports registered in the IMA group as the root port.

15009 Since the specified IMA group setting reaches the maximum number, the IMA group cannot be created.

The IMA group cannot be created. The specified IMA group setting exceeds the maximum number for the setting.

Check if the number of IMA groups which are registered for port 1 to 8 or port 9 to 16 is less than four.

15010 Since ATM Shaper setting has already been configured for the specified port or index, this command cannot be executed.

This command cannot be executed because the ATM Shaper setting has already been configured for the specified port number or index.

Delete the ATM Shaper setting and set the default value.

15011 IMA group cannot be specified when T1 with frame format "unframed" is configured.

IMA group cannot be set when the frame type is "T1" and the frame format is "unframed".

Change the frame type or frame format.

Page 621: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Appendix

107

No. Indication Cause Corrective action

20001 The specified command cannot be executed due to the frame type disagreement.

The specified command cannot be executed because of the frame type mismatch.

Reenter the command after matching the frame type.

20002 Since consecutive TS numbers are required, this group setting cannot be performed.

Consecutive TS numbers must be specified. Reenter the command with range specification of consecutive TS numbers.

20005 The specified path setting has already been made on the same port.

The specified path setting has already been made on the same port.

Specify another line for path setting.

20008 The specified group has already been used in the group setting.

The specified group number has already been used.

Use another group number or delete the group setting.

20009 The specified TS has already been grouped. The specified time slot number has already been grouped.

Use another time slot number or delete the group setting.

20010 The specified group does not have the setting. The specified group does not have the setting. Reenter the command specifying a group number that is grouped.

20012 The numbers of TSs of the specified groups are different.

The numbers of time slots (TSs) of the specified groups are different.

Select groups with the same number of time slots (TSs).

20013 The path setting cannot be overwritten. Path setting cannot be overwritten. Reenter the command after deleting the path setting or specifying a group number to which a path is not set.

20014 The path setting already exists in the specified group.

A path has already been set to the specified group number.

Reenter the command after deleting the path setting.

20016 The port mode setting is inappropriate for TDM configuration.

The port mode setting for the specified port is not TDM configuration.

Specify a port to which the TDM configuration is set for its port mode, or set TDM configuration for the port mode and reenter the command.

20017 The specified Frame Type does NOT correspond to the configured frame type of the system.

The specified frame type does not correspond with the frame type which is configured for the system.

Change the frame type setting to set the same type, or select the same frame type and reenter the command.

20018 TS cannot be specified as ‘0’ when unframed mode.

"0" cannot be set for the time slot (TS) in other than the unframed mode.

Select other than "0" for the time slot (TS) and reenter the command.

Page 622: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Appendix

108

No. Indication Cause Corrective action

20019 The frame format which does not allow executing the specified command has already been configured.

This command cannot be executed because the frame format that has already been configured is not allowed.

Check the port frame setting.

21000 Because the related configuration setting exists, this command cannot be executed.

Because the related configuration setting exists, this command cannot be executed.

Delete the related configuration setting and set the default value.

21001 Since the frame type of the specified port is e1, this command cannot be executed.

This command cannot be executed because the frame type of the specified line is E1.

Enter the command when the frame type is T1.

21003 Since duplicate setting is identified on the same port, this command cannot be executed.

Distribution setting cannot be overlapped for the same port.

Reenter the command with no overlaps for the distribution setting.

21004 CESoPSN is not allowed to specify "unframed" for the frame format.

unframed cannot be specified in the CESoPN mode.

Change the mode to the SAToP mode or specify another frame format, and then reenter the command.

21005 The frame type is not E1, this command cannot be executed.

This command cannot be executed because the frame type is not E1.

Reenter the command after checking the port frame setting.

21006 Since the port mode of ATMoP mode setting exists, this command cannot be executed.

The command cannot be executed because the ATMoP mode has been set for the port mode.

Check the port mode setting and reenter the command.

21007 ATMoP mode cannot be specified when T1 with frame format "unframed" is configured.

ATMoP mode cannot be specified when the frame type is "T1" and the frame format is "unframed".

Check the port frame setting and reenter the command.

21008 The specified port mode setting cannot be made.

The combination of the specified port number and port mode is invalid.

Check the state of the port mode setting and reenter a valid port mode setting.

21100 Since the port mode is not TDMoP mode, this command cannot be executed.

Since the line mode is not the TDMoP mode, this command cannot be executed.

Enter the command after setting the line mode to the TDMoP mode.

21102 Since the group setting has been configured, this command cannot be executed.

Since the group setting has been configured, this command cannot be executed.

Use another group number or delete the group setting.

21103 The specified group number has not been configured.

The specified group number is not set. Check the group number.

Page 623: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Appendix

109

No. Indication Cause Corrective action

21106 The frame type specified by the command is different from that configured on the specified port.

The frame type of the specified port number does not agree.

Use the same frame type.

21107 Since consecutive TS numbers are required, this group setting cannot be performed.

Consecutive TS numbers must be specified. Reenter the command with range specification of consecutive TS numbers.

21108 The specified TS has already been grouped. The specified group number has already been used.

Use another group number or delete the group setting.

21110 The specified ECID has already been grouped. The specified ECID has already been grouped. Use another ECID or delete the group setting.

21112 The specified VLAN name has not been registered.

The specified VLAN name has not been registered.

Reenter the command specifying a registered VLAN name.

21117 The MAC address cannot be configured. The specified MAC address is invalid.

The MAC address cannot be configured. The specified MAC address is invalid.

Make a setting again after checking the MAC address value is not invalid.

21121 Because the related configuration setting exists, this command cannot be executed.

Because the related configuration setting exists, this command cannot be executed.

Reenter the command after deleting the related configuration setting.

21124 Since ONLY "all" can be specified when SAToP is selected in TDMoP mode setting, this command cannot be executed.

Time slot cannot be specified when SAToP is set for the TDMoP mode.

Specify "all" when SAToP is set for the TDMoP mode, and reenter the command.

21125 IP Address cannot be specified when the packet format is MEF8.

IP address cannot be specified when the packet format is MEF8.

Reenter the command without specifying IP address.

21126 ECID cannot be specified when the packet format is UDP-IP.

ECID cannot be specified when the packet format is UDP-IP.

Reenter the command not specifying ECID.

21128 The specified VLAN ID has already been set for %s feature.

The specified VLAN ID has already been set for the PVC-VLAN, ATMoP, and TDMoP function.

Check that the specified VLAN ID is not set for the other function.

21129 The specified IP address is invalid because it is the same as the source IP address.

The setting is invalid because the specified IP address is the same value as the source IP address.

Reenter the command specifying different IP address from the source IP address.

21131 Since Adaptive-clock setting has already been configured, this command cannot be executed.

Since adaptive-clock setting has already been configured, this command cannot be executed.

Reenter the command after deleting the adaptive-clock setting.

Page 624: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Appendix

110

No. Indication Cause Corrective action

21132 TS can be set as ‘0’ ONLY when the frame format is "unframed".

"0" cannot be specified for the time slot when other than "unframed" is set for the frame format.

Set "unframed" for the frame format or specify another time slot number.

21133 The connection setting cannot be made to the group to which the format setting has been set.

The connection setting cannot be made to the group to which the format setting has been set.

Delete the format setting or specify another group, and then reenter the command.

21135 The reverse path setting cannot be made within the same port.

The reverse path setting cannot be made within the same port.

Specify a group within another port.

21138 The specified IP address is invalid. The value of the specified IP address cannot be specified.

Reenter the command specifying the valid value for the IP address.

21139 ONLY %s groups can be configured per system.

The group setting exceeds the maximum number set by the system.

Existing groups are required to be deleted to add a new group.

21140 The specified group cannot be set since the connection setting has already been set.

Group to which the connection setting has been already set cannot be specified.

Reenter the command specifying another group or delete the connection setting before the command execution.

21141 The adaptive-clock setting cannot be configured from port number 9 to 16 in SAToP mode.

The adaptive-clock setting cannot be configured from port 9 to 16 in the SAToP mode.

Specify a port 1 to 8 and reenter the command.

21144 Neither TDMoP connection nor TDMoP format setting has been set.

Neither TDMoP connection nor TDMoP format setting has been set.

Reenter the command specifying a group for which TDMoP connection and TDMoP format have been set.

21145 CESoPSN cannot be specified when the frame format is "unframed".

The CESoPSN mode cannot be specified when "unframed" is set for the frame format.

Change the frame format or specify the SAToP mode.

21146 The numbers of TSs of the specified groups are inappropriate.

The specified groups do not have the same number of TSs.

Select the groups that have the same number of TSs.

21147 Since the number of Adaptive-clock mode settings exceeds the limit for the system, this setting cannot be made.

The number of Adaptive-clock mode settings that exceeds the limit for the system cannot be set.

Reenter the command after deleting an Adaptive-clock that has already been set.

21148 Since Adaptive-clock format setting has already been configured, this command cannot be executed.

This command cannot be executed because Adaptive-clock format has already been configured.

Check the Adaptive-clock format setting.

Page 625: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Appendix

111

No. Indication Cause Corrective action

21149 Since Adaptive-clock setting has not been configured, this command cannot be executed.

This command cannot be executed because Adaptive-clock has not been configured.

Check the Adaptive-clock setting.

21150 The Adaptive-clock has already been configured for the specified port.

The Adaptive-clock has already been configured for the specified port.

Check the Adaptive-clock setting.

21151 The specified %s%s has already been set. The specified ECID or the combination of the source UDP port number and the destination UDP port number has already been set.

Make a setting again after checking that the combination of the relevant UDP ports or ECID is not set.

21152 The specified number of frames is invalid. The specified number of transmission frames is an invalid value.

Check the setting of the number of transmission frames.

21153 The specified jitter buffer value is invalid. Only 2 msec, 4 msec, or 8 msec can be configured in dynamic mode.

The values between 16ms and 128ms cannot be set for the jitter buffer value when the dynamic mode is set.

Check the setting of the jitter buffer value.

21154 The combination of the specified jitter buffer value and the configured number of frames is invalid.

The combination of the specified jitter buffer value and the number of frames is incorrect.

Check the combination of the setting of the jitter buffer value and the number of frames.

21155 UDP port cannot be specified when the packet format is MEF8 or MPLS.

UDP port number cannot be specified when the packet format is MEF8 or MPLS.

Reenter the command without specifying any UDP port number.

21156 The specified UDP port(s) have already been configured in the same line module.

The specified UDP port number has already been set in the same line card.

Reenter the command specifying another UDP port number.

21157 Since the fault of CESoP device has occurred, the specified command cannot be executed until the CESoP device is reset.

The specified command cannot be executed until the CESoP device is reset because a CESoP device fault occurred.

Reset the CESoP device and reenter the command.

21160 The MAC address cannot be omitted when the packet format is MEF8 or UDP-IP.

When the packet format is MEF8 or UDP-IP, the MAC address cannot be omitted.

Specify the MAC address and reenter the command.

21162 Destination MAC Address must be specified when the packet format is MEF8.

When the packet format is MEF8, the destination MAC address cannot be omitted.

Reenter the command with the destination MAC address specified.

21163 UDP-IP cannot be specified when 32T1E1T line card is running.

When a 32T1E1T line card is mounted, you cannot set TDM over UDP/IP for the packet format.

Reenter the command without specifying the packet format TDM over UDP/IP.

Page 626: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Appendix

112

No. Indication Cause Corrective action

22000 The specified priority has already been set. The specified priority has already been set. Reenter the command specifying another priority, or execute the command after deleting the priority setting.

22001 Priority setting has already been made for the specified clock source.

Priority setting has already been made for the specified clock source.

Use another source clock, or delete the priority setting before the command execution.

22002 Priority setting has already been made for the specified port range.

Priority setting has already been made for the specified port range.

Use another port, or delete the priority setting before the command execution.

22003 The specified port is not registered in Adaptive-clock mode.

The specified port has not been registered to Adaptive-clock mode.

Execute the command after registering the port to adaptive-clock mode.

22004 Since two of clock source settings have already been configured in LINE1, this setting cannot be made.

Since two of source clocks have already been configured in the LINE1 card, this setting cannot be made.

Delete the priority setting before the command execution.

22005 Because reference-clock function has already been set, reference-clock multiple-source mode cannot be changed.

The port (line)-independent clock mode setting cannot be changed because the reference clock function has been set.

Clear the priority setting, reference clock switchover mode setting, or reference clock group setting and reenter the command.

22006 The specified command cannot be executed in the present mode.

The specified command cannot be set in the current mode.

Check the port (line)-independent clock mode setting.

22007 The clock source cannot be specified as the port of the clock supply destination.

The source clock cannot be specified as the port of the clock supply destination.

Check the input parameter.

22008 The clock supply destination cannot be set for Group 1.

The clock supply destination port cannot be set for Group 1.

Check the input parameter.

22009 The specified port has already been set in another group.

The specified port has already been set for another group.

Use another port, or clear the reference clock group setting to which the specified port is included before executing the command.

22010 The clock source of the specified group has already been set.

The source clock of the specified group has already been registered.

Match the clock source port, or use another group number.

22011 Because TDMoP operation mode is not SAToP mode, this setting cannot be made.

The setting cannot be done because the TDMoP operation mode is not SAToP mode.

Change the TDMoP operation mode to SAToP mode and reenter the command.

Page 627: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Appendix

113

7 Restart Cause List The table below lists the restart causes.

Type of fault pattern Meaning

Power On Reset Normal start by power-on operation

Command Reset (reset system) Restart by entering the "reset system" command

The status of WDT is abnormal Autonomous restart by hardware decision

The fatal error has occurred Autonomous restart by software decision

Page 628: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Appendix

114

8 IMA State List The table below lists the IMA states.

No IMA transmission link state Description

01 Not In Group No link is set to the IMA group.

02 Unusable The link is set to the group, but cannot be used. The following sub-states are available.

NoGivenReason : IMA group is not registered.

Fault : User-specific fault occurred.

Misconnected : Misconnect fault occurred.

Inhibited : Link operation stopped due to local or implementation reason.

Failed : Fault such as LCD, LIF, or LODS occurred.

03 Usable The link is in the standby state and is waiting for Active report from the remote side.

(Not round-robin object)

04 Active The link is activated and cells can be transmitted from the ATM layer.

(Round-robin object)

No IMA reception link state Description

01 Not In Group No link is set to the IMA group.

02 Unusable The link is set to the group, but cannot be used. The following sub-states are available.

NoGivenReason : IMA group is not registered. Fault : User-specific fault occurred. Misconnected : Misconnect fault occurred. Inhibited : Link operation stopped due to local or implementation reason. Failed : Fault such as LCD, LIF, or LODS occurred.

Page 629: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Appendix

115

03 Usable The link is in the standby state and is waiting for Usable/Active report from the remote side.

(Not round-robin object)

04 Active The link is activated and cells can be transmitted to the ATM layer.

(Round-robin object)

No IMA group state Description

01 Not Configured No IMA group exists.

02 Start-up Waiting for start-up report from the remote IMA. When the IMA group makes valid communication with the remote IMA, the group parameters are recorded and the IMA group moves to Start-up-Ack.

03 Start-up-Ack This is a temporary state. When the groups of both directions start up, they move to the Insufficient-Links after this state.

04 Config-Aborted This is the state when the remote IMA tries to use an unacceptable configuration parameter.

05 Insufficient-Links The IMA group accepts the remote group parameter and the remote side accepts the IMA group parameter, but there are no sufficient links to move to the Operational state.

06 Blocked The IMA group is blocked. When valid links of both directions are active, an IMA group can be blocked for maintenance.

07 Operational There are valid links of both Tx and Rx directions. The IMA interface can perform reception form the ATM layer cell and can perform transmission from the IMA sub-layer to the ATM layer.

Page 630: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Appendix

116

9 Remote Device Interface Speed-by-Speed Connection List 1) 10/100BASE-TX interface connection specifications

Setting of this device

Fixed Setting of remote device

10BASE-T/ Full-duplex 100BASE-TX/ Full-duplex Auto-negotiation

10BASE-T: Half-duplex - - -

10BASE-T: Full-duplex 10BASE-T: Full-duplex - -

100BASE-TX: Half-duplex - - - Fixe

d

100BASE-TX: Full-duplex - 100BASE-TX: Full-duplex -

10BASE-T: Half-duplex only - - -

10BASE-T: Full-duplex only - - 10BASE-T: Full-duplex

10BASE-T: Half-duplex/Full-duplex - - 10BASE-T: Full-duplex

100BASE-TX: Half-duplex only - - -

100BASE-TX: Full-duplex only - - 100BASE-TX: Full-duplex

100BASE-TX: Half-duplex/Full-duplex - - 100BASE-TX: Full-duplex

10/100BASE-TX: Half-duplex/Full-duplex - - 100BASE-TX: Full-duplex

1000BASE-T: Half-duplex only - - -

1000BASE-T: Full-duplex only - - -

1000BASE-T: Half-duplex/Full-duplex - - -

Aut

o-ne

gotia

tion

10/100/1000BASE-T: Half-duplex/Full-duplex - - 100BASE-TX: Full-duplex

(Legend) -: Not covered by continuity guarantee

(Caution) In the case of fixed speed setting, connection is disabled, depending on the remote device. So, auto-negotiation is recommended.

Page 631: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Appendix

117

2) 100BASE-TX/1000BASE-T interface connection specifications

Setting of this device

Fixed Setting of remote device

100BASE-TX Full-duplex 1000BASE-T Full-duplex Auto-negotiation

10BASE-T: Half-duplex - - -

10BASE-T: Full-duplex - - -

100BASE-TX: Half-duplex - - -

100BASE-TX: Full-duplex 100BASE-TX: Full-duplex - -

1000BASE-T: Half-duplex - - -

Fixe

d

1000BASE-T: Full-duplex - - -

10BASE-T: Half-duplex only - - -

10BASE-T: Full-duplex only - - -

10BASE-T: Half-duplex/full-duplex - - -

100BASE-TX: Half-duplex only - - -

100BASE-TX: Full-duplex only - - 100BASE-TX: Full-duplex

100BASE-TX: Half-duplex/full-duplex - - 100BASE-TX: Full-duplex

10/100BASE-TX: Half-duplex/full-duplex - - 100BASE-TX: Full-duplex

1000BASE-T: Half-duplex only - - -

1000BASE-T: Full-duplex only - 1000BASE-T: Full-duplex 1000BASE-T: Full-duplex

1000BASE-T: Half-duplex/full-duplex - 1000BASE-T: Full-duplex 1000BASE-T: Full-duplex

Aut

o-ne

gotia

tion

10/100/1000BASE-T: Half-duplex/full-duplex - 1000BASE-T: Full-duplex 1000BASE-T: Full-duplex

(Legend) -: Not covered by continuity guarantee

(Caution) In the case of fixed speed setting, connection is disabled, depending on the remote device. So, auto-negotiation is recommended.

Page 632: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Appendix

118

3) 1000BASE-X interface connection specifications

Setting of this device

Fixed Setting of remote device

1000BASE-T full-duplex Auto-negotiation

1000BASE-X: Half-duplex - - Fixed

1000BASE-X: Full-duplex 1000BASE-X: Full-duplex -

1000BASE-X: Half-duplex only - - Auto-negotiation

1000BASE-X: Full-duplex only - 1000BASE-X: Full-duplex

(Legend) -: Not covered by continuity guarantee

Page 633: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Appendix

119

10 ATM Shaper Setting Bandwidth Value List • ATM Shaper bandwidth setting list when no IMA setting is configured

Bandwidth Setting Value (Kbps) Line Card Type Frame Type Frame Format

min max

1ATM155A (Granularity: 500 Kbps) - - 500 149500

T1 - 64 1536

crc4 crc4nocas non-crc4

64 1920 32T1E1H (Granularity: 64 Kbps) E1

unframed 64 2048

• ATM Shaper bandwidth setting list when an IMA setting is configured

- When T1 is set

Number of Ports for IMA Group IMA Frame Size 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

32 2944 4416 5888 7424 8896 10368 11840

64 3008 4480 6016 7552 9024 10560 12032

128 3008 4544 6080 7616 9088 10624 12160

256 3008 4544 6080 7616 9152 10688 12224

* Unit: Kbps * Granularity: 64 Kbps

Page 634: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Appendix

120

- When E1 is set

- Frame format: crc4/crc4nocas/non-crc4

Number of Ports for IMA Group IMA Frame Size 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

32 3712 5568 7424 9280 11136 12992 14848

64 3776 5632 7552 9408 11328 13184 15104

128 3776 5696 7616 9472 11392 13312 15232

256 3776 5696 7616 9536 11456 13376 15232

* Unit: Kbps * Granularity: 64 Kbps

- Frame format: unframed

Number of Ports for IMA Group IMA Frame Size 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

32 3904 5888 7872 9856 11840 13824 15808

64 3968 6016 8000 10048 12032 14080 16064

128 4032 6080 8064 10112 12160 14208 16192

256 4032 6080 8128 10176 12224 14272 16256

* Unit: Kbps * Granularity: 64 Kbps

Page 635: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Appendix

121

11 List of Operations on ATM Loopback Cell Reception • Operations performed when a F4 loopback cell is received from the ATM line side

(Test status of the received connection: Untested)

Received Connection Type

(VP/ VC) Flow Type

(segment / end-to-end) Flow Point

(none / end-point / con-point)

LB Indication (Insert/ Loopback)

Location ID (Matched/ Unmatched) Operation

none - - Transparent

Insert Matched Loopback

Insert Unmatched Discard

end-point

Loopback - Discard

Insert Matched Loopback

Insert Unmatched Transparent

segment

con-point

Loopback - Transparent

VP Connection

end-to-end con-point - - Transparent

none - - Discard

Insert Matched Loopback

Insert Unmatched Discard

segment

end-point

Loopback - Discard

Insert Matched Loopback

Insert Unmatched Discard

VC Connection

end-to-end end-point

Loopback - Discard

Flow Type: Flow type of the received connection (It can be specified by the "set atm-oam flow" command.) Flow Point: Flow point setting of the received connection (It can be specified by the "set atm-oam flow" command.) LB Indication: Type of the received loopback cell "Insert" and "Loopback" indicate the request cell and the response cell respectively.

Page 636: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Appendix

122

• Operations performed when a F5 loopback cell is received from the ATM line side (Test status of the received connection: Untested)

Received Connection

Type (VP/ VC)

Flow Type (segment / end-to-end)

Flow Point (none / end-point /

con-point)

LB Indication (Insert/ Loopback)

Location ID (Matched/ Unmatched) Operation

none - - Transparent

end-point - - Transparent

segment

con-point - - Transparent

VP Connection

end-to-end con-point - - Transparent

none - - Transparent

Insert Matched Loopback

Insert Unmatched Discard

end-point

Loopback - Discard

Insert Matched Loopback

Insert Unmatched Transparent

segment

con-point

Loopback - Transparent

VC Connection

end-to-end con-point - - Transparent

Page 637: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Appendix

123

• Operations performed when a F4 loopback cell is received from the SW side (Test status of the received connection: Untested)

Received Connection

Type (VP/ VC)

Flow Type (segment / end-to-end)

Flow Point (none / end-point /

con-point)

LB Indication (Insert/ Loopback)

Location ID (Matched/ Unmatched) Operation

none - - Transparent

Insert Matched Loopback

Insert Unmatched Discard

end-point

Loopback - Discard

Insert Matched Loopback

Insert Unmatched Transparent

segment

con-point

Loopback - Transparent

VP Connection

end-to-end con-point - - Transparent

none - - Discard segment

end-point - - Discard

VC Connection

end-to-end end-point - - Discard

Page 638: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Appendix

124

• Operations performed when a F5 loopback cell is received from the SW side (Test status of the received connection: Untested)

Received Connection

Type (VP/ VC)

Flow Type (segment / end-to-end)

Flow Point (none / end-point /

con-point)

LB Indication (Insert/ Loopback)

Location ID (Matched/ Unmatched) Operation

none - - Transparent

end-point - - Transparent

segment

con-point - - Transparent

VP Connection

end-to-end con-point - - Transparent

none - - Transparent

Insert Matched Loopback

Insert Unmatched Discard

end-point

Loopback - Discard

Insert Matched Loopback

Insert Unmatched Transparent

segment

con-point

Loopback - Transparent

VC Connection

end-to-end con-point - - Transparent

Page 639: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Appendix

125

• Operations performed when a F4 loopback cell is received from the ATM line side (Test status of the received connection: Testing)

Received Connection

Type (VP/VC)

Flow Type (segment/

end-to-end)

Flow Point (none/

end-point/ con-point)

LB Indication (Insert/

Loopback)

LB Indication Check

(Enabled/ Disabled)

Source ID (Matched/

Unmatched)

Correlation Tag

(Matched/ Unmatched)

Location ID (Matched/

Unmatched) Operation

Insert Enabled - - Matched Loopback

Insert Enabled - - Unmatched Discard

Insert Disabled Matched Matched - Succeed

Loopback Enabled Unmatched - - Discard

Loopback Enabled Matched Unmatched - Discard

end-point

Loopback Enabled Matched Matched - Succeed

Insert Enabled - - Matched Loopback

Insert Enabled - - Unmatched Transparent

Insert Disabled Matched Matched - Succeed

Loopback Enabled Unmatched - - Transparent

Loopback Enabled Matched Unmatched - Transparent

segment

con-point

Loopback Enabled Matched Matched - Succeed

Insert Enabled - - - Transparent

Insert Disabled Matched Matched - Succeed

Loopback Enabled Unmatched - - Transparent

Loopback Enabled Matched Unmatched - Transparent

VP Connection

end-to-end con-point

Loopback Enabled Matched Matched - Succeed

Insert Enabled - - Matched Loopback VC Connection segment end-point

Insert Enabled - - Unmatched Discard

Page 640: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Appendix

126

Received Connection

Type (VP/VC)

Flow Type (segment/

end-to-end)

Flow Point (none/

end-point/ con-point)

LB Indication (Insert/

Loopback)

LB Indication Check

(Enabled/ Disabled)

Source ID (Matched/

Unmatched)

Correlation Tag

(Matched/ Unmatched)

Location ID (Matched/

Unmatched) Operation

Insert Disabled Matched Matched - Succeed

Loopback Enabled Unmatched - - Discard

Loopback Enabled Matched Unmatched - Discard

Loopback Enabled Matched Matched - Succeed

Insert Enabled - - Matched Loopback

Insert Enabled - - Unmatched Discard

Insert Disabled Matched Matched - Succeed

Loopback Enabled Unmatched - - Discard

Loopback Enabled Matched Unmatched - Discard

end-to-end end-point

Loopback Enabled Matched Matched - Succeed

LB Indication Check: Indicates whether the LB indication check is enabled or disabled

It can be specified as a parameter of the "loopback atm" command. A request cell is handled as a response cell when the check is disabled.

Page 641: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Appendix

127

• Operations performed when a F5 loopback cell is received from the ATM line side (Test status of the received connection: Testing)

Received

Connection Type

(VP/VC)

Flow Type (segment/

end-to-end)

Flow Point (none/

end-point/ con-point)

LB Indication (Insert/

Loopback)

LB Indication Check

(Enabled/ Disabled)

Source ID (Matched/

Unmatched)

Correlation Tag

(Matched/ Unmatched)

Location ID (Matched/

Unmatched) Operation

end-point - - - - - Transparent segment

con-point - - - - - Transparent

VP Connection

end-to-end con-point - - - - - Transparent

Insert Enabled - - Matched Loopback

Insert Enabled - - Unmatched Discard

Insert Disabled Matched Matched - Succeed

Loopback Enabled Unmatched - - Discard

Loopback Enabled Matched Unmatched - Discard

end-point

Loopback Enabled Matched Matched - Succeed

Insert Enabled - - Matched Loopback

Insert Enabled - - Unmatched Transparent

Insert Disabled Matched Matched - Succeed

Loopback Enabled Unmatched - - Transparent

Loopback Enabled Matched Unmatched - Transparent

segment

con-point

Loopback Enabled Matched Matched - Succeed

Insert Enabled - - - Transparent

Insert Disabled Matched Matched - Succeed

Loopback Enabled Unmatched - - Transparent

Loopback Enabled Matched Unmatched - Transparent

VC Connection

end-to-end con-point

Loopback Enabled Matched Matched - Succeed

Page 642: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Appendix

128

• Operations performed when a F4 loopback cell is received from the SW side (Test status of the received connection: Testing)

Received

Connection Type

(VP/VC)

Flow Type (segment/

end-to-end)

Flow Point (none/

end-point/ con-point)

LB Indication (Insert/

Loopback)

LB Indication Check

(Enabled/ Disabled)

Source ID (Matched/

Unmatched)

Correlation Tag

(Matched/ Unmatched)

Location ID (Matched/

Unmatched) Operation

Insert Enabled - - Matched Loopback

Insert Enabled - - Unmatched Transparent

Insert Disabled Matched Matched - Succeed

Loopback Enabled Unmatched - - Transparent

Loopback Enabled Matched Unmatched - Transparent

segment con-point

Loopback Enabled Matched Matched - Succeed

Insert Enabled - - - Transparent

Insert Disabled Matched Matched - Succeed

Loopback Enabled Unmatched - - Transparent

Loopback Enabled Matched Unmatched - Transparent

VP Connection

end-to-end con-point

Loopback Enabled Matched Matched - Succeed

Page 643: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

Appendix

129

• Operations performed when a F5 loopback cell is received from the SW side (Test status of the received connection: Testing)

Received

Connection Type

(VP/VC)

Flow Type (segment/

end-to-end)

Flow Point (none/

end-point/ con-point)

LB Indication (Insert/

Loopback)

LB Indication Check

(Enabled/ Disabled)

Source ID (Matched/

Unmatched)

Correlation Tag

(Matched/ Unmatched)

Location ID (Matched/

Unmatched) Operation

segment con-point - - - - - Transparent VP Connection

end-to-end con-point - - - - - Transparent

Insert Enabled - - Matched Loopback

Insert Enabled - - Unmatched Transparent

Insert Disabled Matched Matched - Succeed

Loopback Enabled Unmatched - - Transparent

Loopback Enabled Matched Unmatched - Transparent

segment con-point

Loopback Enabled Matched Matched - Succeed

Insert Enabled - - - Transparent

Insert Disabled Matched Matched - Succeed

Loopback Enabled Unmatched - - Transparent

Loopback Enabled Matched Unmatched - Transparent

VC Connection

end-to-end con-point

Loopback Enabled Matched Matched - Succeed

Page 644: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

(blank page)

Page 645: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

End User License Agreement Please read this license agreement carefully before using the CX2200.

This license agreement (hereinafter referred to as This Agreement) is a legally biding document made and entered by and between Customer (regardless whether you are an individual customer or corporate customer) and NEC Corporation (hereinafter referred to as NEC) concerning the use of the software defined below (hereinafter referred to as This Software).

This software is installed on NEC's CX2200 (hereinafter referred to as Unit). By using this Unit that contains This Software, you agree to be bound by This Agreement. If you do not agree all of the terms and conditions of This Agreement, NEC will not grant to you a license to use This Software or make a copy of This Software. If you do not agree This Agreement, immediately return this Unit in unused condition to the place of purchase. A return to a retail shop of NEC or retail shop authorized by NEC within fifteen (15) days of the purchase date will receive a full refund. Only the original purchaser is granted a right to return this Unit and get a refund.

Definition of This Software: A set of computer programs installed on this Unit, and printed materials (including documents such as manuals) and electronic files related to these programs. This Software herein also includes upgrades, bug fixes, and revisions (generically termed upgrades) that NEC or NEC's distributors may supply to Customer, and backup copies of This Software. The terms and conditions hereof are applicable to all that are defined as This Software.

License Grant: Customer is granted the following rights under This Agreement:

Customer shall have the right to use This Software only on this Unit subject to personal use (or internal business use).

Customer shall have the right to make a copy of This Software, of which number is limited to one, on the desired device or medium, subject to backup.

Prohibition of reverse engineering, reverse compilation, and reverse assembly: Customer shall have no right to reverse engineer, reverse compile, or reverse assemble This Software.

Prohibition of disassembly: Customer is granted a license to use This Software as a single product. Customer shall have no right to disassemble This Software into components and use them on the multiple Units.

Prohibition of rental: Customer shall have no right to rent, lease, or commercially share This Software.

Prohibition of sharing: Customer shall have no right to share This Software with any other users by remote access or any other means.

Assignment, transfer, or disposal of This Software: Customer may assign This Agreement and all the rights hereunder to a third party, only when Customer assigns, transfers, or otherwise disposes of This Software together with this Unit that Customer purchased, to the third party on a permanent basis, on condition that the third party agrees all terms and conditions of This Agreement. Upon such assignment, transfer, or disposal of This Agreement, Customer shall not possess This Software or any part of it, including but not limited to backup copies of This Software.

Termination: NEC may terminate This Agreement if Customer should commit any breach of This Agreement without prejudice to any other rights. Upon termination of This Agreement, in any case, Customer must cease using This Software and destroy all copies and components of This Software.

Warranty: NEC does not warrant This Software in any way subject to This Agreement. NEC shall warrant this Unit subject to the terms and conditions of the maintenance agreement that should be separately made and entered by and between Customer and NEC.

In no event will NEC and its suppliers, regardless of the legal constitution, be liable for any loss of data, profits, or estimated profits, or any other special, indirect, consequential, incidental, punitive, or any similar type damages arising from This Software, or the use or inability to use of This Software, even if NEC has been advised of the possibility of such loss or damages. In no event, liability for damages assumed by NEC and its suppliers to Customer, whether in contract, tort (including negligence), or any other claims, exceed the price paid by Customer for the cost of this Unit.

Intellectual property right: NEC and its suppliers have all and any copyrights and other intellectual property rights on This Software and its copies. NEC shall not assign any intellectual property rights on This Software to Customer by This Agreement.

Export: Customer shall not export This Software or its copies out of Japan without permission granted by the government of Japan and the government of the country that is involved.

This Agreement shall be governed by the laws of Japan.

Page 646: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

(Blank page)

Page 647: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

PASOLINK NEO TE CX2200

Multi-service Transport Gateway

Instruction Manual

NWD-064951-005

© 2007 NEC Corporation

Version 2.5 Rev. B

January 2010

NEC Corporation

(All rights reserved)

Page 648: Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200_instruction Manual Ver_02.05

NEC Corporation